JP7760109B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Slot machines (reel-type gaming machines) have been known as one type of gaming machine. One such slot machine is a point-based slot machine that allows players to play using points stored on a card without using medals (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-56055 A

The problem this invention aims to solve is to improve the performance of gaming machines.

The present invention provides
having a main control means;
A medal count control means is provided,
having a predetermined bet button,
It has a checkout button,
Communication with the rental unit is possible,
When the power supply of the gaming machine and the power supply of the lending unit are turned on , the VL signal can be turned on.
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the VL signal was turned ON, a gaming machine information notification can be transmitted to the rental unit .
When a predetermined bet button is operated, the bet number can be "3",
When the settlement button is operated, data including the settlement number can be transmitted from the main control means to the medal number control means,
The medal count control means receives data including the settlement number, and determines that an abnormality has occurred if the settlement number is greater than "3".
Gaming machine.

This invention can improve the performance of gaming machines.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the front door of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the cabinet of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the reel arrangement of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing symbol combinations for the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing symbol combinations for the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing symbol combinations for the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing symbol combinations for the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing symbol combinations for the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a condition device of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the objects of the internal lottery of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the results of the internal lottery of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the results of the internal lottery of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the contents of a message used for communication between the gaming machine and the rental unit of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the contents of the gaming machine information notification, which is one of the messages output from the gaming machine of the present embodiment to the rental unit. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the gaming machine type included in the gaming machine information notification output by the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing gaming machine information included in a message when gaming machine performance information is set, among gaming machine information notifications output by a gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing gaming machine information included in a message when gaming machine installation information is set, among gaming machine information notifications output by the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing gaming machine information included in a message when hall control and fraud monitoring information is set, among gaming machine information notifications output by a gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a basic communication sequence between the gaming machine and the rental unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the startup sequence of the gaming machine and rental unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the startup sequence of the gaming machine and rental unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the counting notification sequence between the gaming machine and the rental unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a lending notification sequence between the gaming machine and the lending unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a recovery sequence from a communication abnormality between the gaming machine and the rental unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the sequence when a communication error occurs during counting between the gaming machine and the rental unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the sequence when a communication error occurs during rental between the gaming machine and rental unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart relating to the counting control of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the score awarding process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart relating to gaming machine information management for the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a transmission pattern of gaming machine information notification after the first startup of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a second transmission pattern of hall control and fraud monitoring information among the gaming machine information notifications of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a pattern in which the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information and the gaming machine installation information coincides among the gaming machine information notifications of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a pattern in which the transmission timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information among the gaming machine information notifications of the gaming machine according to this embodiment coincides. Figure 35 is a comparative example to explain the effect of the gaming machine of this embodiment, and shows an undesirable example in which the number of balls inserted signal ON and the BB status signal ON are transmitted at the same time as the hole control/fraud monitoring information. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a preferred example in which the number of coins inserted signal ON and the BB state signal ON are transmitted at different times in the hall control/fraud monitoring information in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. Figure 37 is a comparative example to explain the effect of the gaming machine of this embodiment, and shows an undesirable example in which the payout number signal ON and the BB status signal ON are transmitted at different times in the hall control/fraud monitoring information. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a preferred example in which the payout number signal ON and the BB status signal ON are transmitted at the same time as the hall control/fraud monitoring information in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the counting execution flag setting process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a time chart relating to the counting process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a time chart relating to the counting process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a time chart relating to the counting process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a time chart relating to the counting process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the game progress main processing of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. Figure 45 is a diagram showing the advantageous zone end processing of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. Figure 46 is a diagram showing <Pattern 1> of advantageous zone clear counter management for the gaming machine of this embodiment. Figure 47 is a diagram showing <Pattern 2> of advantageous zone clear counter management for the gaming machine of this embodiment. Figure 48 is a diagram showing <Pattern 3> of advantageous zone clear counter management for the gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the process of receiving a rental notification for a gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the interrupt process of the game media number control means of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart relating to the game medal count check process in the interrupt process of the game media count control means of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart relating to the count button check process in the count control process of the game media number control means of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart relating to the communication abnormality 2 to 6 check process in the lending notification receiving process of the game media number control means of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. Figure 54 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation of the operation advance notification state and the end of game notification state of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. Figure 55 is a flowchart regarding advantageous zone clear counter management (advantageous zone difference counter) of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. Figure 56 is a flowchart regarding advantageous zone clear counter management (advantageous zone difference counter) of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 57 is a time chart relating to the complete signal of the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

<Terminology>
"Medals (number of medals),""game media (number of game media),""gamevalue," and "points (number of points or scores)" are synonymous, and may be referred to as medals as a concept even if there are no actual medals. "Bet,""BET," and "insertion" regarding game media are synonymous, and all refer to the act of betting game media. The "effect selection switch P8W" and the "effect determination switch P8E" are sometimes collectively referred to as "sub-switches." Hexadecimal numbers are written as "0x00" or "00h," and unless otherwise specified before or after the number, they are expressed in decimal. "Reels" are sometimes referred to as "drums," and all are synonymous. "Storage means" are sometimes referred to as "RWM,""RAM," or "storage area," and all are synonymous. "Awarding" used in "awarding game media" or "awarding points," etc., may be referred to as "payout," and all are synonymous. The "setting/reset switch" may be referred to as a "setting change switch" or a "reset switch" depending on its function, but in both cases they refer to the same switch. The "setting change switch" and the "reset switch" may each be provided as different switches. "Pattern,""piece," and "piece" are synonymous and all refer to the pattern area drawn on the reel. "Playable" refers to a state in which the gaming machine and the rental unit are connected and both are powered on, or, within that state, a state in which play cannot proceed on the gaming machine alone and is not in "initial setting upon power-on,""settingchange,""settingconfirmation," or "error state."

We will now explain the features (outline) of the gaming machine P according to this embodiment. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

<Explanation of the appearance of the gaming machine P>
First, the basic structure of the gaming machine P according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1 . The gaming machine P has a front door P2 (also referred to as a front mask, front door, front panel, door, or door) and a cabinet P1 (also referred to as a rear box or housing) that are secured together by a hinge structure. The hinge structure is located on the left side of the gaming machine P when viewed from the front, and the front door P2 can be opened using the left side as an axis. To open the front door P2, a door opening key is inserted into a cylinder located on the right side of the gaming machine P when viewed from the front (located to the right of the front door P2) and rotated to the right, thereby changing the state from locked to unlocked. A door opening error may also be resolved by rotating the door opening key left while inserted into the cylinder of the front door P2. In addition, the resolvable errors are not limited to door open errors, but may include all or some of the following types of errors that can be recovered by operating a reset switch (specifically, input request communication errors, settlement request communication errors, payout request communication errors, game media number control reception abnormalities, main control reception abnormalities, total score upper limit abnormalities, total score threshold reached state, lending device connection abnormalities, lending serial number abnormalities, lending device communication abnormality 1 (also referred to as "communication error 1"), lending device communication abnormality 2 (also referred to as "communication error 2"), lending device communication abnormality 3 (also referred to as "communication error 3"), lending device communication abnormality 4 (also referred to as "communication error 4"), lending device communication abnormality 5 (also referred to as "communication error 5"), lending device communication abnormality 6 (also referred to as "communication error 6"), etc.).

A door switch is installed near the cylinder on the back of the front door P2, and by detecting whether the door switch is ON or OFF, it is possible to determine whether the front door P2 is open or closed.

The door switch is movable back and forth using a spring or other elastic member. When the front door P2 is closed, the tip of the door switch comes into contact with the door switch receiving portion provided on the cabinet P1, causing the door switch to be pushed in. When the door switch is pushed in, the optical sensor provided on the door switch is blocked from light, detecting that the door switch is ON and determining that the door is closed.

Furthermore, when the front door P2 is open, the tip of the door switch is not in contact with the door switch receiving portion provided on the cabinet P1, and the door switch is in a protruding state due to the biasing force of an elastic member such as a spring. When the door switch is in a protruding state, the optical sensor provided on the door switch is not blocked by light, so it detects that the door switch is OFF and determines that the door is open.

The process of determining whether the door is open is performed for each interrupt process by the main control board P15. During the input port reading process within the interrupt process by the main control board P15, the input port corresponding to the door switch is checked to determine whether the door is open or closed based on whether the door switch is ON or OFF.

The process for determining whether the door is open described above is not limited to this, and the correspondence between the detection result of the door switch being ON or OFF and the determination of whether the door is open may be reversed. For example, the door may be determined to be open by detecting that the door switch is ON, and the door may be determined to be closed by detecting that the door switch is OFF. Furthermore, the door switch may also be configured to detect whether the door is open or closed using various sensors such as a proximity sensor, or the door may be opened by detecting that the door open key has been turned to the right.

On the front side of the front door P2 are provided a start switch P3, left stop switch P4L, center stop switch P4C, right stop switch P4R (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "stop switches P4"), MAX bet switch P5M, 1 bet switch P5O (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "bet switches P5"), settlement switch P6, counting switch P7 (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "counting button"), effect selection switch P8W, effect decision switch P8E, etc. Also provided are a game media number display P9 and a bonus number display (not shown) as displays for reporting information related to the game. Also provided are a display window P10 for making the reels visible, and image display devices (image display device P11M, image display device P11S) for enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, there is a rental unit as an external device that can communicate with the gaming machine P. When the gaming machine P is powered on and the rental unit is powered on, the VL signal turns ON (also referred to as "VL=ON" or "VL=1"), enabling communication between the gaming machine P and the rental unit.

The VL signal may turn ON for only a moment (10 ms) due to chattering when the gaming machine P or lending unit is powered on, so the VL signal may be input to the CPU of the main control means or gaming medal count control means, and when it is determined that the VL signal has been ON for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 ms), it may be determined that the VL signal has turned ON.

(Start switch P3)
It is a lever-shaped switch that becomes active when any specified number of gaming media is bet (for example, a number of gaming media selected by the player from among 1 to 3 insertion points is bet), and when operated, starts the rotation of the reels. Furthermore, when operation of the start switch P3 is acceptable, the color of the lamp (LED light color, or the on/off state of the LED) on the operation part of the start switch P3 or around it is changed or illuminated, indicating that operation of the start switch P3 is acceptable. For example, when operation of the start switch P3 is acceptable, the lamp is illuminated in red, and when operation of the start switch P3 is not acceptable, the lamp is turned off. The LED may be configured so that the main control board P15 manages whether it is turned on or off, or the sub-control board P12 manages whether it is turned on or off.

(Stop switch P4)
In this embodiment, the left reel P18L corresponds to the left stop switch P4L, the center reel P18C corresponds to the center stop switch P4C, and the right reel P18R corresponds to the right stop switch P4R. When operation of the stop switch P4 is acceptable, the color of the lamp (LED color or LED on/off state) on or around the stop switch P4 operation unit or its surroundings is changed or illuminated to indicate that operation of the stop switch P4 is acceptable. For example, when operation of the stop switch P4 is acceptable, the lamp is illuminated in blue, and when operation of the stop switch P4 is unacceptable, the lamp is illuminated in red. The LED may be illuminated or turned on by the main control board P15, or the sub-control board P12.

(Bet switch P5 (MAX bet switch P5M, 1 bet switch P5O))
When the information stored in the gaming medium number storage means (also referred to as the total score storage area), which is provided in the gaming machine P (more specifically, the gaming medium number control board P16) and stores the number of gaming media (also referred to as the total score) owned by the player, is not 0 (when the information displayed on the gaming medium number display unit P9 is not 0), and operation of the bet switch P5 is accepted, a bet number setting process is performed. If the information stored in the gaming medium number storage means is 0, operation of the bet switch P5 is not accepted, or even if operation of the bet switch P5 is accepted, the bet process is not executed. In addition, the gaming machine P is comprised of a MAX BET switch P5M which allows a maximum number set for each gaming machine P to bet, and a 1 BET switch P5O which allows a bet of "1." The 1 BET switch P5O is configured so that by operating it multiple times, the same number of coins as the number of operations can be bet within the range of the maximum bet number. Furthermore, when operation of the MAX bet switch P5M is acceptable, the color of the lamp (LED light color, or LED on/off state) on the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or around it is changed or turned on, indicating that operation of the MAX bet switch P5M is acceptable. For example, when operation of the MAX bet switch P5M is acceptable, the lamp may be turned on in red, and when operation of the MAX bet switch P5M is unacceptable, the lamp may be turned off. Although the 1 bet switch P5O does not have an LED, an LED may be arranged on the operation part of the 1 bet switch P5O or around it, and the lamp color may be changed or turned on to indicate that operation of the 1 bet switch P5O is acceptable. The LED may be turned on or off by the main control board P15, or the sub-control board P12 may be turned on or off.

(Settlement switch P6)
When the settlement switch P6 is operated in a situation where a value of "1" or greater is stored in the bet number storage means provided in the gaming machine P (when the bet number is a value of "1" or greater), the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means is added to the number of gaming media storage means. For example, when the settlement switch P6 is operated in a situation where "2" is stored in the bet number storage means and "100" is stored in the gaming media number storage means, "0" is stored in the bet number storage means and "102" is stored in the gaming media number storage means. The period during which settlement processing can be executed when operation of the settlement switch P6 is accepted is the period from when gaming media are inserted until the start switch P3 is accepted. In other words, settlement processing will not be executed even if operation of the settlement switch P6 is accepted from when the start switch P3 is accepted until the end of the game. Alternatively, the adjustment switch P6 may be configured to accept operation from the time the gaming medium is inserted until the start switch P3 is operated, but not to accept operation from the time the start switch P3 is operated until the game ends. Although the adjustment switch P6 does not have an LED, an LED may be placed on or near the operation section of the adjustment switch P6, and the color of the lamp may be changed or the LED may be lit to indicate that operation of the adjustment switch P6 is acceptable. The LED may be turned on or off by the main control board P15, or the sub-control board P12 may be configured to turn it on or off.

Also, the 1 bet switch P5O and the settlement switch P6 may be configured as a single switch (1 bet switch/settlement switch). For example, the function may be switched depending on how long the 1 bet switch/settlement switch is pressed. If the press time is less than 1000 ms (if the 1 bet switch/settlement switch operation is no longer accepted before 1000 ms has elapsed since the 1 bet switch/settlement switch operation was accepted), the function of the 1 bet switch P5O is executed, and if the press time is 1000 ms or more (if 1000 ms has elapsed since the 1 bet switch/settlement switch operation was accepted), the function of the settlement switch P6 is executed. Note that in order to execute the function of the settlement switch P6 1000 ms after the 1 bet switch/settlement switch operation is accepted, it is not necessary for the 1 bet switch/settlement switch operation to no longer be accepted; the function of the settlement switch P6 is executed even if the 1 bet switch/settlement switch operation is accepted 1000 ms after the 1 bet switch/settlement switch operation is accepted.

(Counting switch P7)
By operating the counting switch P7, information stored in the gaming medium number storage means can be transmitted to an external rental unit (also referred to as a "dedicated unit") via a gaming ball etc. rental device connection terminal board (described later) provided in the gaming machine P. For example, when "50" is stored in the gaming medium number storage means, by operating the counting switch P7, the count value (also referred to as "counting points" or "counted medal count") of "50" is transmitted to the gaming ball etc. rental device connection terminal board, and then the count value of "50" can be transmitted to the rental unit. Note that after the counting switch P7 is operated and the count value is transmitted, "0" is stored in the gaming medium number storage means. Furthermore, although the counting switch P7 does not have an LED, an LED may be provided on or near the operation portion of the counting switch P7, and the LED may change color or light up to indicate that operation of the counting switch P7 is acceptable. The LED may be configured such that the main control board P15 manages turning it on or off, or the sub-control board P12 manages turning it on or off.

(Performance selection switch P8W)
The effect selection switch P8W is a so-called "cross key" and is composed of an up switch, a right switch, a down switch, and a left switch. For example, by operating the up switch of the effect selection switch P8W, it is possible to move a cursor or the like displayed on the image display device P11M or P11S upward. Furthermore, during game standby (also referred to as a game standby state), the up switch may be configured to increase the volume, the down switch may be configured to decrease the volume, the right switch may be configured to increase the light intensity of a lamp, and the left switch may be configured to decrease the light intensity of a lamp.

(Performance decision switch P8E)
The effect determination switch P8E serves as a determination button when determining an effect, or as a chance button when executing an effect that suggests to the player that a favorable situation will occur. For example, when the cursor is positioned on a certain item displayed on the image display device P11M or P11S, the item indicated by the cursor can be determined by operating the effect determination switch P8E. Furthermore, when an effect such as "Press the chance button!" appears on the image display device P11M or P11S during gameplay, the effect determination switch P8E can be operated to execute the next effect. The effect determination switch P8E may be provided with a drive source (such as a solenoid or motor) to execute an effect in which the operating portion of the effect determination switch P8E vibrates up and down.

(Total score clear switch)
The total score clear switch (also referred to as the "game medal count clear switch") is a switch for initializing the total score stored in the total score storage means, and is configured so that if the total score clear switch is ON when the power is turned on, the total score can be initialized. Note that the operation of the total score clear switch, which initializes the total score, is not limited to this; the total score may be cleared by operating the total score clear switch once when the gaming machine P is powered on, or by operating the total score clear switch twice in succession when the gaming machine P is powered on. If the total score is cleared by operating the total score clear switch once when the gaming machine P is powered on, the total score clear switch may be covered with a cover or placed in a recessed position to prevent accidental operation of the total score clear switch during play, making it difficult to operate.

(Number of gaming media display section P9)
This display device displays information about the number of game media (also referred to as "total points" or "total number of game medals") stored in the game media number storage means, and can display numerical information up to five digits. Each digit of the game media number display unit P9 consists of a horizontal row of five segment display units, and the number of game media can be reported by combining the lighting and extinguishing of the seven segments that make up the segment display unit. The five segments may also include decimal points (sometimes referred to as DP points), and a display format using decimal points is also acceptable. Each segment is configured so that its display mode changes depending on whether its LED is lit or extinguished.

In this embodiment, the maximum number of gaming media that can be displayed on the gaming media count display unit P9 is "16,383," and when "1" is displayed, it is displayed right-justified as "□□□□1" (the four □ indicate blank spaces (four of the five segment display units are unlit)). Furthermore, if the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media count storage means is "0," it is displayed as "□□□□0." If the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media count storage means is "0," and the display on the gaming media count display unit P9 is "□□□□□," this could lead to a misidentification that the gaming media count display unit P9 is malfunctioning, even when it is not. Therefore, by displaying something like "□□□□0" on the gaming media count display unit P9, it is possible to know that the gaming media count display unit P9 is malfunctioning.

In addition, when an error occurs, the game media count display unit P9 may display error information corresponding to the error that occurred instead of reporting the game media count information. In this case, the game media count display unit P9 may alternate between displaying the game media count information and error information. For example, a conceivable display format could be: display the game media count information for 3 seconds, then display the error information for 3 seconds, then display the game media count information for 3 seconds, and so on. Furthermore, when an error is displayed on the game media count display unit P9, it displays "Pxx□□" (the two □s indicate a space; the two xs indicate a number, symbol, or letter (the type of error can be identified by displaying "xx," which is error identification information corresponding to various errors)) left-justified. In other words, the game media count information is displayed right-justified, such as the "1" mentioned above, and the lowest digit (the rightmost segment display unit) displays numerical information from "0" to "9." On the other hand, error information is displayed left-justified as in the above-mentioned "Pxx□□", and the lowest digit is hidden, so no numerical information is displayed (the rightmost segment display unit is unlit). By configuring it in this way, it is easy to determine whether the currently displayed information is numerical information or error information based on whether the lowest digit of the gaming medium number display unit P9 is displayed (whether at least a portion of the rightmost segment display unit is lit).

Furthermore, by checking whether the second segment display section from the right of the gaming medium count display section P9 is lit or not, it is possible to easily determine whether the currently displayed information is numerical information or error information.

Furthermore, when controlling a gaming machine using a main control chip and a gaming media count chip, as in this embodiment, errors detected by the main control chip are represented as "Pxx□□" and errors detected by the gaming media count chip are represented as "Hxx□□," making it easier to determine where the error is occurring. For example, a deposit request communication error is detected by the main control chip, so it could be displayed as "P01□□," "PE1□□," etc., while a lending device communication error 1 is detected by the gaming media count chip, so it could be displayed as "H01□□," "HE1□□," etc. In this way, by simultaneously displaying identification information such as "P" and "H" corresponding to the chip that detected the error (location of the abnormality) and error identification information such as "E1" and "01" corresponding to the above "xx," it is possible to display the location of the abnormality and the type of abnormality (type of error) without changing the number of digits, even if there are more than 100 types of abnormalities.

Furthermore, while an example has been described in which the identification information is changed depending on which chip detected the error, this is not limiting and the identification information may be changed depending on the type of error. For example, a recoverable error could be expressed as "Pxx□□" and an unrecoverable error could be expressed as "Hxx□□". This configuration makes it easier to determine the severity of the error.

Furthermore, when an error is displayed on the gaming media count display unit P9, if an error occurs that allows counting processing, and the counting switch P7 is operated while the error is being displayed to perform counting processing, the gaming media count display unit P9 may be configured to alternate between displaying information about the number of gaming media and information about the error, even during counting processing. This configuration makes it possible to check error information even during counting processing.

Furthermore, when an error is displayed on the gaming media count display unit P9, if an error occurs that allows the lending process to be performed, and the lending switch is operated to perform the lending process while the error is displayed, the gaming media count display unit P9 may be configured to alternate between displaying information about the number of gaming media and information about the error, even during the lending process. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to check the error information even during the lending process.

In addition, when an error is displayed on the game medium count display unit P9, if the power is turned off while an error is displayed on the game medium count display unit P9 and the power is turned on while the total score clear switch is operated, the total score will be initialized but the error will not be cleared. Therefore, the game medium count display unit P9 may be configured to alternate between displaying information indicating "0" and error information. By configuring it in this way, it will be possible to check the error information even if the total score clear switch is operated and the total score is initialized.

(Status indicator lamps 1 to 5)
The status indicator lamps 1 to 5 are composed of five LEDs, one LED positioned corresponding to each segment of the game medium count display unit P9 (not shown). The lighting of the status indicator lamps is controlled by the game medium count control board P16, and they light up when there is a change in the status managed by the game medium count control board P16. The status indicator lamps may be placed anywhere as long as they are visible to the player. The various abnormalities indicated by the status indicator lamps 1 to 5 will be described later.

Status indicator lamp 1 is configured to light up when there is a rental device connection abnormality (VL abnormality flag = FFh) and to turn off in other cases (VL abnormality flag = 00h).

The status indicator lamp 2 is configured to light up if there is an abnormality in the rental serial number and to turn off in other cases.

Status indicator lamp 3 is configured to light up when rental device communication abnormalities 1 to 6 occur, and to turn off in all other cases.

The status indicator lamp 4 is configured to light up when the total score is 15,000 or more, and to turn off in all other cases.

The status indicator lamp 5 is configured to light up if the count point is a value other than 0 (a value of 1 or greater) when the count notification is sent, and to turn off if the count point is 0 when the count notification is sent. Whether the status indicator lamp 5 is turned on is determined by whether the counting flag (described below) is set or not; if the counting flag is set (counting flag = FFh), the status indicator lamp 5 is turned on, and if the counting flag is not set (counting flag = 0), the status indicator lamp 5 is turned off.

The counting flag is cleared (counting flag = 0) at each count notification timing, and is set at the count notification timing when the count execution flag (described below) is 1 or higher (when count switch P7 is short-pressed or long-pressed). If the VL abnormality flag is ≠ 0, the total score is 0, or the count execution flag is 0 at any subsequent count notification timing, the counting flag will no longer be set. In other words, if the count value is 1 or higher, the counting flag will be set to FFh for at least 300 ms, which is the output interval between count notifications. In other words, if the status indicator lamp 5 is lit, it will remain lit for at least 300 ms. The counting flag, which is set when the count execution flag is 1 or higher, is cleared at the count notification timing, but is reset within the same interrupt process, so the status indicator lamp 5 will remain lit.

By configuring it in this way, even if the counting switch P7 is pressed briefly just before the count notification timing, the status indicator lamp 5 can remain lit for 300 ms, ensuring that the status indicator lamp 5 is visible for a certain period of time. Furthermore, if the counting switch P7 is pressed and held for n (multiple) count notification timings, the lamp can remain lit for a period of n x 300 ms.

In addition, whether the count switch P7 is pressed briefly and the count value is "1," or whether the count switch P7 is pressed long and the count value is "50," the status indicator lamp 5 will remain lit for 300 ms. This means that there is no need to separate the processing for short presses and long presses; the status indicator lamp 5 can be lit using a common process, eliminating program complexity and reducing program size.

(Number of awards display section)
When game media (scores) are awarded as a result of a game, this display device displays the number of game media awarded, and can display numerical information up to two digits. Each digit of the award number display unit is composed of multiple segments, and the number of game media can be reported by lighting the segments. If error information corresponding to an error that occurred is not displayed on the game media number display unit P9, the error information corresponding to the error may be displayed on the award number display unit. In this case, the award number display unit may display the error information after the number of game media awarded. For example, if the number of game media awarded as a result of a game is "7," the award number display unit could display "1,""2,""3,""4,""5,""6," and "7," followed by "E1" (error code). The award number display unit is not shown, but it may be located to the left of the settlement switch P6 and the 1-bet switch P5O when viewed from the front.

(Display window P10)
With the front door P2 closed, the symbols on the reel tapes attached to the left reel P18L, center reel P18C, and right reel P18R (see FIG. 3), which are vertically rotatable, are visible through the display window P10. Specifically, when the reels are stopped, three consecutive symbols among the 21 (20, 16, etc.) symbols are visible through the display window P10 along the rotation direction of the left reel P18L, center reel P18C, and right reel P18R. That is, a total of nine symbols (3 symbols x 3 reels) are visible through the display window P10. Here, of the stop display positions where the left reel P18L, center reel P18C, and right reel P18R each display three symbols, the uppermost stop display position is referred to as the upper row, the center stop display position is referred to as the middle row, and the lowermost stop display position is referred to as the lower row.

(Image display device)
The image display device displays various effect images, as well as game instruction images that instruct the order in which to press the stop switch P4 during play, error images when an error occurs, etc. In this embodiment, two image display devices are provided as the image display device: image display device P11M and image display device P11S. Note that depending on the model, there may be only one image display device, three or more image display devices, or none at all. Various types of display devices can be used as the image display device, such as a liquid crystal display, plasma display, organic EL display, dot display, projector, etc., as long as they allow the player to view images.

In addition, an operation mode display device (also called an instruction monitor) that notifies the operation mode of the stop switch P4 may be provided. The number of awards display unit may also be used to notify the operation mode of the stop switch P4 (they may serve as both). When the number of awards display unit is used to notify the operation mode of the stop switch P4, the number of awards display unit may be referred to as an instruction monitor. In addition, a 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, or 3 bet lamp for notifying the number of bets, a replay indicator lamp indicating that a replay (also called a replay) is possible, a game executable lamp indicating that a game can be played by operating the start switch P3, and a game medium insert possible lamp indicating that a game medium can be inserted by operating the bet switch P5 may be provided.

The 1 bet lamp can be lit when the number of bets is set to 1, the 2 bet lamp can be lit when the number of bets is set to 2, and the 3 bet lamp can be lit when the number of bets is set to 3. In other words, when the number of bets is set to 1, the 1 bet lamp can be lit, when the number of bets is set to 2, the 1 bet lamp and the 2 bet lamp can be lit, and when the number of bets is set to 3, the 1 bet lamp, the 2 bet lamp, and the 3 bet lamp can be lit.

The above-mentioned 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, replay indicator lamp, game executable lamp, and gaming medium insert lamp are controlled to be turned on or off by the main control board P15, but they may also be controlled to be turned on or off by the sub-control board P12.

<Explanation of the main components located on the back of the front door P2 of the gaming machine P>

Next, we will explain the rear structure of the front door P2 in this embodiment with reference to Figure 2.

(Sub-control board P12)
The sub-control board P12 (also referred to as the sub-control means, sub-control board (means), or performance control board (means)) is housed in the case of the sub-control board P12. The sub-control board P12 is equipped with a sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, and sub-control RAM (the sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, and sub-control RAM may be built into a single chip). The sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, and sub-control RAM are able to communicate data with each other via a bus. The sub-control board P12 determines the data to be output to the performance lamps, speakers, and image display devices (image display device P11M, image display device P11S) based on information (also referred to as commands) from the main control board P15, which will be described later. In other words, the sub-control board P12 mainly performs control related to performance. Note that the sub-control board P12 cannot send information to the main control board P15 (one-way communication). In addition, the data input by operating the performance selection switch P8W or the performance decision switch P8E is acquired, and the data to be output to the performance lamp, speaker, and image display device (image display device P11M, image display device P11S) is determined based on the data input by operating the performance selection switch P8W or the performance decision switch P8E.

(Game medium number display board P13)
The game medium number display board P13 is a board that displays the game medium number display section P9. Specifically, it is a board on which the game medium number display section P9 is installed.
(Speaker)
There are four speakers: an upper right speaker P14UR and an upper left speaker (not shown) above the front door, and a lower right speaker P14DR and a lower left speaker P14DL below the front door.The speakers output sound effects that match the performance, as well as error sounds and warning sounds that notify users that an error has occurred.

<Description of the main components located in the cabinet P1 of gaming machine P>

Next, the internal structure of the cabinet P1 according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 3.

(Main control board P15)
The main control board P15 (also referred to as the main control means, first main control board (means), main control board (means), or game control board (means)) is housed in a main control board case. The main control board P15 is protected by the main control board case, and the main control board case is sealed with a crimp (also referred to as a sealing member) so that it is difficult to open the main control board case.

The main control board P15 is equipped with a first main control CPU, a first main control ROM, and a first main control RAM (the first main control CPU, first main control ROM, and first main control RAM are built into a single chip and are referred to as the main control chip). The first main control CPU, first main control ROM, and first main control RAM are able to communicate data with each other via a bus. The main control board P15 performs internal lottery operations, reel control such as driving and stopping the reels, winning determination control based on the stopped symbol combinations when all reels are stopped, and game state transition control between various game states such as the bonus game state (also simply referred to as the bonus) and the RT state.

A RAM clear switch is connected to the main control board P15, and operating the RAM clear switch clears the advantageous zone information stored on the main control board P15. Operating the RAM clear switch during an advantageous zone ends the advantageous zone and sets the normal zone. Operating the RAM clear switch clears information related to the advantageous zone; information related to the set value, total score, number of bets, RT status, and role ratio monitor is not cleared. The RAM clear switch can be operated to clear the advantageous zone by pressing it once, by detecting that it has been pressed for a predetermined period of time (a so-called long press), or by turning on the power while it is pressed. The RAM clear switch is located in a location that cannot be operated by the player (user) (for example, on the main control board P15, which is not exposed unless the front door P2 is opened, inside the cabinet, or on the back of the front door). The RAM clear switch may also serve as a reset switch. Details will be provided below, but advantageous zones are game zones in which advantageous stop switch operation modes (including operation sequence and operation positions) are notified by the instruction monitor, and normal zones are game zones in which advantageous stop switch operation modes are not notified by the instruction monitor.

A setting key switch (also referred to as a setting switch) is connected to the main control board P15, and the setting change mode can be started by inserting a setting key into the setting key switch, turning it approximately 45 degrees to the right, and then powering on the gaming machine P. Note that the setting key switch is not limited to one operated by a setting key, and a push-type switch or pull-type switch may also be used. In either case, there is no problem as long as it can detect whether the switch is ON or OFF when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, when waiting for play after one game has finished and no bets have been set (number of bets is 0), the setting confirmation mode can be started by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch and turning it approximately 45 degrees to the right. Note that the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode do not have to include the condition that no bets have been set; the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode are referred to as the transition conditions for the setting confirmation mode.

The built-in ROM of the main control chip mounted on the main control board P15 has a storage capacity of "16 KB or less," and includes a usage area (also referred to as the first program) of "7.5 KB or less," and an area outside the usage area (also referred to as the second program). The usage area includes a control area (also referred to as the first control area) of "4.5 KB or less" in which the programs executed by the main control board P15 are stored, and a data area (also referred to as the first data area) of "3.0 KB or less" in which only information other than programs is stored, or will be stored. The area outside the usage area also includes a control area (also referred to as the second control area) and a data area (also referred to as the second data area), similar to the usage area. The usage area stores programs related to the progress of the game, while the area outside the usage area stores programs related to anti-fraud measures and programs used for gaming machine testing.

(Game media number control board P16)
The gaming media number control board P16 (also referred to as gaming media number control means, second main control board (means), payout control board (means), gaming medal number control board (means), gaming medal number display control board (means), or gaming media number display control board (means)) is housed in a gaming media number control board case. The gaming media number control board P16 is protected by the gaming media number control board case, and by sealing the gaming media number control board case with a crimp (also referred to as a sealing member), it is configured so that it is difficult to open the gaming media number control board case.

The gaming media count control board P16 is equipped with a second main control CPU, second main control ROM, and second main control RAM (the second main control CPU, second main control ROM, and second main control RAM are built into a single chip and are referred to as the gaming media count chip). The second main control CPU, second main control ROM, and second main control RAM are able to communicate data with each other via a bus. The gaming media count control board P16 can control the display of the gaming media count display unit P9, send information (commands) to the lending unit via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board described below, receive information (commands) from the lending unit via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board, send information (commands) to the main control board P15, and receive information (commands) from the main control board P15.

The game media count control board P16 also has a game media count storage means for storing the number of game media acquired, and stores the number of game media currently owned by the user by adding the number of game media awarded, which is the number of game media awarded as a result of winning, and subtracting the number of game media inserted, which is the number of game media used to start playing.

The maximum number of game media that can be stored in the game media number storage means is 16383, and numbers beyond 16384 cannot be stored.

If the value stored in the gaming media number storage means is between "15,000" and "16,368," the gaming media number control board P16 will detect a total score threshold reached state. Furthermore, if the value stored in the gaming media number storage means is between "16,369" and "16,383," the gaming media number control board P16 will detect a total score upper limit abnormality. Note that any value between "16,369" and "16,383" stored in the gaming media number storage means is referred to as an upper limit warning value. In other words, the upper limit warning value is a concept that includes the upper limit value. Furthermore, the value "15,000" stored in the gaming media number storage means (the value that indicates a total score threshold reached state) may be referred to as the first threshold, and the value "16,369" stored in the gaming media number storage means (the value that indicates a total score upper limit abnormality) may be referred to as the second threshold.

A total score clear switch is connected to the gaming media count control board P16, and when the power is turned on while the total score clear switch is operated (pressed) while the power is off (when operation of the total score clear switch is detected during the power-on process), the total score stored in the gaming media count control board P16 can be cleared. Operating the total score clear switch clears only the total score; other information (for example, bet number information, etc.) is not cleared. The total score clear switch can be operated by pressing it once, or by detecting that it has been pressed for a predetermined period of time (a so-called long press). The total score clear switch is located in a location where it cannot be operated by the user (for example, on the gaming media count control board P16, inside the cabinet, or on the back of the front door).

If the total score is cleared by turning on the power while the total score clear switch is operated, the total score clear status is turned ON (a "1" is stored in the total score clear status memory area of the RWM), the total score clear status remains ON until play becomes possible, the total score clear status remains ON until three seconds have elapsed since play becomes possible, and the total score clear status is turned OFF three seconds after play becomes possible (a "0" is stored in the total score clear status memory area of the RWM). The total score clear status information may be sent to the rental unit, and if the rental unit receives information that the total score clear status is ON, it will clear the total score information stored in the rental unit. Furthermore, if the total score clear status is ON three seconds after game play becomes possible on gaming machine P and loan points (also called "number of loaned medals") are awarded from the loan unit, the total score clear status will remain ON and the loan points will be added as new total points, and even if three seconds later the total score clear status turns OFF, the total points to which the new loan points have been added will not be cleared.

In addition, if the power is turned off during play (while the reels are spinning, during payout processing (also called score awarding processing), etc.), and the power is turned on again while the total score clear switch is operated, the total score will not be cleared and the total score clear status will remain OFF. However, if the power is turned off after play has ended and the power is turned on again while the total score clear switch is operated, the total score will be cleared and the total score clear status will be turned ON. In this case, the game media number control board P16 determines whether play is in progress based on the game start information and game end information sent from the main control board P15, and will not clear the total score by operating the total score clear switch while play is in progress.

In addition, if the total score clear switch is operated during play, play ends with the total score clear switch still operated, the power is turned off with the total score clear switch still operated and play ends, and then the power is turned on with the total score clear switch still operated, the total scores will be cleared and the total score clear status will be turned ON.

In addition, if the power is turned off while the total score clear status is ON, and then the power is turned back on without the total score clear switch being pressed, the total score clear status will remain ON. In other words, the total score clear status will not be initialized when the power is turned ON or OFF.

In addition, if the power is turned off while the total score clear status is ON, and the power is turned on when the total score clear switch is not pressed and the setting key switch is ON, the setting change mode will start, but the total score clear status will remain ON. In other words, the total score clear status will not be initialized when the power is turned ON or OFF, or when the initialization process is performed when setting change mode is started.

In addition, if the power is turned off while the total score clear status is ON, and then turned back on while the total score clear switch is pressed, the total score will be cleared and the total score clear status will be turned ON again. However, even in this case, although the total score will be initialized, the total score clear status will not be reset to ON, so the total score clear status will remain ON. In other words, the total score clear status will not be initialized by the initialization process caused by turning the power ON or OFF, or turning the total score clear switch ON.

The total score clear switch may also be configured to clear the total score and turn the total score clear status ON when the power is turned off during play and then turned on while the total score clear switch is in operation. In this case, the total score clear status will change from ON to OFF three seconds after play becomes possible after power is turned on. In this case, the total score clear status will be ON even during play, and the payout amount after play ends will be added to the total score, but the total score added after play ends will not be cleared.

In addition, while the total score will not be cleared simply by pressing the total score clear switch, the total score clear switch is detected, and therefore a monitor lamp will light up to allow the amusement facility manager to visually check whether there are any abnormalities in the switches managed by the gaming media count control board P16. On the other hand, rather than the monitor lamp lighting up when the total score clear switch is being detected, the monitor lamp may be configured to be off when the total score clear switch is being detected, and to be on when the total score clear switch is not being detected. Note that the monitor lamp is a lamp that lights up when it detects the operation of various switches mounted on the main control board P15 and/or gaming media count control board P16, but it may also be mounted on another board.

In addition, if the power is turned off during or after play has finished, and the power is turned on while the setting key switch is ON and the total score clear switch is ON, the main control board P15 determines whether the setting key switch is ON, and the game media count control board P16 determines whether the total score clear switch is ON.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch ON and the total score clear switch ON, the setting change mode is activated, and after initializing a specified range of memory area in the first main control RAM, the setting value can be selected. Meanwhile, on the game media count control board P16, after initializing a specific range of memory area in the second main control RAM based on the power being turned on, the total score is cleared by initializing the memory area in the second main control RAM that stores the total score based on the total score clear switch being ON. This configuration allows the setting to be changed and the total score to be cleared simultaneously with a single power-on, preventing cumbersome operations for the amusement facility manager.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch ON and the total score clear switch ON, the main control board P15 activates the setting change mode and initializes a predetermined range of the memory area in the first main control RAM. Then, when the conditions for terminating the setting change mode are met (by operating the start switch P3 to confirm the setting value and then turning the setting key switch OFF), the setting change mode ends. After that, when the bet button is operated, a state in which betting processing using the total score can be executed (waiting for play) is established. In other words, if the initialization of the memory area storing the total score is not completed by the time the setting change mode ends, there is a possibility that betting processing will be performed based on the uncleared total score. To resolve this issue, it is preferable that, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch ON and the total score clear switch ON, the initialization of the memory area storing the total score in the second main control RAM begins earlier than the initialization of the predetermined range of the memory area in the first main control RAM. Alternatively, if the power is turned on with the setting key switch ON and the total score clear switch ON, it is preferable to configure the system so that the initialization of the memory area storing the total score in the second main control RAM is completed earlier than the initialization of the memory area in a specified range in the first main control RAM is completed.

Also, if the power is turned on while the setting key switch is ON and the total score clear switch is ON, it is possible to switch to setting change mode but not clear the total score. With this configuration, the total score will not be cleared even if the total score clear switch is accidentally operated while switching to setting change mode. The total score is important information, so if it is important to prevent it from being easily cleared, this type of control system may be used.

Also, if the power is turned on while the setting key switch is ON and the total score clear switch is ON, the total score may be cleared without transitioning to setting change mode. With this configuration, even if the setting key switch is accidentally operated while clearing the total score, it is possible to prevent transition to setting change mode. Setting values are important information for controlling profits at gaming facilities, and if preventing unauthorized changes is important, this type of control system may be used.

Furthermore, when the setting change mode is entered, the LCD screen displays "Setting change mode in progress," the frame lamp lights red, and the speaker plays background music specifically for the setting change mode and outputs the audio message "Settings being changed," respectively, until the setting change mode is exited. When the total score is cleared, the frame lamp lights orange, and the speaker outputs the audio message "Total score cleared" for a short period of time or once. Therefore, even if the setting change mode is entered and the total score is cleared simultaneously, the notification regarding the total score being cleared, which is output for a short period of time or once, is prioritized to make it easier to recognize all situations. To prioritize, for example, if the audio channel for the setting change mode and the audio for the total score clearing are the same, the audio for the total score clearing can be output later so that the audio for the total score clearing can be recognized first. Even if the audio channels for the setting change mode and the audio for the total score clearing are separate, the volume of the audio for the setting change mode can be lowered or muted while the audio for the total score clearing is being output. By configuring it in this way, it becomes easier to recognize the situation even if the setting change mode is switched to and the total score is cleared at the same time.

The built-in ROM of the gaming media count control chip mounted on the gaming media count control board P16 has a storage capacity of "16 KB or less," and includes a usage area (also referred to as the first program) of "7.5 KB or less" and an area outside the usage area (also referred to as the second program). The usage area includes a control area (also referred to as the first control area) of "4.5 KB or less" in which the programs executed by the gaming media count control board P16 are stored, and a data area (also referred to as the first data area) of "3.0 KB or less" in which only information other than programs is stored or will be stored. The area outside the usage area also includes a control area (also referred to as the second control area) and a data area (also referred to as the second data area), similar to the usage area. The usage area stores programs related to the progress of the game, while the area outside the usage area stores programs related to fraud prevention and programs used for role ratio monitoring.

In addition, the gaming media count control board P16 is equipped with a role ratio monitor (also called a performance display monitor) and is configured to perform calculation and display processes to display the stay ratios of various states.

The role ratio monitor is a display device that switches every 4800 ms to display the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative indicated role ratio (selectable depending on the specifications of the gaming machine), consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role status ratio, and is capable of displaying a four-digit number using four 7-segment LEDs (with DP). Of the four-digit number displayed by the four 7-segment LEDs, the top two digits are called the identification segment, and the bottom two digits are called the ratio segment.

The "role" in the role ratio refers to the first-class special role (known as RB), second-class special role (known as CB), and regular role (known as SB), and the "role ratio" is the ratio calculated by: payout during role operation ÷ total payout × 100. Note that payouts during operation of the first-class special role continuous operation device (known as BB) and the second-class special role continuous operation device (known as MB) are also included in "payouts during role operation," but payouts during regular play during BB or regular play during MB are not included in "payouts during role operation."

In the continuous feature ratio, "continuous feature" refers to a Type 1 special feature (known as RB), and the "continuous feature ratio" is a ratio calculated by: payout during activation of a Type 1 special feature ÷ total payout × 100. Note that payouts during activation of a Type 1 special feature continuous activation device (known as BB) are also included in "payouts during feature activation," but payouts during regular play during BB are not included in "payouts during feature activation."

In the command-inclusive device ratio, "command-inclusive devices" include payouts from games in which the command function is activated (so-called automatic transmission). The "command-inclusive device ratio" is a ratio calculated by (payouts while the command function is activated, or payouts while the device is activated) ÷ total payouts × 100. Here, (payouts while the command function is activated, or payouts while the device is activated) does not refer to payouts from games in which the command function is activated and the device is activated, but rather refers to the sum of payouts from games in which the command function is activated and the device is activated. If the game in which the command function is activated is also a game in which the device is activated, the payout for that game is (payouts while the command function is activated, or payouts while the device is activated), rather than the sum of the two payouts. Furthermore, if a player operates the stop switch incorrectly during a game in which the automatic transmission is activated, the maximum payout may not be obtained; in this case, the calculation is based on the actual payout.

Of the information displayed on the role ratio monitor, the information displayed in the identification segment is information for identifying which ratio is being displayed: cumulative advantageous zone ratio, cumulative instructed role ratio, consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6,000 games, role ratio for the most recent 6,000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, or cumulative role etc. state ratio, and is displayed as "7U.", "7P.", "6Y.", "7Y.", "6A.", "7A.", or "5H.", respectively. For example, when "7U." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, and when "6Y." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6,000 games.

Of the information displayed on the winning ratio monitor, the information displayed in the ratio segment allows the calculation results of various ratios to be visually confirmed, and is displayed as a two-digit number using two 7-segment LEDs. For example, if the calculation result is 70, "70" will be displayed in the ratio segment. The calculated result will be rounded down to the nearest integer. If the calculation result is 100, "99" will be displayed. If the cumulative number of games played is less than 400, the ratio segment will display "00".

The identification segment will flash if the cumulative number of games played is less than the reference number of games. The reference number of games is determined according to various ratios, and is 175,000 games for the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, 175,000 games for the cumulative instructed role ratio, 6,000 games for the consecutive role ratio over the most recent 6,000 games, 6,000 games for the role ratio over the most recent 6,000 games, 17,500 games for the cumulative consecutive role ratio, 17,500 games for the cumulative role ratio, and 175,000 games for the cumulative role and other status ratio.

The ratio segment blinks when the displayed value is equal to or greater than the threshold. The threshold is determined according to the various ratios, and is 70 for the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, 70 for the cumulative indicated feature ratio, 60 for the consecutive feature ratio over the most recent 6000 games, 70 for the feature ratio over the most recent 6000 games, 60 for the cumulative consecutive feature ratio, 70 for the cumulative feature ratio, and 50 for the cumulative feature state ratio. Note that if the cumulative number of games is less than 400 and the calculation result is equal to or greater than the threshold but the ratio segment displays "00", the ratio segment will light up.

Of the information displayed in the identification segment of the winning ratio monitor, only one of "7U." and "7P." is displayed depending on the specifications of the gaming machine. "7U." is an identification mark indicating the advantageous zone ratio, and the value (number of plays in the advantageous zone ÷ total number of plays × 100) is displayed in the ratio segment. "7P." is an identification mark indicating the instruction-included feature ratio, and the value (number of instruction-included feature payouts (number of feature payouts + number of payouts when instruction function is activated) ÷ total payouts × 100) is displayed in the ratio segment. Gaming machines without an instruction function (gaming machines that do not notify the player of the operation mode stop switch advantageous to the player on the instruction monitor) display "7U." as the information displayed in the identification segment of the winning ratio monitor, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment (hereinafter, the specification in which "7U.--" is displayed on the instruction monitor is referred to as the 7U type (without instruction function)).

Furthermore, because the specification to be adopted, "7U." or "7P.", may change during development, it is desirable for the gaming machine P to be configured to store information for both. To achieve this configuration, when the power is turned on, the role ratio monitor type information ("0" for 7U type (no instruction function), "1" for 7U type (with instruction function), "2" for 7P type) stored in a certain memory area or program of the main control board P15 is transmitted to the gaming media number control board P16, and the gaming media number control board P16 stores the role ratio monitor type information transmitted from the main control board P15 in a certain memory area. Furthermore, regardless of whether the game media number control board P16 is a 7U type or a 7P type, it stores information that is only used in one of the two cases, such as the "number of plays in the advantageous zone" and the "number of payouts of instructed game devices," in a predetermined memory area, and is configured to display the necessary information based on the game ratio monitor type information sent from the main control board P15 when displaying the advantageous zone ratio or instructed game device ratio in the identification segment and ratio segment of the game ratio monitor.

The gaming media number control board P16 not only displays information on the role ratio monitor, but also transmits necessary information based on the role ratio monitor type information transmitted from the main control board P15 when transmitting gaming machine performance information to the lending unit. For example, when transmitting gaming machine performance information when gaming machine P is a 7U type (without instruction function), FFh is transmitted as information regarding the instruction-included role ratio, and FFh is transmitted as information regarding the advantageous zone ratio. Also, for example, when transmitting gaming machine performance information when gaming machine P is a 7U type (with instruction function), FFh is transmitted as information regarding the instruction-included role ratio, and a value corresponding to the result of (number of games played in the advantageous zone ÷ total number of games × 100) is transmitted as information regarding the advantageous zone ratio. Also, for example, when transmitting gaming machine performance information when gaming machine P is a 7P type, a value corresponding to the result of (number of instruction-included role payouts ÷ total number of payouts × 100) is transmitted as information regarding the instruction-included role ratio, and FFh is transmitted as information regarding the advantageous zone ratio.

In addition, since the initial value of the role ratio monitor type information storage area of the gaming media count control board P16 is 0, if the main control board P15 does not send role ratio monitor type information due to poor communication between the main control board P15 and the gaming media count control board P16 when the power is turned on, the role ratio monitor type information will be 0 even if the gaming machine P is a 7P type. Furthermore, if a Type 1 special role is not installed at this time, the ratio segments for "6Y.", "7Y.", "6A.", "7A.", and "5H." will all be displayed as "--".

In this way, even if a communication failure occurs between the main control board P15 and the game media count control board P16 when the power is turned on, the role ratio monitor display will show "--" instead of numbers in the ratio segment, making it possible to immediately recognize that something is not normal.

To check whether the role ratio monitor is operating normally, a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment for 4800 ms after the power is turned on and the interrupt process is started. The test pattern is displayed by flashing all segments (including DP) of the four 7-segment LEDs that make up the role ratio monitor. For example, "8.8.8.8." may be displayed in flashing mode. In addition to being displayed immediately after power is turned on, the test pattern may also be displayed during setting changes, setting confirmation, or an RWM abnormal error.

In the identification segment, when the cumulative number of games played is less than the reference number of games played, when the displayed value in the ratio segment is equal to or greater than the threshold, and when a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment, the segment is displayed in a flashing mode. Specifically, the flashing mode is displayed by alternating between lighting and off every 300 ms, such as lighting 300 ms → lighting 300 ms → lighting 300 ms → lighting 300 ms → .... In addition, when various ratio information is switched, it starts with lighting, so that the display time of various ratio information does not become longer or shorter depending on the timing of lighting and flashing.

As described above, the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative indicated role ratio, consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role status ratio displayed on the role ratio monitor are configured to switch display contents every 4800 ms, but by setting this 4800 ms to a multiple of 600 ms, which is one set of lighting and blinking, it is possible to configure the display so that one of the 7-segment LEDs is always lit, even if the various ratios displayed on the role ratio monitor are displayed in blinking mode when they are switched.

By configuring it in this way, the display starts with lighting even when various ratio information switches, so it is possible to display the display continuously without any sense of incongruity caused by a shift in the blinking cycle.

In addition, the display period for the test pattern after power-on as mentioned above is also set to 4800 ms, so once the test pattern has finished displaying for 4800 ms, the 7-segment LED will turn off, and the next interrupt processing will turn on the LED and display information regarding the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative instructed role ratio.

Next, we will explain how to control the blinking display on the ratio monitor.

In order to flash the display mode of the role ratio monitor, it has a memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off is a 2-byte memory area, and executes a process of adding 1 for each interrupt process. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off is initialized (0 is stored) when the power is turned on, and thereafter cycles through the values 0 to 299 each time an interrupt process is executed. In other words, the value following 299 is 0.

Example 1) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is set to "0" and an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "1." In this case, the carry flag becomes 1 (the carry flag becomes 1 because a borrow occurs as a result of calculating "0-299").
Example 2) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "298" and an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "299." In this case, the carry flag becomes 1 (the carry flag becomes 1 as a result of calculating "298-299" due to a borrow).
Example 3) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "299," if an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "0." In this case, the carry flag becomes 0 (the result of calculating "299 - 299" is that no borrow occurs, so the carry flag becomes 0).

As mentioned above, if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is a value between 0 and 298, the carry flag will be 1; if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is 299, the carry flag will be 0. In other words, the carry flag will be 0 every 300 ms.

When the carry flag = 0, the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is configured to be updated. The blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is initialized (stores 0) when the power is turned on, and when 0 is stored in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned on, and when 1 is stored in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned off. In other words, since the carry flag = 0 every 300 ms, by repeatedly storing 0 and 1 in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) every 300 ms, it is possible to have the display mode of the role ratio monitor alternate between a lit state and an off state every 300 ms (blinking display).

The winning ratio monitor is displayed in a blinking mode when the cumulative number of games played in the identification segment is less than the reference number of games, when the displayed value in the ratio segment is equal to or greater than the threshold, or when a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment. In all other cases, the monitor is displayed in a lit mode without referencing the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS). However, since the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between on and off is updated for each interrupt process regardless of whether the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is referenced, the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is also updated as needed, and even when switching from not referencing the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) to referencing it, the timing of the lighting and turning off and the timing for switching the various ratio displays can be displayed without any discrepancy.

(Game ball rental device connection terminal board)
The gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board (also referred to as the connection terminal board) serves as a relay board for two-way communication between the gaming machine P and the lending unit. The gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board is housed in a gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board case. The gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board is protected by the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board case, and is configured to be difficult to open by sealing the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board case with a crimp (also referred to as a sealing member).

The gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board has a connector (D-sub 9 pin) for two-way communication with the lending unit, and two-way communication is possible via a harness (approximately 1.5m to 2.0m long) connected to the connector through an opening on the back side of the gaming machine P's housing. The gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board is also equipped with a capacitor to stabilize communication with the lending unit. The lending unit is equipped with a lending switch, and when the lending switch is operated, a lending notification is sent from the lending unit, which is then input to the gaming media count control board P16 via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board. The connector connecting the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board to the lending unit is equipped with a spring lock, preventing the harness from easily coming loose.

The main control board P15, the gaming media count control board P16, and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board are each housed in a board case, but this is not limited to this. The main control board P15 and the gaming media count control board P16 may be housed together in a single board case, or the main control board P15, the gaming media count control board P16, and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board may be housed together in a single board case. Furthermore, the board case is configured so that the back side can be easily seen even when installed in the gaming machine P.

In conventional gaming machines that use medals, the main control board P15 and the reel device board are connected by a harness. Unplugging this harness cuts off the power supply from the capacitor mounted on the reel device board to the main control chip mounted on the main control board P15, allowing the data stored in the RAM of the main control chip to be initialized. This ensures that even if invalid data is stored in the RAM, it can be reliably initialized by unplugging the harness. Furthermore, because the main control board P15 has a sealed board case, if a capacitor is mounted on the main control board, as mentioned above, to cut off the power supply from the capacitor, it is necessary to destroy the board case of the main control board and then remove the main control chip from the main control board P15. Thus, in order to cut off the power supply from the capacitor without destroying the board case, it is desirable to mount the capacitor on a board other than the main control board.

On the other hand, the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board described in this embodiment uses a photocoupler for high-speed communication with the lending unit, making it prone to power shortages, and it is desirable to install a capacitor to ensure an immediate supply of power. Therefore, by installing a capacitor on the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board, connecting this gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board to the gaming media count control board P16 with a harness, and further connecting the gaming media count control board P16 to the main control board P15 with a harness, the capacitor installed on the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board serves as a backup power source for the main control chip installed on the main control board P15.

The main control board P15, the gaming media count control board P16, and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board are each sealed in a board case. The gaming media count control board P16 and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board, and the main control board P15 and the gaming media count control board P16 are each connected by harnesses, so the data stored in the RAM of the main control chip can be initialized by unplugging the harness. Furthermore, because the gaming media count control chip on the gaming media count control board is sealed in a board case, it is difficult to remove or insert it, but the total score can be initialized by operating the total score clear switch to initialize it.

The main control board P15 and the game media count control board P16 are connected via a 32-pin connector. Pin 1 is DC 12V, pin 2 is DC 12V, pin 3 is DC 5V, pin 4 is DC 5V, pin 5 is the main control data signal, pin 6 is control status signal 1, pin 7 is control status signal 2, pin 8 is control status signal 3, pin 9 is control status signal 4, pin 10 is control status signal 5, pin 11 is game media count control data signal 1, pin 12 is game media count control data signal 2, pin 13 is game media count control data signal 3, pin 14 is game media count control data signal 4, pin 15 is game media count control data signal 5, pin 16 is game media count control data signal 6, pin 17 is game media count control data signal 7, and pin 18 is Pin 1 is game media number control data signal 8, pin 19 is game media number control data signal 9, pin 20 is game media number control data signal 10, pin 21 is game media number control data signal 11, pin 22 is game media number control data signal 12, pin 23 is game media number control data signal 13, pin 24 is game media number control data signal 14, pin 25 is game media number control data signal 15, pin 26 is game media number control data signal 16, pin 27 is game media number control data strobe signal, pin 28 is power interruption detection signal 1, pin 29 is backup power supply, pin 30 is GND signal, pin 31 is GND signal, and pin 32 is GND signal. The main control board P15 and the game media count control board P16 may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The gaming media count control board P16 and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board are connected via a 5-pin connector. Pin 1 is DC 5V, pin 2 is a VL signal, pin 3 is a transmission signal, pin 4 is a reception signal, and pin 5 is a GND signal. The gaming media count control board P16 and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board may be connected directly by a harness, or indirectly via a relay terminal board.

The gaming media count control board P16 and gaming media count display board P13 are connected via a 14-pin connector. Pin 1 is the LED digit A signal, pin 2 is the LED digit B signal, pin 3 is the LED digit C signal, pin 4 is the LED digit D signal, pin 5 is the LED digit E signal, pin 6 is the gaming media count display segment A signal, pin 7 is the gaming media count display segment B signal, pin 8 is the gaming media count display segment C signal, pin 9 is the gaming media count display segment D signal, pin 10 is the gaming media count display segment E signal, pin 11 is the gaming media count display segment F signal, pin 12 is the gaming media count display segment G signal, pin 13 is the gaming media count display segment P signal, and pin 14 is the gaming media count display segment P signal. Additionally, signals related to pins 1 to 14 are signals transmitted from the game medium count control board P16 to the game medium count display board P13. The game medium count control board P16 and the game medium count display board P13 may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The gaming media count control board P16 and the counting switch P7 are connected via a two-pin connector. Pin 1 is the counting switch P7 signal and is used to send a signal related to the operation input of the counting switch P7 to the gaming media count control board P16 when the counting switch P7 is operated. When the counting switch P7 signal is input, some or all of the total score information managed by the gaming media count control board P16 is sent to the lending unit. Pin 2 is a GND signal and is used as GND. The gaming media count control board P16 and the counting switch P7 may be connected directly by a harness, or indirectly via a relay terminal board.

The gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board and the lending unit are connected via a 9-pin connector. Pin 1 is the LG signal, pin 2 is the TXD- signal, pin 3 is the RXD- signal, pin 4 is the PSI signal, pin 5 is the LG signal, pin 6 is the TXD+ signal, pin 7 is the RXD+ signal, pin 8 is the VL signal, and pin 9 is the VL signal. The TXD+ signal and TXD- signal are used to send information from gaming machine P (gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board) to the lending unit. The RXD+ signal and RXD- signal are used by gaming machine P (gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board) to receive information from the lending unit. The PSI signal is used as a connection confirmation signal to confirm the connection between gaming machine P and the lending unit. The VL signal is used as an isolated DC 5V power supply. Additionally, the harness connecting pins 2 and 6 is twisted. Additionally, the harness connecting pins 3 and 7 is twisted. The gaming ball and other lending device connection terminal board and the lending unit may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The main control board P15 and door relay board are connected via a 40-pin connector. Pin 1 is DC 5V, pin 2 is DC 5V, pin 3 is DC 5V, pin 4 is DC 5V, pin 5 is a GND signal, pin 6 is an LED digit 1 signal, pin 7 is an LED digit 2 signal, pin 8 is an LED digit 3 signal, pin 9 is an LED digit 4 signal, pin 10 is an LED digit 5 signal, pin 11 is an LED segment 1A signal, pin 12 is an LED segment 1B signal, pin 13 is an LED segment 1C signal, pin 14 is an LED segment 1D signal, pin 15 is an LED segment 1E signal, pin 16 is an LED segment 1F signal, pin 17 is an LED segment 1G signal, pin 18 is an LED segment 1P signal, pin 19 is a GND signal, and pin 20 is a GND signal. Pin 21 is a GND signal, pin 22 is a GND signal, pin 23 is a GND signal, pin 24 is a GND signal, pin 25 is a start switch sensor signal, pin 26 is a GND signal, pin 27 is an adjustment switch signal, pin 28 is a single-sheet insertion switch signal, pin 29 is a triple-sheet insertion sensor signal, pin 30 is a GND signal, pin 31 is a left stop switch P4L sensor signal, pin 32 is a GND signal, pin 33 is a middle stop switch P4C sensor signal, pin 34 is a GND signal, pin 35 is a GND signal, pin 36 is a right stop switch P4R sensor signal, pin 37 is a GND signal, pin 38 is a GND signal, pin 39 is a GND signal, and pin 40 is a connector connection monitor signal. The main control board P15 and reel device board P17 may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The main control board P15 and reel unit board P17 are connected via a 26-pin connector. Pin 1 is DC 12V, pin 2 is DC 12V, pin 3 is DC 5V, pin 4 is DC 5V, pin 5 is the backup power supply, pin 6 is the left reel P18L motor Φ0 signal, pin 7 is the left reel P18L motor Φ1 signal, pin 8 is the left reel P18L motor Φ2 signal, pin 9 is the left reel P18L motor Φ3 signal, pin 10 is the center reel P18C motor Φ0 signal, pin 11 is the center reel P18C motor Φ1 signal, pin 12 is the center reel P18C motor Φ2 signal, and pin 13 is the center reel P18C motor Φ3 signal. Pin 14 is the right reel P18R motor Φ0 signal, pin 15 is the right reel P18R motor Φ1 signal, pin 16 is the right reel P18R motor Φ2 signal, pin 17 is the right reel P18R motor Φ3 signal, pin 18 is the left reel P18L sensor signal, pin 19 is the center reel P18C sensor signal, pin 20 is the right reel P18R sensor signal, pin 21 is the door switch signal, pin 22 is a GND signal, pin 23 is a GND signal, pin 24 is a GND signal, pin 25 is a GND signal, and pin 26 is a GND signal. The main control board P15 and reel device board P17 may be connected directly by a harness or indirectly via a relay terminal board.

The main control board P15 and the setting/reset switch are connected via a 5-pin connector. In this embodiment, the setting change switch, which changes the setting value during setting change mode, and the reset switch, which clears an error when an error occurs, are the same switch, but they may also be provided as separate switches.

The main control board P15 and sub-control board are connected via a 30-pin connector.

The reel device board P17 and the power supply board are connected via an 8-pin connector.

The reel device board P17 and the left reel P18L motor are connected via a 4-pin connector. Pin 1 is the motor Φ0 signal, pin 2 is the motor Φ1 signal, pin 3 is the motor Φ2 signal, and pin 4 is the motor Φ3 signal. The reel device board P17 and the left reel P18L motor may be connected directly by a harness, or indirectly via a relay terminal board.

The reel device board P17 and the left reel P18L sensor are connected via a 3-pin connector. Pin 1 is DC 5V, pin 2 is the left reel P18L sensor signal, and pin 3 is the GND signal. The reel device board P17 and left reel P18L sensor may be connected directly by a harness, or indirectly via a relay terminal board.

The reel device board P17 and the middle reel P18C motor are connected via a 4-pin connector. Pin 1 is the motor Φ0 signal, pin 2 is the motor Φ1 signal, pin 3 is the motor Φ2 signal, and pin 4 is the motor Φ3 signal. The reel device board P17 and the middle reel P18C motor may be connected directly by a harness, or indirectly via a relay terminal board.

The reel device board P17 and the middle reel P18C sensor are connected via a 3-pin connector. Pin 1 is DC 5V, pin 2 is the middle reel P18C sensor signal, and pin 3 is the GND signal. The reel device board P17 and the middle reel P18C sensor may be connected directly by a harness, or indirectly via a relay terminal board.

The reel device board P17 and the right reel P18R motor are connected via a 4-pin connector. Pin 1 is the motor Φ0 signal, pin 2 is the motor Φ1 signal, pin 3 is the motor Φ2 signal, and pin 4 is the motor Φ3 signal. The reel device board P17 and the right reel P18R motor may be connected directly by a harness, or indirectly via a relay terminal board.

The reel device board P17 and the right reel P18R sensor are connected via a 3-pin connector. Pin 1 is DC 5V, pin 2 is the right reel P18R sensor signal, and pin 3 is the GND signal. The reel device board P17 and right reel P18R sensor may be connected directly by a harness, or indirectly via a relay terminal board.

The reel device board P17 and the door switch are connected via a three-pin connector. Pin 1 is the door switch signal, pin 2 is the GND signal, and pin 3 is the GND signal. The reel device board P17 and the door switch may be connected directly by a harness, or indirectly via a relay terminal board.

The door relay board and display board are connected via a 14-pin connector.

The door relay board and Maxbed are connected via a 6-pin connector.

The door relay board and start switch P3 are connected via a 3-pin connector.

The door relay board and stop switch P4 are connected via a 9-pin connector.

<Settings change mode>
The setting change mode is a mode in which a setting value can be selected (in other words, a setting value setting mode in which a setting value can be set), and in this embodiment, any of information "0" to "5" can be selected as setting value information and stored in the setting value information storage means. Here, a setting value display (not shown) is provided for displaying the setting value, and in the setting change mode, the hall staff can determine the setting value information based on the information displayed on the setting value display. The setting value displayed on the setting value display is any of information "1" to "6," and the degree of advantage of the game (machine payout rate, payout rate, AT winning probability, etc.) changes depending on the setting value.

When the power switch is off, turn the setting key switch on, and then turn the power switch on to enter setting change mode (start changing settings).

The conditions for starting the setting change mode may also be that the setting key switch is ON when the power is turned on, and that the game state when the power is turned on is not in progress (the state is from when all reels have stopped and game termination processing has been performed until the start switch for the next game is operated). In any case, the conditions under which the setting change mode can be started may be referred to as the setting change mode start conditions or predetermined start conditions.

After entering the setting change mode (starting setting changes), you can select the setting value information by operating the setting change switch. For example, if the setting change switch is operated when the setting value display is showing "2," the setting value display will display "3." Also, if the setting change switch is operated when the setting value display is showing "6," the setting value display will display "1." When the setting change mode is activated, a specified range of memory area in the first main control RAM is initialized. This initialization process initializes the game status, such as recoverable errors and advantageous zones, but does not initialize the total score. If you want to initialize the total score, you must operate the total score clear switch separately.

After starting the setting change mode (starting the setting change), you can select a setting value by operating the setting change switch, confirm the setting value by operating the start switch P3, and then exit the setting change mode (end the setting change) by turning off the setting key switch. After exiting the setting change mode (end the setting change), you can place a bet, and if you bet on the points and then operate the start switch P3, you can start playing.

If the setting change mode is ended when the setting value display shows "1", "0" will be stored as the setting value information; if the setting change mode is ended when the setting value display shows "2", "1" will be stored as the setting value information; if the setting change mode is ended when the setting value display shows "3", "2" will be stored as the setting value information; if the setting change mode is ended when the setting value display shows "4", "3" will be stored as the setting value information; if the setting change mode is ended when the setting value display shows "5", "4" will be stored as the setting value information; and if the setting change mode is ended when the setting value display shows "6", "5" will be stored as the setting value information.

Here, even in setting change mode, communication between the rental unit and gaming machine P is still taking place. In other words, even in setting change mode, the rental notification described below can be received and points can be added to gaming machine P. Also, even in setting change mode, the counting notification described below can be sent and points can be counted for gaming machine P.

It is also possible to configure the system so that communication between the rental unit and gaming machine P does not occur even in setting change mode. In other words, even if the rental switch on the rental unit is operated during setting change mode, gaming machine P will not receive a rental notification, and points cannot be added to gaming machine P. Also, in this case, even if the counting switch P7 is operated during setting change mode, a counting notification is not sent, and points cannot be counted for gaming machine P.

In addition, during setting change mode, the reel spinning process triggered by operating the start switch, the bet number setting process triggered by operating the bet switch, the settlement process triggered by operating the settlement switch, and the reel stopping process triggered by operating the stop switch are disabled, preventing gameplay from progressing.

<Settings confirmation mode>
The setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the setting values can be confirmed, and the current setting values can be displayed on the setting value display.

When the power switch is on, the setting check mode can be started (setting check begins) when the setting key switch is turned on. Note that in setting check mode, unlike setting change mode, it is not possible to select or change setting values. Also, if one or more points have been bet and the power switch is on, it is possible to prevent the setting check mode from starting. In other words, when no bets have been made (including automatic bets due to replays), the setting check mode will start when the setting key switch is turned on.

After starting the setting check mode (starting the setting check), you can exit the setting check mode (end the setting check) by turning off the setting key switch.

Here, even in setting confirmation mode, communication between the rental unit and gaming machine P is still taking place. In other words, even in setting confirmation mode, the rental notification described below can be received and points can be added to gaming machine P. Also, even in setting confirmation mode, the counting notification described below can be sent and points can be counted for gaming machine P.

It is also possible to configure the system so that communication between the rental unit and gaming machine P does not occur even in setting confirmation mode. In other words, even if the rental switch on the rental unit is operated during setting confirmation mode, gaming machine P will not receive a rental notification, and points cannot be added to gaming machine P. Also, in this case, even if the counting switch P7 is operated during setting confirmation mode, a counting notification is not sent, and points cannot be counted for gaming machine P.

In addition, while in setting confirmation mode, the reel spinning process triggered by operating the start switch, the bet number setting process triggered by operating the bet switch, the settlement process triggered by operating the settlement switch, and the reel stopping process triggered by operating the stop switch are disabled, preventing gameplay from progressing.

<Rental unit>
In this embodiment, the gaming machine P is capable of communicating with the lending unit. The lending unit is provided with a lending switch, a replay (medal play) switch, a card return switch, a card insertion slot, a bill insertion slot, and the like. The lending switch and the replay switch may be a common switch. The card in the card return switch or card insertion slot refers to a member card (issued by each store) owned by the user or a visitor card used by a non-member user, and may be simply referred to as a card or an information recording medium.

When a user inserts a bill into the bill slot and operates the dispensing switch, a dispensing notification is sent to the gaming machine P. The dispensing unit is equipped with an SC board that receives information from the gaming machine P, and the SC board is configured to receive information sent by the gaming media count control board P16 in the gaming machine P.

In addition, since there may be a delay between when the VL signal turns ON and when the SC board can stably receive information from the gaming machine P, the gaming machine P may set a timer to count 100 ms after the VL signal turns ON, and transmit the gaming machine information notification after counting 100 ms. This configuration prevents the SC board from being unable to receive gaming machine information when the gaming machine P transmits the gaming machine information notification to the rental unit immediately after the VL signal turns ON. In other words, by waiting until the SC board is stable and able to receive information from the gaming machine P before transmitting the gaming machine information notification to the rental unit, the SC board can more easily receive the gaming machine information notification.

The delay time of the SC board is exemplified as 100 ms, which is the sum of the time from when the VL signal is turned ON until the VL signal output stabilizes (e.g., 50 ms) and the time from when the VL signal output stabilizes until the PSI signal is detected (e.g., 50 ms).

The timer period set by gaming machine P after the VL signal turns ON is not limited to 100 ms, and may be less than or greater than 100 ms. However, it is desirable that the value be within 300 ms, which is the notification interval for gaming machine information notifications. This is because 300 ms corresponds to the period in which gaming machine P can send two gaming machine information notifications after the VL signal turns ON. During this period, even if cheating is committed while the timer is counting after the VL signal turns ON, no trace will be left. Therefore, a value of 300 ms or less is desirable in order to leave traces of cheating.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the timer period set by the gaming machine P after the VL signal turns ON be a value within 500 ms, which is the period for determining whether the counting switch P7 has been pressed and held. By configuring it in this way, a gaming machine information notification can be sent from the time the VL signal turns ON until the counting switch P7 is pressed and held (held and held) until the gaming machine P determines that the counting switch P7 has been held and held, and the number of medals to be counted corresponding to the long press of the counting switch P7 can then be counted without delay.

If medal information is stored on the card, operating the replay switch will send a loan notification to gaming machine P for a specified number of gaming medals from the medal information stored on the card.

When the card return switch is operated, the card inserted through the card slot is returned to the user.

<Hall computer>
When the SC board installed in the lending unit receives information from the gaming machine P, some of the information is transmitted from the lending unit to the hall computer. Examples of information transmitted from the lending unit to the hall computer include the number of coins inserted, the number of coins paid out, the main control status, and fraud information. When the hall computer receives information from the lending unit, it executes processing to display the information on a data display or the like outside the gaming machine. Since the hall computer may also simultaneously manage information from gaming machines that use conventional physical gaming medals, it manages the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out by receiving a pulse number corresponding to that number. In other words, the gaming machine P transmits the values of the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out directly, but the hall computer, which is the final receiving medium, receives the information as pulses, resulting in a time lag before the hall computer completely receives the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out.

<Description of power-on processing controlled by the main control board P15 applicable to this embodiment>
When the gaming machine is powered on, it determines whether the power failure detection signal is ON or not, and if the power failure detection signal is not ON (if it is OFF), it sets the functions of the main control chip, and if the power failure detection signal is ON, it loops to determine whether the power failure detection signal is ON or not (the following power-on process is not executed).

The main control chip's function settings perform the initial settings of the built-in registers.

Next, the checksum of the RWM area is calculated and the power-off processing completion flag is checked to generate power-off recovery data.

Next, it determines whether the door switch signal and setting key switch signal are ON. If the door switch signal is ON (front door open) and the setting key switch signal is ON, it executes setting change device processing. If either switch is OFF, it determines whether the power interruption recovery data is normal.

Next, if the power failure recovery data is not normal, an error is displayed and the error state loops until initialization processing is performed. If the power failure recovery data is normal, the stack pointer is restored based on the data saved at the time of power failure.

Next, read the input port.

Next, the interrupt activation process is executed. During the interrupt activation process, settings related to the four serial communication port channels 0 to 3 are executed. Of these, channel 0 can be set to transmit and receive, channel 1 can be set to transmit only, channel 2 can be set to transmit only, and channel 3 can be set to transmit only.

To set channel 0 to allow reception, bit 7 in the setting area (part of the built-in register) corresponding to channel 0 is set to "1." Also, setting bit 6 in the setting area (part of the built-in register) corresponding to channel 0 to "1" allows transmission to channel 0. In this embodiment, channel 0 is set to receive only, so bit 7 is set to "1" and bit 6 remains at "0." By allowing only reception on channel 0, the main control board can receive commands from the game media count control board. Note that in this embodiment, commands sent from the main control board to the game media count control board are sent via parallel communication, so the serial communication port is not used. However, when sending commands from the main control board to the game media count control board via serial communication, they may be sent using any of channels 1 to 3 of the serial communication port. Even in this case, by setting channel 0 to allow reception only, mutual communication can be performed without performing complex processes such as adjusting the timing of send and receive commands.

During the interrupt startup process, the receive setting for channel 0 is set within the used area, and the transmit setting for channel 2 is set outside the used area. Channel 2 executes the transmit setting to execute the process for outputting a test signal from the main control board to the test IF board.

During the interrupt startup process, after channel 0 is set to receive and channel 2 is set to transmit, a serial communication setting program outside the operating area is called and channel 2 is set to transmit. By setting channel 0 to receive before channel 2 to transmit, it is possible to quickly prepare for command transmission from the game media count control board.

After executing the interrupt startup process, the system will return to the interrupt processing that occurred when the power was turned off.

<Description of the game progress main process controlled by the main control board P15 applicable to this embodiment>
The processing related to games on the gaming machine P is broadly divided into interval interrupt processing (hereinafter simply referred to as "interrupt processing" or "timer interrupt processing") that is executed periodically (every 2.235 ms in this embodiment), and game progress main processing that is executed from the end of the interval interrupt processing until the start timing of the next interval interrupt processing.

An overview of the main game progress processing of the main control board P15 in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 44.

<Power-on processing>
When the power is turned on, the power-on process is executed. In the power-on process, an abnormality in the first main control RAM is determined (a checksum is calculated). If the first main control RAM is abnormal and the setting key switch is not on (off), the "power-off recovery cannot be performed normally" occurs, and an irrecoverable error occurs. If an irrecoverable error occurs, the subsequent game progress main process is not executed. If an irrecoverable error occurs, it is possible to recover by turning the power off once, and then turning the power on with the setting key switch on (initializing a specified area of the first main control RAM by changing the settings).

During power-on processing, if the first main control RAM is normal and the setting key switch is not on (off), the game is set to start.

During power-on processing, if the first main control RAM is normal and the setting key switch is on, a specific area of the first main control RAM is initialized, and then the system transitions to setting change mode, in which setting values can be changed. If the conditions for exiting setting change mode are met, the system is set to start playing.

When the first main control RAM is abnormal (an unrecoverable error) during power-on processing and the setting key switch is on, the system initializes a predetermined area, including at least a specific area of the first main control RAM, and then transitions to setting change mode, in which setting values can be changed. When the conditions for terminating setting change mode are met, the system sets the game to begin.

In addition, while the condition for transitioning to setting change mode was explained as being when the setting key switch was on, it is also possible to transition to setting change mode when the setting key switch is on and the setting changeable state is set in the first main control RAM. The setting changeable state will be described later.

<Starting set>
First, a setting changeable state, in which settings can be changed, is set in the first main control RAM. When the setting changeable state is set, if the setting key switch is on when the power is turned on, the system will transition to setting change mode. When the setting changeable state is not set (when the setting unchangeable state is set), the system will not transition to setting change mode even if the setting key switch is on when the power is turned on.

Next, the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, 3 BET lamp, gaming media insertion possible lamp, game execution possible lamp, and replay indicator lamp are turned off. Specifically, turn-off data is set in the memory area of the first main control RAM that manages the lighting and extinguishing of the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, 3 BET lamp, gaming media insertion possible lamp, game execution possible lamp, and replay indicator lamp.

Next, determine whether the result of the previous game is a replay.

If it is determined that the previous game is a replay, the replay indicator lamp is turned on. Specifically, lighting data is set in the memory area of the first main control RAM that manages the on/off of the replay indicator lamp. Then, an automatic bet is placed on the number of bets from the previous game. For example, if the number of bets from the previous game was "3," the automatic bet will make the number of bets "3." Then, gaming media is accepted.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the previous game is not a replay, the replay indicator lamp will not light up and automatic bets will not be placed, and gaming media will be accepted.

<Gaming media acceptance>
Gaming media acceptance is a control process in a situation where betting processing using total points and settlement processing of the number of bets can be executed (while waiting for a game).

When gaming media is accepted, the system first determines whether the conditions for transitioning to setting confirmation mode are met. Specifically, it first checks whether the number of bets is 0. If the number of bets is 0, the system executes setting confirmation processing (transitions to setting confirmation mode) when the door is open and the setting key switch is on (or when it is determined that the setting key switch signal is rising). If the number of bets is not 0 (for example, when the number of bets is 1), the system does not execute setting confirmation processing (does not transition to setting confirmation mode) even if the door is open and the setting key switch is on.

If the conditions for transitioning to setting confirmation mode are not met (if the mode does not transition to setting confirmation mode), the next step is to determine whether there is a VL abnormality or a total score upper limit abnormality, as described below.

In the event of a VL abnormality or a total score upper limit abnormality, the gaming media insertable lamp and game executable lamp are turned off regardless of their lighting status, and subsequent processing (such as betting and settlement processing) is not performed. Here, turning off the gaming media insertable lamp and game executable lamp means storing the turn-off data in the memory area of the first main control RAM that manages the lighting and extinguishing of the gaming media insertable lamp and game executable lamp. Note that the lighting status of the first bet lamp, second bet lamp, and third bet lamp remains unchanged. For example, if a VL abnormality occurs when the first bet lamp is on, the second bet lamp is on, and the third bet lamp is off, the first bet lamp will remain on, the second bet lamp will remain on, and the third bet lamp will remain off. By configuring the lamps in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the current number of bets even if a VL abnormality or a total score upper limit abnormality occurs. Meanwhile, the gaming media insertion possible lamp and game execution possible lamp are turned off. By turning off the game execution possible lamp, it is possible to notify the player that the game will not proceed even if the start switch is operated, even if the specified number of bets has been placed (when the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit). Furthermore, by turning off the gaming media insertion possible lamp, it is possible to notify the player that even if the number of bets is 0 and the total score is greater than the specified number, no bets will be placed even if the bet switch is operated.

Even if a VL abnormality or total score upper limit abnormality occurs during game media reception, the system determines whether the conditions for transitioning to setting confirmation mode are met. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can check the setting values if the conditions for transitioning to setting confirmation mode are met, even if a VL abnormality or total score upper limit abnormality occurs.

If there is no VL abnormality or total score upper limit abnormality, the settlement process and insertion process will be carried out.

During the settlement process, if it is determined that the settlement switch P6 has been operated, the settlement process for the bet points will be carried out.

During the bet process, if it determines that the MAX bet switch has been operated, it will execute a process to deposit 3 points, and if it determines that the 1 bet switch has been operated, it will execute a process to deposit 1 point.

Here, we will explain the deposit process (hereinafter also referred to as the bet process) performed by the main control board P15.

When the main control board P15 receives operation of the MAX BET switch or 1 BET switch (when it determines that there is rising data for the MAX BET switch or 1 BET switch), if the result of subtracting the maximum number of insertions (also called the specified number) of "3" from the current number of insertions (also called the current number of bets, the number of bets placed, or the number of insertions placed) is "0" (if the zero flag = 1), it terminates the insertion process; if the result of subtracting the maximum number of insertions (also called "3") from the current number of insertions is not "0" (if the zero flag = 1), it sets the requested number of insertions (also called the requested number of bets).

When setting the requested number of bets, if the operation of the 1 bet switch is accepted, the requested number of bets is set to "1", and if the operation of the MAX bet switch is accepted, the requested number of bets is set to the maximum number of bets (if the current number of bets is "0", it is "3", if the current number of bets is "1", it is "2", and if the current number of bets is "2", it is "1").

The set number of gaming media requested to be inserted is sent to the gaming media count control board P16 as an insertion request command (also called a bet request command). The command sent from the main control board P15 to the gaming media count control board P16 consists of a first control command (1 byte) and a second control command (1 byte), with the first control command indicating the type of command and the second control command indicating the data. For example, in the case of an insertion request command, the first control command is "20h" and the second control command is one of the values "01h" to "03h". In other words, when the gaming media count control board P16 receives a command from the main control board P15, it can confirm from the first control command that it is a insertion request command, and can confirm the number of gaming media requested to be inserted from the second control command.

After the main control board P15 sends a deposit request command, if a command for the number of game media to be inserted is sent from the gaming media count control board P16, the main control board P15 will add one point to the bet count according to the requested number of game media to be inserted. Furthermore, each time one point is added to the bet count, the 1 to 3 bet lamps will light up in sequence.

Furthermore, if a gaming media count control board P16 sends a non-acceptance command after the main control board P15 sends a deposit request command, the deposit process is terminated. The gaming media count control board P16 will send a non-acceptance command to the main control board P15 if the value stored in the total score memory area, which is the RAM area of the gaming media count control board P16 (also referred to as the total score), is less than the number of deposit requests. For example, if the number of deposit requests is "3" and the value stored in the total score memory area is less than "3," the gaming media count control board P16 will send a non-acceptance command to the main control board P15. If the number of deposit requests is "2" and the value stored in the total score memory area is less than "2," the gaming media count control board P16 will send a non-acceptance command to the main control board P15. Furthermore, if the number of deposit requests is "1" and the value stored in the total score memory area is less than "1," the gaming media count control board P16 will send a non-acceptance command to the main control board P15.

Here, we will explain the settlement process performed by the main control board P15.

When the main control board P15 receives operation of the settlement switch P6 (when it determines that there is rising data from the settlement switch P6), it reads the number of coins bet and determines whether the number of coins bet is "0." If the number of coins bet is "0," it terminates the settlement process. If the number of coins bet is not "0," it turns off the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, 3 BET lamp, replay indicator lamp, game executable lamp, and gaming media insertable lamp. Note that because the settlement process cannot be performed during a replay, the settlement process will not be performed even if the settlement switch P6 is operated during a replay. In other words, even if the settlement switch P6 is operated during a replay, the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, 3 BET lamp, game executable lamp, and gaming media insertable lamp, including the replay indicator lamp, will not turn off.

After the various lamps are turned off, a settlement request command is set. The value of the second control command for the settlement request command uses the register value stored when reading the number of bets (also called the settlement request number) at the time the settlement process is executed. In other words, the settlement request number will be one of the values "01h" to "03h".

Next, the set settlement request command is sent to the gaming media count control board P16.

If a settlement request command is sent from the gaming media count control board P16 after the main control board P15 has sent a settlement request command, the main control board P15 will send a command to start the settlement process to the sub-control board P12, clear the number of bets, turn off the lit 1-3 bet lamps, and send a command to end the settlement process to the sub-control board P12. Furthermore, when a command to start the settlement process is sent from the main control board P15, the sub-control board P12 will output a settlement sound from the speaker, and when a command to end the settlement process is sent from the main control board P15, the sub-control board P12 will end the output of the settlement sound from the speaker.

In addition, if the total score stored in the game media number storage means is equal to or greater than the upper limit warning value of "16369," the game media number control board P16 detects an abnormality in the total score upper limit and notifies the main control board P15 via command communication that there is an abnormality in the total score upper limit.If the main control board P15 receives a command indicating an abnormality in the total score upper limit from the game media number control board P16, the main control board P15 sets an abnormality in the total score upper limit.

In the event of an abnormality in the total score upper limit, the main control board P15 disables play (the start switch P3, bet switch P5, and settlement switch P6 are disabled), preventing the total score stored in the gaming media count storage means from exceeding the upper limit of 16,383. For example, if the gaming media count storage means stores 16,368, the value immediately preceding the upper limit warning value, and the maximum bet of 3 has been placed, even after the settlement switch P6 is operated, the value stored in the gaming media count storage means is 16,371, which is below the upper limit of 16,383. Therefore, even if the number of gaming media is added to the gaming media count storage means during the settlement process by operating the settlement switch P6, the upper limit will not be exceeded, preventing the loss of gaming media exceeding the upper limit. In this case, after the value stored in the gaming media count storage means reaches 16,371, an abnormality in the total score upper limit is detected, and further operation of the settlement switch P6 is disabled, preventing settlement processing. If the counting switch P7 is then operated and the value stored in the gaming media number storage means becomes 16,368 or less, the total points upper limit error is automatically cleared and the game becomes playable (start switch P3, bet switch P5, and settlement switch P6 are ready to be operated).

In the event of an abnormality in the total score limit, play is disabled and the start switch P3, bet switch P5, and settlement switch P6 are disabled. However, under normal circumstances, play is disabled even if only the bet switch P5 is disabled, and the start switch P3 and settlement switch P6 do not need to be disabled, but in consideration of the possibility of an illegal total score limit abnormality occurring, the start switch P3 and settlement switch P6 are also disabled. Furthermore, in consideration of the possibility of an illegal total score limit abnormality occurring during play, payout processing may be disabled.

<Start lever accepted?>
Next, if a playable insertion point has been inserted, the start lever acceptance is determined. When the start lever acceptance is determined, it is confirmed whether the start switch P3 has been operated (confirm whether a rising signal of the start switch P3 has been detected). If a playable insertion point has not been inserted, the process returns to the process of determining whether the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode for game medium acceptance have been met, and the game standby state is looped.

Next, when a playable insertion point is inserted, the start lever is accepted to check whether the start switch P3 has been operated. If it is determined that the start switch P3 has been operated (start lever accepted?: YES), a setting change disabled state is set. If it is determined that the start switch P3 has not been operated (start lever accepted?: NO), the process returns to determining whether the conditions for transitioning to setting confirmation mode have been met, and the game standby state is looped.

<Internal lottery>
Next, after the setting unchangeable state is set, an internal lottery process is executed. In the internal lottery process, a small winning combination, a replay (also called a replay), a BB, a RB, a loss, etc. are determined by lottery.

<Reel rotation processing>
Next, it is determined whether the minimum play time (the time required to ensure that the time from the start of reel rotation in one game to the start of reel rotation in the next game is 4.1 seconds or more) has elapsed, and if it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed, it executes a reel rotation start process, and if it is determined that the minimum play time has not elapsed, it loops the minimum play time determination process until the minimum play time has elapsed.

Next, the reel rotation start process executes the process to rotate all reels, and begins creating the offset frame number data until the stop switch operation can be accepted.

<Reel stop processing>
Next, the reel stop process is executed. In the reel stop process, it is determined whether or not the operation of the stop switch is acceptable, and if the operation of the stop switch is acceptable, it is confirmed whether or not the stop switch has been operated (confirm whether or not the rising signal of the stop switch has been detected). If the operation of the stop switch is not acceptable, it returns to the creation of the shift frame number data.

Next, it checks whether the stop switch has been operated. If it determines that the stop switch has been operated, it determines the stop position from the stop acceptance position and the number of shifted frames. If it determines that the stop switch has not been operated, it returns to creating the number of shifted frames data.

Next, once the stopping position has been determined, it is determined whether all reels (three reels in this embodiment) have stopped, and if it is determined that all reels have stopped, processing according to the game state is executed. If it is determined that all reels have not stopped, the process returns to creating the shift frame number data.

<Processing by game state>
The processing by game state executes processing according to the main game state, which will be described later. For example, if the current game is an AT (game in an advantageous zone), and the current game satisfies any end condition of the advantageous zone (for example, execution of AT300 games), and the next game will be a game in the normal zone, the advantageous zone end processing is executed. The control processing for ending the advantageous zone under any end condition will be described later.

<Payment process>
Subsequently, after the processing for each game state is executed, the payout processing is executed.

During the payout process, it is determined whether the replay activation symbol has stopped, and if it is determined that the replay activation symbol has stopped, the number of coins inserted at the start of play is stored as automatic insert number data. If it is determined that the replay activation symbol has not stopped, it is determined whether the value of the score awarding timer is not "0" to determine whether the payout time has elapsed. If the value of the score awarding timer is not "0", it waits until the value of the score awarding timer becomes "0". If the value of the score awarding timer is "0", it stores the value "27" (equivalent to 60.35 ms), which indicates the payout time for one awarded point, in the value of the score awarding timer, and then sets a payout request command.

If a payout request command is sent from the game media count control board P16 after the main control board P15 has sent a payout request command, the main control board P15 increments the value of the acquisition number data indicating the number acquired (stored as "0" when payout begins) and decrements the score award data indicating the number to be paid out (stored as the payout number according to the winning symbol when payout begins). If the value of the score award data is not 0, the process of determining whether the value of the score award timer is not "0" is repeated until the value of the score award data becomes 0. The acquisition number data is data used to display the number acquired in the award number display section.

Furthermore, since the gaming media count storage means stores "16368," the value immediately before the upper limit warning value, and even if the maximum number of "15" is awarded, the value stored in the gaming media count storage means after the award is "16383," which is the upper limit, adding the number of gaming media to the gaming media count storage means during the payout process will not exceed the upper limit, preventing the gaming media exceeding the upper limit from being lost. In this case, after the value stored in the gaming media count storage means reaches "16383," an abnormality in the total points upper limit is detected, and subsequent operations of the bet switch P5 and start switch P3 are not accepted, preventing betting and processing related to the start of gameplay (such as the start of spinning the reels). If the counting switch P7 is subsequently operated and the value stored in the gaming media count storage means becomes "16368" or lower, the abnormality in the total points upper limit is automatically cleared, and the game becomes playable (start switch P3, bet switch P5, and settlement switch P6 are accepted).

<Advantageous Zone Clear Counter Management Processing>
Next, when the current game is a game in the advantageous zone, an update process is executed for the counters related to the end conditions of the advantageous zone (for example, a memory area that manages the number of games played in the advantageous zone and a memory area that manages MY in the advantageous zone). If it is determined through this update process that the end conditions of the advantageous zone are met, the next game is controlled to be a normal zone. If the advantageous zone is to be ended in the current game, initialization is performed for the various memory areas of the first main control RAM that were used in the game in the advantageous zone. On the other hand, if the current game is a game in the normal zone, the update process for the counters related to the end conditions of the advantageous zone is not executed. In other words, the advantageous zone clear counter management process determines whether the end conditions of the advantageous zone have been met when the game is in the advantageous zone, and if the end conditions of the advantageous zone have been met, control is executed to end the advantageous zone.

<Operational status management process>
Next, the operation status management process for the replay, the accessory, and the accessory continuous operation device is executed. By executing the operation status management process, one game ends, and the process returns to the game start set of the game progress main process.

Note that when it is determined that the start switch has been operated, the setting is set to a setting change disabled state, preventing settings from being changed while the setting is disabled. However, it is also possible to configure the setting to be changed even during play (even after the start switch has been operated) without providing a setting change disabled state.

<Description of interval interrupt processing controlled by the main control board P15 applicable to this embodiment>
In the interval interrupt process, first, a register save process is executed, in which register values are stored in a stack area so that the game progress main process that was being executed immediately before the interrupt process is completed.

Next, the interrupt flag clearing process is executed. The interrupt flag clearing process clears (turns OFF) the interrupt flag to allow interrupt processing.

Next, the power-off process is executed. During the power-off process, if the power-off detection signal is ON, the power-off process described below is executed, and if the power-off detection signal is OFF, the power-off process is terminated.

Next, the interrupt counter update process is executed. The interrupt counter update process updates the counter for each interrupt process.

Next, the main control command acquisition process is executed. During the main control command acquisition process, commands are received from the game media count control board P16 and stored in the main control command buffer.

Next, the input port read process is executed. The input port read process reads the input port.

Next, the reel drive management process is executed. During the reel drive management process, drive processing is executed for all reels according to their status.

Next, the game media count control command output process is executed. During the game media count control command output process, the command is saved in the game media count command buffer so that it can be sent to the game media count control board P16.

Next, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, data is set in the output port and output.

Next, the timer measurement process is executed. This process updates various timers, including the condition device output timer, payout count signal output timer, overflow test signal timer, reel stop acceptance waiting timer, minimum play time management timer, score award timer, setting change device activation start waiting timer, bonus activation start waiting timer, and bonus activation end waiting timer.

Next, the error management process is executed. The error management process checks for setting value errors and internal random number errors. Note that the error management process calls a program outside the area of use, and error checking is performed in the program outside the area of use.

Next, the gaming machine information management process (main control) is executed. In the gaming machine information management process (main control), information on gaming machine fraud 1 and gaming machine fraud 2 is updated.

Next, the sub-control command transmission process is executed. In the sub-control command transmission process, the command to be sent to the sub-control board P12 is set.

If the main control board P15 has no commands to send to the sub-control board P12 (if no commands are stored in the send command buffer), the main control board P15 may send a no-operation command to the sub-control board P12. The no-operation command includes information on the game status and error status, so that when the sub-control board P12 receives the no-operation command, it can determine the status of the main control board P15. For example, if the total score of the game media number control board P16 reaches a value that indicates an abnormal total score upper limit and the main control board P15 receives a total score upper limit abnormality signal, the sub-control board P12 may send a no-operation command to the sub-control board P12, causing it to issue a notification urging the operation of the counting switch as a response to the abnormal total score upper limit. It is desirable that the no-operation command include, for example, information such as an abnormal total score upper limit, a total score threshold reached state, a lending device communication abnormality 1-6, counting in progress, or a VL abnormality.

Next, the LED display process is executed. This process involves setting the 7-segment LED segment table to be displayed in the number of awards display section.

Next, the sub-alarm data output process is executed. During the sub-alarm data output process, information such as whether the stop switch and max bed switch are operable and whether the door is open or closed is sent to the sub-control board.

Next, the gaming media count control notification process is executed. In the gaming media count control notification process, the gaming media count control notification information is updated.

Next, the register restore process is executed. This process restores the information saved on the stack during the register save process.

Next, execute the interrupt permission process.

<Description of Power-Off Processing Controlled by the Main Control Board P15 Applicable to This Embodiment>
If the power supply to the gaming machine P is turned off or if the power supply interruption detection signal is turned ON due to an external factor such as a power outage, power supply interruption processing is executed. If the power supply interruption detection signal is not ON, the power supply interruption processing is terminated. Note that if the voltage falls below a predetermined value, the power supply interruption detection signal is input to a predetermined input port, and if the power supply interruption detection signal is input to the predetermined input port two consecutive times during the interrupt processing, it is determined that a power interruption has occurred and the power supply interruption detection signal is turned ON. However, this is not limited to this, and the power supply interruption detection signal may be configured to be turned ON if the voltage falls below the predetermined value even once.

If it determines that the power interruption detection signal is ON, it turns OFF the output ports (0-6).

Next, execute the stack pointer save process.

Next, the power-off processing completion flag and RWM checksum data are set.

Next, execute the RWM write prohibition process.

Then it waits for a reset signal and loops in this state.

<Description of power-on processing, main loop processing, and power-off processing controlled by the game medium number control board P16 applicable to this embodiment>
When the power supply of the gaming machine is turned on, the function of the game media count control chip is set by initializing the built-in register.

Next, the RWM initialization process is performed. In the RWM initialization process, the power status flag is checked and the RWM checksum data is calculated. Depending on whether the status is normal or abnormal, the RWM initialization start address is set and the RWM is initialized. In addition, the RWM area outside the used area is also initialized by a program outside the used area. In other words, the RWM initialization range differs between normal and abnormal cases; in normal cases, the total score stored in the total score memory area is not included in the initialization range, but in abnormal cases, the total score stored in the total score memory area is also included in the initialization range.

The power status flag is checked and the RWM checksum data is calculated (checking the power status flag and calculating the RWM checksum data are sometimes collectively referred to as determining whether the RWM is abnormal). If the result is normal, the various memory areas storing the counting flag, gaming machine information notification timer A, gaming machine information notification timer B, gaming machine information notification timer C, serial number, counting serial number, counting points, accumulated counting points, loan serial number, loan point receipt results, calculation MY counter, output MY counter, main control chip ID, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, etc. are initialized (for example, 0 is stored in the various memory areas). Note that various memory areas are initialized regardless of whether the setting key switch is on or not. After the RWM initialization process, the total score clear switch is also determined to be on or not. If it is determined to be on, the total score is initialized; if it is not determined to be on, the total score is not initialized. With this configuration, whether or not to clear the total score can be determined based on the operation of the total score clear switch, preventing the total score from being cleared inadvertently.

If the RWM abnormality determination determines that an abnormality has occurred, in addition to initializing the memory areas (counting flag, gaming machine information notification timer A, gaming machine information notification timer B, gaming machine information notification timer C, serial number, counting serial number, counting points, accumulated counting points, loan serial number, loan point receipt results, calculation MY counter, output MY counter, main control chip ID, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, etc.) that were used when the RWM was determined to be normal, the memory areas that store information such as total points and role ratio monitors are also initialized (for example, 0 is stored in various memory areas). Note that initialization of various memory areas is performed regardless of whether the setting key switch is on or not.

If the RWM abnormality determination results in a normal state, a determination is made as to whether the total score clear switch is ON. However, if the RWM abnormality determination results in an abnormality, a determination is not made as to whether the total score clear switch is ON. This is because the total score is initialized by the initialization process that is executed when the results of checking the power status flag and calculating the RWM checksum data are determined to be abnormal. In other words, even if the total score clear switch is operated, the power status flag is checked and the RWM checksum data is calculated, and if an abnormality is determined, initialization based on the operation of the total score clear switch is not executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to avoid initializing the memory area that stores the total score twice, thereby shortening the processing time related to the initialization process.

Note that while RWM abnormalities are determined by checking the power status flag and calculating the RWM checksum data, either one of them may be used. Furthermore, RWM abnormalities may also be determined using other check methods.

Furthermore, if an abnormality is determined as a result of the RWM abnormality determination, a determination may be made as to whether the total score clear switch is ON after performing the RWM initialization process in the event of a power supply recovery abnormality (for example, initializing the entire RWM area of the second main control RAM (including the memory area storing the total score)). Then, the configuration may be such that a determination is made as to whether the total score clear switch is ON after performing the RWM initialization process in the event of a power supply recovery abnormality.

With this configuration, if the result of checking the power status flag and calculating the RWM checksum data indicates an abnormality (if the result of checking the power status flag indicates an abnormality, or if the result of calculating the RWM checksum data indicates an abnormality), the RWM initialization process for when the power is restored is executed, and then a determination is made as to whether the total score clear switch is ON.If the total score clear switch is ON, the memory area storing the total score will also be initialized again.While there may be overlapping initialization ranges, the total score can be reliably initialized.

Furthermore, if the RWM is determined to be normal after an abnormality has been detected and the total score clear switch is determined to be ON, the total score is initialized and then total score clear timer 1 (also called medal count clear timer 1) is saved in a specified memory area in the RWM.

Furthermore, if an abnormality is determined as a result of the RWM abnormality assessment, the RWM area containing the total score is initialized, and then total score clear timer 2 (also called medal count clear timer 2) is saved in a specified memory area in the RWM (a memory area different from total score clear timer 1).

Total score clear timer 1 is a timer that counts 60 seconds, and total score clear timer 2 is also a timer that counts 60 seconds. Total score clear timer 1 and total score clear timer 2 are decrement counters, and when the counter value reaches 0, 60 seconds have been counted. However, total score clear timer 1 and total score clear timer 2 may also be increment timers.

If a value for counting 60 seconds is stored as the value of total score clear timer 1, total score clear 1 information is sent to the main control means until the value of total score clear timer 1 reaches 0; if a value for counting 60 seconds is stored as the value of total score clear timer 2, total score clear 2 information is sent to the main control means until the value of total score clear timer 2 reaches 0.

When the main control means receives total score clear 1 information, the main control means transmits to the sub-control means, as part of the no-operation command, predetermined information based on the receipt of total score clear 1 information; and when the main control means receives total score clear 2 information, the main control means transmits to the sub-control means, as part of the no-operation command, predetermined information based on the receipt of total score clear 2 information (information different from the predetermined information based on the receipt of total score clear 1 information).

When the sub-control means receives predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 1 information, it issues a notification based on the predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 1 information; and when the sub-control means receives predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 2 information, it issues a notification based on the predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 2 information. Examples of notifications based on predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 1 information include displaying "Total score has been cleared" or "Total score has been cleared successfully" on the LCD, or outputting dedicated background music from the speaker. Examples of notifications based on predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 2 information include displaying "Power recovery abnormality" or "Total score has been cleared due to an abnormality" on the LCD, or outputting dedicated background music from the speaker.

In addition, when the sub-control means receives predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 1 information or predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 2 information, the alarm time may be until the value of total score clear timer 1 or the value of total score clear timer 2 reaches 0 (until 60 seconds have passed since setting total score clear timer 1 or total score clear timer 2), or the sub-control means may manage and alarm for any alarm time (for example, 180 seconds) after receiving predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 1 information or predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 2 information.

In this way, the gaming media count control means sets total score clear timer 1 or total score clear timer 2, allowing the sub-control means to issue a notification based on predetermined information upon receiving total score clear 1 information, or a notification based on predetermined information upon receiving total score clear 2 information. This allows the administrator to know that the total score has been cleared and what triggered the total score to be cleared, making it possible to recognize the initialization of the total score due to incorrect operation of the total score clear switch or fraud.

Also, if the total score clear switch is pressed when the power is turned on, the total score is initialized, total score clear timer 1 is set, and then the total score clear status is set to 1 (total score clear status is turned ON).

The reason why total score clear timer 1 and total score clear timer 2 are 60 seconds is to ensure that commands are sent reliably from the main control means to the sub-control means. This is because, when gaming machine P is powered on, the difference between the time it takes for the main control means to start up and the time it takes for the sub-control means to start up can be as much as 30 seconds (the sub-control means may start up 30 seconds after the main control means starts up), and even in this case, the sub-control means is able to issue a notification based on specified information based on receiving total score clear 1 information or a notification based on specified information based on receiving total score clear 2 information for 30 seconds. When power is turned on, the main control means starts up after the gaming media number control means. However, since the time difference between the gaming media number control means and the main control means starting up when power is turned on is relatively short (about 1 second), the explanation is based on the time difference between the main control means and the sub-control means starting up when power is turned on. However, if the time difference between the gaming media number control means and the main control means starting up when power is turned on is long, it is necessary to set the timer value taking this time difference into account.

In addition, instead of managing total score clear timer 1 and total score clear timer 2 as timers, it is also possible to manage them as flags, like total score clear flag 1 and total score clear flag 2. However, with flag management, an initialization process (a process of storing 0 in the memory area) is required after setting the flag (storing 1 in the memory area), whereas with timer management, the timer value automatically resets to the initial value (0) over time, making it possible to reduce program size.

The time counted by total score clear timer 1 and total score clear timer 2 is not limited to 60 seconds, and may be set to any time as long as the sub-control means can receive information from total score clear timer 1 or total score clear timer 2.

If a power outage occurs when the value of total score clear timer 1 is not 0 (when total score clear timer 1 is counting), total score clear timer 1 is initialized during the initialization process after the RWM abnormality is determined to be normal when power is restored. Total score clear timer 1 is also initialized during the initialization process after the RWM abnormality is determined to be abnormal when power is restored. In other words, if a power outage occurs while a notification based on total score clear 1 information is being issued and power is restored, the secondary control means will not issue a notification based on specified information that was received when total score clear 1 information was received.

<When the power is turned on by pressing the total score clear switch after the power is turned off during the total score clear timer 1 count 1>
If a power outage occurs when the value of total score clear timer 1 is not 0 (when total score clear timer 1 is counting) and the power is restored while the total score clear switch is operated, the total score clear timer 1 is initialized in the initialization process after the RWM abnormality is determined to be normal when the power is restored, and then the total score clear switch is ON, so the total score initialization process is performed and then total score clear timer 1 is saved. In other words, total score clear timer 1 is initialized when power is restored after a power outage, but if the total score clear switch is ON, total score clear timer 1 is set again.

By configuring it in this way, even if the total score clear timer 1 is initialized due to a power outage, the total score clear timer 1 can be saved again by turning the total score clear switch ON when the power is turned on, making it possible for the secondary control means to issue a notification based on specified information upon receiving the total score clear 1 information.

<When the power is turned on by pressing the total score clear switch after the power is turned off during the total score clear timer 1 count 2>
If a power outage occurs when the value of total score clear timer 1 is not 0 (a situation in which total score clear timer 1 is counting), and power is restored while the total score clear switch is operated, and if an abnormality is determined as a result of the RWM abnormality judgment when power is restored, the initialization process after determining an abnormality as a result of the RWM abnormality judgment when power is restored will initialize the RWM area including total score clear timer 1, and then save total score clear timer 2 without determining whether the total score clear switch is ON, even if the total score clear switch has been operated. In other words, total score clear timer 1 is initialized when power is restored after a power outage, and is configured so that total score clear timer 2 is set even if the total score clear switch is ON.

By configuring it in this way, if the power is restored while the total score clear switch is operated and an RWM abnormality is determined, the total score clear timer 2 is saved, making it possible for the secondary control means to issue a notification based on specified information in response to receiving the total score clear 2 information.

If a power outage occurs when the value of total score clear timer 2 is not 0 (when total score clear timer 2 is counting), total score clear timer 2 is initialized and then reset during the initialization process after the RWM abnormality is determined to be normal when power is restored (a value for counting 60 seconds is stored as the value of total score clear timer 2). Also, total score clear timer 2 is initialized and set during the initialization process after the RWM abnormality is determined to be abnormal when power is restored. In other words, if a power outage occurs while a notification is being issued based on specified information upon receiving total score clear 2 information, and power is restored, a notification based on specified information upon receiving total score clear 2 information can be issued. Note that if a power outage occurs when the value of total score clear timer 2 is not 0 (when total score clear timer 2 is counting), total score clear timer 2 may be reset without being initialized during the initialization process after the RWM abnormality is determined to be normal when power is restored.

<When the power is turned on by pressing the total score clear switch after the power is turned off while the total score clear timer 2 is counting 1>
If a power outage occurs when the value of total score clear timer 2 is not 0 (when total score clear timer 2 is counting), and power is restored while the total score clear switch is operated, and an abnormality is determined as a result of the RWM abnormality determination when power is restored, the initialization process after determining an abnormality as a result of the RWM abnormality determination when power is restored will initialize the RWM area including total score clear timer 2, and then save total score clear timer 2 without determining whether the total score clear switch is ON or not, even if the total score clear switch has been operated. In other words, total score clear timer 2 is initialized when power is restored after a power outage, and is configured so that total score clear timer 2 is set even if the total score clear switch is ON.

By configuring it in this way, if the power is restored while the total score clear switch is operated and an RWM abnormality is determined, the total score clear timer 2 is saved, making it possible for the secondary control means to issue a notification based on specified information in response to receiving the total score clear 2 information.

<When the power is turned off while the total score clear timer 2 is counting, and then turned on by pressing the total score clear switch 2>
If a power outage occurs when the value of total score clear timer 2 is not 0 (when total score clear timer 2 is counting), and power is restored while the total score clear switch is operated, and the RWM abnormality determination result when power is restored is determined to be normal, the initialization process after determining that the RWM abnormality result when power is restored initializes the RWM area including total score clear timer 2, and then, since the total score clear switch is ON, executes the total score initialization process, and then saves total score clear timer 1 and total score clear timer 2. In other words, total score clear timer 2 is initialized when power is restored after a power outage, but total score clear timer 1 and total score clear timer 2 are configured to be set even if the total score clear switch is ON. In addition, when total score clear timer 1 and total score clear timer 2 are set, predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 1 information and predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 2 information are sent to the sub-control board, and when the sub-control board receives predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 1 information and predetermined information based on receiving total score clear 2 information, it prioritizes issuing an alert based on the total score clear 2 information.

By configuring it in this way, if the RWM abnormality is determined to be normal when the power is restored while the total score clear switch is operated, total score clear timer 1 and total score clear timer 2 will be saved, but the secondary control means can issue a notification based on specified information upon receiving total score clear 2 information.

In addition, if a power outage occurs when the value of total score clear timer 2 is not 0 (when total score clear timer 2 is counting), and power is restored while the total score clear switch is operated, and total score clear timer 2 is not initialized during the initialization process after the RWM abnormality is determined to be normal when power is restored, the total score clear switch is ON, so total score clear timer 1 may be saved and total score clear timer 2 may also be saved again after the total score initialization process is performed, or if a power outage occurs when the value of total score clear timer 2 is not 0 (when total score clear timer 2 is counting), and power is restored while the total score clear switch is operated, and total score clear timer 2 is saved again during the initialization process after the RWM abnormality is determined to be normal when power is restored If the total score clear timer 2 is not initialized during the initialization process after determining that the RWM is normal as a result of the operation, the total score clear timer 2 may be saved again without determining whether the total score clear switch is ON even if the total score clear switch is operated. Alternatively, if a power outage occurs when the value of the total score clear timer 2 is not 0 (a situation in which the total score clear timer 2 is counting), and the power is restored while the total score clear switch is operated, and the RWM is determined to be normal as a result of the RWM abnormality when the power is restored, the total score clear timer 2 may be initialized during the initialization process without determining whether the total score clear switch is ON even if the total score clear switch is operated. In either case, it is possible to have the secondary control means issue a notification based on predetermined information that is generated when the total score clear 2 information is received.

In the above description, the main control means transmits to the sub-control means, as part of a no-operation command, predetermined information based on the receipt of total score clear 1 information and predetermined information based on the receipt of total score clear 2 information. However, this is not limited to transmitting information as part of a no-operation command, and a command corresponding to predetermined information based on the receipt of total score clear 1 information or a command corresponding to predetermined information based on the receipt of total score clear 2 information may be directly transmitted. In other words, a command corresponding to predetermined information based on the receipt of total score clear 1 information or a command corresponding to predetermined information based on the receipt of total score clear 2 information may be generated and stored in a command buffer, and when the command transmission timing arrives, a command corresponding to predetermined information based on the receipt of total score clear 1 information or a command corresponding to predetermined information based on the receipt of total score clear 2 information may be transmitted.

Next, a program outside the usage area is called and the test pattern display flag is turned ON to display a test pattern on the role ratio monitor.

Then, interrupt processing is initiated. In this implementation, the interrupt cycle of the game media count control board P16 is 1 ms.

Next, a power failure detection process is executed to determine whether a power failure has been detected. If a power failure is detected, the power failure process is executed; if a power failure is not detected, the system waits for interrupt processing.

If the power to gaming machine P is turned off or the voltage falls below a predetermined value due to an external factor such as a power outage, a power outage detection signal is input to a predetermined input port, and if the power outage detection signal is input to the predetermined input port seven consecutive times during interrupt processing, it is determined that a power outage has occurred and the power outage detection signal is turned ON. However, this is not limited to this, and the device may be configured to generate an external interrupt and turn ON the power outage detection signal if the voltage falls below the predetermined value even once.

Next, when a power outage is detected during the power outage detection process, if the power is turned on normally, the power status flag is saved as normal, and if the power is turned on abnormally, the power status flag is saved as abnormal.

Next, execute the RWM write prohibition process.

Then it enters a reset signal waiting state, and loops in this reset signal waiting state.

<Description of interval interrupt processing controlled by the game media number control board P16 applicable to this embodiment>
The interval interrupt processing (also called timer interrupt processing or interrupt processing) controlled by the game media number control board P16 will be explained with reference to FIG.

The interval interrupt process controlled by the gaming media count control board P16 is executed every 1 ms.

The interval interrupt process first executes the WDT (watchdog timer) clear and restart process. During the WDT clear and restart process, "55h" is saved in the watchdog timer command register as the WDT clear and restart word.

Next, set the check data for the medal count check (also called total score check), which will be described later. 16h is saved in register B as the check data, and 04h is saved in register C.

Here, 16h stored in register B corresponds to the maximum payout (maximum awarded number) of 15 points, and 04h stored in register C corresponds to the maximum bet number of 3 points.

Furthermore, 16h stored in register B corresponding to the maximum payout amount will be referred to as range check data 1, and 04h stored in register C corresponding to the maximum bet amount will be referred to as range check data 2.

If the maximum payout is 10 points, 11h will be stored in register B as range check data 1, so the value of range check data 1 can be thought of as maximum payout + 01h. If the maximum bet is 5 points, 06h will be stored in register C as range check data 2, so the value of range check data 2 can be thought of as maximum bet + 1h.

Next, the game medal count check process is executed. The game medal count check process will be explained based on Figure 51. Note that the game medal count check process is executed twice within the interrupt process. For convenience, the game medal count check process executed at this timing will be referred to as the first game medal count check process, and the game medal count check process executed at a different timing will be referred to as the second game medal count check process. However, the first game medal count check process and the second game medal count check process are the same module, but have different check data and execution timing.

The first medal count check process first obtains the medal count (total points). Specifically, the total points data stored in the total points storage means is saved in the HL register.

Next, in the confirmation data set process, the number of game medals acquired is saved in the IX register. Specifically, the value of the IX register is saved in the DE register, and then the value of the HL register is saved in the IX register. At this point, the total score data stored in the total score storage means is saved in the IX register. In other words, each time the game medal number check process is executed, the latest total score data is saved in the IX register. Note that the total score data stored in the total score storage area is saved in the IX register during the power-on process, so that accurate checking can be performed even immediately after power-on.

Next, in the "Number of medals played >= confirmation data?" process, the difference between the acquired number of medals and the confirmation data is determined. Specifically, the total score data stored in the IX register stored in the DE register is subtracted from the total score data stored in the total score storage means stored in the HL register. If the result is non-carry (the bit corresponding to the carry flag in the flag register is 0) (the value of the HL register is equal to or greater than the value of the DE register), the game medal number change value calculation process is executed. If the total score data stored in the IX register stored in the DE register is subtracted from the total score data stored in the total score storage means stored in the HL register and the result is not non-carry (the bit corresponding to the carry flag in the flag register is 1) (the value of the HL register is less than the value of the DE register), the values of the DE register and HL register are swapped, range check data 2 is set (04h stored in the C register is saved in the B register), and the game medal number change value calculation process is executed.

In other words, this process checks the difference between the total score data stored in the IX register during the second medal count check process and the total score data stored in the total score storage means called up during the first medal count check process.

Next, in the game medal number change value calculation process, the total score data stored in the IX register stored in the DE register is subtracted from the total score data stored in the total score storage means stored in the HL register, and the subtraction result is stored in the HL register.

Next, in the "Game medal count change value < range check data?" process, range check data 1 or range check data 2 stored in register B is subtracted from the subtraction result stored in register HL, and the subtraction result is stored in register HL. If there is a carry as a result of the subtraction (the bit corresponding to the carry flag in the flag register is 1), the first game medal count check process ends; if there is no carry as a result of the subtraction (the bit corresponding to the carry flag in the flag register is 0), 200 is stored as the timer value in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer storage area, and the first game medal count check process ends.

In other words, if range check data 1 is stored in register B (if 16h is stored), the total score data stored in register IX during the second medal count check process is smaller than or there is no difference between the total score data stored in the total score storage means called up during the first medal count check process, meaning that the number of medals has either increased or not increased or decreased between the second medal count check process and the first medal count check process.

If the number of game medals increases between the second game medal count check process and the first game medal count check process, it may be that the main control means has added the number of game medals (award points) to the game medium control means through a payout process.

When the number of game medals does not increase or decrease between the second game medal count check process and the first game medal count check process, it is possible that the main control means has not executed a score increase process through a payout process on the game media control means, and the main control means has not executed a score decrease process through a bet process on the game media control means.

For this reason, in a normal environment, the maximum value obtained by subtracting the total score saved in the second medal count check process from the total score saved in the first medal count check process is 15, the maximum payout number, and because 16 is set as range check data 1, there is no situation in which a carry occurs as a result of 16 - 15.

For this reason, if a carry occurs during the medal count change value < range check data? process, it is possible that the total score has increased due to fraudulent activity, so a timer value of 200 is stored in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer storage area.

If a timer value of 200 is stored in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer storage area, an abnormality command is sent to the sub-control means via the main control means, and an abnormality alert is issued based on the abnormality command, making it possible to notify those around the device of fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, if range check data 2 is stored in register B (if 04h is stored), the total score data stored in register IX during the second medal count check process is greater than the total score data stored in the total score storage means called during the first medal count check process, which means that the number of medals has decreased between the second medal count check process and the first medal count check process.

If the number of gaming medals decreases between the second gaming medal count check process and the first gaming medal count check process, it may be that the main control means has sent a subtraction of the number of gaming medals (inserted points) to the gaming medium control means as a result of betting processing.

Incidentally, because the DE register value and the HL register value are swapped before setting range check data 2, the game medal count change value calculation process can be executed with the same command whether range check data 1 or range check data 2 is set. In other words, when the game medal count change value calculation process subtracts the total score data stored in the IX register and stored in the DE register from the total score data stored in the total score storage means and stored in the HL register, the result is always a positive value.

For this reason, in a normal environment, the maximum value obtained by subtracting the total score saved in the second medal count check process from the total score saved in the first medal count check process is the maximum bet number of 3, and because 04h is set as range check data 2, there is no situation in which a carry occurs as a result of 4-3.

For this reason, if a carry occurs during the medal count change value < range check data? process, it is possible that the total score has decreased due to fraudulent activity, so a timer value of 200 is stored in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer storage area.

If a timer value of 200 is stored in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer storage area, an abnormality command is sent to the sub-control means via the main control means, and an abnormality alert is issued based on the abnormality command, making it possible to notify those around the device of fraudulent activity.

Next, the input port read process is executed. During the input port read process, input port 3 is read.

The input ports of the game medium count control board P16 are configured so that game medium count control data signals 1-8 can be input to input port 1, game medium count control data signals 9-16 to input port 2, and game medium count control data strobe signal, power interruption detection signal, count button signal, VL signal, and medal count clear button signal can be input to input port 3.

Input ports 1 and 2 are input ports used for parallel communication between the main control board P15 and the game media count control board P16, and are read by receiving commands from the main control board P15. Commands indicating the type of information are input to input port 1, and commands indicating the information data are input to input port 2.

Input port 3 is an input port used for serial communication with various switches, the rental unit, and the main control board P15, and the input port is read by the game media count control command reception process.

In the input port reading process, rising edge data for input port 3 is created from the previous level data for input port 3 and the current level data for input port 3.

Next, if the bit data of the power interruption detection signal input to input port 3 is 1, the value of the power interruption check counter is incremented by 1. The value of the power interruption check counter is then checked, and if the value of the power interruption check counter is 7, it is determined that a power interruption has been detected, and 1 is stored in the power interruption detection flag (the power interruption detection flag is turned ON).

Next, the VL signal is checked to confirm any abnormalities in the connection with the rental unit. First, the VL abnormality flag is set to 0 (the VL abnormality flag is cleared). Then, if the bit data input to the VL signal at input port 3 is 0, FFh is stored in the VL abnormality flag (1 is subtracted from the value of the VL abnormality flag and stored). Note that if the bit data input to the VL signal at input port 3 is 1, the connection is normal, so the next process is executed.

Next, the gaming machine information management process (gaming media count control) is executed. In the gaming machine information management process (gaming media count control), processing such as updating gaming machine information notification timer A, gaming machine information notification timer B, and/or gaming machine information notification timer C is executed. If, as a result of updating gaming machine information notification timer A, gaming machine information notification timer B, and/or gaming machine information notification timer C, it is time to notify hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, or gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine information that has reached the notification time is transmitted to the lending unit. Specific processing will be described later with reference to Figure 30.

Next, the counting control process is executed. In the counting control process, counting is executed according to the operation status of the counting switch P7. Specific processing will be described later with reference to Figure 28.

Next, the rental notification reception process is executed. In the rental notification reception process, rental processing is executed in response to the rental notification received based on the operation status of the rental unit's rental switch. In addition, a program outside the usage area is called and rental device communication error flags 2 to 6 are set depending on the communication status. Specific processing will be described later with reference to Figure 49.

Next, set the check data for the second medal count check. 51h is saved in register B as the check data, and 51h is saved in register C.

Here, 51h stored in register B corresponds to the maximum number of medals that can be lent (maximum loan points), which is 50 points, and 51h stored in register C corresponds to the maximum number of medals that can be counted (maximum count points), which is 50 points.

Next, a second medal count check process (a medal count check process executed for the second time within the same interrupt process) is executed. The only difference in the second medal count check process is the set check data; it is the same module as the first medal count check process and executes the same commands.

The first game medal count check process checks the increase or decrease in the total score between the second game medal count check process and the first game medal count check process, and the second game medal count check process checks the increase or decrease in the total score between the first game medal count check process and the second game medal count check process.

In other words, the first game medal count check process checks whether the increase/decrease value is normal, taking into account the number of bets and payouts based on the command received from the main control means; the second game medal count check process checks whether the increase/decrease value is normal, taking into account the number of counted medals based on the command sent to the lending unit and the number of lending medals received from the lending unit.

Next, the process for managing the press time of count switch P7 (hereinafter also referred to as the count execution flag set process) will be explained using Figure 39.

The counting execution flag setting process is a process that sets a flag to indicate whether a short press operation or a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7 when the player is operating (pressing) the counting switch P7 or when the player has released (not pressed) the counting switch P7. The counting execution flag setting process, which employs processing related to the counting button state described below, is not required.

First, "Counting switch ON?" determines whether the counting switch P7 has been operated. As described above, the method for determining whether the counting switch P7 has been operated is to store the input data (ON or OFF) of the counting switch P7 input to input port 3 by the interrupt processing of the gaming medium count control board P16 in a certain memory area (also referred to as the input port 3 level data memory area) in the RWM area of the gaming medium count control board P16 before executing the counting execution flag set processing. If the input data of the counting switch P7 stored in this memory area is a value indicating ON, a YES determination is made, and if the input data of the counting switch P7 stored in this memory area is a value indicating OFF, a NO determination is made.

"Counting execution timer (also called "counting button timer") = 0?" determines whether the timer value measuring the time the counting switch P7 is operated is "0." One method for measuring the time the counting switch P7 is operated is, for example, to have a counting execution timer memory area (_TM_CAL_ACT) in the RWM area of the game media count control board P16 that measures the time the counting switch P7 is operated. If the value stored in this memory area is "0," a YES result is obtained, and if the value stored in this memory area is a value other than "0" (for example, "200" or "500"), a NO result is obtained. The counting execution timer memory area is a memory area that can store 2 bytes of data (0 to 65535), allowing values from "0" to "500" to be stored.

"Counting execution flag ≠ 0?" determines whether the counting execution flag is "0." Here, the counting execution flag is a flag that manages whether a short press operation or a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. For example, a counting execution flag storage area (_FL_CAL_ACT) that manages the counting execution flag is provided. When the counting execution flag storage area is "0" (when the counting execution flag is 0), it indicates that it has not yet been determined whether a short press operation or a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. When the counting execution flag storage area is "1" (when the counting execution flag is 1), it indicates that it has been determined that a short press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. When the counting execution flag storage area is "2" (when the counting execution flag is 2), it indicates that it has been determined that a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7.

Therefore, "Counting execution flag ≠ 0?" is judged as YES if a value other than "0" is stored in the counting execution flag storage area (specifically, "1" or "2" in the counting execution flag storage area), and is judged as NO if "0" is stored in the counting execution flag storage area.

"Save counting execution flag = 1" is a process that saves "1" in the counting execution flag storage area. In other words, it is a process that determines that a short press operation has been accepted as an operation of the counting switch P7. For example, if there is no operation of the counting switch P7, the counting execution timer storage area is "200", and "0" is stored in the counting execution flag storage area, "1" is saved in the counting execution flag storage area.

"Counting execution timer clear" is a process that resets the counting execution timer storage area to its initial value (e.g., "0"). As is clear from Figure 39, "Counting execution timer clear" is executed when the counting switch P7 is not operated, and is executed not only when "1" is stored in the counting execution flag storage area, but also when "1" is not stored in the counting execution flag storage area (e.g., when "1" or "2" is already stored in the counting execution flag storage area). In other words, by resetting the counting execution timer storage area to its initial value when the counting switch P7 is not operated, the value in the counting execution timer storage area can be updated from the initial value if the counting switch P7 is operated again thereafter.

"Counting execution timer ≥ 500" determines whether the timer value measuring the time that counting switch P7 is operated is 500 or greater (the time that counting switch P7 is operated is 500 ms or greater). For example, if the value in the counting execution timer storage area is 500, it determines YES, and if the value in the counting execution timer storage area is less than 500 (specifically, if the value in the counting execution timer storage area is between 0 and 499), it determines NO.

"Counting execution timer +1" is a process that adds "1" to the timer value measuring the time that counting switch P7 is operated (updating the time that counting switch P7 is operated). As is clear from Figure 39, if "Counting execution timer ≥ 500" returns YES, "Counting execution timer +1" is not executed. In other words, once the value in the counting execution timer memory area reaches "500," the value in the counting execution timer memory area remains at "500," allowing the value in the counting execution timer memory area to be kept within the range "0 to 500." In other words, the time that counting switch P7 is operated will not be longer than 500 ms (the value in the counting execution timer memory area will not be greater than 500), so the value stored in the counting execution timer memory area will not overflow. With this configuration, for example, when the maximum value that can be stored in the counting execution timer storage area is "65535", the value in the counting execution timer storage area will become "0" by executing "Counting execution timer +1". If the counting switch P7 continues to be operated thereafter, the value in the counting execution timer storage area will be updated, and if the counting switch P7 is released when the value in the counting execution timer storage area is less than "500", it is possible to prevent "1" from being stored in the counting execution flag storage area (which would result in the counting switch P7 being determined to have been a short press).

"Save counting execution timer" is a process that saves the value updated by "counting execution timer + 1" in the counting execution timer storage area. For example, if the value in the counting execution timer storage area is "0," the value in the counting execution timer storage area becomes "1," and if the value in the counting execution timer storage area is "499," the value in the counting execution timer storage area becomes "500."

"Counting execution flag = save 2" is a process that saves "2" in the counting execution flag storage area. In other words, it is a process that determines that a long press operation has been accepted as an operation of the counting switch P7. Specifically, if it is determined that the timer value measuring the time that the counting switch P7 has been operated is "500" or greater (the time that the counting switch P7 has been operated is 500 ms or greater), "2" is saved in the counting execution flag storage area.

As described above, the counting execution flag setting process determines whether the counting switch P7 has been operated as a short press or a long press, and measures the operation time of the counting switch P7.

Next, the system returns to the interrupt process and executes the gaming media count control command reception process. In the gaming media count control command reception process, it executes the reception process for commands from the rental unit and main control board P15. If a gaming machine fraud command is received from the rental unit, it calls a program outside the usage area and accumulates and saves the fraud information.

In addition, when a reel operation status command is received from the main control board P15, a program outside the operating area is called to save the reel operation status.

Also, when a ratio display command is received from the main control board P15, a program outside the usage area is called and the role ratio monitor type number is saved.

In addition, when a start lever acceptance command is received from the main control board P15, the program in the usage area stores the investment point information used in the game information for the hall control and fraud monitoring information in the data area (_WK_MDL_IN) of the usage area, and calls a program outside the usage area to store investment point information for display on the role ratio monitor in the data area (_SN_MDL_IN) outside the usage area. Note that the investment point information used in the hall control and fraud monitoring information is stored as "3" (if the investment points in the previous game were 3 points; if the investment points in the previous game were 2 points, it becomes "2") when a replay is activated (if a replay was won in the previous game), and the investment point information for display on the role ratio monitor is stored as "0" when a replay is activated (if a replay was won in the previous game).

Furthermore, when a command to stop all reels is received from the main control board P15, the program in the usage area stores the award point information used in the game information for the hall control and fraud monitoring information in the data area (_WK_MDL_OUT) of the usage area, and calls a program outside the usage area to store the award point information for display on the role ratio monitor in the data area (_SN_MDL_OUT) outside the usage area. Note that the award point information used in the hall control and fraud monitoring information is stored as "3" (if the award point for the previous game was 3 points; if the award point for the previous game was 2 points, it becomes "2") when replay is activated (if a replay was won in the previous game), and the award point information for display on the role ratio monitor is stored as "0" when replay is activated (if a replay was won in the previous game).

Note that (_SN_MDL_OUT), a data area outside the usage area that stores the award point information for display on the award ratio monitor, is information necessary for calculating the cumulative instructed feature ratio, consecutive feature ratio for the most recent 6,000 games, feature ratio for the most recent 6,000 games, cumulative consecutive feature ratio, and cumulative feature ratio. For example, by adding the information stored in (_SN_MDL_OUT), which is the award point information for the game, to a memory area capable of storing the cumulative number of awards, a memory area capable of storing the cumulative number of awards when consecutive features are activated, and a memory area capable of storing the cumulative number of awards when features are activated, it is possible to update the memory area capable of storing the cumulative number of awards, the memory area capable of storing the cumulative number of awards when consecutive features are activated, and the memory area capable of storing the cumulative number of awards when features are activated.

Also, if Bit 3 of Gaming Machine Illegal 2 is set to "1" when a command to stop all reels is received from the main control board P15 (if the total score clear switch was operated when the power was turned on, the total score was cleared, and the total score clear status is ON), a program outside the usage area is called and Bit 3 of Gaming Machine Illegal 2 is set to "0" (cleared).

In addition, when a command to stop all reels is received from the main control board P15, calculations are performed for game performance information and role ratio monitoring.

Furthermore, when a slot request command is received from the main control board P15, the controller determines whether the value of the second control command is "0." If it is determined to be "0," the controller executes abnormal command reception processing. If it is determined not to be "0," the controller determines whether it exceeds "3" ("4" or greater). If it is determined that the value of the second control command exceeds "3," the controller executes abnormal command reception processing. If it is determined not to be "3" ("3" or less"), the controller determines whether the VL abnormal flag is "0." If it is determined that the VL abnormal flag is not "0," the controller executes unacceptable setting processing. If it is determined that the VL abnormal flag is "0," the controller determines whether the result of subtracting the number of slot requests from the total score is a negative value (whether the carry flag is 1). If it is determined that the result of subtracting the number of slot requests from the total score is a negative value, the controller executes unacceptable setting processing. If it is determined that the result of subtracting the number of slot requests from the total score is not a negative value, the controller stores the value obtained by subtracting the number of slot requests from the total score as the total score. The controller then stores the number of slot requests in the slot point memory area for transmitting hole control and fraud monitoring information, and then sets the command to be sent to the main control board P15. The unacceptable setting process is a process of setting a value indicating an abnormality as data for the second control command sent to the main control board P15 (for example, setting the most significant bit of the data for the number of input requests received to "1"). The abnormal command reception process is a process of setting a value indicating a communication abnormality (for example, FFh) as the type of first control command sent to the main control board P15, and a value indicating an abnormality (for example, FFh) as data for the second control command. After setting the commands, the commands are sent to the main control board P15 as needed.

In addition, when a settlement request command is received from the main control board P15, it determines whether the value of the second control command is "0", and if it is determined to be "0", it executes abnormal command reception processing, and if it is determined to not be "0", it determines whether it exceeds "3" ("4" or greater). If it is determined that the value of the second control command exceeds "3", it executes abnormal command reception processing, and if it is determined that it does not exceed "3" ("3" or less") it determines whether the VL abnormal flag is not "0". If it is determined that the VL abnormal flag is not "0", it executes unacceptable setting processing, and if it is determined that the VL abnormal flag is "0", it determines whether the value obtained by adding the settlement number to the current total score exceeds the total score upper limit (16383), and if it is determined that the value obtained by adding the settlement number to the current total score exceeds the total score upper limit, it executes unacceptable setting processing, and if it is determined that the value obtained by adding the settlement number to the current total score does not exceed the total score upper limit, it stores the value obtained by adding the settlement number to the current total score as the total score. The controller then stores the value obtained by subtracting the number of settlement requests from the value in the input point memory area for transmitting hall control and fraud monitoring information, and then sets a command to be sent to the main control board P15. The unacceptable setting process is a process of setting a value indicating an abnormality as data for the second control command to be sent to the main control board P15 (for example, setting the most significant bit of the received number of settlement requests data to "1"). The abnormal command reception process is a process of setting a value indicating a communication abnormality (for example, FFh) as the type of first control command to be sent to the main control board P15, and a value indicating an abnormality (for example, FFh) as data for the second control command. After setting the commands, the controller sends commands to the main control board P15 as needed.

When it is determined that the VL abnormality flag is "0", it is determined whether the value obtained by adding the settlement number to the current total score exceeds the total score upper limit (16383). However, if the total score reaches the upper limit warning value, the settlement switch P6 will not be accepted, and under normal circumstances the total score will not exceed the upper limit due to the settlement process. Therefore, after determining that the VL abnormality flag is "0", it is possible to execute a process to store the value obtained by subtracting the settlement request number from the value of the input point memory area for sending hole control and fraud monitoring information, without determining whether the value obtained by adding the settlement number to the current total score exceeds the total score upper limit (16383).

Furthermore, when a payout request command is received from the main control board P15, it determines whether the value of the second control command is not "1." If it determines that the value is not "1," it executes an abnormal command reception process. If it determines that the value is "1," it determines whether the VL abnormal flag is not "0." If it determines that the VL abnormal flag is not "0," it executes an unacceptable setting process. If it determines that the VL abnormal flag is "0," it determines whether the total score is at the upper limit. If it determines that the total score is at the upper limit, it executes an unacceptable setting process. If it determines that the total score is not at the upper limit, it adds "1" to the current total score and stores the result as the total score. Then, after updating the value in the awarded point memory area for transmitting hole control and fraud monitoring information, it sets a command to be sent to the main control board P15. The unacceptable setting process is a process of setting a value indicating an abnormality in the data of the second control command to be sent to the main control board P15 (for example, a process of setting the most significant bit of the data for the number of received payout requests to "1"). Additionally, the abnormal command reception process is a process of setting a value indicating a communication abnormality (e.g., FFh) as the type of the first control command to be sent to the main control board P15, and setting a value indicating an abnormality (e.g., FFh) as the data for the second control command. After the commands are set, they are sent to the main control board P15 as needed.

When it is determined that the VL abnormality flag is "0", it is determined whether the total score is at the upper limit. However, if the total score reaches the upper limit warning value, the start switch P3 and bet switch will not be accepted. Under normal circumstances, the total score will not exceed the upper limit due to the payout process. Therefore, after determining that the VL abnormality flag is "0", it is possible to execute a process in which the current total score is added by "1" and the value is stored as the total score, without determining whether the total score is at the upper limit.

The game media count control command reception process may be performed by reception interrupt processing rather than by timer interrupt processing. The reception interrupt processing is executed when the main control means sends a command and the game media count control means receives the command, and is executed with priority over the timer interrupt.

Next, status control processing is performed. The status control processing includes determining whether the VL abnormality flag, which is set when the VL signal is OFF, is ON (VL abnormality flag is "FFh"), and whether the serial number abnormality flag, which is set when the serial numbers are not consecutive, is ON. In other words, the VL abnormality flag is ON when the gaming machine P and the rental unit are not connected. When the gaming machine P and the rental unit are not connected, this corresponds to a situation where the gaming machine P is powered on and running but the rental unit is not powered on, or a situation where an abnormality has occurred in the communication between the gaming machine P and the rental unit.

In addition, if the value stored in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer storage area is not 0, a control status signal is set, causing the main control means to execute a notification process regarding the out-of-range increase/decrease timer being exceeded.

Next, the LED display process is executed. During the LED display process, display control of the gaming media count display section P9 is executed.

Next, the ratio control process is executed. During the ratio control process, programs outside the usage area are called to update various counters used to calculate the display contents of the role ratio monitor, and to display the role ratio monitor.

Next, the timer management process is executed. The timer management process calls a program outside the usage area to update loan notification reception timer 1 and loan notification reception timer 2. Loan notification reception timer 1 and loan notification reception timer 2 are used to determine communication abnormalities.

Next, execute the interrupt permission process.

<Description of a method for coordinating each board when power is turned off and when power is turned on, which is applicable to this embodiment>
In the game described in this embodiment, when a power outage occurs, the main control board P15 determines whether or not the power has been cut off using two interrupts, and the game media count control board P16 determines whether or not the power has been cut off using seven interrupts. In other words, the main control board P15 determines whether or not the power has been cut off 4.47 ms (2.235 ms x 2) after the voltage falls below a predetermined value, and the game media count control board P16 determines whether or not the power has been cut off 7 ms (1 ms x 7) after the voltage falls below the predetermined value.

As a result, if a power outage occurs, the main control board P15 can execute the power outage processing before the gaming media count control board P16, so the gaming media count control board P16 can receive commands from the main control board P15 even when a power outage occurs.

Also, when the power is turned on, the main control board P15 activates security mode for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2883.54 ms) and then activates user mode, while the game media count control board P16 activates user mode without activating security mode. Alternatively, the game media count control board P16 activates security mode for a period of time shorter than the predetermined period of time (e.g., 500 ms) and then activates user mode. User mode is a mode in which games-related programs are executed, and the main control board P15 and game media count control board P16 first perform power-on processing.

As a result, when the power is turned on, the game media count control board P16 can start up before the main control board P15, allowing the game media count control board P16 to receive commands from the main control board P15.

Furthermore, if the system is configured to execute power-off processing via an external interrupt after a power outage is detected, power-off processing will be executed even in situations where the voltage drops to a predetermined value for only a moment (a so-called momentary power outage). In this case, if the WDT (watchdog timer) set during the power-off processing is not cleared after the power-off processing is executed, a reset signal will be output, and the main control board P15 will activate security mode for a predetermined period (e.g., 2883.54 ms) before executing power-on processing, and the gaming media count control board P16 will execute power-on processing without activating security mode. As a result, even if power-off processing is executed due to a momentary power outage, the gaming media count control board P16 can start up before the main control board P15, allowing the gaming media count control board P16 to receive commands from the main control board P15.

For example, if the total score stored in the total score storage means is 100 points and a power outage occurs just before the gaming machine P executes the payout process of 15 points, causing the power outage process to be executed, and the total score clear switch is pressed when the gaming machine P is powered on, the gaming media count control board P16 will start up first, initializing the total score managed by the gaming media count control board P16 (setting it to 0 points), and then the main control board P15 will start up, adding 15 points to the total score.

In other words, the absolute value of the difference between the time from when the gaming machine P is powered on until the gaming media count control board P16 activates the user mode and the time from when the gaming machine P is powered on until the main control board P15 activates the user mode is configured to be longer than the execution time (the time from the start of the payout process to the end of the payout process) for the maximum payout number (15 points in this embodiment).

This configuration prevents the total points from being cleared in the middle of a payout process when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs just before the start of the payout process, allowing for accurate management of the number of gaming media.

In addition, the absolute value of the difference between the time from when the gaming machine P is powered on until the gaming media count control board P16 activates the user mode and the time from when the gaming machine P is powered on until the main control board P15 activates the user mode is configured to be longer than the time from when the final stop operation (the third stop operation in this embodiment) is accepted to when the maximum number of slides (four slides in this embodiment (maximum slide time is 190 ms)) is reached and the payout process for the maximum number of payouts (15 points in this embodiment) is completed.

This configuration prevents the total points from being cleared in the middle of the payout process when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs immediately after the final stop operation is received, allowing for accurate management of the number of gaming media.

<Explanation of gameplay using advantageous zones applicable to this embodiment>
In this embodiment, the specified number of coins required to start a game is only 3. In other words, a game cannot be started with anything other than 3 coins, and even when a bonus is activated, a game can only be started with 3 coins.

In this embodiment, the active line consists of one line: the bottom row of the left reel P18L, the middle row of the center reel P18C, and the bottom row of the right reel P18R. Hereinafter, when a symbol combination stops on an active line, it will be simply referred to as "the symbol combination stopping."

In this embodiment, there are 10 types of symbols. They are called Red Seven, Blue Seven, Bar, Gold Bar, Blank, Cherry, Watermelon, Bell A, Bell B, and Replay. Please note that the names and types of symbols are merely examples and may be changed without any problems.

The reel arrangement of this embodiment will be explained using Figure 4. As shown in Figure 4, each reel has 20 symbols, and is equipped with a first reel (left reel P18L), a second reel (center reel P18C), and a third reel (right reel P18R).

The symbol combinations in this embodiment are shown in Figures 5 to 9. The "Winning Symbol, Activation Symbol, and Pattern Symbol Name" items in the figures indicate the names of the condition devices corresponding to the symbol combinations. Additionally, the "Specified Number and Game Status" items indicate the bonus awarded when a symbol combination stops for each specified number. If "Type 1 BB" is written in the "Specified Number and Game Status" item, this indicates that a Type 1 BB will be awarded when the symbol combination stops; if "Replay" is written, this indicates that a replay will be awarded when the symbol combination stops; if a number is written, this indicates the number of coins to be paid out when the symbol combination stops; and if "-" is written, this indicates that the symbol combination will not stop in the corresponding game status.

In this embodiment, the bonus is equipped with a Type 1 BB, and the termination condition is the awarding of more than 11 points of gaming media. This Type 1 BB is also a type in which RB operates continuously, and RB ends when either two wins or two games are met. Once the RB termination condition is met, RB will automatically operate until the Type 1 BB termination condition (awarding of more than 11 points of gaming media) is met.

As shown in Figure 5, there are eight possible combinations of Type 1 BB symbols, and the draw rate (probability of symbols related to the symbol combination stopping) for Type 1 BB symbol combinations on each reel is not 100%, so to display a Type 1 BB symbol combination, it is necessary to carefully press each reel.

In this embodiment, the RT transition begins in non-RT (also referred to as "not inside Type 1 BB"). If a Type 1 BB is won during non-RT and the Type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop, the next game (which may be the end of that game) transitions to RT1 (also referred to as "inside Type 1 BB"). If a Type 1 BB symbol combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and Type 1 BB is activated (also referred to as "in Type 1 BB") from the next game. When Type 1 BB activation ends, the next game transitions to non-RT. Furthermore, since the setting change starts from non-RT, if the setting change device is activated during RT1 or Type 1 BB activation, non-RT is set when the setting change device's operation ends. Note that in the event of a power outage in which the setting change device is not activated (sometimes referred to as a normal power outage), the RT state and Type 1 BB activation state are not cleared, and therefore, when power is restored, the state before the power outage is resumed. Specifically, if a power outage occurs during Type 1 BB and then power is restored, the Type 1 BB operating state will be Type 1 BB and RT1, and if a power outage occurs while the power is restored, the RT state will be RT1.

Here, RT is an abbreviation for replay time, and refers to a state in which the probability of winning a replay can be different for each of multiple RTs. For example, it is possible to make the probability of winning a replay in RT1 different from the probability of winning a replay in RT2. Furthermore, making the probability of winning a replay different may mean that the probability of winning a replay as a whole is different, or that the probability of winning a certain replay is different while the probability of winning the replay as a whole remains the same. Triggers for transitioning to RT can be set when a predetermined symbol combination stops, when a bonus is won (when the bonus condition device is activated), when a predetermined number of plays have been played after the bonus has ended, etc., and these can be combined as appropriate.

The conditional devices in this embodiment are explained in Figure 10. In Figure 10, the "Winning Replay" item lists numbers corresponding to winning numbers. The "Conditional Device" item lists the conditional devices that will be activated. The "Common Name" item lists the simple names of the conditional devices that will be activated. For example, the common name corresponding to the Replay-H conditional device is "Right Push: Strong - Battle Eye," indicating that the Strong Battle Eye will stop when the right reel P18R is stopped for the first time. The common name corresponding to the Winning-A1 conditional device is "Push Order Bell Group A 123," indicating that the operation mode of the left reel P18L stopping first, the center reel P18C stopping second, and the right reel P18R stopping third is the correct operation mode (in this case, the operation mode that stops the symbol combination of Winning 52 (a prize with a higher payout number than Winnings 01-02, 09, and 29-31)). The "Components" item lists the symbol combinations corresponding to the conditional devices. For example, if the Replay-A condition device is activated (a win), it is possible to display Replay 01 or Replay 02. Note that a "0" in the "Winning Replay" section corresponds to a loss.

The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during a non-Type 1 BB in this embodiment will be explained using Figures 11 to 13. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during a non-Type 1 BB in this embodiment are: Type 1 BB, Replay -A, Replay -B, Replay -C (+Type 1 BB), Replay -D (+Type 1 BB), Replay -E (+Type 1 BB), Replay -F (+Type 1 BB), Replay -G (+Type 1 BB), Replay -H (+Type 1 BB), Replay -I (+Type 1 BB), Replay -J (+Type 1 BB), Winning -A1, Winning -A2, Winning -A3, Winning -A4, Winning -A5, Winning The prizes are either -A6, Winner -B1, Winner -B2, Winner -B3, Winner -B4, Winner -B5, Winner -B6, Winner -C1, Winner -C2, Winner -C3, Winner -C4, Winner -C5, Winner -C6, Winner -D (+1 type BB), Winner -E (+1 type BB), Winner -F (+1 type BB), Winner -G (+1 type BB), Winner -H (+1 type BB), Winner -I (+1 type BB), Winner -J (+1 type BB), Winner -K (+1 type BB), and there are no losing prizes.

The above-mentioned notation "Replay -C (+Type 1 BB)" indicates that Replay -C and Type 1 BB are won simultaneously, which corresponds to the fact that the names "Bonus Condition Device" and "Winning Replay" are both listed in Figures 11, 12, and 13. The "Internal Lottery" item in Figures 11, 12, and 13 indicates whether or not an internal lottery is applicable for each game state, with "○" indicating that an internal lottery is applicable and "×" indicating that an internal lottery is not applicable. The "Advantageous Zone Transition" item in Figures 11, 12, and 13 indicates whether or not an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed for each game state, with "○" indicating that an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed and "×" indicating that an advantageous zone transition lottery is not executed. In this embodiment, if an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, there is a 100% chance of winning and transitioning to the advantageous zone. Additionally, the "R1" to "R6" items in Figures 11, 12, and 13 indicate settings 1 to 6, respectively, and indicate the number of winning positions for the internal lottery corresponding to the setting value, with 65,536 positions allocated for each gaming state.

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means within Type 1 BB are either Replay-A, Replay-B, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K; there are no losing results.

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during Type 1 BB are either Win -K, Win -L, or Loss.

In this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone are winning any of the following: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K; winning Replay-A or Replay-B will not result in transition to the advantageous zone. That is, if you win any of the following in the normal zone: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, or Win-K, you will be in the advantageous zone from the next play.

In this embodiment, if any of the following is won during the normal zone: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K, the player will always move to the advantageous zone. That is, if you win any of the following in the normal zone: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, or Win-K, you will be in the advantageous zone from the next play.

In this embodiment, since there are no misses in RT1 (within Type 1 BB), (either a replay role or a winning role is guaranteed to be a winning combination), once the game transitions to RT1, it is possible to stop the BB symbol combination with some of the operation modes when the push order bell group C (winning role-C1 to C6) is won. For example, a part of the push order bell group C when winning role-C1 is won refers to some of the eye-pressing positions of the center reel P18C or the first stop of the right reel P18R. Furthermore, when winning role-C1 is won in the advantageous zone, the correct push order (in this case, "1, 2, 3") is displayed on the image display device, and the winning role 38 stops, preventing the BB symbol combination from stopping. This configuration allows the user to maintain RT1 by being notified of operation modes that prevent the BB symbol combination from stopping. Alternatively, the number of losing symbols during RT1 may be set to 4 (because the minimum winning probability designed is 1/17,500 or greater), and the BB symbol combination may not stop for other replay or winning symbols, so that the BB symbol combination stops only when there is a loss. Note that the "1, 2, 3" displayed on the image display device indicates that "1" corresponds to the left stop switch P4L, "2" corresponds to the middle stop switch P4C, and "3" corresponds to the right stop switch P4R. The "1, 2, 3" displayed on the image display device indicates that the correct pressing order is to press the left stop switch P4L for the first stop, the middle stop switch P4C for the second stop, and the right stop switch P4R for the third stop.

In this embodiment, the game state (also referred to as the main game state) managed by the main control means in the advantageous zone comprises the general advantageous zone state (also referred to as the normal state), the chance zone (also referred to as the CZ), and the AT, with transitions occurring from the general advantageous zone state to the CZ, from the CZ to the AT, and from the AT to the general advantageous zone state or the CZ. It should be noted that there are also cases where a transition occurs from the general advantageous zone state (also referred to as the normal state), or the CZ, or the AT to the normal zone. Furthermore, the game state managed by the main control means in the normal zone is the general normal zone state only, and the game state does not transition until a transition occurs to the advantageous zone. The game state flags managed by the main control means in the general advantageous zone state and the general normal zone state may be the same or different.

The normal state is when the internal lottery results in one of the winning numbers - A1 to - C6, and the advantageous winning button sequence is not announced.

CZ is a state that is entered when the internal lottery result under normal circumstances is either WIN-D through WIN-H, and during the CZ, the transition to AT is determined by the results of the internal lottery during the CZ or the lottery at the start of the CZ.

AT is the state you enter when you win the AT lottery during the CZ, and is the state that notifies you of the advantageous operation mode (winning button sequence) when you win any of WIN-A1 to WIN-C6.

In this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the normal zone (conditions for forcing the end of the advantageous zone) are when the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3,000 plays), when MY (the difference in number of coins) in the advantageous zone exceeds a specific value (e.g., 2,400), when initialization processing is performed based on a setting change, and when the RAM clear switch is activated. The end conditions of the AT and the end conditions of the advantageous zone do not coincide. However, some of the end conditions of the AT (e.g., in a specification where the end condition is 300 plays after entering the AT, when the number of plays reaches 300 (in this case, an ending effect indicating the end of the AT is played) or when the number of winning coins exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 2,300 coins)) may also be used as the end conditions of the advantageous zone. Furthermore, a transition to the normal zone may also occur when a CZ is won in the advantageous zone. In this case, whether or not to end the advantageous zone is determined based on the status of the advantageous zone when a CZ is won in the advantageous zone. Note that the conditions for ending the advantageous zone do not have to include the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaching a predetermined number. In particular, in gaming machines in this embodiment that do not use actual medals (sometimes referred to as "medalless gaming machines"), the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaching a predetermined number is not a condition for ending the advantageous zone (the number of plays in the advantageous zone is unlimited).

In addition, when the AT ends, a message is displayed on the LCD or other display device saying, "Be careful not to get addicted. Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation" (a so-called addiction prevention message) to prevent players from becoming addicted to the games.

The medal-less gaming machine in this embodiment is also equipped with a function (hereinafter referred to as the "stop function") that stops play when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins (when the total difference exceeds 19,000). Note that the total score storage means has a storage limit of 16,383, so this limit cannot be reached unless the total score is transferred to the lending unit via a counting process along the way.

The difference here is the cumulative value obtained by subtracting the number of coins inserted from the number of coins paid out (awarded) in all play periods (each play) since the power was turned on, and represents the number of coins won in one day of play.

For this reason, the system is equipped with a favorable zone MY counter that counts only the difference number within the favorable zone, or a difference number counter (also called a "stop counter") that counts the difference number in all game zones, separate from the favorable zone difference number counter.

The difference counter is cleared to 0 when the power is turned on (including if there is an RWM error or a setting change), and all information related to the difference counter calculation is initialized.

The cutoff process and difference counter will be discussed in more detail later.

The method for calculating MY in advantageous zones will be explained below. The main control board P15 is equipped with an advantageous zone MY counter as a memory area. The memory area of the advantageous zone MY counter is composed of a 2-byte memory area with consecutive addresses in the first main control RAM. Specifically, it is composed of a memory area that stores the value of the lower byte and a memory area that stores the value of the upper byte. In the following explanation, the memory area of the advantageous zone MY counter will simply be referred to as the advantageous zone MY counter. Furthermore, the advantageous zone MY counter is set to an initial value of "0" when entering an advantageous zone, and increases or decreases depending on the results of the game. In the following explanation, the advantageous zone will be considered to end when the value of the advantageous zone MY counter exceeds 2400.

The advantageous zone MY counter is an increment counter, and in a gaming machine where the value of the advantageous zone MY counter is "0", if the inserted points are "3" points and the awarded points are "10" points, the value of the advantageous zone MY counter will be "10-3", which becomes "7".

In addition, since the advantageous zone MY counter counts the maximum increase during an advantageous zone, if the value of the advantageous zone MY counter is "0" and the investment points are "3" and the awarded points are "0", the value of the advantageous zone MY counter will be "0-3", but if the result of the calculation is a negative value, it will be corrected to "0" and will become "0". This is because the carry flag becomes "1" when a carry is carried over as a result of the calculation, and an instruction is used to set the carry flag to "0" when the carry flag is "1".

In addition, if a replay is won as a result of a game, the advantageous zone MY counter update process is not executed, so the value of the advantageous zone MY counter for the game in which the replay is won will not increase or decrease.

The CZ is determined by lottery when one of the winning combinations, Win-D through Win-H (hereinafter also referred to as a rare combination), is won, and generally, the less likely the internal lottery result is to win, the more likely it is that a CZ will be won. In this embodiment, the order of likelihood of winning a CZ is Win-G > Win-E > Win-H > Win-F > Win-D.

In this embodiment, the CZ does not occur immediately after a win. Rather, after winning the CZ, the CZ begins when the player transitions from the advantageous zone to the normal zone and then back to the advantageous zone. (In other words, the CZ always begins when the player transitions to the advantageous zone in RT1 (transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone can also be considered a condition for the CZ to occur). If the player wins the CZ in the current advantageous zone, the player is deliberately transitioned to the normal zone and the next advantageous zone begins, which causes the CZ to occur.) This eliminates the problem of not being able to win balls when the player wins the AT from the CZ because there are few plays remaining in the advantageous zone. This is particularly effective when the net increase in coins (expected number of coins won per play, also known as the slope value) is small. For example, if the net increase is 2 coins, the maximum number of coins that can be won in the advantageous zone is approximately 2,400, so it would take 1,200 plays to win 2,400 coins. However, the AT does not always run in the advantageous zone, and because the game transitions between various game states such as the normal state and CZ described above, there are often only a few plays remaining in the advantageous zone when the AT starts (for example, 500 plays). In this case, even if 500 plays are played, the net increase is only 2 coins, so the game ends with only around 1,000 coins won, making it difficult to meet the user's expectations of winning. Therefore, by ending the advantageous zone once with a CZ win and starting the CZ when moving to a new advantageous zone, even if the CZ has 100 plays, there are 1,400 plays remaining in the advantageous zone, creating the user's expectation of winning 2,400 coins.

The probability of winning the CZ from the second time onwards within the same advantageous zone may also be varied depending on the number of coins won since the advantageous zone began (cumulative number of coins paid out - cumulative number of coins inserted). For example, if a CZ is started when the advantageous zone is entered and the AT is won, one possible mode is to vary the probability of winning the CZ within the remaining advantageous zone after the AT ends depending on whether 50 coins are won in the AT or 1000 coins are won. In this case, the probability of winning the CZ after winning 50 coins may be higher or lower than the probability of winning the CZ after winning 1000 coins.

If the probability of winning a CZ after winning 50 coins is made higher than the probability of winning a CZ after winning 1,000 coins, it will be easier to award the next CZ to users who did not win much in the AT, allowing them to play while maintaining a sense of anticipation.

If the probability of winning the CZ after winning 50 coins is made lower than the probability of winning the CZ after winning 1000 coins, since there is little remaining advantageous period after winning 1000 coins (because it is close to the condition for the advantageous period to end, which is 3000 plays or winning 2400 coins), even if the CZ probability is made high, the payout design will not significantly increase gambling spirit, and it can also create a new sense of expectation for the user.

If a CZ is won, a congratulatory effect is displayed in which text such as "Success" or "Victory" is displayed on the game in which the CZ was won, or when a predetermined number of games have been played (this can be set arbitrarily depending on the specifications of the gaming machine P). This allows the user to understand that some kind of benefit has been granted, allowing them to intuitively understand the progress of the game. From the next game onwards, a message stating "CZ Preparation" is displayed using an image display device or a lit lamp, creating a sense of anticipation for the CZ. When a CZ winning game is in a favorable zone, CZ Preparation corresponds to the state from the end of the favorable zone until the transition to the favorable zone again in the subsequent normal zone. Because "CZ Preparation" is internally a normal zone, it is a disadvantageous state for users who do not perform any AT draws or AT top-ups. However, by lowering the payout rate during CZ preparation compared to the AT state, balls can be allocated to the AT, creating a wave of ball payouts. Additionally, while the CZ is being prepared, a sense of anticipation for the CZ is created, making it less likely that users will feel they have lost out even if the payout rate is reduced.

In addition, while the advantageous zone ends with the next play after the CZ is won, a predetermined number of plays may be played from the play in which the CZ is won until the advantageous zone ends. In this case, the CZ win is not announced in the play in which the CZ is won, and whether or not the CZ has been won may be determined through effects over a predetermined number of plays (so-called premonition effects or continuous effects). A congratulatory effect is then executed when the predetermined number of plays have been played, and the CZ is in preparation from the next play. This is because the advantageous zone lamp is lit during the advantageous zone and turns off when the advantageous zone ends, so that it is not possible to tell whether or not the CZ has been won from the lighting state of the advantageous zone lamp between the CZ win play and the announcement of the CZ win. Note that the advantageous zone may transition from the normal zone during CZ preparation; in this case, since the fact that the CZ is being prepared has already been announced, the result will not be revealed in advance based on the lighting state of the advantageous zone lamp during CZ preparation.

Furthermore, CZ preparation does not necessarily have to be a normal interval, and may be set to a favorable interval. Even in this case, the rate at which CZ preparation is executed in a normal interval is relatively higher than the rate at which CZ preparation is executed in a favorable interval, and the condition for executing CZ preparation in a favorable interval is that the number of remaining plays in the favorable interval is a predetermined number (for example, 1,000 plays). By configuring it in this way, CZ preparation is executed when there is sufficient remaining play in the favorable interval, so even if the CZ is executed after CZ preparation and the AT is executed as a result, a sufficient feeling of winning can be created. Furthermore, since the normal interval is not used during CZ preparation, it is possible to create a surprise by starting the AT immediately after CZ preparation (information related to the AT is initialized at the end of the favorable interval, so if the normal interval is used during CZ preparation, the CZ will be executed at the start of the favorable interval and the AT cannot start).

Also, when executing the CZ preparation during the advantageous zone described above, whether or not to award an AT may be determined by lottery when one of WIN-D through WIN-H is won during CZ preparation. In this case, the order of rare combinations that are likely to win the AT through the AT lottery may be the same as the order that is likely to win the CZ, or may be slightly different, such as WIN-E > WIN-G > WIN-F > WIN-H > WIN-D. By configuring it in this way, users can expect to win a rare combination even during CZ preparation.

Furthermore, to prevent users who win a rare role but do not win the AT from losing their motivation to play, a bonus different from the AT may be awarded. Such a bonus may, for example, be displayed as a two-dimensional code that can be read by the user's terminal, or as a setting suggestion effect that allows the setting value to be determined. The bonus may be more likely to be awarded the closer the number of plays in the advantageous zone is to the aforementioned predetermined number (e.g., 3,000 plays), or when the number of CZ plays is a specific number (e.g., a multiple of 5).

The conditions for a guaranteed transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone (conditions for a forced end of the advantageous zone) have been described as when the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3000 plays), when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds a specific value (e.g., 2400), when initialization processing is performed based on a setting change, and when the RAM clear switch is enabled. However, not all conditions need to be defined as conditions for a guaranteed transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone, and some conditions may be defined as conditions for a guaranteed transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone. For example, it is not necessary to include when the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3000 plays) as a condition for a guaranteed transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone.

Next, we will explain how the advantageous zone can be terminated (transitioned to the normal zone) under any desired termination condition when the condition for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the normal zone does not include when the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3,000), but does include when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2,400. Note that while we will explain the condition for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the normal zone as when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2,400, this can be set to any value other than 2,400 (e.g., 4,800).

Ending the advantageous zone under any end condition means that when MY in the advantageous zone is a value that does not exceed 2400 (for example, MY in the advantageous zone is 1000), the AT end conditions are met (for example, 300 plays have been played since entering the AT, or the number of winning coins exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 2300 coins)), or when a CZ is won in the advantageous zone (whether or not to end the advantageous zone may be determined depending on the situation of the advantageous zone when a CZ is won in the advantageous zone).

When the advantageous zone is to be ended under an arbitrary ending condition, if the arbitrary ending condition of the advantageous zone is met, a flag indicating the end of the advantageous zone is stored in a predetermined memory area (for example, an advantageous zone end memory area) in the first main control RAM by game state-specific processing. Then, if it is determined that a flag indicating the end of the advantageous zone is stored in the advantageous zone end memory area, it is possible to end the advantageous zone (perform initialization processing of information related to the AT stored in the first main control RAM).

If the advantageous zone is to be terminated under an arbitrary termination condition, a flag indicating the termination of the advantageous zone is stored in a one-byte memory area (for example, an advantageous zone termination memory area) in the first main control RAM when the arbitrary termination condition of the advantageous zone is met. If it is then determined that a flag indicating the termination of the advantageous zone is stored in the advantageous zone termination memory area, the advantageous zone may be terminated (an initialization process is performed on the information related to the AT stored in the RAM of the first main control).

However, if a 1-byte advantageous period end storage area is provided in the first main control RAM, the storage area of the first main control RAM will become congested, so another method is to use the advantageous period MY counter to end the advantageous period under any end condition. Below, we will explain how to end the advantageous period under any end condition using the advantageous period MY counter.

<Method of ending a favorable period under any end condition using the favorable period MY counter>
First, the storage area of the advantageous zone MY counter will be explained. The advantageous zone MY counter needs to store a value for determining whether the advantageous zone MY has exceeded 2400, and therefore requires a 2-byte storage area. Below, an example will be given to explain what values are stored in the upper byte storage area and the lower byte storage area of the advantageous zone MY counter. Note that to make it easier to distinguish between the value of the upper byte storage area and the value of the lower byte storage area, a "/" is written at the boundary between the value of the digit byte storage area and the value of the lower byte storage area, making it look like "value of upper byte storage area/value of lower byte storage area." Furthermore, numbers with a "b" at the end indicate that they are expressed in binary. Furthermore, of the 8 bits (1 byte), the least significant bit is D0 bit, the bit next to D0 bit is D1 bit, the bit next to D1 bit is D2 bit, the bit next to D2 bit is D3 bit, the bit next to D3 bit is D4 bit, the bit next to D4 bit is D5 bit, the bit next to D5 bit is D6 bit, and the bit next to D6 bit is D7 bit. In other words, the bit that is referred to as the least significant bit corresponds to D0 bit, and the bit that is referred to as the most significant bit corresponds to D7 bit.

In addition, the D0 bit of the lower byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the first digit, the D1 bit of the lower byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the second digit, the D2 bit of the lower byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the third digit, the D3 bit of the lower byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the fourth digit, the D4 bit of the lower byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the fifth digit, the D5 bit of the lower byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the sixth digit, the D6 bit of the lower byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the seventh digit, and the D7 bit of the lower byte of the favorable zone MY counter indicates the eighth digit. In addition, the D0 bit of the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter indicates the 9th digit, the D1 bit of the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter indicates the 10th digit, the D2 bit of the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter indicates the 11th digit, the D3 bit of the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter indicates the 12th digit, the D4 bit of the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter indicates the 13th digit, the D5 bit of the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter indicates the 14th digit, the D6 bit of the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter indicates the 15th digit, and the D7 bit of the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter indicates the 16th digit.

(Example 1) When the value of the advantageous zone MY counter is 10, it will be 00000000b/00001010b (upper byte: 0, lower byte: 10)
(Example 2) When the value of the advantageous zone MY counter is 255, it will be 00000000b/11111111b (upper byte: 0, lower byte: 255).
(Example 3) When the value of the advantageous zone MY counter is 256, it will be 00000001b/00000000b (upper byte: 1, lower byte: 0)
(Example 4) When the value of the advantageous zone MY counter is 1000, it will be 00000011b/11101000b (upper byte: 3, lower byte: 232).
(Example 5) When the value of the advantageous zone MY counter is 2400, it will be 00001001b/01100000b (upper byte: 9, lower byte: 96)
(Example 6) When the value of the advantageous zone MY counter is 2414, it will be 00001001b/01101110b (upper byte: 9, lower byte: 110)

As described above, in gaming machines in which the advantageous zone MY counter can store values from 0 to 2414 as the advantageous zone MY, bits D4, D5, D6, and D7 are not used in the storage area of the upper bytes of the advantageous zone MY counter. Note that while an example of a gaming machine in which the advantageous zone MY counter can store values from 0 to 2414 as the advantageous zone MY is given, even if the upper limit value that can be stored as the advantageous zone MY is not 2414 but any value between 2400 and 2413, bits D4, D5, D6, and D7 are not used in the storage area of the upper bytes of the advantageous zone MY counter.

<<Processing at the end of the advantageous period>>
Next, a method for ending the advantageous zone under any end condition using the advantageous zone MY counter will be explained with reference to Figure 45. The advantageous zone end processing is one of the processes included in the above-mentioned game state-specific processing, and is a control process that is executed when the advantageous zone is to be ended under any end condition.

<<<Pattern 1>>>
In <Pattern 1> of the favorable zone end processing in Figure 45, when the favorable zone is ended under any end condition, a specific bit of the value stored in the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter is set to 1 (a 1 is stored in the specific bit). Specifically, a 1 is stored in the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the storage area of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter. For example, when the value stored in the storage area of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter is 1 (00000001b), setting the D7 bit of the storage area of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter to 1 will make the value stored in the storage area of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter 129 (10000001b).

This configuration is possible because, as mentioned above, no values are stored in bits D4 through D7 of the storage area in the upper bytes of the favorable zone MY counter. In other words, bit D7 of the storage area in the upper bytes of the favorable zone MY counter can be used for another purpose (here, as a flag indicating whether the end conditions of the favorable zone have been met). Furthermore, setting bit D7 of the value stored in the upper bytes of the favorable zone MY counter to 1 is equivalent to storing a value of at least 32,768 (2 to the power of 15) or greater as the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter. In this case, no processing is performed to store values in the storage area in the lower bytes of the favorable zone MY counter, nor is processing performed to store 1 in a certain bit. For example, if the advantageous zone MY counter stores 1000 (00000011b/11101000b ("/" indicates the boundary between the value of the upper byte storage area and the value of the lower byte storage area)), and the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the value stored in the upper byte storage area of the advantageous zone MY counter is set to 1, then the advantageous zone MY counter will store 33768 (10000011b/11101000b). In this way, rather than performing a process of storing a value or setting a certain bit to 1 targeting both the lower byte storage area and the upper byte storage area (2-byte storage area) that make up the advantageous zone MY counter, the program capacity can be reduced by targeting the upper byte storage area of the advantageous zone MY counter (1-byte storage area) and performing a process of setting a specific bit to 1. Note that, while an example was shown in which a 1 is stored in bit D7 of the upper byte storage area of the favorable section MY counter, this is not limited to bit D7 and can be any bit from bit D4 to bit D7.

<<<Pattern 2>>>
In <Pattern 2> of the processing at the end of the favorable zone in Figure 45, when the favorable zone is to be ended under any ending condition, a specific value (250 (11110000b)) is stored in the memory area of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter. For example, when the value stored in the memory area of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter is 1 (00000001b), if 250 is stored in the memory area of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter, the value stored in the memory area of the upper byte of the favorable zone MY counter will become 250 (11110000b).

This configuration is possible because, as mentioned above, the value stored as MY for the favorable zone only uses bits D0 through D3 of the upper byte memory area of the favorable zone MY counter. Specifically, if the upper limit value of the value stored as MY for the favorable zone is any value between 2400 and 2414, the upper byte memory area of the favorable zone MY counter can store a maximum of 9 (00001001b). In other words, since a value greater than 10 cannot be stored, by storing a value greater than 10 in the upper byte memory area of the favorable zone MY counter, the favorable zone MY counter can be set to a value at least greater than 2414. In this case, no process is performed to store a value in the lower byte memory area of the favorable zone MY counter, nor is a process performed to store a 1 in a certain bit. For example, if the advantageous zone MY counter stores 1000 (00000011b/11101000b ("/" indicates the boundary between the value of the upper byte storage area and the value of the lower byte storage area), and 250 is stored in the upper byte storage area of the advantageous zone MY counter, 61672 (11110000b/11101000b) will be stored in the advantageous zone MY counter. In this way, rather than storing a value in both the lower byte storage area and the upper byte storage area (2-byte storage area) that make up the advantageous zone MY counter, or storing a 1 in a certain bit, the program capacity can be reduced by targeting the upper byte storage area of the advantageous zone MY counter (1-byte storage area) and storing a specific value. Note that while an example has been shown in which 250 is stored in the upper byte storage area of the advantageous zone MY counter, the specific value is not limited to 250 and can be any value equal to or greater than 10.

<<Advantageous Zone Clear Counter Management Processing>>
Next, the advantageous zone clear counter management process when the advantageous zone MY counter is used to end the advantageous zone under any end condition will be explained using Figures 46, 47, and 48. Here, since three patterns of the advantageous zone clear counter management process are possible, Figure 46 will be explained as <Pattern 1> of the advantageous zone clear counter management process, Figure 47 as <Pattern 2> of the advantageous zone clear counter management process, and Figure 48 as <Pattern 3> of the advantageous zone clear counter management process. Note that any of the modes of the advantageous zone clear counter management process in Figures 46, 47, and 48 is executed by the game progress main process of the main control board P15 described in Figure 44.

<<<Pattern 1>>>
46 shows <Pattern 1> of the advantageous zone clear counter management process. <Pattern 1> of the advantageous zone clear counter management process is a method that can determine at once whether the value stored in the advantageous zone MY counter exceeds the upper limit value of the advantageous zone (for example, 2400) or not, thereby determining whether the forced termination condition of the advantageous zone has been met and whether the optional termination condition of the advantageous zone has been met.

First, "Playing in an advantageous zone?" determines whether the current game is in an advantageous zone. For example, whether the current game is in an advantageous zone can be determined using the main game state of the current game or a flag (advantageous zone flag) that is set to 1 if the current game is in an advantageous zone. If it is determined that the current game is not in an advantageous zone, the advantageous zone clear counter management process is terminated.

In "Get MY Counter," the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter is stored in the HL register (a general-purpose register owned by the CPU; a pair of registers that can store a 2-byte value by combining the H and L registers; the same applies below). For example, if the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter is 1000, 1000 is stored in the HL register. Note that 1000 is a 2-byte value, so the value of the upper byte is stored in the H register, and the value of the lower byte is stored in the L register. Therefore, storing 1000 in the HL register is equivalent to storing 00000011b in the H register and 11101000b in the L register.

"When replay activation symbol is displayed?" determines whether a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped and displayed during this game. If it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped and displayed during this game (if YES), "Save MY counter" is executed. If it is not determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has not stopped and displayed during this game (if NO) during "When replay activation symbol is displayed?", "Add bonus number."

In "Add Amount of Awards," the number of gaming media awarded in the current game is added to the value stored in the HL register, and the value after the addition is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the HL register before the addition is 1000 and the number of gaming media awarded in the current game is 1, then 1001 will be stored in the HL register after the addition.

In "Bet Number Subtraction," the number of gaming media betted in the current game (bets) is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register, and the value after the subtraction is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the HL register before the subtraction is 1001 and the number of bets in the current game is 3, the value stored in the HL register after the subtraction will be 998.

"Subtraction result less than 0?" determines whether the "Bet number subtraction" executed before this process caused the value stored in the HL register to become less than 0 (a borrowing occurred). For example, if a borrowing occurred as a result of executing "Bet number subtraction" (if the carry flag becomes 1), the answer is YES and "Set MY counter initial value." On the other hand, if a borrowing did not occur as a result of executing "Bet number subtraction" (if the carry flag becomes 0), the answer is NO and "Save MY counter" is executed.

"Set MY Counter Initial Value" sets the value stored in the HL register to 0. This allows 0 to be stored as the initial value of the favorable zone MY counter in the next "Save MY Counter" operation.

"Save MY Counter" stores the value stored in the HL register in the favorable zone MY counter. Note that even if the value stored in the HL register is stored in the favorable zone MY counter, the value stored in the HL register is maintained. For example, if 998 is stored in the HL register, 998 is stored in the favorable zone MY counter. The value stored in the HL register remains 998. For example, if 0 is stored in the HL register, 0 is stored in the favorable zone MY counter. The value stored in the HL register remains 0.

"MY Counter > MY Counter Upper Limit?" determines whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400. Here, the value stored in the HL register is the same as the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter. Therefore, determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400 is synonymous with determining whether the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter exceeds 2400. Also, while determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400, it is also possible to determine whether the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter exceeds 2400. However, the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter is a value stored in RAM. Here, when comparing with a certain numerical value, comparing with a value stored in a register rather than comparing with a value stored in RAM reduces program size. Therefore, determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400 reduces ROM (program) usage.

The following describes an example of how to determine whether "MY counter>MY counter upper limit value?" depending on the value stored in the HL register.
(Example 1) If 0 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be NO and the process is terminated.
(Example 2) If 998 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be NO and the process is terminated.
(Example 3) If 2404 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be YES, and RAM initialization is performed at the end of the favorable period.
(Example 4) If 33768 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be YES, and RAM initialization is performed at the end of the favorable period.
(Example 5) If 61672 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be YES, and RAM initialization is performed at the end of the favorable period.
Here, when a value between 2400 and 2414 is stored, as in (Example 3), this means that the forced termination condition of the advantageous zone is met. On the other hand, when a value exceeding 2414 is stored, as in (Example 4) or (Example 5), this means that an arbitrary termination condition of the advantageous zone is met (when <Pattern 1> of the advantageous zone end processing or <Pattern 2> of the advantageous zone end processing is executed). In this way, by using "MY counter > MY counter upper limit value?", it is possible to execute RAM initialization at the end of the advantageous zone (ending the advantageous zone in this game) depending on whether the forced termination condition of the advantageous zone is met or whether an arbitrary termination condition of the advantageous zone is met.

"RAM initialization at the end of the advantageous zone" initializes information about the AT. This process also initializes the advantageous zone MY counter and main game state, and the advantageous zone ends with this game. Therefore, the next game can be a normal zone game.
<<<Pattern 2>>>
47 shows <Pattern 2> of the advantageous zone clear counter management process. <Pattern 2> of the advantageous zone clear counter management process is a method that can determine whether the advantageous zone has ended (the advantageous zone has ended by satisfying any advantageous zone end condition) or the advantageous zone has ended by the value stored in the advantageous zone MY counter exceeding the upper limit value (the advantageous zone has ended by satisfying a forced advantageous zone end condition) depending on whether a predetermined bit of the value stored in the advantageous zone MY counter is 1 or not.

First, "Playing in an advantageous zone?" determines whether the current game is in an advantageous zone. For example, whether the current game is in an advantageous zone can be determined using the main game state of the current game or a flag (advantageous zone flag) that is set to 1 if the current game is in an advantageous zone. If it is determined that the current game is not in an advantageous zone, the advantageous zone clear counter management process is terminated.

In "Get MY Counter," the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter is 1000, 1000 is stored in the HL register. Note that 1000 is a two-byte number, so the value of the upper byte is stored in the H register, and the value of the lower byte is stored in the L register. Therefore, storing 1000 in the HL register is equivalent to storing 00000011b in the H register and 11101000b in the L register.

"Specific Bit ON?" determines whether the specific bit of the value stored in the H register is "1." In other words, this process determines whether any of the conditions for ending the favorable period have been met. For example, if the process of storing a 1 in bit D7 of the upper byte memory area of the favorable period MY counter is performed using <Pattern 1> of the favorable period end processing, the specific bit corresponds to bit D7. Furthermore, if 250 (11110000) is stored in the upper byte memory area of the favorable period MY counter using <Pattern 2> of the favorable period end processing, the specific bit corresponds to bit D7, bit D6, bit D5, or bit D4. In this way, when <Pattern 1> of the favorable period end processing or <Pattern 2> of the favorable period end processing is performed, a determination is made as to which bit (specific bit) will become 1. If the specific bit of the value stored in the H register is 1, "RAM initialization at the end of the favorable period" is executed. On the other hand, when the specific bit of the value stored in the H register is not 1 (when it is 0), "When replay activation symbol is displayed?" is executed. Note that when the specific bit of the value stored in the H register is 1, it means that the specific bit of the value stored in the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter is 1. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is determined whether the specific bit of the value stored in the H register is 1, but it may also be determined whether the specific bit of the value stored in the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter is 1.

"When replay activation symbol is displayed?" determines whether a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped and displayed during this game. If it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped and displayed during this game (if YES), "Save MY counter" is executed. If it is not determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has not stopped and displayed during this game (if NO) during "When replay activation symbol is displayed?", "Add bonus number."

In "Add Amount of Awards," the number of gaming media awarded in the current game is added to the value stored in the HL register, and the value after the addition is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the HL register before the addition is 1000 and the number of gaming media awarded in the current game is 1, then 1001 will be stored in the HL register after the addition.

In "Bet Number Subtraction," the number of gaming media betted in the current game (bets) is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register, and the value after the subtraction is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the HL register before the subtraction is 1001 and the number of bets in the current game is 3, then the value stored in the HL register after the subtraction will be 998.

"Subtraction result less than 0?" determines whether the "Bet number subtraction" executed before this process caused the value stored in the HL register to become less than 0 (a borrowing occurred). For example, if a borrowing occurred as a result of executing "Bet number subtraction" (if the carry flag becomes 1), the answer is YES and "Set MY counter initial value." On the other hand, if a borrowing did not occur as a result of executing "Bet number subtraction" (if the carry flag becomes 0), the answer is NO and "Save MY counter" is executed.

"Set MY Counter Initial Value" sets the value stored in the HL register to 0. This allows 0 to be stored as the initial value of the favorable zone MY counter in the next "Save MY Counter" operation.

In "Save MY Counter," the value stored in the HL register is stored in the favorable zone MY counter. Here, the value stored in the HL register is the same as the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter. Note that even if the value stored in the HL register is stored in the favorable zone MY counter, the value stored in the HL register is maintained. For example, if 998 is stored in the HL register, 998 is stored in the favorable zone MY counter. The value stored in the HL register remains 998. For example, if 0 is stored in the HL register, 0 is stored in the favorable zone MY counter. The value stored in the HL register remains 0.

"MY Counter > MY Counter Upper Limit?" determines whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400. Here, the value stored in the HL register is the same as the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter. Therefore, determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400 is synonymous with determining whether the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter exceeds 2400. Also, while determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400, it is also possible to determine whether the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter exceeds 2400. However, the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter is a value stored in RAM. Here, when comparing with a certain numerical value, comparing with a value stored in a register rather than comparing with a value stored in RAM reduces program size. Therefore, determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400 reduces ROM (program) usage.

The following describes an example of how to determine whether "MY counter>MY counter upper limit value?" depending on the value stored in the HL register.
(Example 1) If 0 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be NO and the process is terminated.
(Example 2) If 998 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be NO and the process is terminated.
(Example 3) If 2404 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be YES, and RAM initialization is performed at the end of the favorable period.
Here, when a number between 2400 and 2414 is stored as in (Example 3), this is when the forced termination condition of the favorable zone is met.

"RAM initialization at the end of the advantageous period" initializes information related to the AT. This process also initializes the advantageous period MY counter and main game state, and the advantageous period ends with this game. Therefore, the next game can be played in the normal period.

<<<Pattern 3>>>
48 shows <Pattern 3> of the advantageous zone clear counter management process. <Pattern 3> of the advantageous zone clear counter management process is a method that can determine whether the advantageous zone has ended based on whether the value of the upper byte stored in the advantageous zone MY counter is a specific value (the advantageous zone has ended by satisfying any advantageous zone end condition), or whether the advantageous zone has ended by the value stored in the advantageous zone MY counter exceeding the upper limit value (the advantageous zone has ended by satisfying a forced advantageous zone end condition).

First, "Playing in an advantageous zone?" determines whether the current game is in an advantageous zone. For example, whether the current game is in an advantageous zone can be determined using the main game state of the current game or a flag (advantageous zone flag) that is set to 1 if the current game is in an advantageous zone. If it is determined that the current game is not in an advantageous zone, the process ends.

In "Get MY Counter," the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter is stored in the HL register (a general-purpose register owned by the CPU). For example, if the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter is 1000, 1000 is stored in the HL register. Note that 1000 is a two-byte number, so the value of the upper byte is stored in the H register, and the value of the lower byte is stored in the L register. Therefore, storing 1000 in the HL register is equivalent to storing 00000011b in the H register and 11101000b in the L register.

The "Advantageous Zone End Data?" function determines whether the value stored in the H register is a specific value. In other words, this process determines whether any of the advantageous zone end conditions have been met. For example, if 250 (11110000b) is stored in the upper byte memory area of the advantageous zone MY counter using Pattern 2 of the advantageous zone end processing, the specific value corresponds to 250 (11110000b). In this way, it determines whether the value is the one stored when Pattern 2 of the advantageous zone end processing is executed. If the value stored in the H register is a specific value, "RAM initialization at advantageous zone end" is executed. On the other hand, if the value stored in the H register is not a specific value, "Replay activation symbol displayed?" is executed. Note that when the value stored in the H register is a specific value, a specific value is stored in the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter. Therefore, although it determines whether the value stored in the H register is a specific value, it may also determine whether the value stored in the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter is a specific value.

"When replay activation symbol is displayed?" determines whether a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped and displayed during this game. If it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped and displayed during this game (if YES), "Save MY counter" is executed. If it is not determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has not stopped and displayed during this game (if NO) during "When replay activation symbol is displayed?", "Add bonus number."

In "Add Amount of Awards," the number of gaming media awarded in the current game is added to the value stored in the HL register, and the value after the addition is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the HL register before the addition is 1000 and the number of gaming media awarded in the current game is 1, then 1001 will be stored in the HL register after the addition.

In "Bet Number Subtraction," the number of gaming media betted in the current game (bets) is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register, and the value after the subtraction is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the HL register before the subtraction is 1001 and the number of bets in the current game is 3, then the value stored in the HL register after the subtraction will be 998.

"Subtraction result less than 0?" determines whether the "Bet number subtraction" executed before this process caused the value stored in the HL register to become less than 0 (a borrowing occurred). For example, if a borrowing occurred as a result of executing "Bet number subtraction" (if the carry flag becomes 1), the answer is YES and "Set MY counter initial value." On the other hand, if a borrowing did not occur as a result of executing "Bet number subtraction" (if the carry flag becomes 0), the answer is NO and "Save MY counter" is executed.

"Set MY Counter Initial Value" sets the value stored in the HL register to 0. This allows 0 to be stored as the initial value of the favorable zone MY counter in the next "Save MY Counter" operation.

"Save MY Counter" stores the value stored in the HL register in the favorable zone MY counter. Note that even if the value stored in the HL register is stored in the favorable zone MY counter, the value stored in the HL register is maintained. For example, if 998 is stored in the HL register, 998 is stored in the favorable zone MY counter. The value stored in the HL register remains 998. For example, if 0 is stored in the HL register, 0 is stored in the favorable zone MY counter. The value stored in the HL register remains 0.

"MY Counter > MY Counter Upper Limit?" determines whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400. Here, the value stored in the HL register is the same as the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter. Therefore, determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400 is synonymous with determining whether the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter exceeds 2400. Also, while determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400, it is also possible to determine whether the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter exceeds 2400. However, the value stored in the favorable zone MY counter is a value stored in RAM. Here, when comparing with a certain numerical value, comparing with a value stored in a register rather than comparing with a value stored in RAM reduces program size. Therefore, determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400 reduces ROM (program) usage.

The following describes an example of how to determine whether "MY counter>MY counter upper limit value?" depending on the value stored in the HL register.
(Example 1) If 0 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be NO and the process is terminated.
(Example 2) If 998 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be NO and the process is terminated.
(Example 3) If 2404 is stored in the HL register, the answer is determined to be YES, and RAM initialization is performed at the end of the favorable period.
Here, when a number between 2400 and 2414 is stored as in (Example 3), this is when the forced termination condition of the favorable zone is met.

"RAM initialization at the end of the advantageous period" initializes information related to the AT. This process also initializes the advantageous period MY counter and main game state, and the advantageous period ends with this game. Therefore, the next game can be played in the normal period.

As described above, in a game that meets any of the conditions for ending the advantageous zone, the value stored in the memory area of the upper byte of the advantageous zone MY counter is updated by the advantageous zone end processing (the value stored in the memory area of the lower byte of the advantageous zone MY counter is not updated), and the advantageous zone clear counter management processing executed after the advantageous zone end processing allows the advantageous zone to end in a game that meets any of the conditions for ending the advantageous zone (the next game can be a game in the normal zone).

This section explains the process for changing settings in this embodiment.

When the setting change device is started, the RAM initialization process described above is performed at the timing when the setting change device is started or when the setting values are confirmed. If the game state immediately before this RAM initialization process is performed is RT1, the RT1 information is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process will be non-RT. Also, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is Type 1 BB, the information in Type 1 BB is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process will be non-RT. Note that the total score is not initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed following a setting change (the investment points are initialized).

Furthermore, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is in a favorable zone, the information for the favorable zone will be initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process will become the normal zone. In other words, the game state during the favorable zone can be the normal state, CZ, or AT, but regardless of the state, when the RAM initialization process is performed, it will transition to the normal zone.

When the RAM initialization process is performed, play will begin in a non-RT, normal zone, but in this embodiment, the CZ will start when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, so after the setting change, the game will be in an advantageous state (a state in which the CZ can be started by transitioning to the advantageous zone without playing to win the CZ).

By configuring it in this way, the setting will be in an advantageous state after the change, which will motivate customers to visit the store in the morning and increase the number of customers attracted.

Furthermore, if an overly advantageous state (a state in which the machine transitions to the CZ after just a few plays) can be established after changing the settings, there is a risk that this could significantly stimulate gambling instincts (the so-called morning mode). For this reason, it is possible to change the contents of the CZ depending on the situation when the machine transitions to the advantageous zone.

In this case, if the RT state of the next game after it has been determined that the game will move to the advantageous zone is RT1, the CZ will be started as this is the basic game flow, and if the RT state of the next game after it has been determined that the game will move to the advantageous zone is non-RT, the CZ will not be started as this is after a setting change. Games that have been determined to move into the advantageous zone include those that win any of the following: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, and Winning-K.

In addition, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, and Winning-K overlap with Type 1 BB, so the RT state for the next play after the win will be RT1 and CZ will start, but Winning-A1, Winner - A2, Winner - A3, Winner - A4, Winner - A5, Winner - A6, Winner - B1, Winner - B2, Winner - B3, Winner - B4, Winner - B5, Winner - B6, Winner - C1, Winner - C2, Winner - C3, Winner - C4, Winner - C5, Winner - C6 do not overlap with Type 1 BB, so the next play after winning is non-RT and CZ will not start.

This configuration allows for the possibility of transitioning to a favorable zone even during non-RT, which can curb morning-related specifications such as transitioning to a CZ after just a few plays after changing the settings, thereby reducing the tendency for gambling.

It is also possible to reduce gambling by using a specification that changes the game state managed by the main control means in the advantageous zone by referring to the RT state of the next game when a transition to the advantageous zone has been decided. In this case, an AT may not be performed in an advantageous zone that has transitioned to a non-RT (not inside a Type 1 BB), and an advantageous zone that has transitioned to an RT1 (inside a Type 1 BB) may have the possibility of an AT being performed. With this configuration, if a transition to an advantageous zone occurs in a non-RT after a setting change, no balls can be earned because an AT is not performed, thereby reducing gambling. The condition for ending the advantageous zone in this case may be until the above-mentioned CZ is won, or may be when a predetermined number of games have been played (for example, 3,000 games).

In addition, the transition of the CZ is controlled by referencing the RT state of the next game after the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous zone is won, but this is not limited to this; the transition of the CZ may also be controlled by referencing the condition device in operation for the game after the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous zone is won. In this case, when the prize-winning A1 is won while inside a Type 1 BB in the normal zone, the CZ is controlled to start at the start of the advantageous zone based on the fact that the condition devices for the Type 1 BB and the prize-winning A1 are in operation. In addition, when the prize-winning A1 is won while not inside a Type 1 BB in the normal zone, the CZ is controlled not to start at the start of the advantageous zone based on the fact that the condition device for the prize-winning A1 is in operation.

In this embodiment, only Type 1 BB was the subject of the lottery, but instead, RB or MB may also be the subject of the lottery, or two or all of Type 1 BB, RB, and MB may also be the subject of the lottery.

The messages used for communication between gaming machine P and the rental unit are explained using Figure 14.

The data structure of the messages used for communication between the gaming machine P and the rental unit can be divided into the following five types.
(1) Message length (2) Command (3) Serial number (4) Data section (5) Checksum A group of data consisting of the above five items is called a message and is sent in one transmission (it is not sent in parts).

The rental unit is configured to consider a single message if it does not receive the next start bit within 3.9 ms of starting to receive the previous start bit. Therefore, when transmitting continuous data (1 byte of data) as a single message, the transmission interval is designed to be less than 3.9 ms. Some types of data have specified transmission times: gaming machine information notifications must be within 13.9 ms, counting notifications within 5.5 ms, and rental receipt result responses within 4.9 ms. For example, even if gaming machine information notifications are transmitted within 3.9 ms, if more than 13.9 ms pass between transmitting the message length and the checksum, the rental unit will discard the data received up to that point. Therefore, the interval between data must be within 3.9 ms and the time until transmission is complete must be within 13.9 ms.

In this configuration, the transmission time for one byte of data (the time it takes to transmit from the start bit to the stop bit) is 0.158 ms, so the requirement of 3.9 ms between data bits is easily met without any special design considerations when using normal transmission methods.

The data structure is explained below.

(1) Message Length This indicates the length of the data consisting of five parts: message length, command, serial number, data section, and checksum, and is composed of 1 byte of data. For example, if the message length is 1 byte, the command is 1 byte, the serial number is 1 byte, the data section is 14 bytes, and the checksum is 1 byte, the message will be 18 bytes (1 byte + 1 byte + 1 byte + 14 bytes + 1 byte), and the message length will be the data corresponding to 18 bytes (12h).

(2) Command The above message is used for one of the following: gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response, which will be described later. This command can notify the type of message.
For example, the following commands are set: 01h for gaming machine information notification, 02h for counting notification, 13h for loan notification, and 03h for loan receipt result response. The data length of the command is 1 byte.

(3) Serial Number The numbers contained in the gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response, which will be described later, are referred to as serial numbers. The serial number contained in the gaming machine information notification is referred to as the serial number, the serial number contained in the counting notification is referred to as the counting serial number, the serial number contained in the loan notification is referred to as the loan serial number, and the serial number contained in the loan receipt result response is referred to as the loan serial number. These various serial numbers are numbers within the range of 0 to 255 and are composed of 1-byte data. The various serial numbers will be described later.

(4) Data Section The data section refers to the data corresponding to the gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response, which will be described later. The data included in the data section will be described later, but the data length varies depending on the notification content, such as from 1 byte to 53 bytes.

(5) Checksum: The five pieces of data (message length, command, serial number, data section, and checksum) are added together, and the lowest byte of the total is used as the checksum. Using this checksum, the receiving side can determine whether data has been corrupted during communication. For example, the gaming machine P or the rental unit can count the number of messages whose checksums do not match and check the status of communication problems, etc. For example, the gaming machine P may be able to display the number of messages whose checksums do not match on an image display device or the like in a specified situation (during a setting confirmation mode in which setting values can be confirmed or during a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed).

Among the messages output from gaming machine P to the rental unit, the gaming machine information notification will be explained using Figure 15.

(1) Message Length This indicates the length of the data consisting of five parts: message length, command, serial number, data section (including three parts: gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, and gaming machine information), and checksum, and is composed of 1 byte of data. The message length varies depending on the type of gaming machine information, which will be described later.

(2) Commands As mentioned above, commands serve to notify any of the gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response. The gaming machine information notification command corresponds to 01h (fixed value).

(3) Serial Number The serial number is a number between 0 and 255, and serves as a serial number for notifying gaming machine information. A specific example will be described below.
a) When the power is turned on, the serial number "00h (0)" is notified.
a) After the power is turned on, the serial number is updated (+1) every time a notification is sent.
c) The serial number following "FFh (255)" is updated to "01h (1)" (+1 twice).
As described above, the initial serial number after power recovery is 0, and thereafter increases by 1 each time a gaming machine information notification is output. When the serial number of a gaming machine information notification reaches 255, the serial number of the next gaming machine information notification will be 1 (it will never be 0).

(4) Gaming Machine Type The gaming machine type is information constituting the data section, and is information for identifying the type of gaming machine P. This information will be described later with reference to FIG. 6, and is data for notifying the management medium, group classification, and gaming machine type.

(5) Gaming Machine Information Type The gaming machine information type is information constituting the data section, and is information for identifying whether the gaming machine information notification being notified this time is gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, or hall control/fraud monitoring information. The gaming machine information type is 00h when notifying gaming machine performance information, 01h when notifying gaming machine installation information, and 02h when notifying hall control/fraud monitoring information. Note that gaming machine performance information will be described later using FIG. 17, gaming machine installation information will be described later using FIG. 18, and hall control/fraud monitoring information will be described later using FIG. 19.

(6) Gaming Machine Information Gaming machine information is information constituting the data section, and the gaming machine information notification to be notified this time is information that is notified according to any of gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information. Details of the gaming machine information will be described later.

(7) Checksum The five pieces of data for the gaming machine information notification being sent this time, namely, message length, command, serial number, data section (including gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, and gaming machine information), and checksum, are added together, and the lowest byte of the total is used as the checksum.

The gaming machine type information included in the gaming machine information notification is explained below with reference to Figure 16.

The gaming machine type is a 1-byte piece of data, with bits 0 to 3 indicating the type of gaming machine, bits 4 to 6 indicating the classification of the organization to which the manufacturer belongs, and bit 7 indicating the gaming medium, whether the machine uses traditional gaming balls or traditional gaming medals.

The types of gaming machines listed are those specified in the Act on the Control and Improvement of Amusement and Entertainment Businesses, etc.

Next, we will use the gaming machine type list in Figure 16 to explain what gaming machine types are available using specific examples.

A) Pattern 1
Game machine type: Pachinko game machine P
Group classification: Group A
Management medium: old gaming ball In this case, 01h is set as the gaming machine type.

a) Pattern 2
Game machine type: Slot machine Group classification: Group A
Management medium: old gaming medal In this case, 82h is set as the gaming machine type.

C) Pattern 3
Game machine type: Arrange ball game machine Group classification: Group A
Management medium: old gaming medal In this case, 83h is set as the gaming machine type.

D) Pattern 4
Game machine type: Jankyu game machine Group classification: Group A
Management medium: old gaming medal In this case, 84h is set as the gaming machine type.

E) Pattern 5
Game machine type: Slot machine Group classification: Group B
Management medium: old gaming medal In this case, 92h is set as the gaming machine type.

Figure 17 explains the gaming machine information included in the message when gaming machine performance information is set in the gaming machine information notification.

A) Total Insertion Number The total insertion number is information about the cumulative number of gaming media inserted since the power was turned on. If a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, 0 may be output as the information about the total insertion number. For example, if the cumulative number of gaming media inserted is 2000 over a total of 1000 games, the total insertion number will be 2000, and 2000 may be output as the information about the total insertion number. If a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, 0 may be output as the information about the total insertion number. Note that if a replay role (also called a replay role) is won by the internal lottery and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of gaming media inserted on the next game of that game is not included in the total insertion number.

(a) Total Number of Awards The total number of awards is information on the cumulative number of game media awarded since the power was turned on. If a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, 0 may be output as information on the total number of awards. For example, if the cumulative number of game media awarded is 2000 in a total of 1000 games, the total number of awards will be 2000, and 2000 may be output as information on the total number of awards. If a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, 0 may be output as information on the total number of awards. Note that if a replay role is won by an internal lottery and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of game media awarded in that game is not included in the total number of awards.

C) MY
MY is information about the maximum difference that can be calculated from the number of gaming media awarded and the number of gaming media inserted since the power was turned on. If a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, 0 may be output as the MY information. Specifically, MY is the maximum difference, which is the increase in the number of gaming media from the reference point where the number of gaming media was lowest when the game result was obtained (the total number won minus the total number inserted). For example, in a total of 1,000 games, if the 100th game is the game in which the player suffered the greatest loss, and the number of gaming media the player lost at that time was -200, and then an advantageous game begins, and the 800th game is the game in which the player gained the most, and the number of gaming media the player acquired at that time was 800, then 1,000, the difference between -200 and 800, becomes MY, and 1,000 may be output as MY. If a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, 0 may be output as the MY information.

To output this MY, the gaming media number control board uses a calculation MY counter and an output MY counter. Both the calculation MY counter and the output MY counter are initialized (set to 0) when the power is turned on, so the MY from when the power is turned on until it is turned off is output. In other words, since gaming arcades usually turn off the power at the end of the day's business, the MY for one day is output.

The Calculation MY Counter is configured to be updatable regardless of the game status or the specified number, and calculates the awarded points minus the invested points for one game, accumulating and storing the calculation results. For example, if a game starts when the Calculation MY Counter value is "0" and the invested points are "3" and the awarded points are "10", the result of calculating "10 - 3" is added to the Calculation MY Counter, and the value of the Calculation MY Counter is stored as "7". Similarly, if the next game also has the invested points "3" and the awarded points "10", the result of calculating "10 - 3" is added to the Calculation MY Counter, and the value of the Calculation MY Counter is stored as "14".

For example, if a game is started when the value of the calculation MY counter is "0" and the invested points are "3" and the awarded points are "0", the result of calculating "0 - 3" is "-3", but "0" is stored in the calculation MY counter. This is because the instruction is used to set the carry flag to "1" if a carry is carried over as a result of the calculation, and to set "0" if the carry flag is "1".

If the previous game was not a replay (in other words, if a 3-point bet was actually placed), the calculation MY counter treats the investment points for the game in which the replay won as "3" and the awarded points as "0." Then, by setting the investment points to "0" for the next game (the game when the replay is activated), the actual MY can be corrected. For example, if the previous game was not a replay and a game (in which the replay won) started when the calculation MY counter value was "10" has investment points of "3" and awarded points of "0," the result of calculating "0-3" ("-3") is added to the calculation MY counter, and the value of the calculation MY counter is stored as "7." Furthermore, if a minor combination that awards 10 points is won in the game following a game in which a replay is won, the investment points are 0 points and the awarded points are 10 points, and the result of calculating 10-0, 10, is added to the calculation MY counter, and the value of the calculation MY counter is stored as 17.

The output MY counter updates the value of the calculation MY counter to the value of the output MY counter if the value stored in the calculation MY counter is greater than the value stored in the output MY counter. For example, if a game is started when the calculation MY counter value is "10" and the output MY counter value is "12," and the investment points are "3" and the awarded points are "10," then "7," which is the result of calculating "10 - 3," is added, and the value of the calculation MY counter is stored as "17." Furthermore, when the calculation MY counter value of "17" is compared with the output MY counter value of "12," the calculation MY counter value is found to be greater, so the output MY counter value is updated to "17."

The gaming media count control board is configured to transmit the value of the output MY counter to the rental unit.

The calculation MY counter and output MY counter are initialized when the power is turned on, but the advantageous zone MY counter is not initialized when the power is turned on. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to appropriately protect the value of the advantageous zone MY counter, which could potentially cause disadvantages to the player.

The calculation MY counter and output MY counter are configured to be updatable regardless of the game zone (normal zone, advantageous zone), but the advantageous zone MY counter is configured to be updatable in the advantageous zone (but not in the normal zone).

The upper limit of both the calculation MY counter and the output MY counter is set to "917490". This configuration is much higher than the maximum MY normally achieved in a day, significantly reducing the possibility of reaching the upper limit. Furthermore, even if the calculation MY counter and output MY counter are increased through fraudulent activity, the upper limit will not be reached immediately, making it less likely that the counter value will be restarted from "0".

D) Total number of granted reels The total number of granted reels is information on the cumulative number of granted game media that have been awarded by the operation of reels (single bonus (SB), regular bonus (RB), challenge bonus (CB)) since the power was turned on, and if a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, 0 may be output as information on the total number of granted reels. For example, if the cumulative number of game media obtained by the operation of reels is 100 after a total of 1,000 games, the total number of granted reels will be 100, and 100 may be output as information on the total number of granted reels. Furthermore, if a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, 0 may be output as information on the total number of granted reels.

E) Total Number of Consecutive Features Awarded The total number of consecutive features awarded is information on the cumulative number of gaming media awarded by the operation of the first-class special features (regular bonus (RB)) since the power was turned on. If a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, 0 may be output as information on the total number of consecutive features awarded. For example, if the cumulative number of gaming media awarded by the operation of the first-class special features is 100 after a total of 1,000 games, the total number of consecutive features awarded will be 100, and 100 may be output as information on the total number of consecutive features awarded. If a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, 0 may be output as information on the total number of consecutive features awarded. Note that the number of gaming media awarded by the operation of the first-class special features by the first-class special feature continuous operating device (also referred to as Type 1 BB) is also accumulated.

(f) Gadget Ratio The gadget ratio is a ratio where the cumulative number of awards is the denominator and the cumulative number of awards when gadgets (RB, CB, SB) are activated. For example, if the cumulative number of plays is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (e.g., 17,500 plays), the cumulative number of awards is 20,000, and the cumulative number of awards when gadgets are activated is 10,000, a gadget ratio of 50 may be output. Note that the cumulative total does not have to be the total for all plays. For example, if the cumulative number of awards reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 65,535) or exceeds the upper limit (if the cumulative number of awards added to the current game exceeds the upper limit), the cumulative number of awards and the cumulative number of awards when gadgets are activated are not updated in subsequent plays. In other words, the gadget ratio is configured to remain unchanged. When the cumulative number of games played is less than a predetermined number (for example, 17,500), FFh is output as the bonus ratio information.

(g) Sequential Reel Ratio The sequential reel ratio is a ratio where the cumulative number of awards is the denominator and the cumulative number of awards when consecutive reels are activated (RB) is the numerator. For example, if the cumulative number of plays is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (e.g., 17,500 plays), the cumulative number of awards is 20,000, and the cumulative number of awards when consecutive reels are activated is 10,000, a value of 50 may be output as the reel ratio information. Note that the cumulative total does not have to be the total for all plays. For example, if the cumulative number of awards reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 65,535) or exceeds the upper limit (if the cumulative number of awards added to the current play exceeds the upper limit), the cumulative number of awards and the cumulative number of awards when consecutive reels are activated are not updated in subsequent plays. In other words, the reel ratio is configured to remain unchanged. When the cumulative number of games played is less than a predetermined number (for example, 17,500), FFh is output as the consecutive bonus ratio information.

(h) Advantageous Zone Ratio The advantageous zone ratio is a ratio where the cumulative number of plays is the denominator and the cumulative number of advantageous zone plays is the numerator. For example, if the cumulative number of plays is 20,000 and the cumulative number of advantageous zone plays is 18,000, 90 may be output as advantageous zone ratio information. Note that the cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all plays. For example, if the cumulative number of plays reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 65,535), the cumulative number of plays and the number of advantageous zone plays are not updated in subsequent plays. In other words, the advantageous zone ratio is configured not to change.
Note that the cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all games. For example, if the cumulative number of games reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 65,535), or if the cumulative number of games plus the number of games played in the current game exceeds the upper limit, the cumulative number of games and the cumulative number of games played in the advantageous zone are not updated in subsequent games. In other words, the advantageous zone ratio is not changed. Note that if the cumulative number of games is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 17,500), FFh is output as the advantageous zone ratio. Also, FFh is output even in gaming machines P that do not have advantageous zones.

(i) Ratio of Indication-Included Features The ratio of indication-included features is a ratio where the cumulative number of features is the denominator and the sum of the cumulative number of features granted when features (RB, CB, SB) are activated and the cumulative number of instruction features granted when the instruction function is activated (notification of the operation mode of the stop switch P4) is the numerator. Note that the sum here may be a value derived by calculation based on the number of features granted when features are activated and the number of instruction features, or it may be a single memory area to which the values granted when features are activated or when instruction features are activated are added. For example, if there are 175,000 or more plays, the cumulative number of features granted is 200,000, and the sum of the cumulative number of features granted when features are activated and the cumulative number of instruction features granted is 100,000, a value of 50 may be output as the feature ratio information. Note that the cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total for all games. For example, if the cumulative number of awards reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 1,677,215), or if the cumulative number of games played plus the number of games played in the current game exceeds the upper limit, the cumulative number of awards and the sum of the cumulative number of awards when the special device is activated and the cumulative number of awards given by instructions are not updated in subsequent games. In other words, the advantageous zone ratio is not changed. Note that when the cumulative number of games played is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 175,000), FFh is output as the special device ratio information. FFh is also output in gaming machines P that do not have special device or instruction functions.

J) Gadget Status Ratio The gadget status ratio is a ratio where the cumulative number of plays is the denominator and the cumulative specific number of plays, which is the number of plays in which a gadget (RB, CB, SB) is activated or the number of plays in which a gadget continuous operating device (1BB, 2BB) is activated, is the numerator. For example, if the cumulative number of plays is 20,000 and the cumulative specific number of plays is 5,000, 25 may be output as the gadget status ratio information. Note that the cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all plays. For example, if the cumulative number of plays reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 1,677,215), the cumulative number of plays and the specific number of plays are not updated in subsequent plays. In other words, the gadget status ratio is configured to remain unchanged. Note that if the cumulative number of plays is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 175,000), FFh is output as the gadget status ratio. In addition, even in a gaming machine P that is not equipped with a reel or a reel continuous operation device, it is configured to output FFh.

K) Number of Games The number of games is the cumulative number of games played since the gaming machine was turned on. It is cleared when the gaming machine is turned on.

C) Spare A spare is something that is prepared in advance for possible future use, and when only the information from A) to K) above is to be output, 00h is output.

S) Reservation 1
Reservation 1 is not used only by the gaming machine P itself. For example, after being sent from the gaming machine P to the rental unit, it is used when outputting from the rental unit to an external party such as Group A or Group B (for example, a gaming machine information center) using the 3-byte area reserved as a reservation on the unit side. An example of its use is adding the maximum MY calculated by the rental unit to the above-mentioned A) to C) and outputting it to an external party (for example, a gaming machine information center).

C) Reservation 2
Reservation 2 is not used only by the gaming machine P itself. For example, after being sent from the gaming machine P to the rental unit, it is used when outputting from the rental unit to an external party such as Group A or Group B (for example, a gaming machine information center) using the 2-byte area reserved as a reservation on the unit side. An example of its use is adding the number of games calculated by the rental unit to the above-mentioned A) to C) and outputting it to an external party (for example, a gaming machine information center).

With reference to Figure 18, we will explain the gaming machine information included in the message when gaming machine installation information is set.

A) Main Control Chip ID Number: The main control chip ID number is information including a chip individual number used to identify the main control chip, which is an integrated CPU, RWM, and ROM, installed on the main control board P15. Even for the same model, the main control chip ID number is different for each chip. For example, if the chip individual number is 4 bytes (12345678h) and the main control chip was purchased from Company A, the main control chip ID number can be output to the rental unit as 000000001234567821h (the last byte, 21h, indicates that the main control chip is model X, purchased from Company A). Also, if the chip individual number is 4 bytes (23456789h) and the main control chip was purchased from Company B, the main control chip ID number can be output to the rental unit as 000000002345678941h (the last byte, 41h, indicates that the main control chip is model Y, purchased from Company B).

a) Main control chip manufacturer code: Information indicating the gaming machine manufacturer stored in the built-in memory of the main control chip.

(c) Main control chip product code: Information indicating the model name of gaming machine P stored in the built-in memory of the main control chip.

The main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, and main control chip product code mentioned above are transmitted from the main control board P15 to the gaming media count control board P16 during the power-on process when the gaming machine P is powered on. The main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, and main control chip product code are then stored in the RWM area provided on the gaming media count control board P16, respectively.

e) Game media count control (game medal count control) chip ID number The game media count control chip ID number is information that includes an individual chip number for identifying the game media count control chip that is provided on the game media count control board P16 and integrates a CPU, RWM, and ROM, and is different information for each chip even if it is the same model.
For example, if the chip individual number is 4 bytes, 98765432h, and the chip is a game media count control chip purchased from Company A, the game media count control chip ID number 000000009876543221h (the lowest byte, 21h, indicates that the chip is a game media count control chip of model number X purchased from Company A) can be output to the rental unit.
For example, if the chip individual number is 4 bytes, 87654321h, and it is a game media count control chip purchased from Company B, the game media count control chip ID number 000000008765432141h (the lowest byte 41h indicates that it is a main control chip of model number Y purchased from Company B) can be output to the rental unit.

In the case of a gaming machine P that does not have a gaming media count control board P16 installed, the gaming media count control chip ID number 000000000000000000h can be output to the lending unit.

e) Game Media Count Control Chip Manufacturer Code This is information indicating the game machine manufacturer stored in the built-in memory of the game media count control chip.
In addition, in the case of a gaming machine P that does not have a gaming medium number control board P16 mounted thereon, 000000h can be output to the rental unit as the gaming medium number control chip manufacturer code.

(c) Game Media Number Control Chip Product Code: This is information indicating the model name of the game machine P stored in the built-in memory of the main control chip.
In addition, in the case of a gaming machine P that does not have the gaming media count control board P16 mounted, it is possible to output 0000000000000000h as the gaming media count control chip product code to the rental unit.

Figure 19 will be used to explain the gaming machine information included in the message when hall control and fraud monitoring information is set among the gaming machine information notifications.

A) Total Score The total score is the current number of gaming media stored in the gaming media count control board P16, and can increase or decrease depending on the gaming media insertion process and winning process. The current total score is displayed on the gaming media count display unit P9 provided on the gaming machine P. Total score information is sent to the lending unit. For example, if 2000 points are stored as the total score, 0007D0h can be output to the lending unit. The upper limit of the total score that can be stored in the gaming media count control board P16 is 16,383 points.

A) Inserted Points Inserted points refer to the number of gaming media inserted. For example, if three points are bet, 03h can be output to the lending unit. Also, if three points are bet and three points are settled on the gaming media number control board P16 by operating the settlement switch P6 before starting the game (before the start switch P3 is operated), FDh can be output to the lending unit. In other words, information ranging from -3 points (FDh) to +3 points (03h) can be output to the lending unit.

C) Awarded points Awarded points (also called winning points) indicate the number of gaming media awarded depending on the pattern combination that stops on the active line (winning) after all reels have stopped. For example, if 8 points are awarded, information 08h can be output, and if 15 points are awarded, information 0Fh can be output to the lending unit.

By transmitting the above-mentioned "total points," "inserted points," and "awarded points" to the rental unit, gaming machine P can detect abnormalities in the total points using the total point information managed by the rental unit.

D) Main control state 1
The main control status 1 indicates a status related to the gaming status. Specifically, each bit of the 1-byte data is assigned a gaming status. For example, when Bit 0 is 1, information indicating the RB status can be output to the rental unit. For example, when Bit 1 is 1, information indicating the BB status can be output to the rental unit. For example, when Bit 2 is 1, information indicating the AT status can be output to the rental unit. Bits 3 to 6 correspond to gaming machine status signals 1 to 4. The gaming machine status signals 1 to 4 can be used for different purposes or can be unused depending on the type of gaming machine P. For example, gaming machine status signal 1 can be output every time the points earned in AT play reach 100 points. Bit 7 is unused and configured to be able to output 0 regardless of the type of gaming machine P. By configuring in this way, for example, when an AT status is to be notified, 00000100B can be output to the rental unit.

E) Main control state 2
Main control state 2 indicates a state related to the gaming state, similar to main control state 1. Bits 0 to 2 correspond to gaming machine state signals 5 to 7. Gaming machine state signals 5 to 7 can be used for different purposes or not used depending on the type of gaming machine P. For example, gaming machine state signal 5 can be output when a specific RT state (replay probability variable state) is entered. Bits 3 to 7 are unused and configured to be able to output 0 regardless of the type of gaming machine P. By configuring in this way, for example, when a specific RT state is entered, 00000001B can be output to the lending unit.

(c) Gaming machine error state The gaming machine error state refers to an error state that is composed of information including an error code indicating an error occurring in the gaming machine P.

Specifically, Bits 0 to 5 indicate the error code. Bit 6 indicates whether there is an error in the game media count control board P16 (in this case, Bit 6 is 0) or an error in the main control board P15 (in this case, Bit 6 is 1). Bit 7 indicates whether the lending unit will only notify the error (in this case, Bit 7 is 0), or whether the lending unit will notify the error and also notify the hall computer (HC) of the error code via the lending unit (in this case, Bit 7 is 1).

For example, suppose a gaming machine P is capable of detecting random number anomalies and radio wave anomalies as types of errors. In this case, the error codes can be defined as 00001B for random number anomalies and 00010B for radio wave anomalies, and information containing these error codes can be output. Specifically, if the random number anomaly is an error in the main control board P15 and the lending unit only reports the error, 01000001B can be output to the lending unit. Furthermore, if the radio wave anomaly is an error in the game media count control board P16 and the lending unit reports the error and also notifies the hall computer of the error code, 10000010B can be output to the lending unit. Note that if no error has occurred or the gaming machine P does not have an error code, 00000000B can be output to the lending unit.

G) Gaming machine fraud 1 (main control)
Gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) indicates information regarding the detection of fraud related to the main control board P15 and the status of the main control board P15. The signal of gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) is treated as a signal for the hall computer. In other words, each signal of gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) output from the gaming machine P is output to the hall computer via the lending unit.

The signals that make up Gaming Machine Illegal Operation 1 (Main Control) are described below.

Bit 0 is assigned the setting change in progress signal. This indicates that the setting is being changed (in setting change mode) and that a setting change has been made. Bit 0 of the setting change in progress signal is 1 during the setting change until three seconds have passed since the setting change (after play becomes possible). Bit 0 is 0 in any situation other than three seconds have passed since the setting change or after the setting change (after play becomes possible). The setting change in progress signal is output while the setting change in progress status is ON (a "1" is stored in the setting change in progress status memory area of the RWM). The setting change in progress status is turned ON after setting change mode is activated, RAM initialization processing is performed, and the setting value is displayed. Then, three seconds after the setting change (after play becomes possible), the setting change in progress status is turned OFF (a "0" is stored in the setting change in progress status memory area of the RWM), stopping the output of the setting change in progress signal. Additionally, the setting change signal may be configured so that Bit 0 remains 1 from the time the setting is changed until one game play has ended after the setting change (for example, when all reels have stopped and the payout process has ended). In this case, Bit 0 remains 0 except during the time the setting is changed until one game play has ended after the setting change. The setting change signal is output while the setting change status is ON (storing "1" in the setting change status storage area of the RWM). The setting change status is turned ON after the setting change mode is activated, RAM initialization processing is performed, and the setting value is displayed. Then, at the end of one game play after the setting change, the setting change status is turned OFF (storing "0" in the setting change status storage area of the RWM), thereby stopping the output of the setting change signal.

In other words, the setting change signal is not output based on gaming machine P turning the setting change status ON. Rather, after gaming machine P turns the setting change status ON, when it is time to send hall control and fraud monitoring information, the setting change signal is output (Bit 0 becomes 1) based on the setting change status being ON. If the setting change status is turned OFF three seconds after the setting is changed (after play becomes possible), the setting change signal is stopped (Bit 0 becomes 0) based on the setting change status being OFF when it is time to send hall control and fraud monitoring information after the setting change status is turned OFF. Similarly, even if the setting change status is turned OFF when one game is completed, the setting change signal is stopped (Bit 0 becomes 0) based on the setting change status being OFF when it is time to send hall control and fraud monitoring information after the setting change status is turned OFF.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to control the output information of the setting change signal included in the hole control/fraud monitoring information by managing whether the setting change status is ON or OFF.

Note that when play becomes possible after a setting change, this means that betting can be performed by operating the bet switch, and once play becomes possible, betting can be performed by operating the bet switch, reel spinning can be performed by operating the start switch, or internal lottery processing can be performed, and reel stop processing can be performed by operating the stop switch. In other words, play is possible even during the period from the time the setting change signal is output until three seconds have elapsed, and betting can be performed by operating the bet switch, reel spinning can be performed by operating the start switch, or internal lottery processing can be performed, and reel stop processing can be performed by operating the stop switch.

Next, Bit 1 is assigned the setting confirmation signal. In other words, when the setting is being confirmed (in setting confirmation mode), Bit 1 is 1, and when the setting is not being confirmed, Bit 1 is 0.

In the example shown, the setting confirmation signal has a bit of 1 only during setting confirmation, but this is not limited to this and the signal may be configured to have a bit of 1 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) from the start of setting confirmation mode. In other words, when the setting confirmation mode is initiated on the main control board P15 (for example, when the setting key switch is turned on while the game is in standby mode), a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode is active is sent to the gaming media count control board P16, and the gaming machine fraud 1 bit sent from the gaming media count control board P16 to the lending unit becomes 1. The main control board P15 also sets a setting confirmation timer. When the main control board P15 measures the setting confirmation timer and determines that 5 seconds have elapsed (the setting confirmation timer's count value is 0), it sends a command to the gaming media count control board P16 indicating that 5 seconds have elapsed in the setting confirmation mode. Furthermore, since the main control board P15 has already received a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, the gaming machine fraud 1 bit sent from the gaming media count control board P16 to the lending unit becomes 0 even during the setting confirmation mode. The setting confirmation signal may be output for another period (for example, 3 seconds).

In this case, if five seconds have passed during setting check mode, a command indicating that five seconds have passed in setting check mode may or may not be sent. Also, if five seconds have passed during setting check mode, the gaming machine fraud 1 bit will remain at 1 until setting check mode ends. Even if setting check mode ends in less than five seconds (for example, two seconds), the gaming machine fraud 1 bit, indicating that setting check mode is in progress, will remain at 1 for the remaining three seconds (a total of five seconds). By configuring it in this way, even if setting check mode ends in a very short time, there is enough time to send information that the setting check mode is in progress to the rental unit, making it possible to detect any unauthorized operation of the setting key switch.

Furthermore, when the main control board P15 starts the setting confirmation mode (for example, when the setting key switch is turned on while the game is in standby mode), it sends a command to the gaming media count control board P16 indicating that it is in setting confirmation mode, and the gaming machine fraud 1 bit sent from the gaming media count control board P16 to the lending unit becomes 1. At the same time, the main control board P15 sets a setting confirmation timer, and sends to the gaming media count control board P16 a command regarding the setting confirmation timer being set and a command regarding the setting confirmation timer being updated each time the main control board P15 updates the setting confirmation timer. Based on the value (count value) of the setting confirmation timer sent from the main control board, the gaming media count control board P16 determines that 5 seconds have elapsed in the setting confirmation mode (determines that the timer (count value) of the setting confirmation timer is 0), thereby setting the gaming machine fraud 1 bit sent from the gaming media count control board P16 to the lending unit to 0.

In this case, if five seconds have passed during setting check mode, the command regarding the setting check timer being updated will no longer be sent. Furthermore, if five seconds have passed during setting check mode, the gaming machine fraud 1 bit will remain at 1 until setting check mode ends. Even if setting check mode ends in less than five seconds (for example, two seconds), the gaming machine fraud 1 bit, indicating that setting check mode is in progress, will remain at 1 for the remaining three seconds (a total of five seconds). By configuring it in this way, even if setting check mode ends in a very short time, there is enough time to send information indicating that the setting check mode is in progress to the rental unit, making it possible to detect any unauthorized operation of the setting key switch.

In addition, when the setting confirmation mode is initiated on the main control board P15 (for example, when the setting key switch is turned on in game standby mode), a command indicating that setting confirmation mode is active is sent to the gaming media count control board P16, and the gaming machine fraud 1 bit sent from the gaming media count control board P16 to the lending unit becomes 1. At the same time, the gaming media count control board P16 sets a setting confirmation timer, and based on the value (count value) of the setting confirmation timer, the gaming media count control board P16 determines that 5 seconds have elapsed in setting confirmation mode (determines that the timer (count value) of the setting confirmation timer is 0), thereby setting the gaming machine fraud 1 bit sent from the gaming media count control board P16 to the lending unit to 0.

In this case, if five seconds have elapsed during setting check mode, the setting check timer will stop updating. Furthermore, if five seconds have elapsed during setting check mode, the gaming machine fraud 1 bit will remain at 1 until setting check mode ends. Even if setting check mode ends in less than five seconds (for example, two seconds), the gaming machine fraud 1 bit, indicating that setting check mode is in progress, will remain at 1 for the remaining three seconds (a total of five seconds). By configuring it in this way, even if setting check mode ends in a very short time, there is enough time to send information indicating that the setting check mode is in progress to the rental unit, making it possible to detect any unauthorized operation of the setting key switch.

The timing for setting the setting confirmation timer may be after starting setting confirmation mode and displaying the setting value. If either of the conditions "in setting confirmation mode" or "the setting confirmation timer is not 0" is met, the setting confirmation status is turned ON and the setting confirmation signal is output. If neither of the conditions "in setting confirmation mode" or "the setting confirmation timer is not 0" is met, the setting confirmation status is turned OFF and the output of the setting confirmation signal is stopped.

Details on output control of the setting confirmation signal.

While the game progress main processing is waiting for play, it determines whether the setting key switch has risen (determines whether the setting key switch has changed from OFF to ON), and if it determines that the setting key switch has risen, it sets a timer for 5 seconds (5004.165 ms to be exact) as the setting confirmation signal output period (since the interrupt processing interval is 2.235 ms, the count value is set to "2239").

After setting the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period (setting the count value to "2239"), the timer measurement process within the interrupt process executes, which decrements the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period (decrements the count value by "1"). The gaming machine information management process within the same interrupt process determines whether 5 seconds have passed since the setting confirmation signal output period (determines whether the count value is "0"). If 5 seconds have not passed (if it is determined that the count value is not "0" (the zero flag is not set)), the setting confirmation signal is set. If 5 seconds have passed (if it is determined that the count value is "0" (the zero flag is set)), the setting confirmation signal is not set and processing proceeds to another step. Here, after the setting confirmation signal is set, when the timing for sending the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification arrives, the setting confirmation signal is output (sent to the lending unit).

Whether 5 seconds have passed since the setting check signal was output is determined by whether the zero flag is set. If the timer for the setting check signal output period is 0 as a result of the subtraction performed by the timer measurement process, the zero flag is set and it is determined that 5 seconds have passed. If the timer for the setting check signal output period is not 0 as a result of the subtraction performed by the timer measurement process, the zero flag is not set and it is determined that 5 seconds have not passed. Note that after 5 seconds have passed since the setting check mode ended and the output of the setting check signal has ended, the timer is set to 0, and when the timer is 0, the result of the subtraction performed by the timer measurement process is also 0, and the zero flag is set. Therefore, after 5 seconds have passed since the setting check mode ended, the setting check signal will not be set unless the setting check mode is re-entered.

In addition, while the game is in standby mode during the game progress main process, it determines whether the setting key switch has risen, and if it determines that the setting key switch has risen, it sets a 5-second timer as the setting confirmation signal output period. Then, in the next process, it determines whether the setting key switch signal has fallen (the setting key switch has fallen) (determines whether the setting key switch has changed from ON to OFF), and if it determines that there has been no fall, it again sets a 5-second timer as the setting confirmation signal output period and returns to the process of determining whether the setting key switch has fallen.

In this way, after it is determined that the setting key switch has risen, the 5-second timer is set as the setting confirmation signal output period until it is determined that the setting key switch has fallen, so the setting confirmation signal is always transmitted during setting confirmation mode. Also, even if it is determined that the setting key switch has fallen and the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting confirmation signal is transmitted until the setting confirmation signal output period timer reaches 0. Therefore, even if the setting confirmation mode ends within 5 seconds, the setting confirmation signal can be transmitted for 5 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends, ensuring that the setting confirmation signal is transmitted to the rental unit.

In addition, even if someone attempts to spy on the settings by switching to setting check mode and then instantly switching back to normal mode, the setting check signal will be transmitted for five seconds, leaving traces of the tampering.

In addition, because the process for setting the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period is executed using the loop processing of the main game progress processing, if the timer is decremented by executing the timer measurement process within the interrupt processing and then the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period is set again in the loop processing of the main game progress processing, the process for setting the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period can be executed multiple times, making it possible to reliably set the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period to its initial value (5 seconds). In other words, to enable the process for setting the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period to be executed multiple times (at least twice), the time required to execute one execution of the timer setting process for the setting confirmation signal output period is configured to be shorter than 2.235 ms/2 (half the time between interrupt processing).

Furthermore, with this configuration, the output period of the setting checking signal can be controlled by setting a timer, allowing for accurate control of the output of the setting checking signal using a simple program. Note that the output period of the setting checking signal is an example, and the output period of the setting checking signal may be set to any period (e.g., 1 second, 3 seconds, or 10 seconds) so that the output of the setting checking signal is not stopped immediately after the setting check mode ends. Alternatively, the output of the setting checking signal may be stopped immediately after the setting check mode ends, or the output of the setting checking signal may be stopped a predetermined period of time after the start of the setting check mode, regardless of whether the setting check mode is in progress.

Furthermore, if it is determined that the setting key switch has risen during game standby in the game progress main processing, a sub-control command including at least a command based on the rising edge of the setting key switch is set. Furthermore, if it is determined that the setting key switch has fallen during the game progress main processing, a sub-control command including at least a command based on the falling edge of the setting key switch is set. Then, in the sub-control command sending processing within the interrupt processing, the set sub-control command is sent to the sub-control board P12, and when the sub-control board P12 receives a sub-control command, it analyzes the sub-control command and executes processing according to the analysis results. For example, if a command based on the rising edge of the setting key switch is received, an effect corresponding to the setting confirmation mode is executed, and if a command based on the falling edge of the setting key switch is received, the setting confirmation mode is terminated and an effect corresponding to normal mode or standby mode is executed.

The effects corresponding to the setting check mode do not directly correspond to the output period of the setting check signal. For example, immediately after the setting check mode ends, the setting check signal is output continuously for 5 seconds, but a command based on the falling edge of the setting key switch is sent to the sub-control board P12, and if the command based on the falling edge of the setting key switch is received, the effects corresponding to the setting check mode immediately end. If the effects corresponding to the setting check mode were executed even after the setting check mode has ended, the player would be given the illusion that they could not continue playing. However, by configuring it in this way, it is possible to immediately switch the effect state when the setting check mode ends, preventing interference with the player's game progress. Furthermore, because the setting check signal continues to be output for 5 seconds even after the setting check mode has ended, it is possible to reliably send the setting check signal to the rental unit.

Following this, Bit 2 is assigned to fraud detection signal 1, Bit 3 is assigned to fraud detection signal 2, and Bit 4 is assigned to fraud detection signal 3. For example, in gaming machine P where random number anomalies are considered fraudulent, if random number anomaly detection is assigned to fraud detection signal 1, Bit 2 will be 1 if a random number anomaly is detected, and 0 if a random number anomaly is not detected.

When the gaming machine outputs any of the following signals, fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3, the game will stop. Furthermore, when the lending unit receives any of the following signals, fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3, the insertion and return of cards through the card insertion slot is disabled. In other words, when the lending unit receives any of the following signals, fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3, the card will not be returned even if the card return switch is operated, and the lending unit will not be able to insert a new card through the card insertion slot. Furthermore, lending or replay is possible through the lending unit. Furthermore, the lending unit can also receive count notifications. Furthermore, deposits are possible through the bill insertion slot.

In addition, even if the gaming machine stops gameplay while outputting any of the fraud detection signals 1, 2, and 3, communication with the lending unit continues. Specifically, the lending unit transmits gaming machine information notifications every 300 ms, and when the gaming machine's counting switch is operated, a counting notification is sent to the lending unit with a non-zero counted medal number (for example, 50).

Next, Bit 5 is assigned the security signal. Specifically, Bit 5 is 1 when a fraud detection signal is being output (Bits 2 to 4 are 1), when a setting change signal is being output (Bit 0 is 1), when a setting confirmation signal is being output (Bit 1 is 1), or when a complete signal is being output due to the execution of a stop process (when the safety device (complete function) is activated) (Bit 6 is 1); and Bit 5 is 0 in all other situations.

When the gaming machine is outputting a security signal, the game progress is halted. Furthermore, when the lending unit is receiving a security signal, and any of the following signals are received: Fraud Detection Signal 1, Fraud Detection Signal 2, and Fraud Detection Signal 3, the insertion and return of a card through the card insertion slot is not possible. In other words, when the lending unit is receiving a security signal, and any of the following signals are received: Fraud Detection Signal 1, Fraud Detection Signal 2, and Fraud Detection Signal 3, the card will not be returned even if the card return switch is operated, and the lending unit will not be able to insert a new card through the card insertion slot. Furthermore, lending or replay is possible through the lending unit. Furthermore, the lending unit can also receive count notifications. Furthermore, deposits are possible through the bill insertion slot.

In addition, even if the gaming machine is halting gameplay while outputting a security signal, communication with the rental unit continues. Specifically, the rental unit transmits gaming machine information notifications every 300 ms, and when the gaming machine's counting switch is operated, a counting notification is sent to the rental unit with a non-zero counted medal number (for example, 50).

In addition, when the lending unit is receiving a security signal but is not receiving any of the fraud detection signals 1, 2, and 3 (when the lending unit is receiving a security signal and is receiving a setting change signal, when the lending unit is receiving a security signal and is receiving a setting confirmation signal, or when the lending unit is receiving a security signal and is receiving a complete signal), the card can be returned when the card return switch is operated. It is also possible to insert a new card into the card insertion slot in the lending unit. It is also possible to lend or replay a card in the lending unit. It is also possible to receive count notifications in the lending unit. It is also possible to deposit money through the bill insertion slot.

Next, Bit 6 is assigned the complete signal (also called the stop signal, safety device activation signal, or complete function activation signal). For example, when the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value (e.g., 19,000) and the stop process is being executed, Bit 6 becomes 1, and when the value of the difference counter is equal to or less than the predetermined value, Bit 6 becomes 0.

The complete signal is configured to continue outputting for 30 seconds after the complete function is activated and game play is stopped, and to end output after 30 seconds have elapsed. Therefore, the complete signal can be output for 30 seconds even if the specified termination conditions for the complete function's activation to end are met. In other words, even if the specified termination conditions for the complete function's activation to end within 30 seconds after the complete function is activated and game play is stopped, the complete signal can be output to the lending unit for 30 seconds after the complete function is activated and game play is stopped. Note that the timing at which the output of the complete signal begins is sometimes referred to as the specified timing after the complete function is activated. Also, even if the complete function is activated (game play is stopped) when 30 seconds have elapsed since the complete function was activated and game play was stopped, the output of the complete signal will stop 30 seconds after the complete function was activated and game play was stopped. In other words, even if the complete function is operating, the output of the complete signal will end after 30 seconds have elapsed, and the complete function will continue to operate until the specified termination conditions for terminating operation of the complete function are met.

Furthermore, like the setting confirmation signal described above, the counter that manages the output time of the complete signal can be essentially stopped from updating while the complete function is in operation (for example, the counter can be configured to always be set to its initial value while the complete function is in operation), so the complete signal can be output for 30 seconds after the completion of the complete function. With this configuration, the complete signal output period can be the time the complete function is in operation plus 30 seconds, allowing the complete signal to be output to the rental unit for a longer period of time.

As will be described in more detail below, the initialization process triggered by the setting change process corresponds to the predetermined termination condition for terminating operation of the complete function. Therefore, when the complete function is activated, the complete signal begins to be output at a first timing (when play is stopped). The gaming machine is then powered off at a second timing, 30 seconds before the first timing, when the setting key switch is turned to the ON position, powering on the gaming machine, the setting change mode is activated, and the setting change in progress signal and complete signal are output. If the setting change is in progress 30 seconds after the first timing, the setting change in progress signal continues to be output, but the output of the complete signal is terminated. The time (30 seconds) for outputting the complete signal may or may not include the time when the gaming machine is powered off. The predetermined termination condition for terminating operation of the complete function is not limited to the above, and may be any timing related to the setting change, such as when the setting change mode is activated or when the setting change mode is terminated.

Alternatively, the complete function may be activated and begin outputting a complete signal at a first timing (when play stops), and then the gaming machine is powered down at a second timing 30 seconds before the first timing, the setting key switch is turned to the ON position to power on the gaming machine, the setting change mode is activated and a setting change signal is output, but the complete signal may be initialized by the initialization process associated with the setting change mode. In this case, the output time for the complete signal will be within 30 seconds, but the initialization program capacity can be reduced by making the addresses in the initialization range associated with the setting change process consecutive.

In addition, if the gaming machine is powered off while a complete signal is being output, the gaming machine will stop outputting the complete signal. Because the rental unit cannot receive the complete signal during this time, the rental unit may choose not to execute a specified process based on the receipt of the complete signal, or it may execute one. Examples of specified processes executed by the rental unit based on the receipt of the complete signal include sending information to the hall computer indicating that the complete function is in operation, or disabling the rental unit's rental button acceptance.

Furthermore, if the power to the rental unit is interrupted while the complete signal is being output, the gaming machine will determine that a VL abnormality has occurred and will suspend the output of the complete signal. Suspending the output of the complete signal means that a "1" is stored in Bit 6 of Gaming Machine Illegal 1 (main control) corresponding to the complete signal, and the update of the timer that manages the output time of the complete signal is halted. Note that timer updates can be halted by skipping the timer update process or prohibiting interrupt processing. This configuration prevents a situation in which the power to the rental unit is turned off immediately after the complete signal is output, and then turned on after 30 seconds have passed, preventing the rental unit from receiving the complete signal. In other words, even if the power of the rental unit is turned OFF immediately after the complete signal is output, the timer for managing the output time of the complete signal stops updating, so the output of the complete signal is maintained even 30 seconds after the start of output of the complete signal. Once the power of the rental unit is turned ON, the timer for managing the output time of the complete signal resumes updating, so it is possible to output the complete signal for 30 seconds while connected to the rental unit. Note that if the power of the rental unit is turned OFF while the complete signal is being output and then turned ON again, the timer for managing the output time of the complete signal may be reset to 30 seconds.

In addition, if a VL abnormality occurs while the complete signal is being output, the output of the complete signal will be interrupted, but if another specified abnormality occurs while the complete signal is being output, the output of the complete signal will continue. Other specified abnormalities include any or all of the following: settlement request communication error, game media count control reception abnormality, main control reception abnormality, total score upper limit abnormality, rental serial number abnormality, rental device communication abnormality 1, rental device communication abnormality 2, rental device communication abnormality 3, rental device communication abnormality 4, rental device communication abnormality 5, and rental device communication abnormality 6. In these cases, communication with the rental unit is possible, and the rental unit can receive the complete signal. Therefore, it is conceivable that the output of the complete signal will continue without interruption, enabling stable output of the complete signal. In addition, for rental serial number abnormality, rental device communication abnormality 1, rental device communication abnormality 2, rental device communication abnormality 3, rental device communication abnormality 4, rental device communication abnormality 5, and rental device communication abnormality 6, communication with the rental unit is possible, but since there is some kind of abnormality in the communication, the output of the complete signal may be interrupted.

In the above-described embodiment, if the power to the rental unit is interrupted while the complete signal is being output, the gaming machine determines that there is a VL abnormality and halts the output of the complete signal. However, this is not limited to this; the gaming machine may continue to output the complete signal even if it determines that there is a VL abnormality while the complete signal is being output. In this case, the processing capacity related to the output of the complete signal can be reduced. Furthermore, if the gaming machine determines that there is a VL abnormality while the complete signal is being output, the output of the complete signal may be terminated. In this case, there is a possibility that the rental unit will not be able to receive the complete signal, but it will be possible to stably execute processing related to the VL abnormality.

Also, if the output of fraud detection signals 1-3 ends three seconds after fraud is cleared, the complete function is activated and begins outputting a complete signal at the first timing. If fraud is then detected at the second timing, 30 seconds before the first timing, one of the fraud detection signals 1-3 and the complete signal are output. If the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is during fraud detection or after fraud is cleared and three seconds have yet to pass since fraud was cleared, the output of fraud detection signals 1-3 is maintained, but the output of the complete signal is terminated. Also, if the complete function is activated and begins outputting a complete signal at the first timing, and fraud is then detected at the second timing, 30 seconds before the first timing, one of the fraud detection signals 1-3 and the complete signal are output. If the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is after fraud is cleared and three seconds have yet to pass since fraud was cleared, the output of fraud detection signals 1-3 has ended, and the output of the complete signal is also terminated. This configuration makes it less likely that the output of the complete signal and the output of fraud detection signals 1 to 3 will overlap (the output time of the complete signal alone will be 27 seconds or more), making it easier to receive the complete signal even when the processing load on the rental unit is high.

Furthermore, if the output of fraud detection signals 1 to 3 ends three seconds after fraud is released and the count of complete signal output (timer updates) essentially stops when the complete function is activated (if the complete signal is always output while the complete function is activated and the complete signal is output for 30 seconds after the complete function has finished operating), the complete signal will begin to be output at the first timing when the complete function is activated, and then the complete signal will be maintained at the second timing when the complete function is activated even if 30 seconds have passed since the first timing, and then at the third timing after fraud is detected, one of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 and the complete signal will be output, and then at the fourth timing before three seconds have passed after fraud is released, fraud detection signals 1 to 3 and the complete signal will be output, and at the fifth timing after the fourth timing and three seconds have passed after fraud is released, the output of fraud detection signals 1 to 3 will have ended and the complete signal will be output. Then, at the sixth timing, which is after the fifth timing and 30 seconds have passed since the initialization process associated with the setting change mode was executed, the output of fraud detection signals 1-3 has ended, and the output of the complete signal has also ended. With this configuration, the complete signal can be configured to end output after the fraud detection signals 1-3, ensuring the output period for the complete signal alone and making it easier to receive the complete signal even when the processing load on the rental unit is high.

In addition, since the setting change in progress signal ceases output three seconds after the setting change mode ends, the complete function is activated and begins outputting the complete signal at a first timing. The gaming machine is then powered down at a second timing, 30 seconds before the first timing, the setting key switch is turned to the ON position, the gaming machine is powered on, the setting change mode is activated, and the setting change in progress signal and complete signal are output. If the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is during the setting change mode, or after the setting change mode has ended but before three seconds have passed since the setting change mode ended, the setting change in progress signal continues to be output, but the complete signal ceases to be output. Note that the time (30 seconds) for which the complete signal is output may or may not include the time the gaming machine is powered down. In addition, in a configuration in which output of the setting change in progress signal ends at the end of one game after the setting change is completed, the complete function is activated and the complete signal begins to be output at a first timing, then the gaming machine is powered down at a second timing 30 seconds before the first timing, the setting key switch is turned to the ON position to power on the gaming machine, the setting change mode is activated and the setting change in progress signal and complete signal are output, and if the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is during the setting change mode or after the setting change mode has ended and before one game has been played, the output of the setting change in progress signal is maintained but the output of the complete signal is terminated. Note that the time (30 seconds) for outputting the complete signal may or may not include the time when the gaming machine is powered down.

Furthermore, the complete function is activated and begins outputting a complete signal at a first timing. Then, at a second timing, 30 seconds before the first timing, the gaming machine is powered down. The setting key switch is turned to the ON position, powering on the gaming machine. The setting change mode is activated, and the setting change signal and complete signal are output. If the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is the end of the setting change mode and 3 seconds have passed since the end of the setting change mode, the output of the setting change signal and the complete signal also end. Note that the time (30 seconds) for outputting the complete signal may or may not include the time the gaming machine is powered down. This configuration makes it less likely that the output of the complete signal and the output of the setting change signal will overlap (the output time of the complete signal alone will be 27 seconds or more), making it easier to receive the complete signal even when the lending unit is under heavy processing load.

Furthermore, if the count of the complete signal output (timer update) essentially stops when the complete function is activated (if the complete signal is always output while the complete function is activated and is output for 30 seconds after the complete function has finished operating), the complete signal starts to be output at the first timing when the complete function is activated, and then the complete signal is maintained at the second timing when the complete function is activated even after 30 seconds have passed since the first timing, and then the gaming machine is powered down, the setting key switch is turned to the ON position to turn on the gaming machine, and the setting change mode is activated at the third timing when the setting change mode is activated, and then the setting change signal and complete signal are output at the fourth timing, which is before 3 seconds have passed since the setting change mode ended and the initialization process was executed, and then the setting change signal and complete signal are output, and at the fifth timing after the fourth timing and 3 seconds have passed since the setting change mode ended and the initialization process was executed, the output of the setting change signal has stopped and the complete signal is output. Then, at the sixth timing, which is after the fifth timing and 30 seconds have passed since the setting change mode ended and the initialization process was executed, the output of the setting change signal has ended, and the output of the complete signal has also ended. With this configuration, the complete signal can be made to end output after the setting change signal, ensuring the output period for the complete signal alone and making it easier to receive the complete signal even when the processing load on the rental unit is high.

Also, if the setting confirmation signal ends output three seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends, the complete function is activated and begins outputting the complete signal at the first timing. Then, at the second timing, 30 seconds before the first timing, the setting key switch is turned to the ON position to activate the setting confirmation mode, and the setting confirmation signal and complete signal are output. If the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is during the setting confirmation mode or after the setting confirmation mode has ended and three seconds have passed since the setting change, the setting confirmation signal continues to be output, but the complete signal ends. Also, if the complete function is activated and begins outputting the complete signal at the first timing, then the setting key switch is turned to the ON position at the second timing, 30 seconds before the first timing, to activate the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation signal and complete signal are output. If the timing 30 seconds after the first timing is after the setting confirmation mode has ended and three seconds have passed since the setting confirmation mode ended, the setting confirmation signal ends and the complete signal ends. This configuration makes it less likely that the output of the complete signal and the output of the setting confirmation signal will overlap (the output time of the complete signal alone will be 27 seconds or more), making it easier to receive the complete signal even when the processing load on the rental unit is high.

In addition, if the setting confirmation signal stops being output 3 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends, and the count of the complete signal output (timer update) effectively stops when the complete function is activated (if the complete signal is always output while the complete function is activated and is output for 30 seconds after the complete function ends), the complete signal starts being output at the first timing when the complete function is activated, and then the complete signal continues to be output at the second timing when the complete function is activated even though 30 seconds have passed since the first timing, and then the setting confirmation signal and complete signal are output at the third timing when the setting key switch is turned to the ON position and the setting confirmation mode is activated, and then the setting confirmation signal and complete signal are output at the fourth timing, which is before 3 seconds have passed since the setting confirmation mode ended, and then the setting confirmation signal and complete signal are output at the fifth timing, which is after the fourth timing and 3 seconds have passed since the setting confirmation mode ended, and at the fifth timing, which is after the fourth timing and 3 seconds have passed since the setting confirmation mode ended, the output of the setting confirmation signal stops and the complete signal is output. Then, at the sixth timing, which is after the fifth timing and 30 seconds have passed since the initialization process associated with the setting change mode was executed, the output of the setting confirmation signal has ended, and the output of the complete signal has also ended. With this configuration, the complete signal can be made to end output after the setting confirmation signal, ensuring the output period for the complete signal alone and making it easier to receive the complete signal even when the processing load on the rental unit is high.

In this way, even if other signals are output to the rental unit while the complete signal is being output, the output of the complete signal will be maintained. These other signals include the door open signal, the setting door open signal, the setting change signal, the setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3.

Next, Bit 7 is unused and is set to 0.

Here, we will explain by example what kind of signals are output, focusing on the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and security signal. Note that while we will not mention fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, or fraud detection signal 3 here, they also output a "0" or "1." Furthermore, the first game refers to the first game played after the setting change mode is entered.

(Case 1) For example, suppose a setting change is made and then completed (play becomes possible). In this case, a "1" (on) is output as the setting change in progress signal from the specified timing when setting change mode is started, and a "0" (off) is output as the setting change in progress signal three seconds after the setting change is completed. In this case, if the setting confirmation mode is not entered after the setting change is completed, a "0" (off) continues to be output as the setting confirmation in progress signal. Also, even if a "0" (off) is output as the fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, or fraud detection signal 3, if a "1" is output as the setting change in progress signal, the security signal will output a "1" (on). If a "1" is not output as the fraud detection signal for any of fraud detection signals 1, fraud detection signal 2, or fraud detection signal 3 at the timing when a "0" is output as the setting change in progress signal, a "0" is output as the security signal. Furthermore, if "1" is output as any of the fraud detection signals 1, 2, or 3 at the same time that "0" is output as the setting change signal, "1" is output as the security signal.

(Case 2) For example, suppose that after making a setting change, the power switch is turned off (a power outage occurs) three seconds after the setting change is complete, and then the power switch is turned on (power is restored). Then, three seconds have passed since the setting change was completed. In this case, "1" (on) is output as the setting change in progress signal from the specified timing when setting change mode is started, and while the power is out, no output processing is performed. From a specific timing after power is restored, "1" (on) is output as the setting change in progress signal, and three seconds after the setting change is completed (not including the time during the power outage), "0" (off) is output as the setting change in progress signal. In this case, if the device does not transition to setting confirmation mode after the setting change is completed, "0" (off) will continue to be output as the setting confirmation signal. Furthermore, even when "0" (off) is output as fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, or fraud detection signal 3, "1" is output as the setting change signal, so the security signal is output as "1" (on). If "1" is not output as any of fraud detection signals 1, fraud detection signal 2, or fraud detection signal 3 at the timing when "0" is output as the setting change signal, "0" is output as the security signal. Note that if "1" is output as any of fraud detection signals 1, fraud detection signal 2, or fraud detection signal 3 at the timing when "0" is output as the setting change signal, "1" is output as the security signal.

(Case 3) For example, suppose that after a setting change, the device transitions to setting confirmation mode three seconds after the setting change is complete, and then ends setting confirmation mode three seconds after the setting change is complete. In this case, a "1" (on) setting change signal is output from the specified timing when the setting change mode is started. Even after the setting change is complete but before three seconds have passed since the setting change was completed, the setting change signal continues to be output as "1" (on) and the setting confirmation signal continues to be output as "1" (on). After the setting confirmation mode ends after the setting change is complete but before three seconds have passed since the setting change was completed, the setting change signal continues to be output as "1" (on) and the setting confirmation signal continues to be output as "0" (off). After three seconds have passed since the setting change was completed and the device is not in setting confirmation mode, the setting change signal continues to be output as "0" (off) and the setting confirmation signal continues to be output as "0" (off). Furthermore, even when "0" (off) is output as fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, or fraud detection signal 3, "1" is output as the setting change signal, so the security signal is output as "1" (on). If "1" is not output as any of fraud detection signals 1, fraud detection signal 2, or fraud detection signal 3 at the timing when "0" is output as the setting change signal, "0" is output as the security signal. Note that if "1" is output as any of fraud detection signals 1, fraud detection signal 2, or fraud detection signal 3 at the timing when "0" is output as the setting change signal, "1" is output as the security signal.

H) Gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or control of the number of gaming media)
Gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or gaming media number control) indicates information regarding the detection of fraud related to the main control board P15 or gaming media number control board P16, and information regarding the status of the main control board P15 or gaming media number control board P16. Note that the gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or gaming media number control) signal is treated as a hall computer signal. In other words, each gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) signal output from the gaming machine P is output to the hall computer via the lending unit.

The signals that make up Gaming Machine Fraud 2 (Main Control or Gaming Media Count Control) are described below.

Bit 0 is assigned the setting door open signal. The setting door open signal is a signal that indicates whether the setting key switch cover member (also called the setting door), which covers the setting key switch used to change settings, is open or not. When the setting key switch cover member is open, Bit 0 becomes 1, and information indicating that the setting key switch cover member is open is included in gaming machine fraud 2. When the setting key switch cover member is closed, Bit 0 becomes 0, and information indicating that the setting key switch cover member is closed is included in gaming machine fraud 2. Note that Bit 0 will be 0 in gaming machines P that do not have a setting key switch cover member or a gaming machine P that does not have the function to detect when the setting key switch cover member is open.

Next, Bit 1 is assigned a door open signal (also called a door switch signal). The door open signal is a signal that indicates whether the front door P2 of the gaming machine P is open or not. When the front door P2 of the gaming machine P is open, Bit 0 becomes 1, and information indicating that the front door P2 is open is included in gaming machine fraud 2. When the front door P2 of the gaming machine P is closed, Bit 0 becomes 0, and information indicating that the front door P2 is closed is included in gaming machine fraud 2.

The door open signal is output according to the open/close state of the front door P2, based on the ON/OFF status of the door switch detected by the input port reading process within the interrupt process described above.

If the input port reading process within the interrupt process determines that front door P2 is open, a 5-second timer (5001.93 ms to be exact) is set (the count value is set to "2239" because the interrupt process interval is 2.235 ms). Then, the timer measurement process within the same interrupt process measures the timer (decrements the count value by "1"). Then, if the gaming machine information management process within the same interrupt process determines that the door open signal output time has not exceeded 5 seconds (the count value is not 0 as a result of subtracting the count value (the zero flag is not set)), the door open signal is set. If the door open signal output time has exceeded 5 seconds (the count value is 0 as a result of subtracting the count value (the zero flag is set)), the door open signal is not set, and processing to set signals related to other gaming machine information is executed. Note that the door open signal output time is not limited to 5 seconds and may be any other time (e.g., 3 seconds).

If the input port reading process in the next interrupt process determines that front door P2 is open, the 5-second timer is set again (because the interrupt process interval is 2.235 ms, the count value is set again to "2239"). In other words, if front door P2 is open, the 5-second timer will continue to be set repeatedly (the timer setting process will be executed multiple times).

In this way, when front door P2 is open, the 5-second timer continues to be set for each interrupt process, so even if the timer is decremented (the count value is decremented), the zero flag will not be set. In other words, the process of decrementing "1" from the count value "2239" is repeated each time the timer measurement process within the interrupt process is executed. With this configuration, a door open signal is always output when front door P2 is open.

When front door P2 is closed, the input port reading process within the interrupt process detects that the door switch is ON, thereby determining that front door P2 is closed. If it is determined that front door P2 is closed, the 5-second timer is not reset. Then, a timer measurement process within the same interrupt process measures the timer (decrements the count value by "1"). Then, a gaming machine information management process within the same interrupt process determines whether the door open signal has been output for 5 seconds. Here, because the 5-second timer is not reset when front door P2 is closed, the timer (count value "2239") set when front door P2 is open is decremented as the interrupt process is repeated, and the timer (count value) approaches "0".

In this embodiment, the process of setting the timer and the process of decrementing the timer are executed within the same interrupt process. Therefore, if the initial value is set to "2238," which is 5001.93 ms (2238 times x 2.235 ms), the number of interrupts until it reaches "0" will be 2237, a value less than 5 seconds (4999.7 ms to be exact). Therefore, the initial value is set in advance to "2238 + 1 (2239)." In other words, the timer measurement process within the interrupt process that sets the initial value "2239" will set the count value to "2238," making it possible to set the number of interrupts to 2238.

When the timer count reaches "0" through the timer measurement process, the zero flag is set, and the output of the door open signal can be stopped. In other words, the door open signal is output for five seconds after the front door P2 is closed, and the output of the door open signal is stopped after five seconds have passed. Note that after five seconds have passed since the door was closed and the output of the door open signal has ended, the timer is set to zero. When the timer is at zero, the result of the subtraction performed through the timer measurement process also becomes zero, setting the zero flag. Therefore, after five seconds have passed since the door was closed, the door open signal will not be set unless the door is opened again. In other words, for five seconds after the front door P2 is closed, Bit 1 is set to 1, indicating that the front door P2 is open. After five seconds have passed, Bit 1 is set to 0, indicating that the front door P2 is closed. Therefore, when the front door P2 is closed, the gaming machine fraud 2 may contain information indicating that the front door P2 is open, or it may contain information indicating that the front door P2 is closed.

With this configuration, the output period of the door open signal can be controlled by setting a timer, allowing for accurate control of the output of the door open signal using a simple program. Note that the output period of the door open signal is an example; the output period of the door open signal may be set to any period (e.g., 1 second, 3 seconds, or 10 seconds) so that the output of the door open signal is not stopped immediately after the door is closed, or the output of the door open signal may be stopped immediately after the door is closed.

In addition, the sub-notification data output process within the interrupt process sends a door switch signal to the sub-control board P12 depending on whether the door switch is ON or OFF. If the sub-control board P12 receives an OFF door switch signal, it determines that the door is open and controls the execution of door-open notification effects such as a door-opening sound or the display of a door-opening message.

The door open effect does not directly correspond to the output period of the door open signal. For example, immediately after the door is closed, the door open signal is output continuously for 5 seconds, but the door switch signal becomes an ON signal and is sent to the sub-control board P12. However, by configuring the sub-control board P12 to execute the door open effect for 5 seconds after detecting that the door switch signal has changed from OFF to ON, the output period of the door open signal and the execution period of the door open effect can be made similar. This makes it possible to visually check the output period of the door open signal, making it easier for administrators to understand the signal output period.

In this embodiment, the output period of the door open signal and the execution period of the door open effect are made similar, but this is not limited to this; the execution period of the door open effect may be longer or shorter than the output period of the door open signal.

In this embodiment, the timer is set for each interrupt process, but this is not limiting; the timer may be set for two or more predetermined number of interrupts. However, the interrupt interval for executing the timer set process must be shorter than the time indicated by the timer (count value), so that the timer value (count value) does not reach 0 between setting the timer and setting the next timer.

In addition, when the gaming machine outputs a set door open signal or a door open signal, the game progress is stopped. Furthermore, when the lending unit receives either a door open signal or a door open signal, lending or replay, inserting or returning a card through the card insertion slot, and depositing money through the bill insertion slot are not possible. In other words, when the lending unit receives either a door open signal or a door open signal, cards cannot be returned even if the card return switch is operated, and new cards cannot be inserted through the card insertion slot in the lending unit. Furthermore, lending or replay is not possible even if the lending switch or replay switch is operated in the lending unit, and bills cannot be inserted into the bill insertion slot. However, it is possible for the lending unit to receive count notifications.

In addition, even if the game progress is stopped while the gaming machine is outputting a set door open signal or a door open signal, communication with the lending unit continues. Specifically, the lending unit transmits gaming machine information notifications every 300 ms, and when the gaming machine's counting switch is operated, a counting notification is sent to the lending unit with a value other than 0 (for example, 50) for the counted medal number.

In addition, when the gaming machine is outputting a set door open signal or a door open signal, even if the rental switch on the rental unit is operated, a rental notification will be sent to the gaming machine with the number of rental medals set to 0. Also, since communication between the gaming machine and the rental unit is normal, the rental unit can normally send the rental serial number to the gaming machine.

In addition, if the output of the set door open signal ends three seconds after the set door is closed (after closure is detected), the complete function is activated and begins outputting the complete signal at the first timing. If the set door is then opened (opening is detected) at the second timing 30 seconds before the first timing, the set door open signal and complete signal are output. If the timing 30 seconds after the first timing occurs while the set door is open or after the set door is closed and before three seconds have passed since the set door was closed, the output of the set door open signal is maintained, but the output of the complete signal ends. In addition, if the complete function is activated and begins outputting the complete signal at the first timing, and then the set door is opened at the second timing 30 seconds before the first timing, the set door open signal and complete signal are output. If the timing 30 seconds after the first timing occurs after the set door is closed and after three seconds have passed since the set door was closed, the output of the set door open signal ends, and the output of the complete signal also ends. This configuration makes it less likely that the output of the complete signal and the set door open signal will overlap (the output time of the complete signal alone will be 27 seconds or more), making it easier to receive the complete signal even when the processing load on the rental unit is high.

In addition, if the set door open signal stops being output 3 seconds after the set door is closed, and the count of the complete signal output (timer update) essentially stops when the complete function is activated (if the complete signal is always output while the complete function is activated and is output for 30 seconds after the complete function has finished operating), the complete signal starts being output at the first timing when the complete function is activated, and then the complete signal is maintained being output at the second timing when the complete function is activated even if 30 seconds have passed since the first timing, and then the set door open signal and complete signal are output at the third timing after the set door is opened, and then the set door open signal and complete signal are output at the fourth timing before 3 seconds have passed since the set door is closed, and then at the fifth timing after the fourth timing and 3 seconds have passed since the set door is closed, the output of the set door open signal stops and the complete signal is output. Then, at the sixth timing, which is after the fifth timing and 30 seconds have passed since the initialization process associated with the setting change mode was executed, the output of the set door open signal has ended, and the output of the complete signal has also ended. With this configuration, the complete signal can be made to end output after the set door open signal, ensuring the output period for the complete signal alone and making it easier to receive the complete signal even when the processing load on the rental unit is high.

In addition, if the door open signal output ends three seconds after the front door P2 is closed (after closure is detected), the complete function is activated and begins outputting the complete signal at the first timing. If the front door P2 is then opened (opening is detected) at the second timing, 30 seconds before the first timing, the door open signal and complete signal are output. If the timing 30 seconds after the first timing occurs while the front door P2 is open or after the front door P2 is closed and before three seconds have passed since the front door P2 was closed, the door open signal output is maintained, but the complete signal output ends. In addition, if the complete function is activated and begins outputting the complete signal at the first timing, the door open signal and complete signal are output when the front door P2 is opened at the second timing, 30 seconds before the first timing, the door open signal and complete signal are output. If the timing 30 seconds after the first timing occurs after the front door P2 is closed and after three seconds have passed since the front door P2 was closed, the door open signal output ends, and the complete signal output also ends. This configuration makes it less likely that the output of the complete signal and the output of the door open signal will overlap (the output time of the complete signal alone will be 27 seconds or more), making it easier to receive the complete signal even when the processing load on the rental unit is high.

Furthermore, if the door open signal stops being output 3 seconds after the front door P2 is closed, and the count of the complete signal output (timer update) essentially stops when the complete function is activated (if the complete signal is always output while the complete function is activated and the complete signal is output for 30 seconds after the complete function has finished operating), the complete signal starts being output at the first timing when the complete function is activated, and then the complete signal is maintained being output at the second timing when the complete function is activated even if 30 seconds have passed since the first timing, and then the door open signal and complete signal are output at the third timing after the front door P2 is opened, and then the door open signal and complete signal are output at the fourth timing, which is before 3 seconds have passed since the front door P2 is closed, and then at the fifth timing, which is after the fourth timing and after 3 seconds have passed since the front door P2 is closed, the output of the door open signal stops and the complete signal is output. Then, at the sixth timing, which is after the fifth timing and 30 seconds have passed since the initialization process associated with the setting change mode was executed, the output of the door open signal has ended, and the output of the complete signal has also ended. With this configuration, the complete signal can be made to end output after the door open signal, ensuring the output period for the complete signal alone and making it easier to receive the complete signal even when the processing load on the rental unit is high.

Here, we will explain the time chart for the complete signal using Figure 57.

Figure 57, "Operation of the complete signal while the complete function is activated," shows a time chart of an embodiment in which the complete signal turns OFF 30 seconds after game play stops due to activation of the complete function, even while the above-mentioned complete function is activated.

Figure 57, "Coordinated Operation of Complete Function, Door Switch, and Setting Change Device," shows a time chart of an embodiment in which the front door P2 opens after the complete function is activated and the gaming machine is powered off; after the gaming machine is powered on, the complete function is deactivated during initialization processing associated with the operation of the setting change device; and then the setting change device is deactivated and the front door P2 is closed. "A" in the figure is the output time of the complete signal, which is the time from when the complete signal begins to be output until the gaming machine is powered off. "A'" in the figure is the output time of the complete signal, which is the time from when the gaming machine is powered on until the output of the complete signal ends. The output time of the complete signal is 30 seconds from when play stops due to the activation of the complete function, so A + A' = 30 seconds. Also, "B" in the figure is the output time of the door open signal, which is ON for 3 seconds after the door switch detects closure, so B = 3 seconds. Additionally, "C" in the diagram indicates the output time of the setting change signal, which remains ON for 3 seconds after the setting change device is deactivated, so C = 3 seconds. However, this is not limited to this in other embodiments; for example, if the complete signal is reset when the power is turned on or the setting change device is activated, A' = 30 seconds. Also, if the output of the complete signal is stopped due to initialization processing associated with activation of the setting change device, "A'" = 0 seconds. For example, if the door open signal is set to 3 seconds after the door switch is detected as open, the door open signal may turn OFF 3 seconds after it turns ON. For example, if the setting change signal is set to 3 seconds after activation of the setting change device, the signal may turn OFF 3 seconds after activation of the setting change device.

Next, Bit 2 is unused and is set to 0.

Next, Bit 3 is assigned the detection of game media count clear. Clearing the game media count refers to clearing the total points stored in the game media count control board P16 when the total point clear switch provided on the game media count control board P16 is operated. For example, if the bet points are "3" and the total points stored in the game media count control board P16 are "1000," operating the total point clear switch will change the bet points to "3" and the total points stored in the game media count control board P16 to "0." In other words, operating the total point clear switch will not clear the bet points. If operation of the total point clear switch is detected, Bit 3 will be "1," and if operation of the total point clear switch is not detected, Bit 3 will be "0." Note that in gaming machines P that do not have a total point clear switch, Bit 3 will be "0." If the total score is initialized, Bit 3 will be set to "1" until 3 seconds have passed since the total score was initialized and play becomes possible, after which Bit 3 will be set to "0".

Detection of game media number cleared is related to the total score clear status; if the total score clear status is ON, Bit 3 corresponding to game media number cleared detection is set to "1," and if the total score clear status is OFF, Bit 3 corresponding to game media number cleared detection is set to "0." However, this is not limited to this, and Bit 3 corresponding to game media number cleared detection may also be set to "0" three seconds after play becomes possible after the total score is cleared, regardless of its relationship to the total score clear status.

In addition, when the bet score is "3" and the total score stored in the gaming medium count control board P16 is "1000", operating the total score clear switch may be configured to set the bet score to "0" and the total score stored in the gaming medium count control board P16 to "0". In other words, operating the total score clear switch clears both the bet score and the total score. In this case, the administrator will not forget to clear the bet, making the clearing process easier for the administrator.

Next, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are unused and are set to 0.

I) Gaming machine fraud 3 (main control or control of the number of gaming media)
Gaming machine fraud 3 indicates information regarding the detection of fraud related to the main control board P15 or the gaming media number control board P16 provided as a spare, and information regarding the status of the main control board P15 or the gaming media number control board P16.
In the gaming machine P of this embodiment, these bits are unused. In other words, Bit 0 to Bit 7 are set to 0.

Note that Bit 2, Bit 4, and Bit 5 of Gaming Machine Illegal 2, and Bit 0 and Bit 1 of Gaming Machine Illegal 3 are unused and are therefore basically set to "0." However, if any of these bits becomes "1" and is sent to the lending unit and received by the SC board in the lending unit, the lending operation is prohibited (e.g., the lending switch is disabled even if it is operated).

This is to prevent the unused portion from being used carelessly, since if an act of fraud occurs, such as the insertion of a malicious program or data into unused storage space, the lending operation will be prohibited if the unused portion is used.

It is also envisioned that a common lending unit will be used by a controlled gaming machine (also known as an enclosed gaming machine) that uses gaming balls for play and the medalless gaming machine of this embodiment. Bit 2 of gaming machine fraud 2 in the controlled gaming machine is used to detect illegal radio waves, Bit 4 of gaming machine fraud 2 is used to detect winning ball count abnormality 1, Bit 5 of gaming machine fraud 2 is used to detect winning ball count abnormality 2, Bit 0 of gaming machine fraud 3 is used to detect small balls, and Bit 1 of gaming machine fraud 3 is used to detect iron balls. When these types of fraud are detected, each bit becomes "1," and the SC board operates to prohibit lending operations. This configuration reduces the burden on halls associated with the introduction of controlled gaming machines and medalless gaming machines. Furthermore, once the lending unit is prohibited from lending, it can be restored to a lending-permitted state by receiving an error release signal, such as by operating a reset switch installed on gaming machine P.

The main control board P15 and/or the gaming media count control board P16 may be provided with a fraud detection means for detecting fraud. Below, we will provide an example of the behavior of the gaming machine P when, for example, a radio wave abnormality is detected by the fraud detection means.

As a first behavior, when the gaming machine P (main control board P15 or gaming media count control board P16) detects a radio wave abnormality, it stops play on the main control means (enters an error state). At this time, communication between the gaming media count control board P16 and the lending unit (outputting and receiving various messages) may continue, or communication between the gaming media count control board P16 and the lending unit may be stopped. Furthermore, communication between the main control board P15 and gaming media count control board P16 may continue, or communication between the main control board P15 and gaming media count control board P16 may be stopped. Furthermore, communication between the main control board P15 and the performance control board may continue, or communication between the main control board P15 and the performance control board may be stopped. Note that the performance control board may control an error notification using a lamp, image display, or amplifier (sound).

A second behavior is that when the gaming machine P (main control board P15 or gaming media count control board P16) detects a radio wave abnormality, game play using the main control means is possible. At this time, communication between the gaming media count control board P16 and the lending unit (outputting and receiving various messages) may continue, or communication between the gaming media count control board P16 and the lending unit may be discontinued. Furthermore, communication between the main control board P15 and gaming media count control board P16 may continue, or communication between the main control board P15 and gaming media count control board P16 may be discontinued. Furthermore, communication between the main control board P15 and the performance control board may continue, or communication between the main control board P15 and the performance control board may be discontinued. Note that while game play is possible under the control of the main control board P15, error notifications may be issued using lamps, image displays, or amplifiers (sound) under control of the performance control board.

Note that while radio wave abnormalities have been used as an example, the above behavior is not limited to radio wave abnormalities and can also be applied to other abnormalities that can be detected by fraud detection means, such as random number abnormalities, setting value abnormalities that are determined to be abnormal when setting value data stored in the RWM of the main control board P15 is not within the normal range (0 to 5), and RWM abnormalities that are determined to be abnormal when data stored in the RWM of the main control board P15 is not normal when power is restored.

Furthermore, in cases where the fraud detection means for detecting fraud is capable of detecting multiple anomalies, the device may be configured to behave differently depending on the type of anomaly, such as performing the first behavior described above for a first anomaly (for example, a random number anomaly) and performing the second behavior described above for a second anomaly (for example, a radio wave anomaly).

Next, we will explain the game information included in the hall control and fraud monitoring information described below: J) Game Information Number, K) Type Information 1, L) Count Information 1, S) Type Information 2, and C) Count Information 2.

Information consisting of type information 1 and count information 1 may be referred to as game information 1, and information consisting of type information 2 and count information 2 may be referred to as game information 2. This game information 1 or game information 2 consists of a total of two bytes: type information (first byte) and count information (last byte).

The type information consists of a data type (first 4 bits) and a data number (last 4 bits). When the data type is "0001B", the information indicates the specified number (number of bets). When the data type is "0010B", the information indicates the number of points awarded. Note that data types "0" and "3" to "15" are unused. The data number is fixed to "0001B" when the data type is "0001B", indicating the specified number, and when the data type is "0010B", indicating the number of points awarded. In other words, data numbers "0" and "2" to "15" are unused.

The count information has different settings for each data type. When the data type is "0001B," which indicates a specified number, the count information can take values from "00000001B" to "00000011B." In other words, bits 4 to 7 are unused, and bits 0 to 3 are used. When the data type is "0010B," which indicates the number of awards, the count information can take values from "00000001B" to "00001111B" (allowing for values up to the maximum number of awards for each gaming machine). In other words, bits 4 to 7 are unused, and bits 0 to 3 are used.

Furthermore, when the number of game information items is 0, the above type information and count information are not transmitted. This game information is treated as a signal for the hall computer. In other words, the game information output from the gaming machine P is output to the hall computer via the rental unit.

J) Number of Game Information This is information indicating the number of game information pieces consisting of type information and count information. For example, when the number of game information pieces is 0, type information 1, count information 1, type information 2, and count information 2 are not output. For example, when the number of game information pieces is 1, type information 1 and count information 1 are output. For example, when the number of game information pieces is 2, type information 1 and count information 1 are output, and type information 2 and count information 2 are output.

K) Type information 1, and S) Type information 2
The type information is information that constitutes the above-mentioned game information. When indicating the number of bets (inserted points) used in a game, the type information becomes "00010001B" as type information 1. When indicating the number of awarded points (awarded points) awarded as a result of a game, the type information becomes "00100001B" as type information 1 or type information 2.

C) Count information 1, and C) Count information 2
The count information is information that constitutes the above-mentioned game information. When the number of bets (input points) used in a game is output as count information 1, a value corresponding to the number of bets (input points) used in the game is set. When the number of awards (award points) awarded as a result of a game is output as count information 1 or count information 2, a value corresponding to the number of awards (award points) awarded in the game is set. Note that, when a replay role is won as the game result of the game and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, a value corresponding to the number of bets (input points) used in the game is set as the number of awards (award points) awarded as a result of the game.

For example, if three coins are bet and the start switch is operated, the game information count "00000001B" is output based on the reception of the start switch command, and the game information output is "0001000100000011B (1103h)," with type information indicating the number of bets (input points) used in the game in the upper byte and count information, which is a value corresponding to the number of bets (input points) used in the game, in the lower byte.

For example, if the internal lottery that determines the winning combination results in a draw that can award 10 points, and a symbol combination that awards 10 points when all reels stop is displayed, then at the end of the game (when the command to stop all reels is received), the game information number "00000001B" will be output, with the upper byte being type information indicating the number of awards (awarded points) awarded as a result of the game, and the lower byte being count information that is a value corresponding to the number of awards (awarded points) awarded in that game, and "0010000100001010B (210Ah)" will be output as the game information.

For example, if a start switch acceptance command for when 3 points are used as the investment points is received immediately after receiving a command to stop all reels when 10 points are awarded, the game information number will be "00000010B", and game information 1 will be "0001000100000011B (1103h)", where the upper byte is type information indicating the number of bets (input points) used in the game and the lower byte is count information which is a value corresponding to the number of bets (input points) used in the game. Game information 2 will be "0010000100001010B (210Ah)", where the upper byte is type information indicating the number of investment points awarded as a result of the game and the lower byte is count information which is a value corresponding to the number of investment points awarded in the game.

In addition, the input points are determined using the information stored in (_WK_MDL_IN) described above, and the award points are determined using the information stored in (_WK_MDL_OUT) described above. The memory area for input points used to output the input points for the gaming machine information of hole control and fraud monitoring information is stored in a different memory area from the memory area for input points used to output the input points for the gaming information. Similarly, the memory area for award points used to output the award points for the gaming machine information of hole control and fraud monitoring information is stored in a different memory area from the memory area for award points used to output the award points for the gaming information. The memory area (_WK_MDL_IN) that can store the input points for the gaming information and the memory area (_WK_MDL_OUT) that can store the award points for the gaming information are initialized after transmission.

<Counting notification>
The above-mentioned counting notification (see Figure 20) has a message length of 7 bytes and is a signal sent from the gaming machine P to the lending unit based on the gaming machine P accepting operation of the counting switch P7.

The information that makes up the count notification consists of message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), count serial number (1 byte), count point (1 byte), count cumulative point (2 bytes), and checksum (1 byte).

The message length indicates the length of the count notification message, and is 7 bytes, so is set to "0x07".

The command is "0x02", which indicates a count notification.

The counting serial number is a serial number used exclusively for counting purposes, and is a dedicated serial number that is different from the serial numbers mentioned above and the rental serial number described below. The counting serial number ranges from "0x00" to "0xFF", and is incremented by gaming machine P each time it sends a counting notification. Of the counting serial numbers, "0x00" is a counting serial number that is only sent when the power is turned on, and the value following "0xFF" is "0x01".

The counting points are the points related to the count sent in one gaming machine information notification sent by the gaming machine P every 300 ms. The counting points range from "0x00" to "0x32", so a maximum of 50 points can be sent to the lending unit in one gaming machine information notification. Also, if the total points stored in the gaming media number control board P16 are 50 points or more, the data "0x32" indicating 50 points is sent, but if the total points stored in the gaming media number control board P16 are less than 50 points, data corresponding to the current total points stored in the gaming media number control board P16 is sent (for example, if the total points stored in the gaming media number control board P16 are 30 points, the data "0x1E" indicating 30 points is sent).

The above-mentioned example of counting points is an example in which 50 points are counted when the counting switch P7 is operated only once (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a short press operation), but it is also possible to count 1 point as the counting point when the counting switch P7 is operated only once, and to count 50 points as the counting point when the counting switch P7 is operated for a long time.

In this case, a short press of the counting switch P7 is accepted when the period during which the level data regarding the acceptance of the counting switch P7 operation on the gaming media count control board P16 is set to a value indicating ON (the period during which the acceptance of the counting switch P7 operation is set to a value indicating ON during interrupt processing) is less than a predetermined period (e.g., less than 500 ms). In other words, if the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted during a first period that is less than the predetermined period, a short press of the counting switch P7 is deemed to have been accepted, and one count point is added to the counting points.

An example of the acceptance of a long press of the counting switch P7 is when the gaming media count control board P16 maintains a value indicating ON for the period of time (the period during which the counting switch P7 operation reception is ON in the interrupt processing) that is longer than a predetermined period (e.g., 500 ms or more). In other words, when the counting switch P7 operation is accepted for a second period of time that is longer than a predetermined period, a long press of the counting switch P7 is accepted and 50 count points are counted. Furthermore, if the counting switch P7 is still being long pressed at the time of sending the counting notification after sending the counting notification of "50" to the lending unit, the counting notification of "50" is sent to the lending unit. In other words, once a long press is determined, the counting notification will continue to send counting points of "50" to the rental unit until the counting switch P7 is no longer operated (until the level data related to the operation reception of the counting switch P7 becomes a value indicating OFF) (however, if the total points are a value less than 50, that value will be counted). In this case, no counting will occur until it is determined that the counting switch P7 has been operated with a long press (for example, for 500 ms).

Furthermore, after accepting operation of the counting switch P7, the game media count control board P16 increments the value of the counting switch timer for each interrupt process (every 1 ms) to measure the time that the counting switch P7 is pressed (initial value is "0"). If the value of the counting switch timer reaches 500 (if the counting switch P7 is pressed for 50 ms), the increment process is not executed in the next interrupt process. In other words, the value of the counting switch timer remains at 500 even if the actual time that the counting switch P7 is pressed exceeds 500 ms, such as 1000 ms.

This is to prevent the count point from becoming "1" if the count switch timer value continues to increment, causing the count switch timer value to exceed the memory limit, causing the count switch timer value to count from 0 again, and the count switch P7 being released when the count switch timer value is between 0 and 499 for the second week.

For this reason, when the counting switch timer value is incremented, it is determined whether the counting switch timer value is 500, and if the counting switch timer value is not 500, the increment process is executed, but if the counting switch timer value is 500, the increment process is not executed and the next process is executed.

If the counting switch P7 is released while the counting switch timer value is being counted, the counting switch timer value is initialized to 0, allowing the counting switch timer value to be counted from 0 when the counting switch P7 is pressed again.

In addition, while the count of the counting switch timer has been described as incrementing, it may also be decrementing. In this case, the counting switch timer value is set to 501 when operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted, and the decrement process is not executed when the counting switch timer value is 1, thereby achieving the same effect as the incrementing mode.

The cumulative count points are the accumulated value of the count points since the gaming machine P was powered on. The cumulative count points range from "0x0000" to "0xFFFF", and the count points are added each time counting is performed. If the cumulative count points exceed "0xFFFF", the value next to "0xFFFF" will be "0x0000". Furthermore, when the gaming machine P is powered on, the cumulative count points are cleared to 0.

The checksum is the sum of the values of the message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), counting serial number (1 byte), counting point (1 byte), and counting cumulative point (2 bytes). The checksum is used to determine whether the counting notification received by the lending unit is correct in relation to the counting notification sent from gaming machine P.

<Loan Notice>
The lending notification has a message length of 5 bytes, and is a signal sent from the lending unit to the gaming machine P based on the lending unit accepting operation of the lending switch. When the lending unit receives a counting notification from the gaming machine P, it sends a lending notification to the gaming machine P. However, if the gaming machine information notification has not been received, if the gaming machine information type of the gaming machine information notification is notified as other than "0x02" (if it is notified as other than hall control/fraud monitoring information), or if the counting points of the counting notification are notified in the range of 1 to 50 (a value other than 0), the lending points will be notified to the gaming machine P as 0.

The information that makes up the loan notification consists of message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), loan serial number (1 byte), number of loaned gaming media (1 byte), and checksum (1 byte).

The message length indicates the length of the loan notification message, and is 5 bytes, so is set to "0x05".

The command is "0x13", which indicates a loan notification.

The loan serial number is a serial number used exclusively for loans, and is a special serial number related to loans that differs from the serial numbers and counting serial numbers mentioned above. The loan serial number ranges from "0x00" to "0xFF", and is incremented each time a loan receipt result response (described below) is sent from gaming machine P. Of the loan serial numbers, "0x00" is a loan serial number that is sent only when communication with gaming machine P begins, and the value following "0xFF" is "0x01".

The rental points are the rental points sent to the gaming machine P when the rental switch on the rental unit is operated. Rental points range from "0x00" to "0x32," so a maximum of 50 points can be sent to the gaming machine P in one gaming machine information notification. Also, if the rental points stored in the storage medium (membership card, visitor card, etc.) inserted in the rental unit are 50 points or more, the data "0x32" indicating 50 points is sent to the gaming machine P. However, if the rental points stored in the storage medium are less than 50 points, data corresponding to the current rental points stored in the storage medium is sent (for example, if the rental points stored in the storage medium are 20 points, the data "0x14" indicating 20 points is sent).

The checksum is the sum of the message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), rental serial number (1 byte), and rental points (1 byte). When gaming machine P receives a rental notification sent from the rental unit to gaming machine P, the checksum is used to determine whether the received rental notification is correct.

<Loan acceptance result response>
The loan receipt result response has a message length of 5 bytes and is a signal sent from the gaming machine P to the loan unit upon receiving the loan notification. When the gaming machine P receives the loan notification from the loan unit, it sends a loan receipt result response to the loan unit. However, if the loan serial numbers notified by the loan unit are not consecutive, if the gaming machine P is unable to loan due to a RAM error or the like in the main control board P15 or the gaming media count control board P16, if the sum of the total points and loan points stored in the gaming media count control board P16 exceeds the upper limit of the total points stored in the gaming media count control board P16 (for example, the above-mentioned 16,383), or if the total points stored in the gaming media count control board P16 is equal to or greater than a threshold value (15,000 or greater), a value indicating an abnormality is returned as the loan point receipt result. The information constituting the loan receipt result response consists of message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), loan serial number (1 byte), loan point receipt result (1 byte), and checksum (1 byte).

The message length indicates the length of the loan notification message, and is 5 bytes, so is set to "0x05".

The command is "0x03", which indicates a loan acceptance response.

The rental serial number is the same as the rental serial number stored in the rental notification received from the rental unit. For example, if the rental serial number in the rental notification is 0x01, the rental serial number in the rental receipt result response sent to the rental unit will be 0x01. However, if the rental point receipt result is not normal (abnormal), the rental serial number received from the rental unit when the rental point receipt result was normal will be used as the rental serial number in the response. In other words, the gaming machine P stores the rental notification sent from the rental unit (e.g., all or part of the message length, command, rental serial number, number of rental gaming media, and checksum) and is equipped to respond with the rental point receipt result when it is normal when the rental point receipt result is abnormal. Furthermore, it is sufficient to store only the most recent rental notification; by not storing a new one when the rental point receipt result is abnormal, the most recent rental notification when it is normal can be sent to the rental unit. Note that multiple rental notifications may be stored in addition to the most recent one. The rental serial number is cleared to 0 when the gaming machine P is powered on.

If the rental point receipt result is normal, it will be "0x00", and if it is abnormal, it will be "0x01". Abnormal values can occur if the rental serial numbers notified by the rental unit are not consecutive, if the gaming machine P is unable to lend due to a RAM error on the gaming media count control board P16, if the sum of the total points and rental points stored on the gaming media count control board P16 exceeds the upper limit of the total points stored on the gaming media count control board P16, or if the total points stored on the gaming media count control board P16 is above the threshold (15,000 or more). The rental unit will also determine an abnormality if the value is anything other than "0x00" or "0x01" due to other factors.

The checksum is the sum of the message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), loan serial number (1 byte), and loan point receipt result (1 byte). The checksum is used to determine whether the loan receipt result response received by the loan unit is correct in relation to the loan receipt result response sent to the loan unit.

In addition, when sending a command from the game media count control board P16 to the lending unit, the lending control command set process (also called the message set process) is executed. In the lending control command set process, the message length set in register A, the command set in register A, the lending serial number set in register A, the lending point receipt result set in register A, the checksum set in register A, etc. are set in the transmission data register.

In addition, when multiple commands are sent consecutively from the game media number control board P16 to the lending unit, a lending control command consecutive set process (also called a message consecutive set process) is executed. In the lending control command consecutive set process, the address is updated after the lending control command set process is executed, and the lending control command set process is executed again. The number of times the lending control command set process is executed is based on the value set in register B. In other words, before executing the lending control command consecutive set process, the number of commands is set in register B and then executed.

In addition, when sending a command with a value of 0 as information to be sent to the lending unit, the lending control command zero set process is executed. In the lending control command zero set process, a command with a value of 0 is set in register A and the lending control command set process is executed a predetermined number of times.

The lending control command zero set process is used to align the gaming media count control chip ID to 9 bytes when it is sent to the lending unit. For example, if the gaming media count control chip ID number of the gaming media count control board P16 is 21876543, the lending control command set process within the lending control command zero set process is executed four times to set the upper four bytes to 0, sending 00h four times, then the lending control command set process within the lending control command continuous set process is executed four times to send 21h, 87h, 65h, and 43h, and finally the identification code 41h is sent in the lending control command set process.

Incidentally, since the main control chip ID number is transmitted in advance as 9-byte data from the main control board P15 and stored on the game media count control board P16, the lending control command zero set process is not used. In other words, the game media count control board P16 transmits the 9-byte data of the main control chip ID number transmitted from the main control board P15 to the lending unit as is.

In addition, to send 0 data for Reserve, Reservation 1, and Reservation 2 in the gaming machine performance information, a command with a value of 0 is sent to the rental unit using the rental control command zero set process.

The basic communication sequence between gaming machine P and the rental unit is explained with reference to Figure 20.

<Basic communication sequence>
The gaming machine P transmits gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control and fraud monitoring information to the rental unit as the gaming machine information notification mentioned above.

Gaming machine installation information is sent to the rental unit every 60 seconds (60,000 ms) from the time the gaming machine P has completed startup. Gaming machine performance information is sent to the rental unit every 180 seconds (180,000 ms) from the time the gaming machine P has completed startup. Hall control and fraud monitoring information is sent to the rental unit every 300 ms from the time the gaming machine P has completed startup.

Gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information may be sent to the rental unit at the same time. For example, after 60 seconds have passed since gaming machine P's startup is complete, gaming machine installation information and hall control/fraud monitoring information may be sent at the same time. In this case, gaming machine installation information is sent first, and then hall control/fraud monitoring information is sent 300 ms later.

Also, for example, after 180 seconds have passed since the start-up of gaming machine P is complete, gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information may be transmitted at the same time. In this case, gaming machine installation information is transmitted first, followed by gaming machine performance information 300 ms later, and then hall control/fraud monitoring information 300 ms later.

In this way, in terms of information transmission priority, gaming machine installation information has the highest priority, followed by gaming machine performance information, and finally hall control and fraud monitoring information. As a result, the timing of sending hall control and fraud monitoring information will be delayed by up to 600 ms.

However, if either the main control status 1 or main control status 2 information in the hall control and fraud monitoring information shown in Figure 19 has been updated (if it is determined that the main control status has been updated (if a YES is determined in "Main control status change?" in Figure 30)), or if there is game information (if a YES is determined in "Is insertion information ≠ 0 or payout information ≠ 0?" in Figure 30), the transmission priority of the hall control and fraud monitoring information will be the highest.

Specifically, it is determined that the main control state has been updated when any of the following bits - Bit 0 indicating RB in main control state 1, Bit 1 indicating BB, Bit 2 indicating AT, Bit 3 indicating gaming machine state signal 1, Bit 4 indicating gaming machine state signal 2, Bit 5 indicating gaming machine state signal 3, and Bit 6 indicating gaming machine state signal 4 - is updated from "0" to "1" (corresponding to the gaming state transitioning to the gaming state corresponding to each bit). In this way, when it is determined that the main control state has been updated, it becomes possible to send hall control and fraud monitoring information to the lending unit with the highest priority.

In addition, if any of the following bits - Bit 0 indicating RB in main control state 1, Bit 1 indicating BB, Bit 2 indicating AT, Bit 3 indicating gaming machine status signal 1, Bit 4 indicating gaming machine status signal 2, Bit 5 indicating gaming machine status signal 3, or Bit 6 indicating gaming machine status signal 4 - is updated from "1" to "0" (corresponding to the end of the gaming state corresponding to each bit), it is determined that the main control state has been updated. In this way, if it is determined that the main control state has been updated, it is possible to send hall control and fraud monitoring information to the lending unit with the highest priority.

Note that Bit 7 in Main Control Status 1 is unused, but if Bit 7 is updated from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0," it is determined that the main control status has not been updated. By configuring it in this way, even if the unused Bit 7 is updated due to noise, etc., the transmission priority of hole control and fraud monitoring information does not change, allowing for normal communication with the rental unit.

However, this is not a limitation, and an alternative configuration is also possible in which it is determined that the main control state has been updated when unused Bit 7 is updated from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0." In this case, there is no need to check for updates for each bit (checking whether the RAM value for Main Control State 1 has changed), reducing the program size and speeding up the program for the update confirmation process. Alternatively, the program may be configured to determine whether the RAM value is greater than "40h (01000000B)" or "7Fh (01111111B)," and if so, branching to prevent a change in transmission priority. With this configuration, normal communication with the rental unit can be achieved by checking the RAM value and not changing the transmission priority even if an unused Bit changes from "0" to "1."

Next, if any of Bit 0 indicating gaming machine status signal 5 in main control status 2, Bit 1 indicating gaming machine status signal 6, or Bit 2 indicating gaming machine status signal 7 is updated from "0" to "1" (this corresponds to the gaming status transitioning to the gaming status corresponding to each Bit), it is determined that the main control status has been updated.

In addition, if any of Bit 0 indicating gaming machine status signal 5 in main control status 2, Bit 1 indicating gaming machine status signal 6, or Bit 2 indicating gaming machine status signal 7 is updated from "1" to "0" (corresponding to when the gaming status corresponding to each Bit has ended), it is determined that the main control status has been updated.

Note that Bits 3 to 7 of Main Control Status 2 are unused, but if any of Bits 3 to 7 are updated from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0," it is determined that the main control status has not been updated. By configuring it in this way, even if the unused Bits 3 to 7 are updated due to noise, etc., the transmission priority of hole control and fraud monitoring information does not change, allowing for normal communication with the rental unit.

However, this is not a limitation, and an alternative configuration is also possible in which it is determined that the main control state has been updated when unused bits 3 to 7 are updated from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0." In this case, there is no need to check for updates for each bit (checking whether the RAM value for main control state 2 has changed), reducing the program size required for the update confirmation process and speeding up the program. Alternatively, the program may be configured to determine whether the RAM value is greater than "04h (00000100B)" or "07h (00000111B)," and if so, branching to prevent a change in transmission priority. With this configuration, normal communication with the rental unit can be achieved by checking the RAM value and not changing the transmission priority even if an unused bit changes from "0" to "1."

Next, the presence of gaming information is determined by whether the information stored in the input point memory area (_WK_MDL_IN) and the awarded point memory area (_WK_MDL_OUT), which are used to output gaming information and are part of the information that makes up the hall control and fraud monitoring information, is "0".

The input point information stored in the input point memory area is stored when a start switch acceptance command sent from the main control board P15 is received. Furthermore, the award point information stored in the award point memory area is stored when a stop all reels command sent from the main control board P15 is received. This command reception process is executed as an interrupt process, and within the interrupt process, the command reception process is executed first, followed by the gaming machine information management process (gaming media number control).

The gaming machine information management process (gaming media count control) executes a process to send hole control and fraud monitoring information to the lending unit. When sending the hole control and fraud monitoring information, it determines whether the input point information stored in the input point memory area and the awarded point information stored in the awarded point memory area are both "0." If the input points or awarded points are not 0, the hole control and fraud monitoring information can be immediately sent to the lending unit with first priority. In other words, it is possible to send the hole control and fraud monitoring information to the lending unit with first priority within the interrupt process that stores the input points or awarded points.

If it is determined that the input point information stored in the input point memory area and the awarded point information stored in the awarded point memory area are both "0" and that the main control status has not been updated, the information to be output is selected based on the gaming machine installation information notification request flag and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag. In other words, gaming machine installation information has the first priority, gaming machine performance information has the second priority, and hall control and fraud monitoring information has the third priority.

Another way to determine whether game information is present is to determine whether the game information count is "0." The game information count can be "1" or "2" in the game information count storage area (_WK_INF_GAM) when the investment point information stored in the investment point storage area is not "0" or when the award number information stored in the award number storage area is not "0." The gaming machine information management (gaming media count control) of the interrupt process generates the game information count from the information in the investment point storage area and the award number storage area (storing the game information count in the game information count storage area) before sending the hole control/fraud monitoring information. If the game information count is "1" or "2," the hole control/fraud monitoring information can be sent to the rental unit with the highest priority.

In this way, by changing the priority of hall control and fraud monitoring information depending on the situation, when a gaming machine information notification is sent, if the gaming state is changing (the start or end of a gaming state) and the input points or payout points are not 0, the hall control and fraud monitoring information can be sent with priority, even if gaming machine installation information or gaming machine performance information is being sent. This allows the hall computer managed by the gaming facility to accurately manage which gaming state the input points and payout points belong to.

In addition, to associate the gaming machine status signal of the hall control and fraud monitoring information with the gaming information (inserted points or awarded points) of the hall control and fraud monitoring information, a freeze is performed when the gaming state transitions (when the gaming state starts or ends).

For example, if a game is started with three coins as the Nth game number in the normal state (the start lever is operated), a BB is won, the BB symbol combination is stopped by the stop operation, and the BB state signal is turned ON, a freeze is executed for a predetermined period X after the BB symbol combination is stopped and before the BB state signal is turned ON, so that the time from the start of the game to the BB state signal being turned ON exceeds 300 ms.

Figure 35 shows an undesirable example in which the input number signal and BB status signal are simultaneously transmitted in the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification. Figure 36 shows a favorable example in which the input number signal and BB status signal are accurately transmitted in the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification.

The "insertion number information" is information used to send an insertion number signal for game information type information 1 or 2 in Figure 19, and is information stored in a certain area of the RAM of the game media count control board P16. A "0" in the insertion number information means that 0 is stored in the insertion number information, and an "n" in the insertion number information means that any of 1 to 3 is stored in the insertion number information. When the main control board P15 receives a start lever command, it sends a command indicating the insertion number to the game media count control board P16, causing the game media count control board P16 to store any of the insertion number information "1" to "3" as the specified number for that game. After sending a hall control/fraud monitoring information notification including the insertion number signal, the game media count control board P16 stores "0" in the insertion number information.

The "BB status information" is information for transmitting the BB status signal of main control status 1 in the gaming machine information in Figure 19, and is information stored in a certain area of the RAM of the main control board P15. A "0" in the BB status information means that a 0 is stored in the BB status information, and a "1" in the BB status information means that a 1 is stored in the BB status information. The BB status information is stored as "1" in the operation status setting process within the operation status management process when all reels have stopped and the BB pattern combination has stopped, and as "0" in the operation status setting process within the operation status management process when all reels have stopped and the BB gaming state has ended. In other words, the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification including the BB status signal is transmitted from the start of BB to the end of BB. Furthermore, if "1" is stored in the BB state information, a main control state command is sent to the gaming media count control board P16 by interrupt processing of the main control board P15, and the gaming media count control board P16 acquires the received main control state command, and if the main control state is in the BB state, stores the BB signal information in a specified area of the RAM of the gaming media count control board P16 that stores the main control state for sending a hall control fraud monitoring information notification.

"Freeze information" is information indicating that a freeze is being executed, and is stored in a certain area of the RAM of the main control board P15. Note that instead of information indicating that a freeze is being executed, timer information related to the execution of the freeze may also be used, and whether or not a freeze is being executed may be determined by determining whether or not the timer information related to the execution of the freeze is 0.

Figure 35 shows a case where operation of the start lever is accepted immediately after the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification is sent, and "n (n is a number)" is stored in the number of balls inserted information, and all stop switch operations and BB symbol combinations are stopped within 300 ms of sending the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification, and "1" is stored in the BB status information. In this case, at the timing when the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification is sent after the BB symbol combination has stopped, the number of balls inserted signal and the BB status signal may be turned ON and sent to the lending unit.

In Figure 35, the number of coins inserted and the BB state signal are transmitted simultaneously. The correct information for the number of coins inserted is the normal gaming state before the BB gaming state is entered, so the number of coins inserted is transmitted as incorrect information (number of coins inserted during the BB gaming state).

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 36, a freeze is executed for a predetermined period X ("X" in Figure 36) when the BB symbol combination is displayed, and a "1" is stored in the BB status information after the freeze ends. The value of X can be (300 ms) - (the shortest time Y from when the start lever is operated (the start of play) until a 1 is stored in the BB status information), and if Y = 200 ms is designed, the value will exceed X = 100 ms. Furthermore, since the time required for play varies depending on the player's skill, X = 300 ms may be used to ensure reliable transmission. Since the interval between hole control and fraud monitoring information notifications is 300 ms, executing a freeze for 300 ms or more will ensure that an accurate ball-in count signal is transmitted under any circumstances.

Furthermore, the timing for executing the freeze can be any time between the BB symbol combination stopping and the storing of "1" in the BB status information. For example, the operation status setting process within the operation status management process could store "X" in RAM as the freeze timer value (count value), and then store "1" in the BB status information RAM after determining that X has reached 0.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to align the number of coins inserted and the main control status information for each game, allowing accurate information to be sent to the rental unit.

Also, for example, in the Nth game that enters the BB state, if a game is started with 3 coins bet (the start lever is operated), a small win is won, the small win symbol combination is stopped by the stop operation, a predetermined number of coins are paid out, the BB state ends, and the BB state signal turns OFF, in order to ensure that the time from the start of payout to the BB state signal turning OFF exceeds (300 ms) + (payout time), a freeze is executed for a predetermined period X after the BB state ends and before the BB state signal is turned OFF.

Figure 37 shows an undesirable example in which the payout number signal and BB status signal are not sent simultaneously in the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification. Figure 38 shows a preferable example in which the payout number signal and BB status signal are sent accurately in the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification.

"Payout number information" is information used to send a payout number signal for game information type information 1 or 2 in Figure 19, and is information stored in a certain area of the RAM of the game medium count control board P16. A "0" in the payout number information means that 0 is stored in the payout number information, and an "m" in the payout number information means that any value between 1 and 15 is stored in the payout number information. When all reels are stopped, the main control board P15 sends a command indicating the payout number to the game medium count control board P16, causing the game medium count control board P16 to store any value between "1" and "15" as the payout number for that game. After sending a hall control/fraud monitoring information notification including the payout number signal, the game medium count control board P16 stores "0" in the payout number information.

Other information is the same as that explained in Figures 35 and 36.

Figure 37 shows a case where all reels are stopped after the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification is sent, "m (m is a number)" is stored in the payout information, and the BB gaming state ends within 300 ms after the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification is sent, storing "0" in the BB status information. In this case, at the timing when the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification is sent after the BB gaming state has ended, the payout number signal may be ON and the BB status signal may be OFF, and they may be sent to the lending unit.

In Figure 37, the payout number signal and BB state signal will no longer be transmitted simultaneously. Since the payout number signal in this case is correct information for the BB gaming state, it will be transmitted as incorrect information (payout number information for the normal gaming state).

As shown in Figure 38, this embodiment is configured to freeze for a predetermined period X ("X" in Figure 38) at the end of the payout process, and store "0" in the BB status information after the freeze ends. The value of X can be (300 ms) - (the shortest time Z from the end of the payout process until storing 0 in the BB status information), and if Z = 250 ms, the value will exceed X = 50 ms. Furthermore, since the time required for the payout process varies depending on the maximum payout number set for each gaming machine, X = 300 ms may be used to ensure reliable transmission. Since the interval between hole control and fraud monitoring information notifications is 300 ms, executing the freeze for 300 ms or more will ensure that an accurate payout number signal is transmitted under any circumstances.

Furthermore, the timing for executing the freeze can be any time between the end of the payout process and the storage of "0" in the BB status information. For example, the operation status setting process within the operation status management process could store "X" in RAM as the freeze timer value (count value), and then store "0" in the BB status information RAM after determining that X has reached 0.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to align the payout amount information and main control status information for each game, allowing accurate information to be sent to the rental unit.

The relationship between the number of coins inserted and the BB state signal, and the number of coins paid out and the BB state signal has been described above, but the BB state signal can be replaced with another state signal. For example, there is an RB state signal for determining whether or not the machine is in the RB state, an AT state signal for determining whether or not the machine is in the AT state, or a specific main game state signal for determining whether or not the machine is in a specific main game state.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the freeze is performed for a predetermined period X until the BB status information is set to "1" or "0," but the predetermined period X may be set to a period that assumes the time it takes for the information to reach the hall computer. For example, if the reaction time of each device, such as the SC board, for the input number information or payout number information sent by gaming machine P to reach the hall computer is 1000 ms, the output time for one pulse received by the hall computer is 100 ms, and the maximum number of pulses received by the hall computer is 15 (because the maximum payout number for a slot machine is 15), then 1000 ms + 100 ms x 15 = 2500 ms, and it is desirable to set the value of the predetermined period X to 2500 ms or more.

Gaming machine P sends a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit at a cycle of 300 ms, and then sends a counting notification 100 ms later. The rental unit then sends a rental notification to gaming machine P within 170 ms after receiving the counting notification. Gaming machine P then sends a rental receipt result response within 10 ms after receiving the rental notification. Since the next gaming machine information notification is then sent 300 ms after sending the gaming machine information notification, the time between sending the rental receipt result response and sending the next gaming machine information notification is 20 ms or more.

The startup sequence for gaming machine P and the rental unit is explained below with reference to Figure 21.

<Startup sequence>
A case where the gaming machine P is started up before the rental unit is started up will be described.

When the power to the gaming machine P and the rental unit is OFF, the VL signal and PSI signal of the gaming machine P and the rental unit are OFF. The VL signal is a power supply shared by the I/F signal and is supplied from the rental unit, so it will be OFF until the rental unit starts up. Also, the PSI signal is a connection signal between the gaming machine P and the rental unit, so it will be OFF until the rental unit starts up.

Next, when gaming machine P has completed startup but the rental unit has not yet completed startup, it sends a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit when startup of gaming machine P is complete, and then sends a counting notification. However, because the rental unit has not yet started up, it cannot receive the sent gaming machine information notification and counting notification. Furthermore, even if gaming machine P sends a counting notification, the rental unit does not receive the counting notification, so no rental notification is sent from the rental unit, and gaming machine P does not send a rental receipt result response.

The serial number of the gaming machine information notification and the counting serial number of the counting notification sent first after gaming machine P has completed startup will be "0x00". Furthermore, since the serial number and counting serial number are updated regardless of whether gaming machine P and the rental unit are connected, the serial number and counting serial number sent at the next transmission timing (the timing transmitted 300 ms after the gaming machine information notification sent first after gaming machine P has completed startup) will be "0x01".

In other words, gaming machine P sends messages and updates its serial number regardless of whether it is connected to a rental unit or not.

Next, once the startup of the lending unit is complete, the VL signal and PSI signal turn ON, and the operation of the bet switch P5 and the counting switch P7 of the gaming machine P becomes valid. The lending unit also becomes able to receive information sent from the gaming machine P.

As mentioned above, gaming machine P sends gaming machine information notifications and counting notifications regardless of whether the rental unit is running or not, so the rental unit is managed using the serial number of the gaming machine information notification and the counting serial number of the counting notification sent from gaming machine P after the rental unit has completed startup. By configuring it in this way, gaming machine P can send information without determining the status of the rental unit, thereby reducing the program capacity required to determine the status of the rental unit.

The startup sequence for gaming machine P and the rental unit is explained with reference to Figure 22.

This section explains what happens when the rental unit starts up before the gaming machine P.

If the rental unit starts up before the gaming machine P, it will wait until the gaming machine P starts up. Here, the VL signal and PSI signal of the gaming machine P are OFF until the gaming machine P starts up, but once the rental unit has finished starting up, the VL signal and PSI signal of the rental unit will turn ON. In this state, the rental unit will wait until the gaming machine P has finished starting up.

Next, when gaming machine P has completed booting up, the VL signal and PSI signal of gaming machine P and the rental unit turn ON, and gaming machine P sends a gaming machine information notification with serial number "0x00" and a counting notification with counting serial number "0x00". At this point, since the rental unit has already completed booting up, it receives the gaming machine information notification with serial number "0x00" and the counting notification with counting serial number "0x00" and begins management. By configuring it in this way, gaming machine P can send information without determining the status of the rental unit, thereby reducing the program capacity required to determine the status of the rental unit.

<Alternative startup sequence>
Another example in which the gaming machine P is started up before the rental unit will be described.

When the power to the gaming machine P and the rental unit is OFF, the VL signal and PSI signal of the gaming machine P and the rental unit are OFF. The VL signal is a power supply shared by the I/F signal and is supplied from the rental unit, so it will be OFF until the rental unit starts up. Also, the PSI signal is a connection signal between the gaming machine P and the rental unit, so it will be OFF until the rental unit starts up.

Next, when the startup of gaming machine P is complete but the startup of the rental unit is not yet complete, the VL signal is OFF, so even if the startup of gaming machine P is complete, a gaming machine information notification will not be sent to the rental unit until 100 ms have passed since the VL signal turned ON (until the rental unit has started up). In other words, even if the startup of the gaming machine is complete, if the VL signal is OFF, communication will not begin. In this way, in this embodiment, a gaming machine information notification is sent 100 ms after the VL signal turned ON.

Then, 100 ms after the VL signal is turned ON, gaming machine P sends a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit. The serial number of the gaming machine information notification sent at this time is 0. Note that the rental unit cannot receive a gaming machine information notification sent from gaming machine P until 100 ms after the VL signal is turned ON, so if the rental unit receives a message from the gaming machine within 100 ms after the VL signal is turned ON, it will discard the message.

The gaming machine information notification sent by gaming machine P 100 ms after the VL signal is turned ON can be in two forms: hall control/fraud monitoring information, or gaming machine installation information.

<<First transmission of hole control and fraud monitoring information>>
In the case where the gaming machine information notification sent by the gaming machine P 100 ms after the VL signal is turned ON is hall control/fraud monitoring information, information regarding the number of gaming medals and information regarding fraud can be communicated after communication between the gaming machine P and the lending unit has begun, which has the effect of making the system more resistant to fraudulent activities.

<<Mode of transmitting gaming machine installation information first>>
In the case where the gaming machine information notification sent by gaming machine P 100 ms after the VL signal is turned ON is gaming machine installation information, the main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, gaming medal count control chip ID number, gaming medal count control chip manufacturer code, and gaming medal count control chip product code can be communicated after communication between gaming machine P and the rental unit begins, so even if the gaming machine is replaced, the gaming machine installation information is sent when the power is turned on, so it is possible to first notify the gaming machine information center via the rental unit which manufacturer's product it is communicating with, thereby achieving the effect of allowing subsequent gaming machine information notifications to be managed appropriately.

In such a case, the notification priority order for gaming machine information notifications is as follows: Priority 1 (highest priority) is hall control/fraud monitoring information with updated main control status or game information, Priority 2 is gaming machine installation information, Priority 3 is gaming machine performance information, and Priority 4 is hall control/fraud monitoring information with no updated main control status and no game information.

Furthermore, the notification conditions for gaming machine information notification are as follows: hall control and fraud monitoring information is notified 100 ms after the VL signal turns ON, 300 ms after the gaming machine installation information is transmitted, and then every 300 ms; gaming machine installation information is notified 100 ms after the VL signal turns ON, and then every 60 seconds; and gaming machine performance information is notified 100 ms after the VL signal turns ON, 180 seconds after the gaming machine installation information is transmitted, and then every 180 seconds.

In other words, regardless of notification priority, gaming machine P will first notify gaming machine installation information 100 ms after the VL signal turns ON after power-on, and then notify hall control and fraud monitoring information 300 ms later. It will then notify hall control and fraud monitoring information every 300 ms, and will notify gaming machine information 60 s after first transmitting gaming machine installation information, and then notify hall control and fraud monitoring information 300 ms later.

In other words, in the case of the <<mode in which gaming machine installation information is sent first>>, the notification conditions are the same as those for the <<mode in which hall control and fraud monitoring information is sent first>>, except that the gaming machine installation information is notified 100 ms after the VL signal is turned ON.

The same applies when the transmission timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine installation information coincides, or when the transmission timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information coincides; in this case, the gaming machine information notification with the highest priority will be sent in accordance with the notification priority order described above.

The above-mentioned "mode of first transmitting hall control and fraud monitoring information" and "mode of first transmitting gaming machine installation information" can be selected as appropriate depending on the gaming machine, and all other specifications remain the same regardless of which mode is selected.

The counting notification sequence between gaming machine P and the rental unit is explained with reference to Figure 23.

<Counting notification sequence>
The following describes a case where the gaming machine P sends a counting notification to the lending unit. In this description, the situation before accepting the operation of the counting switch P7 is that the total points managed by the gaming media count control board P16 are "200" and the lendable points managed by the lending unit are "20."

When the gaming machine P and the rental unit have completed startup and are able to communicate with each other, immediately after receiving operation of the counting switch P7 on the gaming machine P, the gaming machine information notification sent to the rental unit contains the serial number "n (n is a number)" and total score "200." As the counting notification contains the counting serial number "m (m is a number)," the total score is 200, and the total score stored in the gaming media count control board P16 is 50 or more, the counting score "50" is sent, as described above. Furthermore, if this counting process is the first counting process since the gaming machine P completed startup, the counting notification contains the cumulative counting score "50." Note that the gaming machine P subtracts the counting points from the total score stored in the total score memory area before executing the process to send the counting notification.

Next, when the lending unit receives the counting notification, it updates the lendable points to "70" and sends the lending serial number "k (k is a number)" and lending points "0" as a lending notification to gaming machine P (because the lending button has not been operated). In addition, when gaming machine P receives a lending notification from the lending unit, it checks the consistency between the information indicated in the lending notification and the information indicated in the previous lending notification.

Next, after gaming machine P receives the rental notification, it sends the rental serial number "k" and the rental point receipt result "normal" to the rental unit as a rental receipt result response (if the result of checking the consistency between the information indicated in the rental notification and the information indicated in the previous rental notification is normal).

Next, when gaming machine P next sends a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit, if it has not yet accepted operation of the counting switch P7 (if the counting switch P7 has been released), it sends the serial number "n+1" and total points "150" as a gaming machine information notification. It also sends the counting serial number "m+1", counted points "0", and cumulative counted points "50" as a counting notification. The rental unit also sends the rental serial number "k+1" and rental points "0" to gaming machine P as a rental notification to gaming machine P. Furthermore, gaming machine P sends the rental serial number "k+1" and rental point receipt result "normal" as a rental receipt result response to the rental unit.

Furthermore, if operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted at the time the second gaming machine information notification is sent after accepting operation of the counting switch P7 (if the counting switch P7 is pressed and held), the serial number "n+1" and total score "150" are sent as the gaming machine information notification. Also, the counting serial number "m+1", counted points "50", and cumulative counted points "100" are sent as the counting notification. Also, the lending unit sends the lending serial number "k+1" and lending points "0" to gaming machine P as a lending notification to gaming machine P. Furthermore, gaming machine P sends the lending serial number "k+1" and lending point receipt result "normal" as a lending receipt result response to the lending unit.

In this way, from the time that operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted until operation of the counting switch P7 is no longer accepted (while the counting switch P7 is being pressed and held), the gaming machine P continues to send counting notifications to the rental unit every 300 ms. This configuration makes it possible to send a fixed amount of counting points (50) to the rental unit every 300 ms without requiring complex operations (simply pressing and holding), thereby reducing the burden of counting operations on the user.

Incidentally, since the counting switch P7 is connected to the gaming medium count control board P16, the input port is checked for each interrupt process of the gaming medium count control board P16, and if information indicating ON is input to the input port representing the counting switch P7, it is assumed that operation of the counting switch P7 has been accepted. If information indicating OFF is subsequently input to the input port representing the counting switch P7, it is assumed that operation of the counting switch P7 has not been accepted.

The rental notification sequence between gaming machine P and the rental unit is explained with reference to Figure 24.

<Loan notification sequence>
A case will be described where the lending unit sends a lending notification to the gaming machine P. In this explanation, the situation before the operation of the lending button is accepted is one in which the total points managed by the gaming media count control board P16 is "10" and the lendable points managed by the lending unit are "100." Note that, since the total points stored in the gaming media count control board P16 are less than "50," it can also be said that when the counting switch P7 is operated, "10" is counted.

When gaming machine P and the rental unit have completed startup and are able to communicate with the rental unit, and the rental button on the rental unit is operated, gaming machine P will send a gaming machine information notification containing the serial number "n (n is a number)" and total score "10", and a counting notification containing the counting serial number "m (m is a number)" and counting points "0". If the counting points included in the counting notification are "0", then at the time a rental notification is sent to gaming machine P, the rental serial number "k" and rental points "50" will be sent as the rental notification.

Then, when the lending unit sends the lending notification, it updates the lending points to "50". Note that the lending unit may also update the lending points when it receives the lending acceptance result response.

Next, after gaming machine P receives the rental notification, it sends the rental serial number "k" and the rental point receipt result "normal" to the rental unit as a rental receipt result response (if the result of checking the consistency between the information indicated in the rental notification and the information indicated in the previous rental notification is normal).

Next, gaming machine P updates the total score to "60" between receiving the loan notification and sending the loan acceptance result response.

Next, if operation of the rental button provided on the rental unit continues to be accepted, the next time gaming machine P sends a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit, it will send the serial number "n+1" and total score "60" as the gaming machine information notification.

Next, gaming machine P sends a counting notification with counting serial number "m+1", counting points "0", and cumulative counting points "0". After that, the lending unit sends lending serial number "k+1" and lending points "50" to gaming machine P as a lending notification to gaming machine P, updating the lendable points to "0". Furthermore, gaming machine P sends a lending serial number "k+1" and lending point receipt result "normal" as a lending receipt result response to the lending unit.

In this example, the rental unit determines the operation level when the rental button is continuously operated and accepts the operation of the rental button, but it may also determine when the rental button is raised and accept the operation of the rental button. In this case, even if the rental button is continuously operated, the rental operation will only be accepted at the time of the first operation, so even if the rental button is continuously operated, the rental points will be sent as "0" when sending rental notifications from the second time onwards.

Furthermore, if the counting point in the counting notification sent from the gaming machine P when the rental button is accepted is 1 or more, the rental point in the next rental notification sent to the gaming machine P will be set to "0". The rental button accepted at this time may be invalidated, or the rental unit may store a rental button operation acceptance flag and send the rental point as "50" in the rental notification sent after the counting point in the counting notification becomes "0". Furthermore, when the rental unit stores the rental button operation acceptance flag, if the rental button is operated again while the flag related to the acceptance of the rental button operation is stored, it may be rewritten to a flag indicating that the button has been operated twice, or operations from the second time onwards may be invalidated.

In addition, the rental unit sends a rental notification to the gaming machine P, and when the gaming machine P receives the rental notification, it stores all of the information in the rental notification in a rental notification information storage area provided in the gaming machine P. This allows the gaming machine P to determine whether the information on the rental point receipt result is "normal" or "abnormal" when sending a rental receipt result response.

Specifically, "k" is stored as the rental serial number information in the rental notification information storage area of gaming machine P, and if the rental serial number in the rental notification sent from the rental unit is "k+1", the stored "k" is incremented to generate "k+1" and then compared with the received rental serial number "k+1". Since the generated rental serial number matches the received rental serial number, the received rental serial number "k+1" is stored in the rental notification information storage area of gaming machine P.

In addition, gaming machine P stores "k" as the rental serial number information in the rental notification information storage area. If the rental serial number in the rental notification sent from the rental unit is "k+2," the stored "k" is incremented to generate "k+1," which is then compared with the received rental serial number "k+2." Since the generated rental serial number does not match the received rental serial number, the received rental serial number "k+2" is not stored (the rental serial number in the rental notification information storage area of gaming machine P becomes "k").

In addition, since the upper limit for rental serial numbers is 255, if the rental serial number is incremented when it is 255, the rental serial number will become 0. However, because rental serial number 0 can only be sent to the gaming machine immediately after the rental unit is started, it is incremented again to become rental serial number 1. In other words, when the gaming machine updates the rental serial number when the rental serial number is 255, it increments it twice, making the next rental serial number 1.

In the above example, the comparison method involves incrementing the rental serial number stored in gaming machine P and then determining whether it matches the rental serial number received from the rental unit. However, this is not limited to this method. Other methods may also be used, such as decrementing the rental serial number received from the rental unit and then comparing it to determine whether it matches the rental serial number stored in gaming machine P, or subtracting the rental serial number stored in gaming machine P from the rental serial number received from the rental unit and determining whether the result is "1."

In addition, the loan notification information storage area provided in gaming machine P is composed of loan notification receiving buffer 1, loan notification receiving buffer 2, loan notification receiving buffer 3, loan notification receiving buffer 4, and loan notification receiving buffer 5.

Lending notification receiving buffer 1 stores the message length, lending notification receiving buffer 2 stores the command, lending notification receiving buffer 3 stores the lending serial number, lending notification receiving buffer 4 stores the lending point, and lending notification receiving buffer 5 stores the checksum.

For example, if the loan notification received by gaming machine P has a message length of "0x05," a command of "0x13," a loan serial number of "0x01," a loan point of "0x32," and a checksum of "0x4B," it stores it in the corresponding loan notification receiving buffer. Gaming machine P subtracts the loan point of "0x32" stored in loan notification receiving buffer 4 from the checksum of "0x4B" stored in loan notification receiving buffer 5 to calculate "0x19," subtracts the loan serial number of "0x01" stored in loan notification receiving buffer 3 from "0x19" to calculate "0x18," subtracts the command of "0x13" stored in loan notification receiving buffer 2 from "0x18" to calculate "0x05," and subtracts the message length of "0x05" stored in loan notification receiving buffer 1 from "0x05" to calculate "0x00."

Next, it determines whether the calculation result is "0x00" or not, and if it is "0x00" as described above, it determines that the checksum is normal. If the calculation result is not "0x00", it determines that the checksum is abnormal, and clears all storage areas of loan notification receiving buffers 1 to 5 (for example, rewrites them to "0x00"), and sends a loan receipt result response with message length "0x05", command "0x03", loan serial number "0x00", loan point receipt result "0x01 (abnormal)", and checksum "0x09". Communication abnormalities during loans will be discussed later.

Next, if it is determined that the checksum is normal, it determines whether the command information stored in loan notification receiving buffer 2 is "0x13". If the command information stored in loan notification receiving buffer 2 is "0x13", it is determined to be normal. If the command information stored in loan notification receiving buffer 2 is not "0x13", it is determined to be abnormal, and all storage areas of loan notification receiving buffers 1 to 5 are cleared (for example, rewritten to "0x00"), and a loan receipt result response is sent with a message length of "0x05", command "0x03", loan serial number "0x00", loan point receipt result "0x01 (abnormal)", and checksum "0x09".

Next, if it is determined that the command is normal, it determines whether the message length information stored in loan notification receiving buffer 1 is "0x05". If the message length information stored in loan notification receiving buffer 1 is "0x05", it is determined to be normal. If the message length information stored in loan notification receiving buffer 1 is not "0x05", it is determined to be abnormal, and all storage areas of loan notification receiving buffers 1 to 5 are cleared (for example, rewritten to "0x00"), and a loan receipt result response is sent with a message length of "0x05", command "0x03", loan serial number "0x00", loan point receipt result "0x01 (abnormal)", and checksum "0x09".

The message length information stored in Lending Notification Receiving Buffer 1 and the command information stored in Lending Notification Receiving Buffer 2 are fixed values and will not change if they are normal. Also, by their very nature, checksums can sometimes match normal values even if they are abnormal. Therefore, by comparing message length information and command information, which are fixed values in addition to checksums, it is possible to reduce the probability of determining an abnormal value as normal to as close to zero as possible.

To determine whether the loan notification information is normal, the checksum, command, and message length are checked in that order, but the order of checking is not limited to this and any combination can be used. Furthermore, if an abnormality is determined at any point during the process of checking the normality of the checksum, command, or message length, all storage areas of loan notification receiving buffers 1 to 5 are cleared and no further checking is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the system may be configured not to clear all storage areas of loan notification receiving buffers 1 to 5 even if an abnormality is determined during the process of checking either the checksum, command, or message length, but to clear all storage areas of loan notification receiving buffers 1 to 5 if any of the checksum, command, or message length results in an abnormality after all checking is completed.

When detecting errors using only the checksum, the reliability is (1 - (1/256)) x 100 = 99.609375000% because the checksum is 1 byte of data. However, if one fixed value (1 byte of data) is included, the reliability becomes (1 - ((1/256) x (1/256))) x 100 = 99.998474121%, and if two fixed values (1 byte of data) are included, the reliability becomes (1 - ((1/256) x (1/256) x (1/256))) x 100 = 99.999999977%. Therefore, if the 1 byte of data is a fixed value, checking two fixed values in addition to the checksum will result in a reliability of nearly 100%, making it easier to detect fraud and abnormalities.

The recovery sequence when the dedicated interface between the gaming machine P and the rental unit is disconnected is explained below with reference to Figure 25.

<Restoration sequence when a dedicated interface is disconnected>
The following describes the flow of various notification information when communication is restored after the gaming machine P and the rental unit are unable to communicate due to a disconnection. In this explanation, it is assumed that the total points managed by the gaming media count control board P16 are "100".

When the startup of gaming machine P and the rental unit is complete and communication between gaming machine P and the rental unit is possible, when it is time to send a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit, the gaming machine information notification will send the serial number "n (n is a number)" and total score "100", and the counting notification will send the counting serial number "m (m is a number)" and counting points "0". Furthermore, if the counting process is the first counting process since the startup of gaming machine P was completed, the counting notification will send the cumulative counting points "0". Note that gaming machine P subtracts the counting points from the total score stored in the total score memory area before executing the process to send the counting notification.

Next, when the rental unit receives the counting notification, it sends the rental serial number "k (k is a number)" and rental points "0" as a rental notification to the gaming machine P. Also, when the gaming machine P receives a rental notification from the rental unit, it checks the consistency between the information indicated in the rental notification and the information indicated in the previous rental notification.

Next, after gaming machine P receives the rental notification, it sends the rental serial number "k" and the rental point receipt result "normal" to the rental unit as a rental receipt result response.

Next, if gaming machine P then transmits the serial number "n+1" and total score "100" as a gaming machine information notification and then experiences a disconnection immediately thereafter (the VL signal on gaming machine P's side is OFF, the VL signal and PSI signal on the rental unit's side are both OFF, and the power to gaming machine P and the rental unit are ON), gaming machine P will transmit the counting notification with the counting serial number "m+1", counting points "0", and cumulative counting points "0". Note that even if operation of counting switch P7 was accepted before the disconnection, when the VL signal on gaming machine P's side turns OFF, the counting process is halted as the acceptance of counting switch P7 is invalidated, and therefore the counting notification sent after the disconnection will send the counting points as "0". Furthermore, if the VL signal on gaming machine P's side turns OFF, acceptance of bet operations will also be invalidated.

After that, the rental unit does not receive the counting notification and therefore does not send a rental notification, and gaming machine P does not send a rental receipt result response. The next gaming machine information notification is sent 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification is sent, but if communication between gaming machine P and the rental unit has not yet been restored, gaming machine P will send the serial number "n+2" and total score "100" as the gaming machine information notification, and the counting serial number "m+2", counting points "0", and cumulative counting points "0" as the counting notification.

In other words, if communication between gaming machine P and the rental unit is disconnected, gaming machine P will continue to send only gaming machine information notifications and counting notifications. At this time, the serial number and counting serial number will be updated and sent.

Next, when communication between gaming machine P and the rental unit is restored just before gaming machine P next sends a gaming machine information notification, it sends the serial number "n+3" and total points "100" as a gaming machine information notification, and the counting serial number "m+3", counting points "0", and cumulative counting points "0" as a counting notification.

Next, the rental unit that receives the counting notification sends a rental notification with rental serial number "0" and rental point "0" to the gaming machine P. As a result, when the connection is restored after a disconnection, the rental serial number "0" is sent, allowing the gaming machine P to determine whether this is the first rental notification since the connection was restored after a disconnection.

Next, after gaming machine P receives the loan notification, it sends the loan serial number "k" and the loan point receipt result response "abnormal" to the loan unit as a loan receipt result response. Here, the loan serial number sent is the loan serial number "k" that was received successfully the last time, and the loan point receipt result response is determined to be "abnormal" because the loan serial number "0" sent from the loan unit differs from the loan serial number "k" that was received successfully the last time, which is "k+1" incremented. Furthermore, when the loan unit receives the loan serial number "k," it stores "k" in the loan serial number storage area of the loan unit. Note that other methods mentioned above may be used to determine whether the loan serial number is abnormal.

Next, when 300 ms have passed since the previous gaming machine information notification, the serial number "n+4" and total score "100" are sent as gaming machine information notification, and the counting serial number "m+4", counting score "0", and cumulative counting score "0" are sent as counting notification.

Next, the rental unit that receives the counting notification sends the rental serial number "k+1" and rental points "0" as a rental notification to gaming machine P. As a result, when gaming machine P receives the rental notification, the rental point receipt result will be "normal."

Next, after gaming machine P receives the rental notification, it sends the rental serial number "k+1" and the rental point receipt result response "normal" to the rental unit as a rental receipt result response. At this point, recovery from the disconnection is complete, and subsequent communication proceeds according to the normal sequence.

In the above example, if the rental unit sends rental serial number "0", the rental point in the rental notification will be sent as "0" even if the rental button operation is accepted. In other words, even if the rental button operation is accepted between the time when the rental unit's VL signal and PSI signal are both turned ON and the time when the first rental notification is sent, the rental point for rental serial number "0" will be sent as "0". However, this is not limited to this, and if the rental button operation is accepted when the rental serial number is "0", the rental point "50" may be sent even if the rental serial number is "0".

Furthermore, in the above example, if the dedicated interface is disconnected and then recovered from the disconnection immediately after gaming machine P sends a gaming machine information notification and the rental unit does not receive the gaming machine information notification, the rental unit may send a rental notification due to receiving a counting notification sent from gaming machine P, or the rental unit may not send a rental notification after the counting notification sent from gaming machine P because it has not received the gaming machine information notification, and may send a rental notification after receiving a counting notification after receiving the next gaming machine information notification.

A communication error during counting between gaming machine P and the rental unit is explained using Figure 26.

<Communication error during counting>
The following describes a case where the gaming machine P transmits a counting notification to the lending unit, but the lending unit does not receive the transmitted counting notification. In this description, the situation before the operation of the counting switch P7 is assumed to be one in which the total points managed by the gaming media count control board P16 is "200" and the lendable points managed by the lending unit are "20."

When the gaming machine P and the rental unit have completed startup and are able to communicate with each other, immediately after receiving operation of the counting switch P7 on the gaming machine P, the gaming machine sends a gaming machine information notification to the rental unit containing the serial number "n" and total score "200" as the gaming machine information notification, and the counting serial number "m" and counting points "50" as the counting notification. Furthermore, if this counting process is the first counting process since the gaming machine P completed startup, the gaming machine P sends the cumulative counting points "50" as the counting notification. Note that before executing the process to send the counting notification, the gaming machine P subtracts the counting points from the total score stored in the total score memory area.

Next, when the rental unit receives the counting notification, it updates the rental points to "70" and sends the rental serial number "k" and rental points "0" as a rental notification to gaming machine P (because the rental button has not been operated). In addition, when gaming machine P receives a rental notification from the rental unit, it checks the consistency between the information indicated in the rental notification and the information indicated in the previous rental notification.

Next, after gaming machine P receives the rental notification, it sends the rental serial number "k" and the rental point receipt result "normal" to the rental unit as a rental receipt result response (if the result of checking the consistency between the information indicated in the rental notification and the information indicated in the previous rental notification is normal).

Next, gaming machine P sends the serial number "n+1" and total score "150" as a gaming machine information notification, and then gaming machine P sends the counting serial number "m+1", counting score "50", and cumulative counting score "100" as a counting notification. If the rental unit fails to receive the counting notification, the rental unit will not send a rental notification. If the rental unit does not receive the counting notification 300 ms after receiving the gaming machine information notification, it will turn OFF the VL signal and PSI signal. In this case, the rental unit will determine that an error has occurred in communication with gaming machine P, and will perform the same operation as the recovery sequence described above. To recover from a disconnected state, a hall attendant may operate the rental unit's error release switch or the rental unit's initialization switch.

Furthermore, even after the rental unit determines that an error has occurred in communication with gaming machine P and turns OFF the VL signal and PSI signal, gaming machine P continues to send gaming machine information notifications and counting notifications. In this case, the serial number as gaming machine information notification and the counting serial number as counting notification are updated before being sent to the rental unit (the rental unit cannot receive them). Furthermore, if the counting switch P7 continues to be pressed even after the rental unit turns OFF the VL signal and PSI signal, gaming machine P will also disable the operation of counting switch P7 due to the VL signal being turned OFF based on the rental unit turning OFF the VL signal and PSI signal, and will therefore send a count point of 0 as counting notification.

<Operation of gaming machine P after VL signal turns ON>
The operation of the gaming machine P after the VL signal is turned ON will be described.

After the power to the gaming machine P and the rental unit is turned on and the VL signal is turned ON, the gaming machine P becomes operational. In other words, after the VL signal is turned ON, operation of the bet switch P5 of the gaming machine P is valid if the total score memory means stores the number of bets that can be made (when the total score memory means stores "1", operation of the 1 bet switch is valid, and when the total score memory means stores "3", operation of the 1 bet switch or the MAX bet switch is valid). Furthermore, after the VL signal is turned ON, if the total score memory means stores the number of bets that can be made, the lamp mounted on the bet switch P5 of the gaming machine P is lit (it is lit in a manner indicating that bets are possible).

Furthermore, after the VL signal is turned ON, operation of the counting switch P7 of the gaming machine P is enabled when a predetermined number of gaming medals is stored in the total score storage means (when the total score storage means stores a gaming medal count of "1" or more, operating the counting switch P7 enables the number of gaming medals (counted medal count) to be sent to the rental unit after a gaming machine information notification is sent).

Furthermore, after the VL signal is turned ON, operation of the settlement switch P6 of the gaming machine P is valid when a predetermined number of bets is stored in the bet number storage means (when a bet number of "1" or more is stored in the bet number storage means, operating the settlement switch P6 can subtract the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means, and can add the number of gaming medals equal to the number of bets to the total points stored in the total point storage means).

In addition, after the VL signal is turned ON, operation of the stop switch on gaming machine P is valid while the reels are spinning (the reels can be stopped when the stop switch is operated).

In addition, after the VL signal is turned ON, operation of the lending switch on the lending unit is valid when the number of lending medals is stored in the lending unit (when the lending switch is operated when the number of lending medals stored in the lending unit is "1" or greater, the number of lending medals can be added to the total score).

<Another mode of operation of the gaming machine P after the VL signal is turned ON>
Another mode of operation of the gaming machine P after the VL signal is turned ON will be described.

In the above-mentioned <Operation of gaming machine P after VL signal turns ON>, an example was shown in which operation of bet switch P5 of gaming machine P was enabled, but this is not limited to this. Operation of bet switch P5 of gaming machine P may also be disabled when the total score storage means stores the number of bets available after the VL signal turns ON (when "1" is stored in the total score storage means, operation of the 1 bet switch is disabled, and when "3" is stored in the total score storage means, operation of the 1 bet switch or MAX bet switch is disabled). Furthermore, in this case, even if the total score storage means stores the number of bets available after the VL signal turns ON, the lamp mounted on bet switch P5 of gaming machine P is off (indicating that bets cannot be made).

This is possible by ensuring that the main control means is not yet up and running immediately after the VL signal is turned ON.

Furthermore, if the main control means is not activated immediately after the VL signal is turned ON, the settlement switch P6 and stop switch, like the bet switch P5, are disabled immediately after the VL signal is turned ON.

However, even if the main control means is not started up immediately after the VL signal is turned ON, the counted number of medals can be sent to the lending unit by operating the counting switch.

This is because the gaming medal count control means is set up immediately after the VL signal is turned ON.

In other words, <another mode of operation of gaming machine P after the VL signal is turned ON>, when the VL signal is turned ON, the main control means is not activated, but the gaming medal count control means is activated. As a result, immediately after the VL signal is turned ON, operation of the counting switch of gaming machine P and operation of the lending switch of the lending unit are enabled.

A communication error that occurs during rental between gaming machine P and the rental unit is explained using Figure 27.

<Communication error during rental>
We will now explain the case where the lending unit sends a lending notification to the gaming machine P. In this explanation, we will assume that the situation before accepting the operation of the lending button is that the total points managed by the gaming media number control board P16 are "10" and the lendable points managed by the lending unit are "100".

When gaming machine P and the rental unit have completed startup and are able to communicate with the rental unit, and the rental button on the rental unit is operated, gaming machine P will send serial number "n" and total score "10" as a gaming machine information notification, and will send counting serial number "m" and counting points "0" as a counting notification. If the counting points included in the counting notification are "0", when it is time to send a rental notification to gaming machine P, it will send rental serial number "k" and rental points "50" as a rental notification.

Then, when the lending unit sends the lending notification, it updates the lending points to "50". Note that the lending unit may also update the lending points when it receives the lending acceptance result response.

Next, after gaming machine P receives the rental notification, it sends the rental serial number "k" and the rental point receipt result "normal" to the rental unit as a rental receipt result response (if the result of checking the consistency between the information indicated in the rental notification and the information indicated in the previous rental notification is normal).

Next, gaming machine P updates the total score to "60" between receiving the loan notification and sending the loan acceptance result response.

Next, if gaming machine P sends a loan receipt result response but the loan unit fails to receive it, and the loan unit does not receive the loan receipt result response more than 10 ms after sending the loan notification, it determines that the loan is incomplete and stores a value indicating that the loan is incomplete in the loan information storage area provided in the loan unit.

Next, gaming machine P sends serial number "n+1" and total score "60" as a gaming machine information notification, and counting serial number "m+1" and counting points "0" as a counting notification. If the lending unit determines that the lending is incomplete based on the previous lending notification, it sends lending serial number "k" and lending points "50" as a lending notification at the same time as sending the lending notification to gaming machine P. This lending notification contains the same information as the previously sent lending notification.

Next, when gaming machine P receives the rental notification, if everything is normal it should have received rental serial number "k+1". However, since the rental serial number received this time was "k", gaming machine P sends the rental receipt result response "k" and the rental point receipt result response "abnormal" to the rental unit.

Next, since the rental serial number "k" in the rental notification sent by the rental unit when it received the rental receipt result response matches the rental serial number "k" in the received rental receipt result response, the rental unit determines that the rental notification has arrived successfully at gaming machine P and stores a value indicating rental completion in the rental information storage area provided in the rental unit.

<Error type>
In this embodiment, errors and states of the gaming machine P that can be determined include an input request communication error, a settlement request communication error, a payout request communication error, gaming medium number control reception abnormality, main control reception abnormality, total score upper limit abnormality, total score threshold reached state, lending device connection abnormality (VL abnormality), lending serial number abnormality, lending device communication abnormality 1, lending device communication abnormality 2, lending device communication abnormality 3, lending device communication abnormality 4, lending device communication abnormality 5, and lending device communication abnormality 6.

A deposit request communication error is an abnormality detected by the main control board P15. If the deposit request command sent by the main control board P15 to the gaming media count control board P16 (a command to confirm whether the bet number can be awarded to the deposit points managed by the main control board P15 from the total points managed by the gaming media count control board P16 when the bet switch is operated) does not match the response command (deposit request acceptance command or deposit request refusal command) received by the main control board P15 from the gaming media count control board P16, or if no response command is received from the gaming media count control board P16, an E1 error is detected and the corresponding "E1" is displayed in the awarded number display section. If an E1 error occurs, it can be canceled by accepting operation of the set/reset switch. Note that since the deposit request is canceled when an E1 error occurs, the deposit request command will not be resent even if the E1 error is canceled. When an E1 error occurs, the process for stopping the progress of the game is to invalidate the bet process by operating the bet switch, the reel spin process by operating the start switch, the reel stop process by operating the stop switch, and the settlement process by operating the settlement switch. Note that as long as the progress of the game is stopped, the reel stop process by operating the stop switch does not need to be invalidated. This is because if the start of the game is invalidated, the reels will not spin, and the operation of the stop switch will essentially be invalidated as well.

In addition, when an E1 error occurs, the main control board P15 sends an E1 error command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error using an image display device or lamp. When the E1 error is resolved, the main control board P15 sends an error resolution command to the sub-control board P12, and when the sub-control board P12 receives the error resolution command, it terminates the E1 error notification. Note that when the sub-control board P12 receives the error resolution command, it may not immediately terminate the E1 error notification, but may instead terminate it after a predetermined period of time.

A settlement request communication error is an abnormality detected by the main control board P15. If the settlement request command sent by the main control board P15 to the gaming medium count control board P16 does not match the response command (settlement request acceptance command or settlement request refusal command) received by the main control board P15 from the gaming medium count control board P16, or if no response command is received from the gaming medium count control board P16, an E2 error is detected and the corresponding "E2" is displayed in the award number display area. If an E2 error occurs, it can be canceled by accepting operation of the set/reset switch. Note that because the settlement request is canceled when an E2 error occurs, the settlement request command is not resent even if the E2 error is canceled. Furthermore, if an E2 error occurs, the following processes are disabled to stop the game progress: bet processing via operation of the bet switch, reel rotation processing via operation of the start switch, reel stop processing via operation of the stop switch, and settlement processing via operation of the settlement switch. Note that as long as the game progress is stopped, the reel stop processing via operation of the stop switch does not need to be disabled. This is because disabling the start of play prevents the reels from spinning, effectively disabling the operation of the stop switch.

In addition, when an E2 error occurs, the main control board P15 sends an E2 error command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error using an image display device or lamp. When the E2 error is resolved, the main control board P15 sends an error resolution command to the sub-control board P12, and when the sub-control board P12 receives the error resolution command, it terminates the E2 error notification. Note that when the sub-control board P12 receives the error resolution command, it may not immediately terminate the E2 error notification, but may instead terminate it after a predetermined period of time.

A payout request communication error is an abnormality detected by the main control board P15. If the payout request command sent by the main control board P15 to the gaming medium count control board P16 does not match the response command (payout request acceptance command or payout request refusal command) received by the main control board P15 from the gaming medium count control board P16, or if no response command is received from the gaming medium count control board P16, an E3 error is detected and the corresponding "E3" is displayed in the award number display area. If an E3 error occurs, it can be canceled by accepting operation of the set/reset switch. Note that the payout request is not canceled when an E3 error occurs and continues, so the payout request command is resent when the E3 error is canceled. Furthermore, if an E3 error occurs, the following processes are disabled to stop the game: bet processing via operation of the bet switch, reel rotation processing via operation of the start switch, reel stop processing via operation of the stop switch, and settlement processing via operation of the settlement switch. Note that as long as the game progress is stopped, the reel stop processing via operation of the stop switch does not need to be disabled. This is because disabling the start of play prevents the reels from spinning, effectively disabling the operation of the stop switch.

In addition, when an E3 error occurs, the main control board P15 sends an E3 error command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error using an image display device or lamp. When the E3 error is resolved, the main control board P15 sends an error resolution command to the sub-control board P12, and when the sub-control board P12 receives the error resolution command, it terminates the E3 error notification. Note that when the sub-control board P12 receives the error resolution command, it may not immediately terminate the E3 error notification, but may instead terminate it after a predetermined period of time.

In the above example, in the event of a deposit request communication error, a settlement request communication error, or a payout request communication error, the gaming media count control board P16 outputs a deposit request unacceptable command, a settlement request unacceptable command, or a payout request unacceptable command to the main control board P15, respectively. However, the deposit request unacceptable command, settlement request unacceptable command, and payout request unacceptable command may all be the same command. For example, in the event of a deposit request communication error, a settlement request communication error, or a payout request communication error, the gaming media count control board P16 outputs the same unacceptable command.

A gaming media count control reception abnormality is an abnormality detected by the gaming media count control board P16. When an insertion request, settlement request, or payout request sent from the main control board P15 to the gaming media count control board P16 is received, the received command is deemed to be a gaming media count control reception abnormality if it is not a correct command. When a gaming media count control reception abnormality occurs, no error is displayed on the awarded number display unit. No operation is required to clear the gaming media count control reception abnormality; it can be cleared automatically. Furthermore, if a gaming media count control reception abnormality occurs, game progress will not be stopped.

Furthermore, when a game media number control reception abnormality occurs, the game media number control board P16 sends information indicating a game media number control reception abnormality to the main control board P15, the main control board P15 receives the information indicating a game media number control reception abnormality sent from the game media number control board P16, the main control board P15 sets the game media number control reception abnormality as an error state, and the main control board P15 sends a game media number control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error using an image display device or lamp. Even after the game media number control reception abnormality is automatically cleared, the game media number control reception abnormality notification does not end immediately, but continues for a predetermined period of time before ending.

The gaming media count control notification command is a command sent by the main control board P15 to the sub-control board P12 with each interrupt, and depending on the bit position, it is a command that notifies the sub-control board P12 of various abnormalities and gaming machine status, such as counting in progress, total score upper limit abnormality, gaming media count control reception abnormality, and main control reception abnormality. It is also possible to notify the sub-control board P12 of various abnormalities and gaming machine status using a no-operation command.

A main control reception abnormality is an abnormality detected by the main control board P15, and is considered to occur when the main control board P15 receives a command from the game media count control board P16 other than when the main control board P15 has sent an input request, settlement request, or payout request to the game media count control board P16. A main control reception abnormality does not result in an error display on the award count display unit. No operation is required to clear the main control reception abnormality; it can be cleared automatically. Furthermore, if a main control reception abnormality occurs, game progress will not be stopped.

In addition, when a main control reception abnormality occurs, the main control board P15 sends a game media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error using an image display device or lamp. Even after the main control reception abnormality is automatically cleared, the notification of the main control reception abnormality does not end immediately, but rather ends after a predetermined period of time.

A total score upper limit abnormality is detected by the gaming medium count control board P16, and is deemed to be a total score upper limit abnormality when the total score managed by the gaming medium count control board P16 reaches the upper limit caution value (any value between 16,369 and 16,383). An error is not displayed on the award number display unit when a total score upper limit abnormality occurs. To cancel the total score upper limit abnormality, the counting process is performed by operating the counting switch P7 provided on the gaming machine P, and the abnormality can be canceled when the total score falls below the upper limit caution value of 16,368. When a total score upper limit abnormality occurs, the start switch P3, bet switch P5, and settlement switch P6 are not accepted, or processing is performed to disable processing based on the start switch P3, bet switch P5, and settlement switch P6, in order to make the machine unable to play. In other words, if the total score managed by the gaming media count control board P16 reaches the upper warning limit, the next game cannot be played unless the total score managed by the gaming media count control board P16 falls below the upper warning limit. This configuration prevents the total score managed by the gaming media count control board P16 from exceeding the upper limit. Note that if the upper limit of the total score is reached without detecting a total score upper limit abnormality, the points exceeding the upper limit will not be stored, and the number stored will not exceed 16,383.

In addition, in the case of an abnormality in the total score upper limit, no error display is given on the number of awarded points display unit, but an error display may be given on the number of gaming media display unit P9. For example, in the case of an abnormality in the total score upper limit, "HF□□□" may be displayed on the number of gaming media display unit P9. If an error display is given on the number of gaming media display unit P9, the error display is not given on the number of gaming media display unit P9 when the error is cleared. In this case, the notification being executed by the sub-control board P12 may end approximately simultaneously with the clearing of the error, or may be given for a certain period of time after the error is cleared. Furthermore, by not displaying an error on the number of awarded points display unit and the number of gaming media display unit P9 when the total score threshold has been reached, it is less likely that a player will mistakenly believe that the gaming machine P has malfunctioned when the total score threshold has been reached.

Next, we will explain how to prevent the game media count control board P16 from storing more than the upper limit of total points, using the score awarding process (also called the payout process) on the main control board P15 shown in Figure 29.

The score awarding process is executed after determining the symbol combination that has stopped on the active line and deciding the number of points to award based on the results of the determination. For example, it is executed after determining that a specific symbol combination that can award 8 points has stopped on the active line, and then storing the number 8 in the award point memory area (described below).

In "Score Awarded?", the main control board P15 determines whether there are points to award (whether a symbol combination that can award points has stopped and been displayed), and if it determines that there are no points to award, the answer is NO. Specifically, it determines whether the value in the award point memory area, which is a memory area that can store award points and is provided in the RWM area of the main control board P15, is "0". If it determines that the value in the award point memory area is "0", the answer to "Score Awarded?" is NO, and the score awarding process is terminated. On the other hand, if it determines that the value in the award point memory area is not "0", the answer to "Score Awarded?" is YES.

"Score awarding time elapsed?" determines whether the value stored in the score awarding timer area, described below, is "0." If the value stored in the score awarding timer area is "0," the answer is YES; if the value stored in the score awarding timer area is not "0," the answer is NO. In other words, this determination process loops until the value stored in the score awarding timer area becomes "0" (in other words, it delays the "award request command set," described below). Note that the score awarding timer area stores an initial value ("27" in this embodiment) using the "score awarding time save" function, described below.

In "Save score awarding time," "27" is stored in the score awarding timer area provided in the RWM area of the main control board P15. Here, the value stored in the score awarding timer area is configured to be updated in response to the execution of a timer interrupt on the main control board P15 side (for example, it is configured to subtract 1 each time a timer interrupt process is executed). Note that timer interrupts on the main control board P15 side are configured to be executed at intervals of approximately 2.235 ms. Therefore, storing "27" in the score awarding timer area is equivalent to saving a time corresponding to approximately 60 ms. Furthermore, even if a timer interrupt process is executed when "0" is stored in the score awarding timer area, the value in the score awarding timer area will remain "0."

In this way, by setting the processing order to "Has score award time elapsed?" → "Save score award time," when multiple points are awarded, the "Award request command set" processing described below will be executed at predetermined intervals. For example, if the number of points to be awarded is "8," the (first) "Award request command set" corresponding to the first point is executed when "0" is stored in the score award timer area, because this is before "27" has been stored in the score award timer area. Therefore, standby processing based on the score award timer is not executed. This allows the main control board P15 to have the gaming media count control board P16 quickly execute processing to add the first point to the total score.

On the other hand, the "award request command set" corresponding to the second through eighth points can be executed after "27" is stored in the score award timer area by "Save score award time" and "Score award time elapsed?" reaches "0." In other words, the "award request command set" corresponding to the second through eighth points can be executed approximately once every 60 ms. In other words, the total score on the gaming medium count control board P16 based on the "award request command set" can be updated approximately every 60 ms, and the display of the gaming medium count display unit P9, which can display the total score, can also be updated approximately every 60 ms. This configuration allows the player to visually see the total score displayed on the gaming medium count display unit P9 being updated by "1."

Note that, unlike the embodiment described above, the order may be "Save score award time" → "Has score award time elapsed?". In this case, even for the first point when multiple points are awarded, the main control board P15 will execute a wait process for a time corresponding to the score award time (score award timer), after which the game media count control board P16 will add one point to the total score. Also, in this embodiment, "27" is stored in the score award timer area as "save score award time," but any number (for example, a number between "10" and "200") may be stored that allows the player to visually see the total score displayed on the game media count display unit P9 being updated by "1" at a time.

In the "award request command set," a command for sending an award request command indicating that one point will be awarded from the main control board P15 to the game medium count control board P16 is stored in the command buffer of the main control board P15. The command stored in the command buffer of the main control board P15 is configured to be sent to the game medium count control board P16 by timer interrupt processing on the main control board P15 side. Therefore, the "award request command set" is synonymous with sending an award request command indicating that one point will be awarded from the main control board P15 to the game medium count control board P16.

For example, if a symbol combination capable of awarding 8 points is displayed, the total points are updated by sending an award request command indicating that 1 point should be awarded to the gaming media count control board P16 eight times. By updating the total points one point at a time in this way, even if the payout process is halted due to an abnormality during the payout process, the payout process can be executed again after the abnormality is resolved.

"Command reception" refers to receiving a response command from the game medium count control board P16 after the main control board P15 sends a grant request command indicating that one game medium should be granted.

In this embodiment, the game media count control board P16 has at least the following two response commands.
a) Grant permission command This refers to a command indicating that one point is to be added.
Specifically, after the game media number control board P16 receives an award request command indicating that one point should be awarded, if the game media number control board P16 determines that the total score before the addition does not exceed the upper limit value when adding one point to the total score, it sends an award permission command to the main control board P15 indicating that one point should be added to the total score.
a) Rejection command: This refers to a command indicating that 1 point will not be added.
Specifically, after the game media number control board P16 receives an award request command indicating that one point should be awarded, if the game media number control board P16 determines that the total score before the addition is the upper limit when adding one point to the total score, it sends an award refusal command to the main control board P15 indicating that one point cannot be added to the total score.

"Grant not permitted?" determines whether the command received from the game media count control board P16 was a grant refusal command, and if it was, the answer is YES. Alternatively, it may determine whether the command received from the game media count control board P16 was a grant permission command, and if it was not, the answer is NO.

This configuration prevents the gaming medium count control board P16 from updating the total score, even if it receives an award request command indicating that one point should be awarded when an abnormality occurs during the score awarding process. Furthermore, if the main control board P15 determines "Award not possible (YES)" for "Award not possible?", it will loop "Score award time elapsed?", "Score award time saved", "Award request command set", "Command received", and "Award not possible?" until the counting process is performed by the gaming medium count control board P16 (until some or all of the total points are counted), preventing betting processes such as those required to start the next game. Even if such a loop situation occurs, if the reset switch is operated and the abnormality is resolved, the determination for "Award not possible?" will return "NO", even in the loop situation, and it will be possible to proceed to processing "Score award data -1".

Note that the loop status described above is not limited to this; for example, if the main control board P15 determines that "grant not possible (YES)," it may loop "grant request command set," "command received," and "grant not possible?".

"Score data -1" subtracts 1 from the value in the assigned point storage area. For example, if the value stored in the assigned point storage area is "8," this process will change the value in the assigned point storage area to "7." Also, if the value stored in the assigned point storage area is "1," this process will change the value in the assigned point storage area to "0."

In "Score awarding completed?", it determines whether the value in the award point storage area is "0". If the value in the award point storage area is not "0", it returns to "Score awarding time elapsed?" and repeats the same process as above. Then, if the value in the award point storage area is "0", it ends.

By executing this scoring process, the gaming media count control board P16 can be controlled so that the total score does not exceed the upper limit.

Furthermore, if the process of awarding points one by one is performed too quickly, the player will not be able to recognize that each point has been awarded. For this reason, after awarding one point, the score awarding timer is set for 60.35 ms (27 interrupt processes), and the timer is updated (the count value is subtracted by "1") each time a point is awarded, and one point is awarded again after 60.35 ms has passed. This configuration allows the player to recognize that each point has been paid out, making the game more enjoyable.

In the above-described embodiment, the main control board P15 awards one point to the game medium count control board P16, but this is not limited to this and the points may be awarded all at once.

For example, if the main control board P15 awards 8 points, it sends an award request command to the game medium count control board P16 requesting whether 8 points can be added to the total score. The game medium count control board P16 determines whether adding 8 points to the total score would exceed the upper limit (determines whether "total score + awarded points > 16,383" evaluates to YES). If the upper limit is exceeded (if the result is YES), it sends a command to the main control board P15 indicating that 8 points cannot be added to the total score (equivalent to an award refusal command). When the main control board P15 receives a command indicating that 8 points cannot be added to the total score, it again requests the game medium count control board P16 requesting whether 8 points can be added to the total score. If the counting process has not been performed, the total score remains unchanged, so it again sends a command indicating that 8 points cannot be added to the total score, resulting in a loop of score awarding processes between the main control board P15 and the game medium count control board P16. In other words, the game is configured to loop until 8 points are added. By configuring it in this way, the points awarded will not be discarded, preventing any disadvantage to the player.

In the scoring process, since it is generally assumed that the total score will not exceed the upper limit, it is possible to perform a configuration in which it is not determined whether the total score exceeds the upper limit.

For example, if the main control board P15 awards 8 points as a score, it sends an award request command to the game media count control board P16 requesting whether 8 points can be added to the total score. The game media count control board P16 determines whether adding 8 points to the total score will exceed the upper limit (determines whether "total score + awarded points > 16383" is YES), and if it does not exceed the upper limit (determines NO), it sends a command to the main control board P15 indicating that 8 points can be added to the total score (equivalent to an award permission command), and the game media count control board P16 adds 8 points to the total score and ends the score awarding process.

In the scoring process, since it is generally assumed that the total score will not exceed the upper limit, it is possible to perform a configuration in which it is not determined whether the total score exceeds the upper limit.

Furthermore, when there is an abnormality in the total score upper limit, the gaming media count control board P16 sends information indicating an abnormality in the total score upper limit to the main control board P15. The main control board P15 receives the information indicating an abnormality in the total score upper limit sent from the gaming media count control board P16, sets the abnormality in the total score upper limit as an error state, and sends a gaming media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12 to notify the error using an image display device or lamp. Then, when the total score upper limit abnormality is cleared by operating the counting switch P7, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the abnormality in the gaming media count control notification command to a normal value (e.g., "0") and sends it to the sub-control board P12, causing the sub-control board P12 to terminate the notification. Note that if the bit corresponding to the abnormality in the total score upper limit has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the gaming media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately stopping.

Furthermore, if an abnormality occurs in the total score upper limit after the score awarding process, the operation part of the MAX BET switch P5M, or the lamps around it, and the gaming media insertion possible lamp will be turned off (not lit). The timing for turning off the operation part of the MAX BET switch P5M, or the lamps around it, and the gaming media insertion possible lamp is when the gaming media number control board P16 detects an abnormality in the total score upper limit, and the main control board P16 and sub-control board P12 each execute processing based on the total score upper limit abnormality. Furthermore, the timing for turning on the operation part of the MAX BET switch P5M, or the lamps around it, and the gaming media insertion possible lamp is when the counting switch P7 is operated and the total score becomes 16,368 or less.

Let's take the example of when the counting switch P7 is operated when the score awarding process reaches 16371, indicating an abnormal total score upper limit. If the counting switch is pressed and held when the total score is "16371," the count will be "50." When subtracting counted points from the total score during the counting process, the gaming media count control board P16 stores the subtraction result. It calculates "16371 - 50" in a register, and when "16321" is stored as the total score, the gaming media count control board P16 detects that the abnormal total score upper limit has been cleared and sends information to the main control board P15 that the abnormal total score upper limit has been cleared. When the main control board P15 receives this information, it enables the bet switch and lights up the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or the lamps around it, as well as the gaming media insertion possible lamp. When the operation part of the MAX BET switch P5M, the lamps around it, and the gaming media insertion possible lamp are controlled by the sub-control board P12, the main control board P15 receives information that the total score upper limit abnormality has been lifted, and then transmits that information to the sub-control board P12. When the sub-control board P12 receives the information that the total score upper limit abnormality has been lifted, the operation part of the MAX BET switch P5M, the lamps around it, and the gaming media insertion possible lamp are illuminated. Also, when the counting switch P7 is briefly pressed and the count points are counted by "1", the operation part of the MAX BET switch P5M, the lamps around it, and the gaming media insertion possible lamp are illuminated when the total score reaches "16368".

Furthermore, if an abnormality occurs in the total score upper limit after the settlement process, the operation part of the MAX BET switch P5M, or the lamps around it, and the gaming media insertion possible lamp will be turned off (not lit). The timing for turning off the operation part of the MAX BET switch P5M, or the lamps around it, and the gaming media insertion possible lamp is when the gaming media number control board P16 detects an abnormality in the total score upper limit, and the main control board P16 and sub-control board P12 each execute processing based on the total score upper limit abnormality. Furthermore, the timing for turning on the operation part of the MAX BET switch P5M, or the lamps around it, and the gaming media insertion possible lamp is when the counting switch P7 is operated and the total score becomes 16,368 or less.

Let's take the example of when the counting switch P7 is operated when the total score upper limit becomes 16371 during the settlement process, indicating an abnormality in the total score upper limit. If the counting switch is pressed and held when the total score is "16371," the count will be "50." When subtracting counted points from the total score during the counting process, the gaming media count control board P16 stores the subtraction result by calculating "16371 - 50" in a register. When "16321" is stored as the total score, the gaming media count control board P16 detects that the abnormality in the total score upper limit has been lifted and sends information to the main control board P15 that the abnormality in the total score upper limit has been lifted. When the main control board P15 receives this information, it enables the bet switch and lights up the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or the lamps around it, as well as the gaming media insertion possible lamp. When the operation part of the MAX BET switch P5M, the lamps around it, and the gaming media insertion possible lamp are controlled by the sub-control board P12, the main control board P15 receives information that the total score upper limit abnormality has been lifted, and then transmits that information to the sub-control board P12. When the sub-control board P12 receives the information that the total score upper limit abnormality has been lifted, the operation part of the MAX BET switch P5M, the lamps around it, and the gaming media insertion possible lamp are illuminated. Also, when the counting switch P7 is briefly pressed and the count points are counted by "1", the operation part of the MAX BET switch P5M, the lamps around it, and the gaming media insertion possible lamp are illuminated when the total score reaches "16368".

In addition, if the operation part of the start switch P3 or the lamps around it and the game execution ready lamp are lit and an abnormality occurs in the total score upper limit, the operation part of the start switch P3 or the lamps around it and the game execution ready lamp may be turned off, and may be turned on when the abnormality in the total score upper limit is cleared.

The total score threshold reached state is a state detected by the gaming media count control board P16, and is deemed to be in the total score threshold reached state when the total score managed by the gaming media count control board P16 reaches a threshold value lower than the upper limit (16,383). The threshold can be set to any value (less than 16,333), as long as it is less than the total score upper limit (16,383) minus the count value for one run (50). The total score threshold reached state is not displayed on the award number display unit. To cancel the total score threshold reached state, the counting switch P7 provided on the gaming machine P is operated to perform the counting process, and the state can be canceled when the total score falls below the threshold of 15,000. In other words, the total score threshold reached state is an abnormal state that is set when the total score is between 15,000 and 16,368.

When the total score exceeds the threshold value of 15,000, the game media count control board P16 turns the overflow signal ON (the overflow signal rises). The overflow signal remains ON until the total score falls below 15,000, at which point the game media count control board P16 turns the overflow signal OFF (the overflow signal falls). The game media count control board P16 sends the overflow signal to the main control board P15, and when the main control board P15 determines that the overflow signal is ON, it performs processing to output an overflow test signal to the test IF board.

When the overflow test signal is turned ON and output to the test IF board, the counting switch P7 connected to the test IF board is operated. Therefore, when the overflow test signal is output ON, the counting switch signal is also output ON (counting switch P7 is operated), and the counting process is performed.

To output the overflow test signal, the main control board P15 turns on the overflow test signal output to the test IF board and stores the overflow test signal timer value (count value) in a specified memory area. The overflow test signal timer value controls the time for which the overflow test signal is turned on, and the overflow test signal remains on until it determines that the overflow test signal timer value is 0. The main control board P15 also stores the overflow test signal timer value when it turns on the overflow test signal. Then, when the game media count control board P16 executes the counting process, the overflow signal turns off, and the main control board P15 determines that the overflow signal has turned off (when it detects the falling edge of the overflow signal), the main control board P15 begins subtracting the stored overflow test signal timer value. In other words, the overflow test signal remains on even after the overflow signal turns off until the overflow test signal timer value reaches 0, and then the overflow test signal turns off. Furthermore, the overflow test signal timer value is stored by the main control board P15 when the overflow signal turns ON, so even when the overflow signal is ON, the overflow test signal timer value is determined to be not 0, and the overflow test signal is turned ON. In other words, the overflow test signal will not turn OFF while the overflow signal is ON.

The main control board P15 also determines whether the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is 0, and turns the overflow test signal ON if it determines that the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is not 0, and turns the overflow test signal OFF if it determines that the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is 0. The main control board P15 sets the overflow test signal timer value when the overflow test signal turns ON (or when it determines that the overflow signal has turned ON), and does not subtract from the timer value while the overflow signal is being output, so the counting switch signal will not turn OFF while the overflow signal is being output during the gaming machine test.

In the above example, an embodiment was described in which the main control board P15 determines whether the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is 0, and turns the overflow test signal ON if it determines that the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is not 0. However, this is not limited to this, and the main control board P15 may also determine whether the overflow test signal timer value after subtraction is 0, and turn the overflow test signal ON if it determines that the overflow test signal timer value after subtraction is not 0.

The main control board P15 may store an overflow test signal timer value of, for example, 1209 (2702.115 ms) when the overflow test signal is turned ON. This is because the interrupt processing interval of the main control board P15 is 2.235 ms, and 2702.115 ms elapses when the interrupt processing is executed 1209 times. Furthermore, 2702.115 ms is the time required to send nine gaming machine information notifications, since the transmission interval for gaming machine information notifications sent by the gaming media count control board P16 to the lending unit is 300 ms. In other words, when the gaming medium number control board P16 turns the overflow signal ON and the main control board P15 turns the overflow test signal ON, the counting switch signal turns ON and 50 is counted as the counting points, and then the counting process is executed by the gaming medium number control board P16, causing the total score to fall below the threshold value of 15,000 and the gaming medium number control board P16 to turn the overflow signal OFF, and the overflow test signal remains ON for 1,209 interrupt processes of the main control board P15, so the counting switch P7 can be kept ON for 2,702.115 ms, and 450 points will be counted as the counting points for 9 gaming machine information notifications. Therefore, when the test IF board and main control board P15 are connected (when gaming machine testing is being performed), once the gaming media count control board P16 turns the overflow signal ON, the counting switch signal also turns ON. In addition to the one counting process (50 count points) performed when the overflow signal turns ON, the counting process can be performed nine times after the overflow signal turns OFF, resulting in a total of 500 count points. This allows 500 count points to be subtracted from the total score after the total score reaches 15,000 points during gaming machine testing, preventing the overflow signal from turning ON immediately after turning OFF. This reduces the frequency of counting processes when the total score reaches 15,000 points or more, even when the gaming machine being tested is in an advantageous state such as an automatic timer, thereby reducing the frequency of gaming machine P malfunctions and the output of error sounds during gaming machine testing.

The overflow test signal timer value is not limited to the above-mentioned value, and may be any value equal to or greater than the time required to send one gaming machine information notification (300 ms or greater). In other words, if you want to update (subtract) the overflow test signal timer value for each interrupt, you can store any value equal to or greater than 135 as the overflow test signal timer value.

In addition, in the above example, an embodiment was described in which the main control board P15 updates the overflow test signal timer value for every interrupt, but this is not limited to this; the overflow test signal timer value may be updated once every two interrupts or once every three interrupts. In this embodiment, the overflow test signal timer value can be reduced. For example, if the main control board P15 updates the overflow test signal timer value once every five interrupts, it could store 242 as the overflow test signal timer value. In this case, the overflow test signal timer value can be kept within one byte, and the time for turning the overflow test signal ON can be set to 2704.35 ms.

In addition, gaming machine P is capable of continuing gameplay (betting, internal lottery processing based on operation of start switch P3, stop control processing based on operation of stop switch P4, etc.) even during counting processing, so even if the total score threshold is reached during gaming machine testing and counting processing is performed, the gaming machine test will not be interrupted. This allows gaming machine testing to be carried out smoothly.

Furthermore, when the total score threshold reached state occurs, the gaming media count control board P16 sends information indicating that the total score threshold has been reached to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 sends a gaming media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the state using an image display device or lamp. If the total score threshold reached state is canceled by a counting operation, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the total score threshold reached state in the gaming media count control notification command to a normal value (e.g., "0") and sends it to the sub-control board P12, thereby terminating the status notification from the sub-control board P12. Note that if the bit corresponding to the total score threshold reached state has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the gaming media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately.

In the above-described embodiment, the bit positions for the total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reached state in the gaming media count control notification command sent by the main control board P15 to the sub-control board P12 are different, but they may also be managed using the same bit position. In this case, the sub-control board P12 cannot change the presentation based on the received gaming media count control notification command, whether the total score upper limit abnormality or the total score threshold reached state (the same presentation is executed). However, with regard to producing a presentation prompting the operation of the counting switch P7, whether the total score upper limit abnormality or the total score threshold reached state, this can be executed without the sub-control board P12 distinguishing between the total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reached state. Furthermore, since the amount of information sent by the main control board P15 is reduced, it is possible to reduce the program capacity.

The notification mode by the sub-control board P12 for the above-mentioned total score upper limit abnormality and total score threshold reached state may be the same (specifically, the bit positions in the game media count control notification command for the total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reached state may be the same, or even if they are different bit positions, the same notification mode may be issued based on the judgment of the sub-control board P12), or they may be different (specifically, the bit positions in the game media count control notification command for the total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reached state may be different bit positions and different notification modes may be issued based on the judgment of the sub-control board P12, or game media count control notification command 1 may be sent in the case of a total score upper limit abnormality, and game media count control notification command 2 may be sent in the case of the total score threshold reached state).

If the notification mode is the same, for example, "Please operate the counting switch" may be displayed on the image display device. If the notification mode is different, for example, when there is an abnormality in the total score upper limit, the image display device may display "The upper limit has been reached. Please operate the counting switch," and when the total score threshold has been reached, the image display device may display "You will reach the upper limit with XX points left. Please operate the counting switch." When displaying the number of points up to the total score upper limit when the total score threshold has been reached, the main control board P15 or game media number control board P16 may calculate the total score upper limit - the current total score and send this to the sub-control board P12, or the sub-control board P12 may calculate the total score upper limit - the current total score using the current total score information received.

The display mode of the image display device that prompts the player to operate the counting switch is sometimes referred to as the counting switch prompting display. The counting switch prompting display is a concept that includes the display when there is an abnormality in the total score upper limit, the display when the total score threshold has been reached, and the display when there is an abnormality in the total score upper limit and the total score threshold has been reached. Furthermore, the counting switch prompting display will cease to be displayed when the total score upper limit abnormality or the total score threshold reaching state is resolved.

Furthermore, if the notification mode by the sub-control board P12 is the same when the total score upper limit is abnormal and when the total score threshold is reached, the same notification mode is used from when the total score reaches the threshold (15,000) to when the upper limit is reached (16,383). Since the notification is given in advance from when the total score reaches the threshold to when the upper limit is reached, the notification mode does not suddenly change or a notification is made when the upper limit is reached. This allows the player to be notified in advance and the notification mode does not change even after the upper limit is reached, so even if points exceeding the upper limit are awarded as a result of winning, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that the excess points have been lost (it is possible to make it appear that there is no urgency).

Note that while gameplay can continue when the total score threshold has been reached, gameplay cannot continue if the total score upper limit is abnormal (start switch P3, bet switch P5, and settlement switch P6 cannot be operated).

In addition, when the total score reaches the threshold (15,000) and the upper limit (16,383), the loan receipt result response sent to the loan unit will be sent as an abnormality.

A lending device connection abnormality (VL abnormality) is an abnormality detected by the gaming medium count control board P16. A lending device connection abnormality occurs when the VL signal between the gaming medium count control board P16 and the lending unit turns OFF (when the gaming machine and lending unit are not connected, or when the gaming machine is powered ON but the lending unit is powered OFF). A lending device connection abnormality does not result in an error display on the payout number display. A lending device connection abnormality can be resolved by establishing normal communication with the lending unit and turning the VL signal ON. Furthermore, when a lending device connection abnormality occurs, the following processes are disabled to stop the game from progressing: bet processing via operation of the bet switch, reel rotation processing via operation of the start switch, reel stop processing via operation of the stop switch, and settlement processing via operation of the settlement switch. Note that as long as the game progress is stopped, it is not necessary to disable the reel stop processing via operation of the stop switch. This is because disabling the start of the game prevents the reels from spinning, effectively disabling the operation of the stop switch. However, since communication with the rental unit is not possible, gaming machine P will not be able to perform counting (the counting process based on the operation of the counting switch will be disabled (the number of counted medals in the counting notification will be set to 0), or the operation of the counting switch itself will be disabled). Note that counting may be enabled, but since it will not be possible to send the count to the rental unit, it is desirable to repeat the same counting process.

In addition, when a rental device connection abnormality occurs, the gaming media count control board P16 sends information about the rental device connection abnormality to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 sends a gaming media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error using an image display device or lamp. Then, when the rental device connection abnormality is resolved when the VL signal is turned ON, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the rental device communication abnormality in the gaming media count control notification command to a normal value (e.g., "0") and sends it to the sub-control board P12, causing the sub-control board P12 to end the notification. Note that if the bit corresponding to the rental device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the gaming media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately.

A lending serial number abnormality is detected by the gaming media count control board P16, and is deemed to be a lending serial number abnormality if the lending serial number received from the lending unit is not the previously received lending serial number +1. An error is not displayed on the number of granted displays when a lending serial number abnormality occurs. A lending serial number abnormality can be cleared by receiving a normal lending notification from the lending unit. Furthermore, while game progress is not stopped when a lending serial number abnormality occurs, game progress may be stopped if a lending serial number abnormality is detected a predetermined number of times (including once). To stop game progress, some or all of the following are performed: bets are invalidated, operation of the start switch P3 is invalidated, operation of the stop switch P4 is invalidated, and settlement is invalidated.

In addition, when a lending serial number abnormality occurs, the gaming media count control board P16 sends information that the lending serial number is abnormal to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 sends a gaming media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error using an image display device or lamp. Then, when the lending serial number abnormality is resolved due to a normal lending notification being sent from the lending unit, the main control board P15 changes the bit in the gaming media count control notification command corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality to a normal value (e.g., "0") and sends it to the sub-control board P12, causing the sub-control board P12 to end the notification. Note that if the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the gaming media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately.

Rental device communication error 1 is an error detected by the gaming media count control board P16. When a gaming machine information notification is sent, if the number of times a rental notification has been received since the previous gaming machine information notification was sent is more than one (if the value of the rental notification reception counter is not "1"), it is deemed to be rental device communication error 1. Rental device communication error 1 does not display an error on the award count display. To cancel rental device communication error 1, it can be automatically canceled when the number of times a rental notification has been received since the previous gaming machine information notification was sent becomes one. Furthermore, while game progress is not stopped when rental device communication error 1 occurs, game progress may be stopped if rental device communication error 1 is detected a predetermined number of times (including once). When game progress is stopped, the following processes are disabled to stop game progress: bet processing via operation of the bet switch, reel rotation processing via operation of the start switch, reel stop processing via operation of the stop switch, and settlement processing via operation of the settlement switch. Note that as long as the game progress is stopped, it is not necessary to disable the reel stopping process caused by operating the stop switch. This is because if the start of the game is disabled, the reels will not spin, and therefore operation of the stop switch will essentially be disabled.

Furthermore, when a lending device communication abnormality 1 occurs, the gaming media count control board P16 sends information that a lending device communication abnormality 1 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 then sends a gaming media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error using an image display device or lamp. When the lending device communication abnormality 1 is resolved, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality in the gaming media count control notification command to a normal value (e.g., "0") and sends it to the sub-control board P12, causing the sub-control board P12 to terminate the notification. Note that if the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the gaming media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately.

Rental device communication error 2 is an error detected by the gaming media count control board P16. When a rental notification is received, if the number of times a rental notification has been received since the gaming machine information notification was sent is more than one, this is considered a rental device communication error 2. Rental device communication error 2 does not display an error on the number of awarded games display unit. To cancel rental device communication error 2, it can be automatically canceled when the number of times a rental notification has been received since the gaming machine information notification was sent becomes one when a rental notification is received. Furthermore, while game progress is not stopped when a rental device communication error 2 occurs, game progress may be stopped if a rental device communication error 2 is detected a predetermined number of times (including once). When game progress is stopped, the following processes are disabled to stop game progress: bet processing via operation of the bet switch, reel rotation processing via operation of the start switch, reel stop processing via operation of the stop switch, and settlement processing via operation of the settlement switch. Note that as long as game progress is stopped, the reel stop processing via operation of the stop switch does not need to be disabled. This is because disabling the start of play prevents the reels from spinning, effectively disabling the operation of the stop switch.

Furthermore, when a lending device communication abnormality 2 occurs, the gaming media count control board P16 sends information that a lending device communication abnormality 2 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 then sends a gaming media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error via an image display device or lamp. When the lending device communication abnormality 2 is resolved, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality in the gaming media count control notification command to a normal value (e.g., "0") and sends it to the sub-control board P12, causing the sub-control board P12 to terminate the notification. Note that if the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the gaming media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately.

Rental device communication error 3 is an error detected by the gaming media count control board P16, and is deemed to be a rental device communication error 3 if, at the time of receiving the rental notification, it is less than 100 ms or more than 270 ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent (if gaming machine information notification timer A < 100 ms or gaming machine information notification timer A > 270 ms). Rental device communication error 3 does not display an error on the number of awarded balls display unit. Rental device communication error 3 can be automatically cleared when, at the time of receiving the rental notification, it is more than 100 ms or less than 270 ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent. Furthermore, while rental device communication error 3 does not halt game progress, it may be configured to halt game progress if rental device communication error 3 is detected a predetermined number of times (including once). When the progress of a game is stopped, the following processes are disabled to stop the progress of the game: bet processing via operation of the bet switch, reel spinning processing via operation of the start switch, reel stop processing via operation of the stop switch, and settlement processing via operation of the settlement switch. Note that as long as the progress of the game is stopped, it is not necessary to disable the reel stop processing via operation of the stop switch. This is because disabling the start of the game effectively disables the operation of the stop switch, as the reels will not spin.

Furthermore, when a lending device communication abnormality 3 occurs, the gaming media count control board P16 sends information that a lending device communication abnormality 3 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 then sends a gaming media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error using an image display device or lamp. When the lending device communication abnormality 3 is resolved, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality in the gaming media count control notification command to a normal value (e.g., "0") and sends it to the sub-control board P12, causing the sub-control board P12 to terminate the notification. Note that if the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the gaming media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately.

Rental Device Communication Error 4 is an error detected by the game media count control board P16. If the number of lent medals exceeds 50 when the rental notification is received, this is deemed to be a rental device communication error 4. Rental device communication error 4 does not result in an error display on the awarded medal display. Rental device communication error 4 can be automatically cleared by automatically clearing it when the number of lent medals falls below 50 when the rental notification is received. While game progress is not stopped when rental device communication error 4 occurs, game progress may be stopped if rental device communication error 4 is detected a predetermined number of times (including once). To stop game progress, the following processes are disabled to stop game progress: bet processing via operation of the bet switch, reel rotation processing via operation of the start switch, reel stop processing via operation of the stop switch, and settlement processing via operation of the settlement switch. Note that as long as game progress is stopped, the reel stop processing via operation of the stop switch does not need to be disabled. This is because disabling the start of gameplay prevents the reels from spinning, effectively disabling the operation of the stop switch.

Furthermore, when rental device communication abnormality 4 occurs, the gaming media count control board P16 sends information that rental device communication abnormality 4 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 then sends a gaming media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error via an image display device or lamp. Then, when rental device communication abnormality 4 is resolved, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the rental device communication abnormality in the gaming media count control notification command to a normal value (e.g., "0") and sends it to the sub-control board P12, causing the sub-control board P12 to terminate the notification. Note that if the bit corresponding to the rental device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the gaming media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately.

Lending device communication error 5 is an error detected by the game media count control board P16. It is deemed a lending device communication error 5 if the number of medals loaned is not 0 when the lending notification is received and the lending notification is received other than after the hall control and fraud monitoring information has been transmitted. Lending device communication error 5 does not display an error on the award count display. Lending device communication error 5 can be automatically canceled by the number of medals loaned is not 0 when the lending notification is received and the lending notification is received after the hall control and fraud monitoring information has been transmitted. Furthermore, while game progress is not stopped when a lending device communication error 5 occurs, game progress may be stopped if a lending device communication error 5 is detected a predetermined number of times (including once). To stop game progress, the following processes are disabled to stop game progress: bet processing via the bet switch, reel rotation processing via the start switch, reel stop processing via the stop switch, and settlement processing via the settlement switch. Note that as long as game progress is stopped, the reel stop processing via the stop switch does not need to be disabled. This is because disabling the start of play prevents the reels from spinning, effectively disabling the operation of the stop switch.

Furthermore, when rental device communication abnormality 5 occurs, the gaming media count control board P16 sends information that rental device communication abnormality 5 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 then sends a gaming media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error via an image display device or lamp. When rental device communication abnormality 5 is resolved, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the rental device communication abnormality in the gaming media count control notification command to a normal value (e.g., "0") and sends it to the sub-control board P12, causing the sub-control board P12 to terminate the notification. Note that if the bit corresponding to the rental device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the gaming media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately.

Rental device communication error 6 is an error detected by the game media count control board P16. If the number of loaned medals is not 0 and the number of counted medals is not 0 when the loan notification is received, it is considered a rental device communication error 6. A rental device communication error 6 does not result in an error display on the awarded medal display unit. To cancel rental device communication error 6, the number of loaned medals must be 0 and the number of counted medals must be 0 when the loan notification is received, or the number of loaned medals must be 0 and the number of counted medals must be 0 when the loan notification is received, or the number of loaned medals must be 0 and the number of counted medals must be 0 when the loan notification is received. Furthermore, while progress of the game is not stopped when a rental device communication error 6 occurs, progress of the game may be stopped if a rental device communication error 6 is detected a predetermined number of times (including once) or more. When the progress of a game is stopped, the following processes are disabled to stop the progress of the game: bet processing via operation of the bet switch, reel spinning processing via operation of the start switch, reel stop processing via operation of the stop switch, and settlement processing via operation of the settlement switch. Note that as long as the progress of the game is stopped, it is not necessary to disable the reel stop processing via operation of the stop switch. This is because disabling the start of the game effectively disables the operation of the stop switch, as the reels will not spin.

Furthermore, when a rental device communication abnormality 6 occurs, the gaming media count control board P16 sends information that a rental device communication abnormality 6 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 then sends a gaming media count control notification command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error via an image display device or lamp. Then, when the rental device communication abnormality 6 is resolved, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the rental device communication abnormality in the gaming media count control notification command to a normal value (e.g., "0") and sends it to the sub-control board P12, causing the sub-control board P12 to terminate the notification. Note that if the bit corresponding to the rental device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value when the sub-control board P12 receives the gaming media count control notification command, the notification may be stopped after a predetermined period of time rather than immediately.

In this embodiment, for the above-mentioned rental device connection abnormality, rental serial number abnormality, rental device communication abnormality 1, rental device communication abnormality 2, rental device communication abnormality 3, rental device communication abnormality 4, rental device communication abnormality 5, and rental device communication abnormality 6, information indicating that an abnormality has occurred on the sub-control board P12 is sent, but information that can identify the type of abnormality is not sent. Furthermore, for rental device communication abnormality 1, rental device communication abnormality 2, rental device communication abnormality 3, rental device communication abnormality 4, rental device communication abnormality 5, and rental device communication abnormality 6, the status indicator lamp only lights in one mode, and the lighting mode of the status indicator lamp does not allow the type of rental device communication abnormality to be determined.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult to determine the conditions under which rental device connection abnormalities, rental serial number abnormalities, rental device communication abnormality 1, rental device communication abnormality 2, rental device communication abnormality 3, rental device communication abnormality 4, rental device communication abnormality 5, and rental device communication abnormality 6 occur due to fraud.

In addition, for rental device connection abnormalities, rental serial number abnormalities, rental device communication abnormalities 1, rental device communication abnormalities 2, rental device communication abnormalities 3, rental device communication abnormalities 4, rental device communication abnormalities 5, and rental device communication abnormalities 6, information that can identify the type of abnormality may be sent to the sub-control board P12. With this configuration, it is possible to manage error history on the sub-control board P12.

In addition, with regard to the abnormalities detected by the gaming machine P, in addition to the abnormalities mentioned above, it is also acceptable for the gaming machine P to have other abnormalities such as radio wave abnormalities (for example, an abnormality when it determines that there is an abnormality in the radio waves it is receiving), random number abnormalities (for example, an abnormality when it determines that there is an abnormality in the random numbers used in internal lotteries or AT lotteries), or setting value abnormalities (for example, an abnormality when it determines that there is an abnormality in the setting values used in internal lotteries or AT lotteries).

Furthermore, among the errors that can be detected by the main control board P15, there are unrecoverable errors that cannot be recovered even by operating the reset switch (they can be recovered by performing initialization procedures such as changing settings). Unrecoverable errors occur when "recovery after power outage cannot be performed normally," "the symbol combination display is abnormal when all reels have stopped," "the setting value is out of range," "an abnormality is detected in the frequency of the clock input to the RCK terminal used to update the random number," or "an abnormality is detected in the update status of the built-in random number."

Furthermore, an example has been described in which, when an abnormality is detected on the game medium count control board P16, a command is sent to the sub-control board P12 via the main control board P15. However, this is not limited to this. The game medium count control board P16 and the sub-control board P12 may be directly connected by a communication cable (harness, etc.), and commands may be sent from the game medium count control board P16 to the sub-control board P12 without going through the main control board P15.

Furthermore, while the embodiment has been described in which an error is reported by the number of awarded items display unit, an error may also be reported by the number of gaming media display unit P9.

Furthermore, when the sub-control board P12 receives an error command sent from the main control board P15 due to an error occurring in the main control board P15 or the game medium count control board P16, the sub-control board P12 may be configured to store the time of reception, the error content, and the game status in association with each other in a specified memory area.

When storing the time, the sub-control board P12 is equipped with an RTC (real-time clock), and the time is stored in a designated memory area based on information from the RTC. The designated memory area is backed up by a backup power supply and is configured so that it will not be initialized when the power is turned off or on. It is also configured so that it will not be initialized when settings are changed.

When storing the game status, the contents based on commands related to the main game status (CZ, AT, etc.) from the main control board P15, and the fact that gameplay is in progress based on start commands and end commands, are stored in a designated memory area. The designated memory area is backed up by a backup power supply and is configured so that it will not be initialized when the power is turned off or on. It is also configured so that it will not be initialized when settings are changed.

The "time of reception," "error details," and "game status" stored in this way are configured to be viewable by the amusement center manager. For example, pressing the reset button (reset switch) once while changing or checking settings displays the administrator menu screen, and the information can be viewed by selecting the "error history" item from the multiple items on the administrator menu screen. The error history item is capable of displaying multiple accumulated error details. Furthermore, if there are many error histories, the administrator can narrow the viewing range by selecting the date range or error type, etc., to make it easier for the manager to check the desired error history. Furthermore, if there are many error histories, the system may be configured to display either the most recent error history based on the current time, or multiple error histories from the most recent error histories based on the current time.

Methods for displaying the administrator menu screen are not limited to pressing the reset button once while changing or checking settings, but could also include, for example, operating a specified switch inside the gaming machine P while it is in standby mode. In other words, the system should be configured so that players cannot (or find it difficult to) display the administrator menu screen, but the administrator can.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to store information such as "A deposit request communication error occurred during game standby at XX year, XX month, XX day, XX hour, XX minute, XX second," on the sub-control board P12, and the administrator can check the desired error history by selecting the error history item. It is also possible to display the time down to milliseconds.

Furthermore, when storing the above-mentioned error details, the sub-control board P12 may store information related to the total score stored on the game media count control board P16 in association with the error details. For example, when an error related to the loan notification, such as loan device connection abnormality, loan serial number abnormality, loan device communication abnormality 1, loan device communication abnormality 2, loan device communication abnormality 3, loan device communication abnormality 4, loan device communication abnormality 5, or loan device communication abnormality 6, occurs, a command related to the total score may be sent to the main control board P15, and then sent from the main control board P15 to the sub-control board P12, thereby storing the error related to the loan notification and the total score information in association with each other.

By configuring it in this way, the increase or decrease in the total score at the time of the loan notification is stored, making it possible to store a history on the sub-control board P12 even when a loan notification is made fraudulently. Note that the errors that are stored in association with the total score are not limited to the errors listed above; information regarding the total score may be associated with all errors.

The sub-control board P12 may also be configured to store history information not only when an error occurs, but also when counting processing is performed. In this case, it is conceivable that the counting information and total score information are stored in association with each other. For example, when the counting switch P7 is pressed and the counting processing is performed, the counted points and total score are stored in association with each other. Also, when the counting switch P7 is pressed and held down to perform counting continuously every 300 ms, all of the counting information for every 300 ms is stored.

By configuring it in this way, the entire history of the counting process can be stored, so if an abnormal number is counted, it becomes possible to provide evidence to determine whether it is fraudulent.

The sub-control board P12 may also be configured to store history information not only when an error occurs, but also when a loan notification is received. In this case, the loan information and total score information may be stored in association with each other. For example, when a loan notification is received, the loan points and total score may be stored in association with each other. In other words, even if loan notifications are received consecutively every 300 ms, all of the loan notification information for every 300 ms may be stored.

The sub-control board P12 may also be configured to store history information periodically, not just when an error occurs. In this case, it is also possible to store loan information and total score information in association with each other. For example, the game media count control board P16 periodically (e.g., every 60 seconds, every 180 seconds, etc.) transmits total score information to the main control board P15, the main control board P15 transmits the received total score information to the sub-control board P12, and the sub-control board P12 stores the received total score information in association with time information.

By configuring it in this way, even if there is no event that triggers the storage of history information, such as an error, the sub-control board P12 can periodically associate and store total score information, time information, etc., making it possible to store history information for fraud that does not use the counting switch P7 or loan switch, and this history information can be used to determine whether or not fraud has occurred.

The sub-control board P12 may also make its own error judgment even if it does not receive an error command. For example, it may judge an error to have occurred if it receives a command related to a loan notification or a command related to a counting notification twice within 300 ms. This is because the communication between the game media count control board P16 and the loan unit is configured to receive or send a loan notification or counting notification once every 300 ms, and two receptions or transmissions within 300 ms can be considered to be abnormal communication.

In this case, when the sub-control board P12 receives a command related to a loan notification or a command related to a count notification from the main control board P15, it sets a timer equivalent to 300 ms. If it determines that the next command related to a loan notification or a command related to a count notification was received within 300 ms, it issues a warning indicating an error (for example, displaying "Please check the total score" on the LCD, lighting a lamp in a lighting pattern corresponding to the abnormality, or outputting an audio message saying "An abnormality has been detected"). One possible method for determining this abnormality is to set a timer equivalent to 300 ms each time a command is received (for example, if the sub-control board P12's interrupt processing interval is 1 ms, a timer equivalent to 300 ms would be set to a count value of "299"), and periodically (for example, after each interrupt) decrement the timer to determine whether the timer is at 0 when a command is received. If the timer is at 0, it is determined to be normal, and if the timer is not at 0, it is determined to be abnormal. However, this is not limited to this method, and a method of incrementing the timer with an initial value of 0 is also possible.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to store information such as "At XX year, XX month, XX day, XX hour, XX minute, XX second, a count notification error occurred while the game was in standby mode, the count points at that time were 50, and the total points were 2000," on the sub-control board P12. Even if the game media count control board P16 is unable to send an error command due to fraud, the sub-control board P12 can determine the error, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is able to prevent fraud.

The sub-control board P12 may also determine an abnormality if it receives multiple consecutive loan notifications (e.g., 10 times) every 300 ms. If an abnormality is determined, it will issue a warning indicating the abnormality (e.g., displaying "Please check your total score" on the LCD, lighting a lamp in a lighting pattern corresponding to the abnormality, or outputting an audio message saying "An abnormality has been detected"). By configuring it in this way, even if the main control board P15 or the game media count control board P16 do not determine an abnormality, the sub-control board P12 can determine an abnormality if there is a possibility that a loan notification has been sent to the gaming machine P in an unauthorized manner, making it possible to prevent fraud and provide a safer gaming machine.

The above-mentioned non-recoverable errors, input request communication errors, settlement request communication errors, and payout request communication errors are errors that can be detected by the main control means, and the progress of the game is halted by disabling bet processing via operation of the bet switch, reel rotation processing via operation of the start switch, reel stop processing via operation of the stop switch, and settlement processing via operation of the settlement switch. Furthermore, if a non-recoverable error, input request communication error, settlement request communication error, or payout request communication error occurs in a situation where transition to setting confirmation mode is possible, and the non-recoverable error, input request communication error, settlement request communication error, or payout request communication error has not been resolved, turning the setting key switch to the ON position will prevent transition to setting confirmation mode.

This allows for the possibility of an abnormality occurring due to fraud, and by not switching to setting confirmation mode, which displays useful setting value information during an error, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent acquisition of useful information.

In addition, rental device connection abnormalities (VL abnormalities) and total point upper limit abnormalities are errors that can be detected by the gaming media count control means, but when a rental device connection abnormality (VL abnormality) or total point upper limit abnormality occurs, the progress of the game is stopped by disabling bet processing via operation of the bet switch, reel rotation processing via operation of the start switch, reel stop processing via operation of the stop switch, and settlement processing via operation of the settlement switch.

Rental device connection abnormalities (VL abnormalities) and total score limit abnormalities can occur due to fraud, but they can also occur due to equipment failure, faulty facilities, or normal power-on procedures. Therefore, game progress will stop, but the setting key switch can be turned to the ON position to enter setting check mode. In other words, if a rental device connection abnormality (VL abnormality) or total score limit abnormality occurs when it is possible to enter setting check mode, and the rental device connection abnormality (VL abnormality) or total score limit abnormality has not been resolved, turning the setting key switch to the ON position will allow the player to enter setting check mode.

This means that even if a rental device connection abnormality (VL abnormality) or total score upper limit abnormality occurs during normal operation, it is possible to quickly switch to setting confirmation mode and check the setting values.

In addition to the errors mentioned above, counting may also be impossible due to an error on the rental unit side. For example, if the rental unit is unable to properly receive messages sent from the gaming machine for a specified period of time after the gaming machine and rental unit begin communication, the rental unit will be unable to rent, replay, or receive counting. In this case, even if the gaming machine's counting switch is operated, the rental unit will be unable to count, and counting information will not be stored on the card.

Since the gaming machine receives a rental notification as information from the rental unit, if there is no VL abnormality, it can determine that there is a communication abnormality with the rental unit if the rental notification cannot be received. Therefore, when the gaming machine detects that it is unable to receive a rental notification (when rental device communication abnormality 1 is set), it can disable the function of the counting switch by determining that it has not received the rental notification a predetermined number of times (including once), and can prevent the counting notification from being sent to the rental unit. This prevents the gaming machine from sending a counting notification with a counted medal number other than 0 when the rental unit is unable to receive the counting notification.

<Counting process>
Next, the counting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

The counting control start process in Figure 28 (synonymous with the counting control process described above) is a process that primarily outputs a counting notification from the gaming machine to the lending unit. Specifically, it is one of the processes executed by the timer interrupt process of the gaming media count control board P16. The cycle of the timer interrupt process of the gaming media count control board P16 is 1 ms.

"Count button check" is a process that sets the count button state. The count button check process is explained with reference to Figure 52.

The count button check process is a process that prevents 50 from being counted as a count point even when the count notification timing arrives after the count button is released in a situation where multiple long presses have been determined in the count process, and is a process that is executed in place of the count execution flag process described above. In other words, processes such as saving the count button state that accompany the count button check process are not necessary when using counting process using the count execution flag. Also, if you want to execute a process that prevents 50 from being counted as a count point even when the count notification timing arrives after the count button is released in a situation where multiple long presses have been determined in the count process, execute processes such as saving the count button state that accompany the count button check process, and do not execute processes related to the count execution flag.

"Get count button state" retrieves the value corresponding to the count button state stored in the count button state memory area (stores it in register A). The values corresponding to the count button state stored in the count button state memory area are: "0" indicates that the count button state is 0, meaning the count button has not been pressed; "1" indicates that the count button state is 1, meaning the count button has been pressed briefly; "2" indicates that the count button state is 2, meaning the count button has been pressed and held (first time); and "3" indicates that the count button state is 3, meaning the count button has been pressed and held (second time or later).

"Counting button state = 1?" determines whether the counting button state is 1, and if it is, executes the "Clear counting button timer" process.

"Count button state = 2?" determines whether the count button state is 2, and if it is, executes the "Clear count button timer" process.

"Count button signal on?" determines whether the count button is pressed or not, and if the count button is not pressed, executes the "Count button status = 0 set" process.

"Count button state ≠ 0?" determines whether the count button state is ≠ 0, and if the count button state is not 0 (normally, the count button state is 3), it executes the "Clear count button timer" process.

"Counting execution timer +1" executes the process of adding 1 to the value stored in the counting execution timer storage area. Note that "Counting execution timer +1" corrects the value stored in the counting execution timer storage area to 500 if the value stored in the counting execution timer storage area exceeds 500, and adds 1 to the value stored in the counting execution timer storage area if the value stored in the counting execution timer storage area is less than 500.

"Count button timer < 500?" determines whether the value stored in the count execution timer memory area, added by "Count execution timer + 1," is less than 500, and if it is less than 500, the count button check process ends. If the count button timer is less than 500, it means that less than 500 ms have passed since the count button was pressed, and it is not yet determined that the count button was pressed and held down.

"Count button state = 2 set" executes a process to store "2" in register A if the value stored in the count execution timer memory area added by "Count execution timer + 1" is 500 or greater.

"Save count button state" executes a process to store the value of register A in the count button state storage area. Register A stores a value corresponding to the count button state, and in the count button check process, count button state = 0, count button state = 1, or count button state = 2 can be set.

"Count button timer clear" executes a process to initialize (set to 0) the value in the count execution timer memory area.

"Count button state = 0 set" is a process that is executed when the count button is not pressed in "Count button signal on?", and stores "0" in register A.

"Counting button timer = 0?" is a process that determines whether the value in the counting execution timer storage area is 0. If the value in the counting execution timer storage area is 0, the "Save counting button state" process sets the counting button state to 0. If the value in the counting execution timer storage area is not 0, the "Counting button state = 1 Set" process is executed.

"Count button state = 1 set" executes the process of storing "1" in register A. This process can be executed when the count button is pressed with count button state = 0, the count execution timer is counting, and the count button is released before the count value of the count execution timer reaches 500. In other words, this process can be executed when the count button is pressed briefly.

When "Count Button Timer Clear" is executed, "Count Button Check" ends, the process returns to the count control start process, and "Count Notification Timing?" is executed.

"Counting notification timing?" determines whether it is time to output a counting notification to the rental unit. Specifically, this is determined based on the value of the memory area (_TM_INF_CTL_A) for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A, which will be described later. If the value stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A is "200" (in other words, when 100 ms have passed since the gaming machine information notification was output), it is determined to be time to output a counting notification to the rental unit (YES); if the value stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A is not "200," it is determined to be NO.

"Clear Counted Medal Count" clears (to 0) the counting point memory area (_CT_CAL_VAL), which is the RWM area of the game media count control board P16 and can store the counting points to be counted. Note that the data stored in the counting cumulative point memory area (_CT_CAL_ALL), which can store the counting cumulative points, is not cleared at this time.

"Clear counting flag" clears (to 0) the counting flag (_FL_CAL_EXE), which indicates whether counting is in progress and is located in the RWM area of the game media count control board P16.

"VL abnormality flag ≠ 0?" determines whether the connection between the gaming machine and the rental unit is normal. Specifically, if the VL abnormality flag (_FL_VL_ABN), which is the RWM area of the gaming media count control board P16, is a value indicating normal (e.g., "0"), the result is NO. If the VL abnormality flag is a value indicating abnormality (e.g., "FFh"), the result is YES. The VL abnormality flag is updated by the execution of the timer interrupt process of the gaming media count control board P16. If there is input data for the VL signal from the rental unit (if the gaming machine and rental unit are electrically connected), the VL abnormality flag stores a value indicating normality. If there is no input data for the VL signal from the rental unit (if the gaming machine and rental unit are not electrically connected), the VL abnormality flag stores a value indicating abnormality.

"Total score = 0?" determines whether the total score (total number of points) is 0 based on the total score memory area (_NB_MEDAL), which is the RWM area of the game media count control board P16 and can store the total score. If the total score is 0, the result is YES. If the total score is not 0, the result is NO. If it is determined that a value indicating an abnormality is stored in the VL abnormality flag, a count notification is output without determining the total score.

"Counting execution flag = 1?" determines whether the counting execution flag is "1." As described above, the counting execution flag is a flag that manages whether a short press operation or a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. For example, a counting execution flag memory area (_FL_CAL_ACT) that manages the counting execution flag is provided in the RWM area of the gaming media count control board P16. If the value stored in the counting execution flag memory area is "0" (the counting execution flag is 0), it indicates that it has not yet been determined whether a short press operation or a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. If the value stored in the counting execution flag memory area is "1" (the counting execution flag is 1), it indicates that it has been determined that a short press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. When the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area is "2" (when the counting execution flag is 2), it indicates that a long press operation has been determined as the operation of the counting switch P7. Therefore, when "Counting execution flag = 1?" returns YES, it means that the counting execution flag storage area is "1" (when it has stored that a short press operation has been received as the operation of the counting switch P7). Specifically, to determine whether the counting execution flag is "1," the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area is stored in register A, and the value of register A is compared with "1." If the values are the same, a YES determination is made. Note that the detailed method for generating the counting execution flag will be explained in the "Counting execution flag setting" section below.

"Counting execution flag = 0?" determines whether the counting execution flag is "0." Specifically, if the counting execution flag storage area is "0" (it has not been determined whether a short press operation or a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7), a YES determination is made.

If the count button check process is used as described above, "Count execution flag = 1?" will be replaced with "Count button status = 1?" and "Count execution flag = 0?" will be replaced with "Count button status = 0?". As with the count execution flag, "Count points = 50 sets" will be executed if "Count button status = 1" is not met and "Count button status = 0" is not met.

"Counting point = 50 set" sets the counting point to 50 (specifically, stores 50 in register A).

"Total score >= Counted score?" performs a calculation (subtraction) that compares the total score with 50 (the value stored in register A).

"Get total score" stores the total score in register A. In other words, it updates the value of register A from "50" to "total score." This process is executed when "Total score >= Counted points?" returns NO; in other words, when it is determined that 50 is greater than the total score (when the total score is less than 50).

"Save count points" is a process that stores count points in the count point memory area (_CT_CAL_VAL), which is the RWM area of the game media count control board P16 and can store count points to be counted. Specifically, it is a process that stores the value of the A register in the count point memory area. For example, if "Count execution flag = 1?" is answered YES, the value of the A register is "1", so "1" is stored in the count point memory area. Furthermore, if "Total points ≧ count points?" is answered YES, the value of the A register is "50", so "50" is stored in the count point memory area. Furthermore, if "Total points ≧ count points?" is answered NO, the value of the A register is "total points", so "total points" is stored in the count point memory area. In this way, when a short press operation is received as the operation of the counting switch P7, the counting point can be derived using the value in the counting execution flag storage area, simplifying the process (there is no need to set the counting point to "1"). Note that when a short press operation is received as the operation of the counting switch P7, the process of setting the counting point to "1" may be executed without using the value in the counting execution flag storage area.

As described above, when a short press operation is received as the operation of counting switch P7, the count point is "1", when a long press operation is received as the operation of counting switch P7 and the total score is 50 or more, the count point is "50", and when a long press operation is received as the operation of counting switch P7 and the total score is less than 50, the count point is "total score". In other words, the maximum number of count points that can be counted in one operation (one count notification) is 50.

In the counting process, it may be configured to first determine whether the counting switch P7 has been operated (whether the counting execution flag is other than 0), and if the counting switch P7 has been operated (if the counting execution flag is other than 0), determine whether the total points are 0, or not, and not determine whether the total points are 0 if the counting switch P7 has not been operated.

With this configuration, the situation where the total score is 0 is more likely to occur (the situation lasts longer) than the situation where counting switch P7 is operated, so by first determining whether counting switch P7 is operated, the processing time is shorter than if you first determined whether the total score is 0.

"Update total score" stores the value obtained by subtracting the counted points from the total score in the total score storage area. In other words, the total score is updated according to the counted points before the count notification is output.

"Update cumulative count points" adds the count points to the cumulative count points memory area (_CT_CAL_ALL) that can store cumulative count points, which is the RWM area of the game medium count control board P16, and updates the cumulative count points memory area (_CT_CAL_ALL) that can store cumulative count points.

"Set counting flag" sets the counting flag (_FL_CAL_EXE) (stores "FF") because it is determined that the counting point will then be "1" or greater. In other words, if the counting point is "0", the counting flag is not set.

"Count notification output" outputs a count notification to the lending unit. Specifically, it outputs 0x07 as the message length, 0x02 as the command, the count serial number stored in the count serial number storage area (_NB_CAL_NUM) that stores count serial numbers and is the RWM area of the game medium count control board P16, the count point stored in the count point storage area (_CT_CAL_VAL) that can store count points, the cumulative count point stored in the cumulative count point storage area (_CT_CAL_ALL) that can store cumulative count points, and the checksum value (1 byte) of the various output data.

"Count serial number update" executes the process of updating the count serial number (increasing by +1). Note that when the count serial number is 255, the result of incrementing by +1 is 0, so if it becomes 0 (if it is determined to be 0), the process of updating the count serial number (increasing by +1) is executed again. In other words, when the count serial number is 255, the process of updating the count serial number is executed twice, updating the count serial number to 1. Also, when the count serial number is a value less than 255 (for example, 10), the result of executing the process of updating the count serial number (increasing by +1) will not be 0, so the count serial number can be updated (for example, to 11) by executing the process of updating the count serial number only once.

"Counting execution flag clear" is a process that clears (e.g., to 0) the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area. By configuring it in this way, the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area can be reset to its initial value (e.g., 0) each time the counting control start process is executed (every 300 ms period). In other words, even if "0" is output as the count point in the counting notification, such as when the VL abnormality flag is not 0 (when the VL abnormality flag is ON) or when the total score is 0, the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area can be reset to its initial value (e.g., 0). Note that the counting control start process does not clear the value in the timer area (counting execution timer storage area (_TM_CAL_ACT) described below) that measures the time that the counting switch P7 is operated.

As mentioned above, if the count button check process is used, "Count execution flag clear" is not executed, but "Count button status < 2?" is executed. Conversely, if the count execution flag process is used, "Count button status < 2?" is not executed.

"Counting button state < 2?" is a process that determines whether the counting button state stored in the counting button state storage area is less than 2.

If it determines that the count button state is less than 2 (count button state = 0 or count button state = 1), it clears the value stored in the count button state memory area (sets count button state = 0); if it determines that the count button state is not less than 2 (count button state = 2 or count button state = 3), it saves 3 in the count button state memory area (sets count button state = 3).

As described above, when processing related to the counting button state is executed, if the counting process related to a long press is performed one or more times and the counting button is released (after counting 50 one or more times as the count point and before the next count notification timing), the counting button check process will set the counting button state to 0, so the counting control start process will not set the count point to 50, but rather the count point to 0, and a count notification will be sent. In other words, since no counting occurs after the counting process related to a long press is performed one or more times and then the counting button is released, processing can be executed based on the player's operation, eliminating dissatisfaction with the game specifications.

In addition, if the count button is pressed for 500 ms or more and a counting notification of 50 has not yet been sent, the counting button state will be 2, and the counting control start process will set the counting point to 50 and send a counting notification. In other words, a player who presses the counting button for 500 ms or more is a player who wants to count 50, so even if the counting button is released after being pressed for 500 ms or more but before the counting notification is sent, a counting notification of 50 can be sent, allowing processing to be performed based on the player's operation and eliminating dissatisfaction with the game specifications.

In the above description, each memory area is provided in the RWM of the gaming media count control board P16, but in the case of a gaming machine P that does not have a gaming media count control board P16, it may also be configured so that it is provided in the RWM of the main control board P15.

In addition, information based on the counting in progress flag (_FL_CAL_EXE) is sent to the main control board P15. This allows the main control board P15 to understand that counting is in progress. Furthermore, for example, by sending information indicating that counting is in progress from the main control board P15 to the performance control board, the performance control board can perform a performance that corresponds to the counting in progress.

Here, the counting points depending on the timing of pressing and releasing the counting switch P7 will be explained using Figures 40 to 43. Note that T1, T2, T3, T4, and T5 in Figures 40 to 43 all indicate counting notification timing, and counting notifications are sent to the rental unit every 300 ms. Also, Figures 40 to 43 show the count value as "50" in the case of a long press, but if the total score is less than 50 points, the total score value will be the count value (for example, if the total score is 30 points, the count value will be "30").

Figure 40 explains the counting process that is performed when the player releases counting switch P7 after holding it down for a long time, prior to the count notification timing.

In Figure 40, counting switch P7 is pressed at timing S1, and released at timing S2, more than 500 ms after which a long press determination is made (700 ms has passed). The counting execution flag is set to 2 at timing F1, 500 ms after timing S1, and is set to 0 at timing F2 (T4), which is the count notification timing after timing S2.

In Figure 40, the counting switch P7, which has been pressed for 500 ms or more, is released at time S2, which is before time T4. However, by maintaining the counting execution flag at 2, the counting process (counting process using the count value "50") due to the long press can be executed at time T4, making it possible to reflect the player's operation without wasting the pressing time from T3 to S2.

Figure 41 is a diagram explaining the counting process that is executed when the player presses and holds the counting switch P7, then releases it, and then presses and releases it again before the next count notification timing.

In Figure 41, counting switch P7 is pressed at timing S1, and is released at timing S2, when 500 ms or more (700 ms) has elapsed since the long press determination is made. Counting switch P7 is pressed again at timing S3 before the next count notification timing T4, and is released at timing S4 before T4. The counting execution flag becomes 2 at timing F1, 500 ms after S1, and becomes 0 at timing F2 (T4), which is the count notification timing after timing S2.

In Figure 41, counting switch P7 is pressed briefly between the time S2, when the counting switch P7 is released after being pressed for 500 ms or more, and the time T4, which is the next count notification time (counting switch P7 is pressed at time S3 and released 50 ms later at time S4), but the count execution flag does not become 1 even at times S3 and S4; it remains 2, and the count value at time T4 is "50". In this way, even if there is a short press after a long press, the counting process can be performed using the long press, so the count value due to the long press can be sent to the rental unit at the count notification time, even if there is an incorrect operation or noise after the long press.

At timing T3 in Figure 41, the count execution flag is set to 2 due to the long press of count switch P7, so the count value is "50". Then, because count switch P7 continues to be pressed, the count value "50" is output to the rental unit at timing T3, after which the count execution flag is temporarily set to 0. In the next interrupt process, the count execution timer is set to "500", so the count execution flag is again set to 2.

Figure 42 is a diagram explaining the counting process that is executed when the player presses and holds the counting switch P7, then releases it, and then presses and releases it again before the next count notification timing.

In Figure 42, counting switch P7 is pressed at timing S1, released at timing S2 after 500 ms or more (700 ms) have passed since the long press determination is made, and counting switch P7 is pressed again at timing S3 before the next count notification timing T4, and released at timing S4 before crossing T4 and reaching T5. The counting execution flag becomes 2 at timing F1, 500 ms after timing S1, and becomes 0 at timing F2 (T4), which is the count notification timing after timing S2. Furthermore, the counting execution flag becomes 1 at timing S4, when counting switch P7 is released less than 500 ms after timing S3, and becomes 0 at timing F4 (T5), which is the count notification timing after timing S4.

In Figure 42, counting switch P7 is pressed briefly between the time S2, when the counting switch P7 is released after being pressed for 500 ms or more, and the time T4, which is the next count notification time (counting switch P7 is pressed at time S3 and released 200 ms later at time S4), but the count execution flag remains set to 2 even at time S3, and the count value at time T4 is "50." Furthermore, if counting switch P7 is released at time S4, which is between time T4 and time T5 and less than 500 ms have elapsed since S3, the requirement for a short press of counting switch P7 pressed at time S3 is met, so the count execution flag becomes 1 at time S4 (F3), and the count value at time T5, which is the count notification time, is "1." In this way, even if a long press is followed by a short press, the counting process can be performed for the long press, and if the time during which the short press spans the count notification timing, the counting process can be performed for the short press. Therefore, even if a player performs a short press after a long press, the counting process for the long press and short press can be performed, allowing control to be performed in line with the player's operational intentions.

At timing T3 in Figure 42, the count execution flag is set to 2 due to the long press of count switch P7, so the count value is "50". Then, because count switch P7 continues to be pressed, the count value "50" is output to the rental unit at timing T3, after which the count execution flag is temporarily set to 0. In the next interrupt process, the count execution timer is set to "500", so the count execution flag is set to 2 again.

Figure 43 explains the counting process that is executed when the player releases the counting switch P7 at the timing of a short press and then presses the counting switch P7 again before the next count notification timing.

In Figure 43, counting switch P7 is pressed at timing S1, released 50 ms later at timing S2, pressed again at timing S3 before the next count notification timing T4, and released at timing S4 before T5, spanning T3 and T4. The counting execution flag becomes 1 at timing F1, 50 ms after S1 (timing S2, when counting switch P7 is released 50 ms after being pressed at timing S1), remains 1 at timing S3, before timing T3, which is the count notification timing after timing S2, and then becomes 0 at timing T3 (F2). Furthermore, at the timing of T4, which is 300 ms after T3, 500 ms have not yet passed since the timing of S3 when the counting switch P7 was pressed again, and the counting switch P7 remains pressed, so the counting execution flag is 0. Furthermore, at the timing of F3, which is 500 ms after the timing of S3 when the counting switch P7 was pressed again, the counting execution flag is set to 2, and because the counting switch P7 is released between T4 and T5, the counting execution flag is set to 0 at the timing of F4 (T5).

In Figure 43, if the counting switch P7 pressed at S1 is released at S2, which is the timing of a short press, and then pressed again at S3, which is before the next count notification timing T3, the counting process will be executed at T3, with the short press count value of "1". However, since the counting execution timer has been counting since S3, before T3, even if the counting switch P7 is released at S4, the counting process will be executed at T5, with the count value of "50". In this way, even if a short press is followed by a long press, counting can be performed for both the short press and the long press. Furthermore, the counting execution timer used to determine a long press begins counting from the timing of the press of counting switch P7, which constitutes a long press. Therefore, even if a player performs a long press after a short press, counting can be performed for the long press and short press. Furthermore, because the counting execution timer used to determine a long press can start counting at timing S3 when counting switch P7 is pressed, which occurs before timing F2 when the counting process for the short press is performed, control can be executed in line with the player's operational intentions.

Next, I'll explain the effects that occur during counting.

As described above, when the counting switch P7 is operated and counting is in progress (when counting), information based on the counting flag (_FL_CAL_EXE) is sent to the main control board P15, enabling the performance control board to display performances that correspond to the counting. Performances that correspond to the counting can include performances using sound and/or images.

In addition, as a corresponding effect during counting, the length of the effect output can be varied depending on the number of count points (referred to as one count point) counted by one operation of the count switch P7 (including a long press operation, etc.). When configured in this way, the length of the effect varies depending on the number of count points based on the operation of the count switch P7, making it possible to add enjoyment to the act of accumulating and counting the total points.

As mentioned above, the maximum number of points that can be counted in one count notification (one cycle) is 50, and the cycle for outputting count notifications is approximately 0.3 seconds.

Below is an example of the length of the effect depending on the number of counting points counted by one operation of counting switch P7 (including long press operations, etc.).

Example 1) When the count point is "25" in one time Since the count point is greater than "0" and less than "50", a uniform effect of approximately 0.3 seconds (0.3 seconds x 1) is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x 1) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the count points. The same applies below.

Example 2) When the counting point for one time is "50" Since the counting point is "50", a performance of approximately 0.3 seconds (0.3 seconds x 1) is executed.

Example 3) When the count point is "130" in one time: Because the count point is greater than "100" but less than "150," a presentation of approximately 0.9 seconds is executed, which is 0.3 seconds x 3. The coefficient (here, x 3) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the count points.

Example 4) When the count point is "1480" in one time: Because the count point is greater than "1450" and less than or equal to "1500", a performance of approximately 9 seconds is executed, which is 0.3 seconds x 30. The coefficient (here, x 30) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the count points.

In addition, as a corresponding effect during counting, the type of effect output can be varied depending on the number of points (total points) that can be counted with one operation of the counting switch P7. In this configuration, the type and/or length of the effect varies depending on the number of points counted based on the operation of the counting switch P7, making it possible to add enjoyment to the act of accumulating and counting total points. In this configuration, for example, it is conceivable that information from the total point memory area (_NB_MEDAL) that can store total points can be sent to the main control means, allowing the main control board P15 and/or the effect control board to grasp the number of points (total points) that can be counted with one operation of the counting switch P7.

For example, when the counting switch P7 is operated to count when the total score is less than 500, effect A can be executed as the corresponding effect during counting; when the counting switch P7 is operated to count when the total score is between 500 and less than 1000, effect B can be executed as the corresponding effect during counting; and when the counting switch P7 is operated to count when the total score is 1000 or more, effect C can be executed as the corresponding effect during counting.

Below are examples of the difference in the number of points counted per operation of counting switch P7 (including long press operations, etc.), and the effects that result from differences in the total points.

Example 1) When the total score is "25" and the counted points per time are "25": Since the total score is less than "500" and the counted points are greater than "0" and less than "50", a uniform 0.3-second performance A (0.3 seconds x 1) is executed. The coefficient (here, x 1) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the counted points.

Example 2) When the total score is "300" and the counted points for one time are "50" Since the total score is less than "500" and the counted points are "50", effect A is executed for approximately 0.3 seconds, which is 0.3 seconds x 1. The coefficient (here, x 1) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the counted points.

Example 3) When the total score is 300 and the counted points per count are 150, the total score is less than 500 and the counted points are greater than 100 but less than or equal to 150, so effect A is executed for approximately 0.9 seconds, which is 0.3 seconds x 3. The coefficient (here, x 3) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the counted points.

Example 4) When the total score is "700" and the counted points per time are "150": Since the total score is between "500" and "1000" and the counted points are greater than "100" and less than "150", effect B is executed for approximately 0.9 seconds, which is 0.3 seconds x 3. The coefficient (here, x 3) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the counted points.

Example 5) When the total score is "700" and the counted points for one time are "700": Since the total score is between "500" and "1000" and the counted points are between "650" and "700", effect B is executed for approximately 4.2 seconds, which is 0.3 seconds x 14. The coefficient (here, x 14) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the counted points.

Example 6) When the total score is "2000" and the counted points per time are "700" Since the total score is "1000" or more and the counted points are greater than "650" and less than "700", effect C is executed for approximately 4.2 seconds, which is 0.3 seconds x 14. The coefficient (here, x 14) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the counted points.

Example 7) When the total score is "2000" and the counted points per count are "2000": Since the total score is "1000" or more and the counted points are greater than "1950" and less than "2000", effect C is executed for approximately 12.0 seconds, which is 0.3 seconds x 40. The coefficient (here, x 40) indicates the number of count notifications required to count all the counted points.

In this way, even if the counting points are the same, the total points are different as in example 5) and example 6), so the output effects can be controlled to be different. Also, even if the total points are the same, if the counting points per time are different, the length of the output effects can be controlled to be different even if the effects are the same as in example 6) and example 7).

If the player stops operating the counting switch P7 while the total points are being counted (partway through), one counting may end without counting all of the total points, as in Example 6). In other words, after enjoying the counting effect up to a certain point, the player can stop operating the counting switch P7, and then operate the counting switch P7 again, allowing the player to enjoy the counting effect once again.

In this embodiment, one counting switch P7 is provided, and the maximum count point for count notification is set to "50," but a separate counting switch P7 may also be provided to count the total points all at once.

In addition, in this embodiment, counting is performed when counting switch P7 is operated, but it is also possible to count all stored total points, for example, if counting switch P7 is operated for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, counting is performed when the counting switch P7 is operated, but it may also be configured so that if the counting switch P7 is operated for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) and the counting switch P7 continues to be operated thereafter, counting will occur in predetermined increments (e.g., "50"). Note that although the predetermined increment is 50, this is just one example. For example, if the total remaining points are 38 and the counting switch P7 is operated, "38" will be counted.

In this embodiment, counting based on the operation of the counting switch P7 is possible even during the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. However, if the counting switch P7 is operated under circumstances where points can be bet, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 may be executed, and if the counting switch P7 is operated during the setting change mode and/or the setting confirmation mode, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 may not be executed. The reason for this configuration is that if the counting switch P7 is operated during the setting change mode and/or the setting confirmation mode, it is highly likely that a hall employee is counting (and not a player).

In other words, even if the counting switch P7 is operated during the setting change mode and/or setting confirmation mode, the necessary information can be provided to the waiting staff by continuing to display a dedicated screen for the setting change mode and/or setting confirmation mode on the image display device and continuing to output audio. It is also possible to issue a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, by displaying "Counting in progress" on the screen) while displaying a dedicated screen for the setting change mode and/or setting confirmation mode. This notification is configured to be different from the presentation during counting described above.

In addition, in this embodiment, counting based on the operation of the counting switch P7 is possible even during an error (this may be a predetermined (specified) portion of the error, or all errors). However, if the counting switch P7 is operated in a situation where points can be bet, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 may be executed, and if the counting switch P7 is operated during an error, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 may not be executed. The reason for this configuration is that if the counting switch P7 is operated during an error, there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity is being committed.

In other words, even if the counting switch P7 is operated during an error, the necessary information can be provided to the hall staff by continuing to display a dedicated screen for the error on the image display device or by continuing to output audio. It is also possible to issue a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, by displaying "Counting in progress" on the screen) while the dedicated screen for the error is displayed. This notification is configured to be different from the effect during counting described above. It is also possible to configure the system so that the number of bets cannot be settled using the settlement switch P6 at this time.

The types of errors include recoverable errors that can be recovered by operating the reset switch (such as the above-mentioned "deposit request communication error," "settlement request communication error," and "payout request communication error"), and unrecoverable errors that cannot be recovered by operating the reset switch (but can be recovered by initializing the settings, etc.).The configuration may be such that counting processing is possible by operating the counting switch P7 during a recoverable error, and that counting processing is impossible by operating the counting switch P7 during an unrecoverable error.With this configuration, counting processing is possible for recoverable errors that can occur during normal operation, and counting processing is impossible for unrecoverable errors, which are more likely to be fraudulent than recoverable errors, resulting in fairer gaming.

In addition, in this embodiment, counting based on the operation of the counting switch P7 is possible even during play (for example, while the reels are spinning). However, if the counting switch P7 is operated when points can be bet, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 may be executed, and if the counting switch P7 is operated during play, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 may not be executed. This configuration is used because if the counting switch P7 is operated during play, there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity is being committed.

In other words, even if the counting switch P7 is operated during an error, the necessary information can be provided to the hall staff by continuing to display a dedicated screen for the error on the image display device and continuing to output audio. It is also possible to issue a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, by displaying "Counting in progress" on the screen) while displaying the dedicated screen for the error. This notification is configured to be different from the aforementioned presentation during counting.

Note that the counting process can be performed while play is possible when waiting for gameplay to start, when play is in progress, or when an error occurs that allows gameplay to proceed. The counting process is optional while play is not possible when the counting process is optional and is performed during initial setup after power-on, when settings are being changed, when settings are being confirmed, or when an error occurs that prevents gameplay from proceeding. However, if the counting process were to be performed when the gaming machine is powered on but the rental unit is not, it is possible that the number of counted medals would not be stored in the rental unit, and therefore the counting process cannot be performed in these situations.

While waiting for a game (when no game is being played), the player may be able to select from multiple volume levels for the volume of the sound effects during play by operating a switch (e.g., a sub-switch). For example, the volume may be selectable from five levels, Volume 1 through Volume 5, with Volume 1 being the quietest and Volume 5 being the loudest. In this configuration, certain sound effects (e.g., dialogue sounds, background music during normal play, background music during automatic turn, background music during bonus rounds, ready-to-win sounds, etc.) are output at a volume corresponding to the selected sound effect, but it is preferable that sound effects output during counting be output at the same volume regardless of whether Volume 1 through Volume 5 are selected. Specifically, even if a player is counting in an unfair manner after selecting Volume 1, sound effects output during counting are prevented from being output at a low volume, thereby discouraging players from attempting to count in an unfair manner. Furthermore, even for regular players, the time when the counting is being performed is a blissful moment, so even when the volume is set to 1, by outputting the sound at the same volume as when the other volume settings are used, the player who is performing the counting will also be able to attract attention from players other than the player performing the counting, and this will increase the player's interest in the counting process.

In this embodiment, gaming machine P sends gaming machine information notifications to the rental unit every 300 ms, but this is not limited to this and they may be sent at any timing within the range of 300 ms to 310 ms. However, they do not take on random values each time they are sent, but rather send a predetermined value.

In this embodiment, gaming machine P transmits the counting notification to the rental unit 100 ms after transmitting the gaming machine information notification, but this is not limited to this and the notification may be transmitted at any time within the range of 90 ms to 100 ms. However, a random value is not used each time a notification is transmitted, but rather a predetermined value is transmitted.

Next, gaming machine information management will be described with reference to FIG.
The gaming machine information management is a control for transmitting gaming machine information notifications from the gaming machine P to the rental unit, and Fig. 30 shows one subroutine in the timer interrupt processing controlled by the gaming media number control board P16. In other words, the gaming machine information management is executed every time the timer interrupt processing is executed (at a cycle of 1 ms).

First, let's explain the various terms used in Figure 30.

Gaming machine information notification timer A is a timer that measures 300 ms. The memory area (_TM_INF_CTL_A) for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A uses 2 bytes of the RWM area of the gaming media count control board P16. Note that the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A is initialized to the initial value ("0") when the power is turned on (ON).

Gaming machine information notification timer B is a timer that measures 60 seconds. The memory area (_TM_INF_CTL_B) for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B uses one byte of the RWM area of the gaming media count control board P16. Note that the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B is initialized to the initial value ("0") when the power is turned on (ON).

Gaming machine information notification timer C is a timer that measures 180 seconds. The memory area (_TM_INF_CTL_C) for measuring gaming machine information notification timer C uses one byte of the RWM area of the gaming media count control board P16. Note that the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer C is initialized to the initial value ("0") when the power is turned on (ON).

The gaming machine performance information notification request flag is a flag that changes from "0" to "1" when the period for transmitting gaming machine performance information in the gaming machine information notification arrives. The memory area for storing the gaming machine performance information notification request flag uses bit D0 of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL), which is a 1-byte memory area in the RWM area of the gaming media count control board P16.

The gaming machine installation information notification request flag is a flag that changes from "0" to "1" when the period for transmitting gaming machine installation information in the gaming machine information notification arrives. The memory area for storing the gaming machine installation information notification request flag uses the D1 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL), which is a 1-byte memory area in the RWM area of the gaming media count control board P16.

The gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is initialized to its initial value ("0") during initialization when the power is turned on (each bit is set to "0").

Next, we will explain the control processing at each step using Figure 30.

"Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1" is an arithmetic operation that subtracts 1 from the memory area used to measure gaming machine information notification timer A. If this arithmetic operation results in a borrow (if the subtraction operation is performed while gaming machine information notification timer A is at "0" (also referred to as when it becomes less than "0")), the count value can be stored in gaming machine information notification timer A by storing "300" in gaming machine information notification timer A.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the timer interrupt period of the gaming media count control board P16 is 1 ms, so storing "300" as the count value in the gaming machine information notification timer A allows for a count of 300 ms. However, this is not limited to this. If the timer interrupt period of the gaming media count control board P16 is set to 2 ms, the gaming machine information notification timer A can store "150" as the count value. If the timer interrupt period of the gaming media count control board P16 is set to 2.235 ms, the gaming machine information notification timer A can store any value between "135" and "138" as the count value. In this way, if the value is not divisible, any value between 300 ms and 310 ms can be set so that the timing for sending the gaming machine information notification is between 300 ms and 310 ms.

Here, "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A-1" may cause the zero flag and carry flag in the flag register (also called the F register) of the CPU to become "1." The zero flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the result of the calculation process is "0." On the other hand, the carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the result of the calculation process is less than "0."

Below, we will explain the zero flag and carry flag using specific numerical examples.

Example 1) In the gaming machine information management executed when "10" is stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A, the value becomes "9" by subtracting 1. At this time, the zero flag and carry flag do not change (they become "0").
Example 2) In the gaming machine information management executed when "1" is stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A, 1 is subtracted to make it "0." At this time, the zero flag becomes "1." Meanwhile, the carry flag remains unchanged (becomes "0").
Example 3) When "0" is stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A, subtracting 1 makes it "300." In this case, the zero flag does not change (it becomes "0"), while the carry flag becomes "1."

The DCPWLD instruction is an example of an operation instruction for the above-mentioned "gaming machine information notification timer A -1." The DCPWLD instruction is an instruction that stores a predetermined value when the carry flag becomes "1" as a result of subtracting 1. In the above-mentioned embodiment, the predetermined value is "300."

Next, "Timer value before update = 0?" determines whether the value in the memory area used to measure gaming machine information notification timer A before executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1" was "0." For example, if the carry flag is "1" after executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1," it can be determined that the value in the memory area used to measure gaming machine information notification timer A before executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1" was "0" (the result of the determination of "Timer value before update = 0?" is YES). On the other hand, if the carry flag is "0" after executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1," it can be determined that the value in the memory area used to measure gaming machine information notification timer A before executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1" was not "0" (the result of the determination of "Timer value before update = 0?" is NO).

If the value in the memory area used to measure gaming machine information notification timer A before executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1" was "0" (if the determination of "Timer value before update = 0?" returns YES), then "Send Hall Control/Fraud Monitoring Information" is executed. A YES result in this step occurs when gaming machine information management is executed during the first interrupt process after the power is turned ON when the power is OFF. As described above, this is because the initialization process performed when the power is turned ON initializes the memory area used to measure gaming machine information notification timer A, storing "0." Furthermore, if the value before the update was "0," then the carry flag is set to "1." Therefore, by using the DCPWLD instruction, which is the subtraction instruction described above, "300" can be simultaneously stored as the count value in gaming machine information notification timer A.

Furthermore, since "Hall Control/Fraud Monitoring Information Transmission" can be executed immediately after power is restored without executing the process of updating Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B or Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer C, processing time and program capacity can be reduced. The reason why Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B or Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer C is not updated when the power is turned ON will be explained later.

Next, if the result of the check "Timer value before update = 0?" is NO, the check "Timer value before update = 1?" is performed.

"Timer value before update = 1?" determines whether the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A was "1" before "gaming machine information notification timer A -1" was executed.

For example, if the zero flag is "1" after executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1", it can be determined that the value in the memory area for measuring Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A before executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1" was "1" (the result of the determination of "Timer value before update = 1?" is YES). If the result of the determination of "Timer value before update = 1?" is YES, "Save Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A Count Value" is executed.

On the other hand, if the zero flag is "0" after executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1", it can be determined that the value in the memory area for measuring Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A before executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1" was not "1" (the result of the determination of "Timer value before update = 1?" is NO).

If the value in the memory area used to measure gaming machine information notification timer A before executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1" is not "1" (if the result of the determination "Is the timer value before update = 1?" is NO), gaming machine information management is terminated. The situation in which the value in the memory area used to measure gaming machine information notification timer A before executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1" is "1" corresponds to a situation in which 300 interrupt processes have been executed (300 ms have elapsed) as a result of measurement by gaming machine information notification timer A.

In addition, a situation in which the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A before executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1" was not "1" means a situation in which the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is between "2" and "300", and corresponds to a situation in which gaming machine information notification timer A is currently measuring. Note that situations in which the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A before executing "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1" was not "1" also include a "0", but if the value is "0", the system does not proceed to this determination process because this was determined in the previous process.

Next, "Save Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A Count Value" is a process that stores "300" in the memory area used to measure gaming machine information notification timer A. This process updates the "0" stored in gaming machine information notification timer A to "300." As mentioned above, in this embodiment, "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A -1" is executed using the DCPWLD instruction, so when the carry flag becomes "1," "300" is stored in gaming machine information notification timer A. However, "Save Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A Count Value" stores "300" before gaming machine information notification timer A becomes "0" (when it becomes "1"), except immediately after power-on. Therefore, gaming machine information notification timer A will never become "0" (except in the event of an abnormality) except immediately after power-on, so the count value is stored in this process.

Next, "clear response permission flag" is a process that clears the value in the response permission flag storage area to 0. The response permission flag will be explained later.

Next, "Clear communication error 1 flag" is a process that clears the value of the communication error 1 flag storage area to 0. Communication error 1 means rental device communication error 1.

Next, "Set communication error 1 flag if loan notification reception counter ≠ 1" is a process that sets the value of the communication error 1 flag storage area to 1 when the value of the loan notification reception counter storage area is not 1 (also referred to as processing related to communication error 1). The loan notification reception counter will be discussed later.

Next, "Clear loan notification reception counter" is a process that clears the value in the loan notification reception counter storage area to 0. In other words, after the gaming machine information notification timer A is set to -1, the value of the loan notification reception counter is initialized and 0 is stored as the initial value.

Next, "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B +1" is a calculation process that uses a special addition instruction to add 1 to the value in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B. This calculation process adds 1 to the value in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B when a value less than "199" is stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B, and stores "0" as the value in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B when a value less than "199" is not stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B (i.e., when a value of "199" is stored under normal operating conditions). Specific examples are described below.

Example 1) When "0" is stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B, when an arithmetic operation is performed using a special addition instruction that adds 1, the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "1."
Example 2) When "100" is stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B, when an arithmetic process is performed using a special addition instruction that adds 1, the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "101."
Example 3) When "199" is stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B, when an arithmetic process is performed using a special addition instruction that adds 1, the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "0" instead of "200".

In this way, in the case of "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B + 1," when "199" is stored in the memory area used to measure Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B, performing an arithmetic operation using a special addition instruction that adds 1 causes the value of the memory area used to measure Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B to cycle between "0" and "199" by executing an addition operation that stores "0." Furthermore, adding "1" when "199" is stored in the memory area used to measure Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B corresponds to the 200th time that the memory area used to measure Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A has reached "0." In other words, because Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B is incremented by 1 every 300 times that the interrupt process is executed, this represents a situation in which 300 times x 200 (= 60,000) interrupt processes have been executed (300 ms x 200 (= 60,000 ms (60 s)) have elapsed). Normally, a 3-byte memory area would be required to measure whether 60,000 interrupt processes have been executed, but by using gaming machine information notification timer A, the memory area for gaming machine information notification timer B can be reduced to 1 byte, reducing the storage capacity of the RWM.

The ICPLD instruction is an example of an operation instruction for the special addition instruction mentioned above, "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B + 1."

In this embodiment, an addition command such as "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B +1" is used, but a subtraction command may also be used. In the case of a subtraction command, the count value may be stored as "200" in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B when the power is turned on, and then be set to "0," or the count value may be stored as "199" in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B when the power is turned on, and then be set to "1."

In addition, in this embodiment, an addition command such as "Gaming machine information notification timer B +1" is used, which eliminates the process of setting an initial value compared to when a subtraction command is used (the initial value is set to "0" by the initialization process when the power is turned on), resulting in improved processing speed and reduced program size.

Next, "Has Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B Time Elapsed?" is determined to be YES when the count value of Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B reaches 200 as determined by "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B +1." For example, a YES determination can be made when the value in the memory area of Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B becomes "0" as determined by "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B +1" (when the increment command has been executed 200 times from the initial value of "0"). On the other hand, a NO determination can be made when the value in the memory area of Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B does not become "0" as determined by "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B +1" (when the increment command has not been executed 200 times from the initial value of "0").

If the result of the determination of "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B Time Elapsed?" is NO, execute "Gaming Machine Installation Information Notification Request?".

If the result of the determination of "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B Time Elapsed?" is YES, execute "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer C +1".

Next, "gaming machine information notification timer C + 1" is a calculation process that uses a special addition instruction to add 1 to the value in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer C. This calculation process adds 1 to the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer C when a value less than "2" is stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer C, and stores "0" in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer C when a value less than "2" is not stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B (i.e., when a value of "3" is stored under normal operating conditions). Specific examples are described below.

Example 1) When "0" is stored in the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C, when an arithmetic operation is performed using a special addition instruction that adds 1, the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C becomes "1."
Example 2) When "1" is stored in the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C, when an arithmetic process is performed using a special addition instruction that adds 1, the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C becomes "2".
Example 3) When "2" is stored in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer C, when an arithmetic operation is performed using a special addition instruction that adds 1, the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "0" instead of "3".

In this way, with "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer C + 1," when the value of the memory area used to measure Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer C is "2," an addition process is performed to store "0," thereby cycling the value of the memory area used to measure Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer C between "0" and "2." Furthermore, adding "1" when the value of the memory area used to measure Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer C is "2" corresponds to the situation where the memory area used to measure Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B has reached "0" three times. In other words, Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B is incremented by one every 300 interrupt processes, and the process of incrementing Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B by one has occurred three times. This means that 300 x 200 x 3 (= 180,000) interrupt processes have been executed (300 ms x 200 x 3 (= 180,000 ms (180 s)) have elapsed). Normally, a 3-byte memory area would be required to measure whether 180,000 interrupt processes have been executed, but by using gaming machine information notification timer A and gaming machine information notification timer B, the memory area for gaming machine information notification timer C can be reduced to 1 byte, reducing the storage capacity of the RWM.

Note that the calculation instruction for the special addition instruction mentioned above, "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer C + 1," can be the same ICPLD instruction as the calculation instruction for "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer B + 1."

In this embodiment, an addition command such as "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer C +1" is used, but a subtraction command may also be used. In the case of a subtraction command, the count value may be stored as "3" in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer C when the power is turned on, and then be set to "0," or the count value may be stored as "2" in the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer B when the power is turned on, and then be set to "1."

In addition, in this embodiment, an addition command such as "gaming machine information notification timer C +1" is used, which eliminates the process of setting an initial value compared to when a subtraction command is used (the initial value is set to "0" by the initialization process when the power is turned on), resulting in improved processing speed and reduced program size.

Next, "Has time passed in gaming machine information notification timer C?" is determined to be YES when the count value of gaming machine information notification timer C reaches 3 by "gaming machine information notification timer C + 1." For example, if the value in the memory area of gaming machine information notification timer C becomes "0" by "gaming machine information notification timer C + 1" (when the increment command has been executed three times from the initial value of "0"), it can be determined to be YES. On the other hand, if the value in the memory area of gaming machine information notification timer C does not become "0" by "gaming machine information notification timer C + 1" (when the increment command has not been executed three times from the initial value of "0"), it can be determined to be NO.

If the result of the determination of "Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer C Time Elapsed?" is NO, execute "Gaming Machine Installation Information Notification Request Flag Set."

If the result of the determination of "Has gaming machine information notification timer C time elapsed?" is YES, execute "Set gaming machine performance information notification request flag."

Next, "Set gaming machine performance information notification request flag" is a control that stores "1" in bit D0 of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL). As shown in the flowchart in Figure 30, "Set gaming machine performance information notification request flag" is executed when "Has gaming machine information notification timer C time elapsed?" returns YES. In other words, "Set gaming machine performance information notification request flag" is executed when the 180 second cycle arrives.

Next, "Set Gaming Machine Installation Information Notification Request Flag" is a control that stores "1" in bit D1 of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL). As shown in the flowchart in Figure 30, "Set Gaming Machine Installation Information Notification Request Flag" is executed when "Has Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer C Time Elapsed?" is NO, and when "Set Gaming Machine Performance Information Notification Request Flag" is executed (when "Has Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer C Time Elapsed?" is YES). In other words, "Set Gaming Machine Installation Information Notification Request Flag" is executed when a 60-second cycle has arrived. Therefore, at a cycle of 180 seconds, which is three times the 60-second cycle, both the "Set Gaming Machine Performance Information Notification Request Flag" and "Set Gaming Machine Installation Information Notification Request Flag" controls are executed.

In this way, the timing for sending gaming machine installation information to the lending unit and the timing for sending gaming machine performance information to the lending unit are managed using flags, which simplifies the process of sending hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information to the lending unit (by linking timers corresponding to various types of information, it is possible to send them to the lending unit without managing them individually). Furthermore, by not updating gaming machine information notification timer B or gaming machine information notification timer C when the power is turned on, there is no deviation in the timing for starting the timers for sending hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information, allowing for accurate transmission. In other words, by only updating gaming machine information notification timer A when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent deviation in the timing for sending the linked gaming machine information notification timers B and C to the lending unit without complex processing.

Next, "Main control status change?" is a process that compares the current main control status with the main control status after the hall control fraud monitoring information was sent to determine whether there has been a change in the main control status. This process is used to determine the priority of the hall control and fraud monitoring information mentioned above.

Next, "Is deposit information ≠ 0 or payout information ≠ 0?" is a process that determines whether a deposit point or payout point is stored in the memory area that stores the deposit point or payout point.

Next, "Gaming machine installation information notification request?" is a control that determines whether the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is set. For example, if the D1 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is "1", it determines YES, and if the D1 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is "0", it determines NO.

If the result of the determination of "Request for notification of gaming machine installation information?" is NO, execute "Request for notification of gaming machine performance information?".

If the result of the determination of "Amusement machine installation information notification request?" is YES, execute "Send gaming machine installation information."

Next, "Gaming machine performance information notification request?" is a control that determines whether the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set. For example, if the D0 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is "1", it determines YES, and if the D0 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is "0", it determines NO.

If the result of the determination of "Request for gaming machine performance information notification?" is NO, execute "Send hall control and fraud monitoring information."

If the result of the determination of "Request for gaming machine performance information notification?" is YES, execute "Send gaming machine performance information."

As shown in the flowchart in Figure 30, the processing order is to determine whether there is a "gaming machine installation information notification request?" before determining whether there is a "gaming machine performance information notification request?" By using this processing order, in situations where both the gaming machine installation information notification request flag and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag are set (for example, when the 180 second cycle has arrived), the "gaming machine installation information notification request?" is determined first, making it possible to execute transmission control of the gaming machine installation information before transmission control of the gaming machine performance information. Furthermore, simply by determining whether there is a gaming machine installation information notification request before determining whether there is a gaming machine performance information notification request, communication according to priority is possible without complex processing.

Next, "Send Hall Control and Fraud Monitoring Information" refers to the control process of sending the above-mentioned "Hall Control and Fraud Monitoring Information" to the rental unit. The content sent to the rental unit at this time is the information stored in the RWM's memory area acquired at the time of transmission. For example, the total score included in the "Hall Control and Fraud Monitoring Information" is transmitted as the information stored in the total score memory area (_NB_MEDAL) at the time of transmission. In other words, if the transmission timing of the original hall control and fraud monitoring information, which is every 300 ms, coincides with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information, since the gaming machine installation information has a higher priority, the hall control and fraud monitoring information will not be transmitted at that 300 ms timing, and will instead be transmitted after the next 300 ms. Regarding this "hall control and fraud monitoring information to be sent in the next 300 ms," rather than sending the hall control and fraud monitoring information at a time that coincides with the timing of sending the gaming machine installation information, by sending the hall control and fraud monitoring information obtained at the "timing to send hall control and fraud monitoring information in the next 300 ms," it is possible to send the latest information even if the transmission timing is off.

Furthermore, after the process for sending "hall control and fraud monitoring information" to the rental unit is completed, the serial number is updated (+1). Like counting serial numbers, this serial number is sent as "0" when transmitting immediately after power is restored, and is updated thereafter so that any number between "1" and "255" can be transmitted (cycling between "1" and "255"). This serial number is updated when any of the three pieces of information are transmitted: hall control and fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information. In other words, because the same serial number is used for hall control and fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information, the serial number is configured to be updated every 300 ms while the power is on.

When "Hall Control/Fraud Monitoring Information Transmission" is complete, gaming machine information management will end.

Next, "Send gaming machine installation information" corresponds to the control process of sending the above-mentioned "gaming machine installation information" to the rental unit. Note that the content sent at this time is the information stored in the RWM's memory area acquired at the time of transmission.

Furthermore, after the process for sending the "gaming machine installation information" to the rental unit is completed, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is cleared. Specifically, the D1 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is set to "0." Furthermore, after the process for sending the "gaming machine installation information" to the rental unit is completed, the serial number is updated (+1).

When "Sending Gaming Machine Installation Information" is complete, gaming machine information management will end.

Next, "gaming machine performance information transmission" refers to the control process of transmitting the aforementioned "gaming machine performance information" to the rental unit. The content transmitted at this time is the information stored in the RWM's memory area obtained at the time of transmission. In other words, if the transmission timing of the gaming machine performance information, which is the original transmission timing of every 180 seconds, coincides with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information, the gaming machine installation information has a higher priority, so the gaming machine performance information is not transmitted at that 180 second timing, but is transmitted after the next 300 ms. Regarding this "gaming machine performance information to be transmitted after the next 300 ms," by transmitting the gaming machine performance information obtained at the "timing to transmit gaming machine performance information after the next 300 ms," rather than transmitting the gaming machine performance information that coincides with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information, it is possible to transmit the latest information even if the transmission timing is off.

Furthermore, after the process for sending the "gaming machine performance information" to the rental unit is completed, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is cleared. Specifically, the D0 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is set to "0." Furthermore, after the process for sending the "gaming machine performance information" to the rental unit is completed, the serial number is updated (+1).

When "Gaming machine performance information transmission" is complete, gaming machine information management will end.

As mentioned above, gaming machine information notifications are configured to be sent to the lending unit every 300 ms. The blinking switch timing of the winning combination monitor is also switched every 300 ms. However, while the timer update process that measures 300 ms for sending gaming machine information notifications is sent to the lending unit using the carry flag and zero flag, the timer update process that measures 300 ms for switching the winning combination monitor on and off is switched using only the carry flag.

This is because gaming machine information notifications can cause greater damage if they are fraudulently transmitted, so two types of flags are used to manage the information sent in order to increase its accuracy.

Next, we will explain the timing of sending gaming machine information notifications (hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, or gaming machine performance information) after gaming machine P is powered on, using Figure 31 as a reference.

Figure 31 shows the timing of transmission of gaming machine information notifications from the gaming media count control board P16 to the lending unit after the gaming machine P is powered on. In the figure, "Timer A" refers to "gaming machine information notification timer A," "Timer B" refers to "gaming machine information notification timer B," "Timer C" refers to "gaming machine information notification timer C," "after startup" refers to "the first interrupt processing in the gaming media count control board P16," and "1 ms later" refers to "the next interrupt processing." Also, "Timer A = 0" indicates that the value (timer value) of gaming machine information notification timer A is 0. Furthermore, the timer value refers to the timer value at the time the interrupt processing is started, and is a value that has not been updated. In other words, it is the value updated in the previous interrupt processing.

As mentioned above, when the device is first started, gaming machine information notification timer A, gaming machine information notification timer B, and gaming machine information notification timer C are initialized, and each timer value is set to "0." Since the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A is "0" (the timer value before subtraction is 0), the hall control and fraud monitoring information is sent as the first gaming machine information notification. The timer values for gaming machine installation information and gaming machine performance information are also "0," but since the zero flag is "0" in this case, the gaming machine installation information and gaming machine performance information are not sent.

Next, the timing of the second transmission of hole control and fraud monitoring information will be explained with reference to Figure 32. Note that the wording appearing in Figure 32 is the same as that in Figure 31, so its explanation will be omitted.

The second transmission of hall control and fraud monitoring information occurs when the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A is "1." When the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A is "1" (the timer value before subtraction is 1), the subtraction process causes it to become "0," resulting in the zero flag becoming "1." Hall control and fraud monitoring information is transmitted, and the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A is set to "300." Furthermore, when the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0," the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer B becomes "1."

Next, we will explain the timing of sending gaming machine information notifications when the timing of sending hall control/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine installation information coincide, based on Figure 33. Note that the wording that appears in Figure 33 is the same as in Figures 31 and 32, so we will not explain it here.

The timing for sending hall control and fraud monitoring information occurs when the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and stores "300." At the same time, if the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer B changes from "199" to "0," the gaming machine installation information notification request flag becomes "1." Therefore, in the interrupt processing when the timing for sending hall control and fraud monitoring information and gaming machine installation information occurs simultaneously, the gaming machine installation information is sent based on the gaming machine installation information notification request flag being "1," and hall control and fraud monitoring information is not sent. Then, in the next interrupt processing, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag becomes "0," but because the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A is "300," the zero flag becomes "0," and hall control and fraud monitoring information is not sent.

In other words, when the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine installation information coincides, the hall control/fraud monitoring information will not be transmitted because the transmission of the gaming machine installation information has a higher priority, and the hall control/fraud monitoring information will not be transmitted until the next time the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and "300" is stored (until the next 300 ms has passed). Also, when the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0", the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer B changes from "199" to "0", and the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer C changes from "0" to "1".

Furthermore, because the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine installation information coincides, even if the transmission of the hall control/fraud monitoring information is delayed by 300 ms, the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A continues to be updated. Therefore, even if one batch of hall control/fraud monitoring information is not sent, the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information will not be delayed.

Furthermore, if the transmission timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine installation information coincides, and the transmission of hall control/fraud monitoring information is delayed by 300 ms, the hall control/fraud monitoring information to be transmitted next 300 ms later will be acquired at the time of transmission, and information from 300 ms ago will not be transmitted. This means that old information will not be transmitted even if the transmission timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information is off.

Next, we will explain the timing of transmitting gaming machine information notifications when the transmission timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information coincides, based on Figure 34. Note that the wording that appears in Figure 34 is the same as that in Figures 31 to 33, so its explanation will be omitted.

The timing for sending hall control and fraud monitoring information occurs when the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and stores "300." However, if the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer B simultaneously changes from "199" to "0" and the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer C changes from "2" to "0," the gaming machine installation information notification request flag becomes "1" and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag becomes "1." Therefore, in the interrupt processing when the timing for sending hall control and fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information occurs simultaneously, the gaming machine installation information is sent based on the gaming machine installation information notification request flag being "1," and hall control and fraud monitoring information and gaming machine performance information are not sent. Then, in the next interrupt process, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is "0" and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is "1", but because the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A is "300", the zero flag is "0" and no hall control or fraud monitoring information is sent. In this case, gaming machine information management ends, and gaming machine performance information is also not sent. However, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag remains stored as "1".

In other words, when the transmission timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information coincides, the transmission of gaming machine installation information has a higher priority, so the hall control/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine performance information are not transmitted. The next time the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and stores "300," the gaming machine performance information is transmitted with priority over hall control/fraud monitoring information, based on the gaming machine performance information notification request flag being "1." After the gaming machine performance information is transmitted, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag becomes "0," so the next time the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and stores "300" (the next time 300 ms have passed), the hall control/fraud monitoring information will be transmitted.

Furthermore, because the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information coincides, even if the gaming machine performance information is transmitted 300 ms later and the hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted 600 ms later, the timer value of gaming machine information notification timer A continues to be updated, so even if the hall control/fraud monitoring information is not transmitted twice, the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information will not be off.

Furthermore, if the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information coincides, and the gaming machine installation information is transmitted at that time, and then the gaming machine performance information is transmitted 300 ms later, and the hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted 600 ms later, the gaming machine performance information transmitted 300 ms after the gaming machine installation information is transmitted is acquired at the time of transmission, so information from 300 ms ago (the time when the gaming machine installation information was transmitted) will not be transmitted. Furthermore, the hall control/fraud monitoring information transmitted 300 ms after the gaming machine performance information is transmitted is acquired at the time of transmission, so information from 600 ms ago (the time when the gaming machine installation information was transmitted) will not be transmitted. This means that old information will not be transmitted even if the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine performance information does not match.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the request flag for the gaming machine performance information transmitted every 180 seconds is always set to 1 at the same time as the gaming machine installation information transmitted every 60 seconds. In other words, when the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set to 1, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is always set to 1. For this reason, the gaming machine performance information cannot be transmitted when the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set to 1, but is transmitted the next 300 ms later. However, even in this case, the timing when the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set to 1 is 180 seconds after the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set to 1, making it possible to transmit gaming machine performance information periodically.

In addition, the memory areas that store gaming machine information notification timers A, B, and C, which are managed by the gaming media count control board P16, are configured to be initialized when the power is turned off (initialized by the power-on process), but the timer that measures the wait time (4.1 seconds, also known as the minimum gaming time) managed by the main control board P15 is saved when the power is turned off and is not initialized when the power is turned on, so that it resumes measuring from where it left off after the power is turned on. With this configuration, the various gaming machine information notification timers used to send gaming machine information notifications to the lending unit can be reset after the power is turned on, enabling regular communication.

In addition, the memory areas that store gaming machine information notification timers A, B, and C, which are managed by the gaming media number control board P16, are configured to be initialized when the power is turned off (initialized by the power-on process), but the timer that measures the freeze time (also called reel performance time) managed by the main control board P15 is saved even when the power is turned off and is not initialized when the power is turned on, so that the freeze time continues to be measured after the power is turned on. With this configuration, the various gaming machine information notification timers for sending gaming machine information notifications to the lending unit can be reset after the power is turned on, enabling regular communication.

<Explanation of Operation Check Mode Applicable in This Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the gaming machine is prohibited from playing games unless it communicates with a rental unit. Therefore, if you want to check the operation of the gaming machine alone, you need to install a dummy unit instead of the rental unit. Since the dummy unit can communicate with the gaming machine just like the rental unit, if the dummy unit is illegally distributed, there is a possibility that the communication between the gaming machine and the rental unit can be analyzed. Therefore, the management of the dummy unit must be very strict. For this reason, in order for a second-hand dealer to check the operation of a used gaming machine, they must borrow a dummy unit from the gaming machine manufacturer, which takes time to check the operation.

To ensure that gaming machine operation checks can be performed on the gaming machine alone, the gaming machine is equipped with an operation check mode that allows it to operate without being connected to a rental unit or dummy unit. Because this operation check mode is designed to check whether the gaming machine is operating normally, it is configured not to insert or dispense gaming media.

It is desirable to configure the operation check mode so that it cannot be easily activated by a player. For this reason, the input port for a specified switch is read during the power-on process, and the operation check mode is activated when it is determined that operation of the specified switch has been detected during the power-on process. The specified switch could be any one of the following: 1 bet switch, MAX bet switch, start switch, left stop switch, center stop switch, right stop switch, settlement switch P6, reset switch, counting switch P7, and setting key switch, or a combination of two or more of these. An example of a combination of two or more could be turning on the setting key switch while the power is off and pressing the counting switch P7 while powering on. Alternatively, a dedicated switch that cannot be operated unless the front door is opened could be provided, and the operation check mode could be activated by turning on the power while operating the dedicated switch.

Operation check mode is a mode that allows the gaming machine to be played on its own, but it is also possible to activate operation check mode even when it is connected to a rental unit. Therefore, since it is assumed that the rental unit and gaming machine P may or may not be connected during operation check mode, communication with the rental unit during operation check mode is carried out in the same way as normal operation. For example, it receives rental notifications and sends rental receipt result responses, etc.

When operation check mode is activated, the five segment display of the gaming media count display P9 will display "----". Furthermore, in operation check mode, three points are automatically inserted with each play, and operation of the start switch becomes valid. Also, to make it easier to recognize that the operation check mode is active, the message "In operation check mode" may be displayed as part of the image. The message "In operation check mode" will always be displayed at the same size, even if the presentation changes due to a presentation lottery or transition to a demo screen.

When the start switch is operated in operation check mode, the gaming machine is operated using the same game progress programs as normal game operation, such as lottery processing (for example, programs executed on the main control board P15, game medium number control board P16, and sub-control board P12, such as internal lottery processing, reel control processing, performance lottery processing, and command transmission processing), making it possible to confirm whether the gaming machine is operating normally. However, payout processing is not performed, and only the number of awards is displayed on the award number display unit, and the display on the game medium number display unit P9 is not updated. Note that in gaming machines that do not have an award number display unit, the number of awards is displayed on the LCD, so the number of awards is displayed on the LCD display during operation check mode. Furthermore, since the minimum play time is measured even in operation check mode, if the start switch is operated before the minimum play time has elapsed, the reels will wait to spin until the minimum play time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in the operation check mode, the communication processing performed between the gaming machine and the rental unit may be configured not to be executed. By configuring it in this way, the abnormality determination processing based on the communication processing performed between the gaming machine and the rental unit will not be executed.

In addition, in the operation check mode, the gaming machine may be configured to operate at a predetermined setting value related to the player's advantage (for example, "1" which results in the lowest payout rate or "6" which results in the highest payout rate), or it may be configured to operate after setting an arbitrary setting value. Furthermore, in the operation check mode, the setting value may be displayed on the setting value display by operating the setting key switch, or the setting value may be displayed on the setting value display regardless of whether the setting key switch is operated, or the setting value may not be displayed on the setting value display even when the setting key switch is operated.

In addition, in operation check mode, effects displayed on displays such as LCDs, the illumination of frame lamps, and sounds output from speakers are all executed normally. Therefore, if play is continued in operation check mode for an extended period of time, effects with a low occurrence rate (so-called premium effects) can easily be confirmed in operation check mode. This may reduce interest in the game if confirmed premium effects are uploaded to the web as videos or images. Therefore, the device is configured to automatically terminate operation check mode after a predetermined number of plays have been played in operation check mode. (In other words, a predetermined number of plays is set as the upper limit for the number of plays that can be played in operation check mode, and once the predetermined number of plays has been reached, play in operation check mode is disabled.) This predetermined number could be, for example, 1, 10, 20, etc. Once a predetermined number of plays have been played in operation check mode, the device terminates operation check mode and may prohibit subsequent normal play. To return from a state in which normal play is prohibited to a state in which normal play is enabled, the device can be powered on again or transition to setting change mode (turning the power switch ON while the setting key switch is ON). Furthermore, if the conditions for starting operation check mode are met when normal play is prohibited, operation check mode will start again.

Furthermore, when voluntarily terminating operation check mode, it is desirable to terminate it through normal operations, such as by shutting down the power while in operation check mode (executing the operation check mode termination process during the power-off process) or by shutting down the power while in operation check mode and then powering it on (executing the operation check mode termination process during the power-on process). This is because operation check mode is required in limited situations, such as moving used vehicles, so even if operation check mode is accidentally activated while changing settings at the amusement park, the possibility of entering operation check mode during business hours can be reduced by quickly terminating it through normal operations, such as shutting down the power. Note that methods for voluntarily terminating operation check mode are not limited to shutting down the power while in operation check mode; operation check mode can also be terminated through the initialization process associated with the setting change process executed by switching to setting change mode (turning the power switch on while the setting key switch is on).

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during operation check mode while the reels are spinning, the operation check mode may end without restarting the reels when the power is turned on, or the reels may be restarted when the power is turned on and the operation check mode may end after the game has finished. Note that although the explanation was given for when the reels are spinning, the same behavior occurs if a power outage occurs between the operation of the start switch and the end of the game.

When the operation mode is ended, the RWM used in the operation mode is initialized. This prevents play in the operation mode from being carried over to normal play. However, the RWM required for signal output to the rental unit is not initialized. Note that when the operation mode is ended and normal play is started, an operation to transition to the setting change mode (power switch ON with the setting key switch ON) is required, and if the specifications are such that the RWM used in the operation mode is initialized when the setting change mode is started, then it is not necessary to initialize the RWM used in the operation mode when the operation mode is ended.

In addition, while the above examples show that during operation check mode, effects on display devices such as LCDs, the lighting of frame lamps, and sounds output from speakers are executed as normal, this is not limited to this. Effects on display devices such as LCDs are not executed (the message "Operation Check Mode" is continuously displayed on a black background), the lighting of frame lamps is turned off or in a dedicated lighting mode, and no sound is output from the speakers, or dedicated background music or sounds are output. Since operation checks are sufficient to determine whether the main control board P15 and game media count control board P16 are operating normally, configuring in this manner can prevent situations where operation checks related to the sub-control boards are not required, making it possible to prevent situations such as players accidentally playing in operation check mode during business hours or premium effects appearing during operation check mode.

In addition, the results of games played during operation check mode are configured not to affect the normal game mode that begins after the operation check mode has ended. For example, even if you win the AT lottery during a game played during operation check mode and end the operation check mode while already entitled to the AT, the game will begin in the normal game mode after the operation check mode has ended without the right to the AT.

In addition, during operation check mode, a test pattern is configured to be displayed on the role ratio monitor. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation check mode is in progress based on the display on the role ratio monitor. During operation check mode, a test pattern may be displayed for five seconds after power is turned on, and after five seconds have passed, various ratios may be displayed on the role ratio monitor as in normal operation, or during operation check mode, various ratios may be displayed on the role ratio monitor without displaying a test pattern when power is turned on.

In addition, the game results played during the operation check mode are configured not to affect the ratios of various items displayed on the role ratio monitor. For example, the various memory areas (such as the cumulative number of games played and the cumulative number of awards) used to calculate the ratios of various items displayed on the role ratio monitor are not updated based on games played during the operation check mode. By configuring it in this way, various ratios that reflect actual market behavior can be displayed on the role ratio monitor.

<Order of abnormality determination>
An explanation will be given of abnormality determination in command communication between the main control board P15 and the game media number control board P16.

Commands that can be sent from the main control board P15 to the gaming media count control board P16 include a deposit request command, a settlement request command, and a payout request command.

As described above, if the gaming media count control board P16 receives a deposit request command and the received deposit points are a value other than 1 to 3, it is configured to send a medal count control reception abnormality command to the main control board P15 and then check whether there is a VL abnormality (VL signal OFF). This is to prioritize processing related to the total score, which is the most important information in the gaming machine described in this embodiment. If the order were to determine a VL abnormality first and then a command abnormality, it would not be possible to determine whether there was an abnormality in the command communication between the main control board P15 and the gaming media count control board P16 when there was a VL abnormality. This is because when a VL abnormality is determined, betting processing to invalidate betting operations is not executed.

The reason why the gaming media count control board P16 is configured to check the data of the second control command before checking for a VL abnormality when it receives a settlement request command or a payout request command is the same as for the input request command.

To prevent this situation, we check whether there are any abnormalities in command reception from the main control board P15 before determining whether there is a VL abnormality.

In addition, not limited to the example described above, when all commands sent from the main control board P15 are received, a determination is made as to whether the command content is normal before determining whether there is a VL abnormality.

<Timer measurement of basic communication sequence>
As shown in FIG. 20 , a gaming machine information notification is output from the gaming machine to the rental unit every 300 ms. A counting notification is output from the gaming machine to the rental unit 100 ms after the gaming information notification is output. A rental notification is output from the rental unit to the gaming machine within 170 ms after the counting notification is output. A rental receipt result response is output from the gaming machine to the rental unit within 10 ms after the rental notification is received. Thus, information must be output and received at a specified timing. Therefore, while multiple timers can be provided to measure the timing of information transmission and reception, a method of measuring the timing of information transmission and reception using a single timer can be adopted to reduce the capacity of the RWM. Below, an example using a memory area (_TM_INF_CTL_A) for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A (a timer for measuring 300 ms) is described.

<Gaming Machine Information Notification Timer A>
As described above, the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A is decremented by one for each timer interrupt process of the gaming media count control board P16. For example, when the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A is "300," the value is "299," and when the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A is "1," the value is "300" (if the value becomes 0, "300" is stored). In other words, except immediately after power-on, the value is configured to cycle between 300 and 1 (immediately after power-on, it is 0). Furthermore, when the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A is "300," processing is executed to output gaming machine information notification.

<Counting notification>
When the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "200", a process for outputting a count notification is executed. In other words, when the value of the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "200", this is the timing when 100 ms has elapsed since the gaming machine information notification was sent.

<Loan Notice>
When a loan notification is received, an abnormality is determined if the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A is greater than "200" or if the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A is less than "30." In other words, when the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A is greater than "200," this occurs before 100 ms have elapsed since the gaming machine information notification was notified. In other words, this refers to the timing before the processing for outputting the counting notification is executed. Furthermore, when the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A is less than "30," this occurs after 270 ms have elapsed since the gaming machine information notification was notified. In other words, this refers to the timing after 170 ms have elapsed since the processing for outputting the counting notification was executed. In addition, if an abnormality is determined based on the value of the memory area for storing gaming machine information notification timer A, the process of determining whether the checksum is normal or not based on the received loan notification, the process of determining whether the loan serial number is normal or not based on the received loan notification, the process of adding the loan points to the total points based on the received loan notification, and the process of outputting the basic loan receipt result response corresponding to the received loan notification are not performed.

<Loan acceptance result response>
When a loan notification is received, if the value of the memory area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A is less than "200" and greater than "30" (when an abnormality is not determined based on the value of the memory area for storing gaming machine information notification timer A when the loan notification is received), processing is performed to output a loan receipt response in the interrupt processing that received the loan notification. As described above, if an abnormality is determined based on the value of the memory area for storing gaming machine information notification timer A, the processing for determining whether the checksum is normal based on the received loan notification, the processing for determining whether the loan serial number is normal based on the received loan notification, the processing for adding the loan points to the total points based on the received loan notification, and the processing for outputting a loan receipt result response corresponding to the received loan notification are not performed. In other words, a response indicating an abnormality is not sent as a loan receipt result response. In other words, if the gaming machine receives a loan notification at a timing other than that based on the basic communication sequence, the received loan notification may be an unauthorized loan notification, so the gaming machine is configured not to output a loan receipt result response to the loan unit.

<Lighting control of each LED>
Dynamic lighting control is performed on the status indicator lamps 1 to 5, each segment display of the game medium number display section P9, and each segment display of the role ratio monitor.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the LED display counter can take five different values (01h, 02h, 04h, 08h, 10h), and is configured to light up every five interrupts. When the LED display counter value is 01h, it corresponds to LED digit A; when the LED display counter value is 02h, it corresponds to LED digit B; when the LED display counter value is 04h, it corresponds to LED digit C; when the LED display counter value is 08h, it corresponds to LED digit D; and when the LED display counter value is 10h, it corresponds to LED digit E.

The LEDs controlled by LED digit A are the first digit LED of the gaming medium count display unit P9, the LED of status indicator lamp 1, and the fourth digit LED of the role ratio monitor. The LEDs controlled by LED digit B are the second digit LED of the gaming medium count display unit P9, the LED of status indicator lamp 2, and the third digit LED of the role ratio monitor. The LEDs controlled by LED digit C are the third digit LED of the gaming medium count display unit P9, the LED of status indicator lamp 3, and the second digit LED of the role ratio monitor. The LEDs controlled by LED digit D are the fourth digit LED of the gaming medium count display unit P9, the LED of status indicator lamp 4, and the first digit LED of the role ratio monitor. The LEDs controlled by LED digit E are the fifth digit LED of the gaming medium count display unit P9 and the LED of status indicator lamp 5.

<Currently on loan>
When the rental button on the rental unit is operated and the gaming machine P receives a rental notification containing information including a predetermined number of rental points (for example, any number other than 0, such as 47 points), if the reception is normal or the total points after addition does not exceed 15,000 points, the total points are updated by adding the rental points to the total points, and then the gaming machine P sends a rental receipt result response to the rental unit.

When the lending process is executed in this way and lending points are added to the total score, the gaming machine P is configured to output a special sound (sometimes called a lending sound) for a predetermined period of time. Examples of lending sounds include sound effects such as a "beep" or a voice message such as "The item has been loaned out."

Specific explanations will be given based on the flowchart for lending processing in Figure 49.

<Received data acquisition>
The data of the rental notification sent when the rental button on the rental unit is operated is acquired. The acquired received data is saved in the rental notification receiving buffer (five memory areas: rental notification receiving buffers 1 to 5). Since the rental notification has a message length of 5 bytes, the received data acquisition process and the rental notification receiving buffer saving process are executed five times to acquire all the rental notification data.

<Did you receive the loan notification successfully?>
It is determined whether the data indicating the message length of the received loan notification is "0x05" and the data indicating the command is "0x13." If this determination process finds that the data indicating the message length is not "0x05" or the data indicating the command is not "0x13," it is determined that the loan notification was not received correctly, and the loan notification reception buffers (five memory areas: loan notification reception buffers 1 to 5) are cleared.

<Check for communication errors 2 to 6>
This is a process of checking for communication error 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 and saving a communication error flag. The communication error flag is 1 byte, and if the D0 bit is 1, it indicates communication error 1, if the D1 bit is 1, it indicates communication error 2, if the D2 bit is 1, it indicates communication error 3, if the D3 bit is 1, it indicates communication error 4, if the D4 bit is 1, it indicates communication error 5, and if the D5 bit is 1, it indicates communication error 6. This will be specifically explained based on the flowchart in Fig. 53.

<<Setting the initial value of the communication error flag>>
A process is executed to store 0 in register A as the initial value of the communication abnormality flag.

<< Loan notification reception counter +1 (maximum value 2) >>
A process is executed to increment the value of the loan notification reception counter by 1. If the result of incrementing the value by 1 using a special addition instruction (one instruction) exceeds 2, the counter is corrected to 2. Therefore, when the value of the loan notification reception counter exceeds 255 due to fraud and is reset to 0 again, it is possible to prevent the value of the loan notification reception counter from becoming 1 when a process is executed to increment the value of the loan notification reception counter by 1.

<<Lending notification reception counter ≠ 1? >><<Communication error 2 flag set>>
It is determined whether the value of the loan notification reception counter is not 1, and if the value of the loan notification reception counter is not 1, the communication error 2 flag is set (the D1 bit of the communication error flag is set to 1) (also referred to as processing related to communication error 2).

The loan notification reception counter is initialized to 0 when a gaming machine information notification is sent (when hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, or gaming machine performance information is sent), and is incremented by 1 when a loan notification is received from the loan unit. In other words, gaming machine information notifications are sent every 300 ms, and loan notifications are received every 300 ms. Therefore, under normal circumstances, the loan notification reception counter is 0 from the time the gaming machine information notification is sent until the loan notification is received. It is incremented by 1 during the loan notification reception process's loan notification counter increment process, so when the loan notification reception counter ≠ 1 determination process is executed, the loan notification reception counter = 1. Therefore, if the loan notification reception counter is any value other than 1, it is possible that multiple loan notifications were received or RAM values were rewritten due to fraud between the time the gaming machine information notification was sent and the time the loan notification was received, and therefore the communication abnormality 2 flag is set.

In addition, by checking the loan notification reception counter at multiple times (when the gaming machine information notification is sent and when the loan notification is received), multiple abnormalities (communication abnormality 1 and communication abnormality 2) can be detected with a single counter, reducing program size and processing load.

<<Reception range error?>><<Communication error 3 flag set>>
It is determined whether the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is less than 100 ms or exceeds 270 ms, and if the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is less than 100 ms or exceeds 270 ms, the communication error 3 flag is set (the D2 bit of the communication error flag is set to 1) (also referred to as processing related to communication error 3).

The time to receive a rental notification from the rental unit is set to 100 ms or more after the gaming machine information notification is sent, but no more than 270 ms. If the time exceeds this reception range, there is a possibility that the rental notification has been received fraudulently, so the communication error 3 flag will be set.

<<Number of medals loaned> 50? >><<Communication error 4 flag set>>
It is determined whether the number of loaned medals contained in the received loan notification exceeds 50, and if the number of loaned medals exceeds 50, the communication error 4 flag is set (the D3 bit of the communication error flag is set to 1) (also referred to as processing related to communication error 4).

<<Number of loaned medals = 0?>>
It determines whether the number of loaned medals included in the received loan notification is 0, and if the number of loaned medals is 0, it executes a communication error flag update process. This is because communication error flag 5 and communication error flag 6 are abnormalities that may be set when the number of loaned medals is not 0, so if the number of loaned medals is 0, the process of determining communication error flag 5 and communication error flag 6 is not executed, which makes it possible to speed up the execution of the program.

<<Response permission flag = 0? >><<Communication error 5 flag set>>
It is determined whether the response permission flag is 0, and if the response permission flag is 0, the communication error 5 flag is set (the D4 bit of the communication error flag is set to 1) (also referred to as processing related to communication error 5). If the response permission flag is 0, the situation is one in which receipt of loan notifications is not permitted (a situation in which hole control/fraud monitoring information has not been sent), so if the response permission flag is 0 when the number of loaned medals is not 0, it means that a loan notification has been received even though receipt of loan notifications is not permitted, and it can be determined that a loan notification sent fraudulently has been received.

In addition, a process to determine whether the loan notification was received correctly is executed before the communication error check processes 2 to 6. The process determines whether the data indicating the message length of the received loan notification is "0x05" and the data indicating the command is "0x13" and determines whether the notification was received correctly. Even after determining that the notification was received correctly, the response permission flag is also checked, making the gaming machine more resistant to fraud.

<<Counted medal count ≠ 0? ? >><<Communication error 6 flag set>>
It is determined whether the number of counted medals is not 0, and if the number of counted medals is not 0, the communication error 6 flag is set (the D5 bit of the communication error flag is set to 1) (also referred to as processing related to communication error 6). Because the lending process and counting process are not performed simultaneously, if the number of counted medals is not 0 when the number of lending medals is not 0, it can be determined that a fraudulently sent lending notification has been received, or that a fraudulent counting notification has been sent.

<<Communication error flag update>>
The communication error flag is updated based on each communication error set in each of the communication error determination processes 2 to 6.

<Normal reception range?>
The receiving timing of the received loan notification is determined to be within a normal range. Specifically, since the normal receiving range of the loan notification is within 170 ms from the counting notification transmission timing, which is 100 ms after the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification, 30 (200-170) is subtracted from the value of gaming machine information notification timer A when the loan notification is received, and if the value obtained by subtracting 30 from the value of gaming machine information notification timer A is smaller than 171 (170+1), it is determined to be normal, and if it is larger, it is determined to be abnormal. If it is determined to be abnormal, the loan notification receiving buffers (five storage areas of loan notification receiving buffers 1 to 5) are cleared.

<Checksum error?>
Whether the checksum is abnormal is determined based on the sum of the various data stored in loan notification receiving buffers 1 to 4, excluding loan notification receiving buffer 5 where the checksum is stored, and the checksum value stored in loan notification receiving buffer 5. Specifically, the sum of the message length data, command data, loan serial number data, and loan point data stored in loan notification receiving buffers 1 to 4 is compared with the checksum value stored in loan notification receiving buffer 5. If the values are the same, it is determined to be normal, and if the values are different, it is determined to be abnormal. If the checksum is determined to be abnormal, a value indicating an abnormality ("0x01") is saved in the loan point receipt result, and the loan receipt result response is set. In other words, if the checksum is abnormal, the loan notification is discarded (for example, the loan points are not added to the total points).

<Get loan serial number, loan serial number + 1, loan serial number = 0?>
The rental serial number stored in the game media count control board P16 is obtained and updated (incremented by 1). If it is determined that the updated (incremented by 1) rental serial number is 0, it updates the rental serial number again (incremented by 1), and if it is determined that the updated (incremented by 1) rental serial number is not 0, it determines whether the rental serial number is normal or not. Note that the rental serial number = 0 is only used when starting communication with the gaming machine, so if the rental serial number is updated (incremented by 1) and becomes 0, it must be updated again (incremented by 1) to make it 1.

<Is the rental serial number correct? Clear the serial number error flag>
It determines whether the rental serial number stored in the rental notification receiving buffer is normal. Specifically, it determines whether the rental serial number after updating the rental serial number stored in the game media count control board P16 is the same as the rental serial number stored in the rental notification receiving buffer 3. If it determines that the rental serial number is normal (the rental serial number after updating the rental serial number stored in the game media count control board P16 is the same as the rental serial number stored in the rental notification receiving buffer 3), it clears the serial number abnormality flag. If it determines that the rental serial number is abnormal (the rental serial number after updating the rental serial number stored in the game media count control board P16 is not the same as the rental serial number stored in the rental notification receiving buffer 3), it sets the serial number abnormality flag, saves a value indicating an abnormality ("0x01") in the rental point receipt result, and sets the rental receipt result response. In other words, if the rental serial number is abnormal (if the rental serial number sent from the rental unit is not consecutive), the rental notification is discarded (for example, the rental points are not added to the total points).

<Lending points = 0?>
It is determined whether the rental points stored in the rental notification receiving buffer 4 are 0. For example, if the rental points stored in the rental notification receiving buffer 4 are 0, this means that the rental notification was sent when the rental button on the rental unit was not operated, and therefore the process of adding the rental points to the total points is not executed thereafter, but the updated rental serial number is saved on the game media number control board P16, a value indicating normal rental point receipt result ("0x00") is saved, and a rental receipt result response is set.

<Response permission flag = 0?>
It is determined whether the response permission flag is 0. If the response permission flag is 0, the receipt of the loan notification is not permitted (the situation is not after the transmission of the hall control/fraud monitoring information), so a value indicating an abnormality ("0x01") is saved in the loan point receipt result, and the loan receipt result response is set. In other words, if the response permission flag is 0, the loan notification is discarded (for example, the loan points are not added to the total score). Note that the response permission flag is saved as 1 after the hall control/fraud monitoring information is sent, and the response permission flag is cleared after the gaming machine information notification timer A count value saving process of the gaming machine information management process (before the gaming machine information notification timer B+1 process).

The response permission flag is set to 1 after sending hall control and fraud monitoring information, but is not set to 1 after sending gaming machine installation information or gaming machine performance information (the response permission flag remains 0). This is because information regarding total points is not sent in the gaming machine installation information or gaming machine performance information, so if the response permission flag is set to 1 after sending gaming machine installation information or gaming machine performance information (lending is permitted), the lending unit will not be able to determine whether the increase in total points is due to the addition of lending points or other factors (fraud, etc.). For this reason, by configuring the response permission flag to store 1 after sending hall control and fraud monitoring information that sends total point information, the lending unit will be able to understand the factors behind the increase or decrease in total points, making it more resistant to fraud.

In addition, even if the rental serial number is normal, if the response permission flag = 0, it is considered to be an abnormality. In this way, even if fraudulent activity is being committed by sending the correct rental serial number, if the rental notification is not received at the correct time (when the response permission flag = 1), it can be determined to be an abnormality, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud.

<Counting points ≠ 0?>
It is determined whether the counting points in the counting notification are 0. If counting and lending are performed simultaneously, counting takes priority, so if the counting points are notified as "1" or higher, a value indicating an abnormality ("0x01") is saved in the lending point receipt result and the lending receipt result response is set. In other words, if the counting points in the counting notification are 0, the lending notification is discarded (for example, the lending points are not added to the total points).

<Lending point ≧ 51?>
It is determined whether the loan points in the loan notice exceed the specified value of 50 (51 or more). If the loan points exceed the specified value of 50, a value indicating an abnormality ("0x01") is saved in the loan point receipt result, and the loan receipt result response is set. In other words, if the loan points in the loan notice exceed 50, the loan notice is discarded (for example, the loan points are not added to the total points).

<Total score obtained, total score ≧ 15,000?>
The total points stored in the game media number control board P16 are obtained and it is determined whether the total points exceed 15,000. If the total points are 15,000 or more, the total points threshold has been reached and the value is close to the total points upper limit abnormality, so the loan points are not added to the total points, a value indicating an abnormality ("0x01") is saved in the loan points receipt result, and a loan receipt result response is set. In other words, if the total points are 15,000 or more, the loan notification is discarded (for example, the loan points are not added to the total points).

<Total score addition, total score saving>
If the total score is less than 15,000, the lending points are added to the total score, and the total score after the addition is stored in the total score storage area.

<Lending control status signal set>
After the lending points are added to the total points and the total points are updated, a control status signal relating to lending is set. The control status signal relating to lending is configured to be output for 200 ms.

The control status signal for lending is provided to output a lending sound from the gaming machine P when the lending button on the lending unit is operated. When the gaming media count control board P16 sets the control status signal for lending, the control status signal for lending is output to the main control board P15. When the main control board P15 receives the control status signal for lending, it is configured to output a presentation command for the lending sound to the sub-control board P12. Note that the reason the gaming media count control board P16 outputs the control status signal for lending for 200 ms is because the main control board P15 sends the presentation command for the lending sound to the sub-control board P12 as part of the no-operation command. The no-operation command is a command sent when the main control board P15 has no commands to send to the sub-control board P12; therefore, if the main control board P15 has commands to send to the sub-control board P12, the no-operation command is not sent. Therefore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the main control board P15 is designed to send the most commands to the sub-control board P12 for a transmission time of 100 ms. Therefore, when the game media count control board P16 transmits a control status signal related to lending for at least 100 ms, the main control means P15 can transmit a no-operation command to the sub-control board P12. Furthermore, to prevent communication errors between boards, the game media count control board P16 is configured to output a control status signal related to lending for 200 ms, double the 100 ms, so that the main control board P15 can reliably transmit a no-operation command to the sub-control board P12. Furthermore, when the sub-control board P12 receives a presentation command related to a lending sound from the main control board P15, it outputs a predetermined lending sound. Therefore, even if the game media count control board P16 has finished outputting the control status signal related to lending, the lending sound can be output for a predetermined period of time.

Also, as mentioned above, the rental sound is output after the rental points are added to the total score, so it is not output when the rental points are 0. In other words, the rental sound is output only when the rental points in the rental notification received every 300 ms are not 0, preventing the rental sound from being output when the rental button is not being operated.

The rental sound output by the sub-control board P12 is set to a different channel from the in-game sound effects, and is configured to be output even during gameplay. This configuration allows the rental sound to be output regardless of the game state (waiting for gameplay, reels spinning, payout processing, specified errors (excluding total score threshold reached, total score upper limit abnormality, and VL abnormality)), preventing double pressing of the rental button due to the rental sound not being output. Because there is a risk of the rental button being pressed twice if the rental sound is not heard over the in-game sound effects, the volume of the rental sound cannot be changed by the player's settings, and is configured to be louder than the normal sound effects. Because there is a risk that the rental sound will not be heard if the rental sound output period is short, it is desirable for the rental sound to be output for at least one second. Because outputting the rental sound for a long period of time could result in the player not hearing the in-game sound effects for an extended period of time, it is desirable for the rental sound to be shorter than the minimum game time (4.1 seconds).

Furthermore, the rental sound output by the sub-control board P12 may be set to the same channel as the in-game sound effects, so that the in-game sound is given priority over the rental sound. This configuration prevents the rental sound from interfering with the in-game sound, increasing the enjoyment of the game. Note that, as a specification for prioritizing the in-game sound, if the rental sound and the in-game sound effects are set to different channels, the volume of the rental sound may be set to 0 when the rental button is operated during play.

The volume of the rental sound may also be able to be changed according to the player's volume setting. In this case, the volume of the rental sound is also changed according to the volume setting set by the player, but by configuring the rental sound to be relatively louder than other effect sounds, it is easier to prevent the rental sound from being missed. For example, because the rental button is likely to be operated towards the end of a game, it is set to be louder than the sound of the third reel (the last reel to stop) stopping and the sound of the game medium being added.

In addition, when the sub-control board P12 receives a performance command related to a lending sound from the main control board P15, it may not only notify with the lending sound, but also with a frame lamp, LCD, etc. In this case, if it is a frame lamp, it will light up with a dedicated lighting pattern, and if it is an LCD, it will display a notification performance related to the lending (such as the text display "Lented" or an icon display indicating the lending) in a position that does not overlap with the UI display. When notifying with a frame lamp or LCD, the lending sound may be output, or the lending may be notified only with the lending sound, frame lamp, or LCD.

<Serial number saved, loan point receipt result = saved normally>
The updated lending serial number is saved in the game media count control board P16, and a value indicating normal lending point receipt is saved in the game media count control board P16. This process is performed when a lending notification is received normally, and is also executed when the lending points are 0 and the notification is received normally, as described above.

<Lending receipt result response set, lending control command set>
By setting various data in the loan receipt result response and executing the loan control command set process (message set process), the message length, loan receipt response, loan serial number, loan quantity receipt result, and checksum are sent to the loan unit.

As described above, when the rental process is executed and rental points are added to the total score, the gaming machine P outputs a rental sound; when the rental process is executed and rental points are not added to the total score, the gaming machine P does not output a rental sound. However, even when the rental process is executed and rental points are not added to the total score, under certain circumstances, the gaming machine P may be configured to notify the player that the rental was not possible (that rental points were not added to the total score). For example, when the rental button on the rental unit is operated and the gaming machine receives a rental notification containing information on 50 rental points, if the total score is 15,000 or more and therefore rental points were not added to the total score, the gaming machine P may output a sound such as "Rental not possible." By notifying the player that the rental was not possible (that rental points were not added to the total score) in this way, the player can be appropriately notified even if the total score did not increase when the player operated the rental button on the rental unit. The notification that the loan was not possible (loan points could not be added to the total points) can be made not only by voice, but also by sound effects, a lamp, or an image display. The notification that the loan was not possible (loan points could not be added to the total points) can also be made in the event of a checksum abnormality, an abnormality in the loan serial number, or a counting point other than 0. On the other hand, the notification that the loan was not possible (loan points could not be added to the total points) does not have to be made in the event of a checksum abnormality, an abnormality in the loan serial number, or a counting point other than 0.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine and the lending unit communicate via the gaming media count control board P16 and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board. However, this is not limited to this; the gaming machine and the lending unit may also communicate via the main control board P15 and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board. In this case, production costs are reduced by not including the gaming media count control board P16. Furthermore, all processing controlled by the gaming media count control board P16 is performed by the main control board P15. Note that if the functions of the main control board P15 and the gaming media count control board P16 are to be realized on the same board, this can be achieved by providing the main control chip and gaming media count control chip on the same board and performing transmission and reception processing similar to that of the above-mentioned embodiment between the main control chip and the gaming media count control chip. Furthermore, by using only the main control chip and storing the processing of the above-mentioned gaming media count control chip in an area separate from the main control area of the main control chip, this can be achieved even on a one-chip, one-board system.

<Power interruption recovery process when VL abnormality and total score clear status is ON>
When the gaming machine P and the rental unit are not connected (when the gaming machine P is powered on but the rental unit is not powered on, or when a communication abnormality occurs between the gaming machine P and the rental unit, etc.), the gaming machine P sets a VL abnormality.

Here, if only gaming machine P is started (the rental unit is not started) and the total score clear switch is pressed, the total score is initialized during the power-on processing when gaming machine P is started, total score clear timer 1 is set, and the total score clear status is turned ON. After that, the interrupt processing is started, and if a VL abnormality is detected during the input port check within the interrupt processing, the VL abnormality flag is turned ON (FFh is stored in the VL abnormality flag memory area).

In this way, if a power outage occurs when the total score clear status is ON and the VL abnormality flag is ON, the total score clear status and VL abnormality flag will not be initialized when the gaming machine P is powered on again, so the game can return to a situation where the total score clear status is ON and the VL abnormality flag is ON.

With this configuration, the total score clear status and VL abnormality flag are not initialized when the power is turned off and then restored, so the total score clear status or VL abnormality flag will be turned ON due to fraudulent behavior. Even if the power is turned off and then restored due to fraudulent behavior, the total score clear status and VL abnormality flag will not be initialized, making it possible to prevent fraudulent behavior.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the total score clear status and VL abnormality flag are not initialized when the power is turned off and then back on. Therefore, if a power outage occurs when the total score clear status is ON and the VL abnormality flag is ON, and the gaming machine P is turned back on when the rental unit is still powered on, the VL abnormality flag will be turned OFF, and the gaming machine P will be able to send information to the rental unit that the total score clear status is ON.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs when the total score clear status is ON and the VL abnormality flag is ON, and the gaming machine P is powered on again while the setting key switch is ON, the initialization process associated with starting the setting change mode is executed, but the total score clear status and VL abnormality flag are not initialized, so the total score clear status can be restored to ON and the VL abnormality flag can be restored. In this case, the setting change in progress status is also ON, so the total score clear status is ON, the VL abnormality flag is ON, and the setting change in progress status is ON.

With this configuration, the total score clear status and VL abnormality flag are not initialized when the power is turned off and then restored, or when the setting change mode is activated. Therefore, fraudulent activity will cause the total score clear status or VL abnormality flag to turn ON. Even if the power is turned off and then restored, or when the setting change mode is activated, the total score clear status and VL abnormality flag will not be initialized, making it possible to prevent fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the total score clear status and VL abnormality flag are not initialized when the power is turned off and then back on, or when the setting change mode is activated. Therefore, if a power outage occurs when the total score clear status is ON and the VL abnormality flag is ON, and the gaming machine P is then turned on again, the setting key switch will be ON, and if the rental unit is powered on, the VL abnormality flag will be OFF (VL abnormality flag is "0"), and the gaming machine P will be able to send information to the rental unit that the total score clear status is ON and that the setting change in progress status is ON.

<About the difference counter that stores the difference number from when the power was turned on>
In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the number of medals inserted (sometimes referred to as the number of inserted medals, the number of bets, the number of bets, the number of coins bet, the number of coins bet, the number of coins bet, the number of coins inserted, the number of bets, the number of coins bet, the number of coins inserted, the number of bets, the number of coins inserted, the number of bets, the number of coins inserted, the number of bets, the number of coins inserted, the number of bets, the number of coins inserted, the number of bets, the number of coins inserted, the number of bets, the number of coins inserted, the number of bets, the number of coins inserted, the number of bets, the number of coins inserted, the number of bets, the number of coins inserted, the number of bets, the number of coins inserted, the number of coins bet ...

Note that when the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value and the stopping process is executed, this is sometimes referred to as "the safety device being activated" or "the complete function being activated."

The end-of-game monitoring process is executed in both advantageous and normal game zones. It is also executed regardless of the specified number at which the game starts. It is also executed regardless of the RT state. In other words, it is executed in all games. Note that in games where a replay role is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops, the value of the difference counter does not change, so the end-of-game monitoring process may or may not be executed.

For example, it is possible to execute a stoppage process in a game in which the number of payouts since the highest number of inputs while the gaming machine was powered on reaches 19,000 or more (a game in which MY reaches 19,000).

Also, for example, in a certain game where the total number of medals paid out since power-on is 50,001 and the total number of medals inserted since power-on is 31,000, the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000, so it may be possible to execute a stop process for that certain game.

The play-stop process may be any or all of the following: not adding bets or credits when medals are inserted; turning off the blocker so that bets or credits are not added even when medals are inserted; not executing bet processing even when operation of the MAX BET switch or 1 BET switch is accepted; not accepting operation of the MAX BET switch or 1 BET switch; not executing reel spin start processing even when operation of the START switch is accepted; not accepting operation of the START switch; not executing reel stop processing even when operation of the STOP switch is accepted; or not accepting operation of the STOP switch. In other words, once the play-stop process is executed, play cannot begin.

Even if the game progress is stopped, the operation of the settlement switch P6 and the counting switch P7 is still valid, and processing based on the operation of each switch can be executed.

The term "stopping process" may also refer to automatic settlement processing in addition to processing that stops the progress of the game. Automatic settlement processing refers to settlement processing based on the operation of settlement switch P6 that is automatically executed after the stopping process. The term "stopping process" may also refer to automatic counting processing. Automatic counting processing refers to counting processing based on the operation of counting switch P7 that is automatically executed after the stopping process. The term "stopping process" may also refer to automatic settlement processing and automatic counting processing.

When game progress is stopped by the stop processing, it cannot be released by turning the power on. Instead, the stopped game progress (stopped state) can be released by turning the power on and changing the settings, which executes the RWM initialization process. In other words, if a gaming machine enters a stopped state during the opening hours of the gaming center, that gaming machine will not be able to operate during the opening hours of that day.

In addition, as a condition for executing the RWM initialization process other than power-on with a setting change, power-on with operation of the RAM clear switch may be used to execute the RWM initialization process, thereby enabling the suspension of game progress (stopped state).In addition, as a condition for executing the RWM initialization process other than power-on with a setting change, power-on with operation of the total score clear switch may be used to execute the total score initialization process, thereby enabling the suspension of game progress (stopped state).Alternatively, it may be possible to configure so that the suspension of game progress (stopped state) cannot be released even if power-on with operation of the total score clear switch is used to execute the total score initialization process.

In this way, if the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value, it may cause the player to become overly gambling-minded. Therefore, by stopping the game when the value of the difference counter exceeds the predetermined value, it is possible to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

The difference counter may also be referred to as a difference number counter, difference number storage means, difference number storage means, difference number storage area, difference number storage area, power-on MY counter, power-on MY storage means, power-on MY storage area, limit difference number counter, limit difference number counter, limit MY counter, limit MY storage means, or limit MY storage area.

The value stored in the difference counter is configured to be initialized when the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the initial value of the difference counter is 0 and it increments from that initial value, so initialization when the power is turned on means setting the value of the difference counter to 0. However, if the initial value of the difference counter is 19,000 and it is a counter that decrements, initialization when the power is turned on means setting the value of the difference counter to 19,000. Note that power-on includes not only normal power-on, but also power-on with a setting change and power-on with an RWM abnormality. Furthermore, the value stored in the difference counter is not initialized by the RWM initialization process that is executed when the conditions for ending the advantageous period are met (for example, MY during the advantageous period exceeds 2,400, the difference number during the advantageous period exceeds 2,400, the number of games played during the advantageous period reaches a predetermined number, etc.).

In the embodiment described above, the value stored in the difference counter is initialized when the gaming machine is turned on, but this is not limiting; the value stored in the difference counter may also be configured to be initialized when the gaming machine is turned off.

Incidentally, since the difference counter is susceptible to being initialized by fraud or a momentary power outage if initialized simply by powering it on, the value of the difference counter may be initialized (cleared) by turning on the power while pressing a specified switch that cannot be operated by the player, such as a settings change switch, reset switch, RAM clear switch, or total score clear switch, when no power is being supplied. In other words, the value of the difference counter may not be initialized by simply turning the power on normally.

In addition, since it may be desirable not to initialize the value of the difference counter when clearing an error during business hours, the machine may be configured so that the value of the difference counter is not initialized even if the gaming machine is turned on while a specific switch is pressed. These specific switches include the start switch P3, stop switch P4, settlement switch P6, counting switch P7, bet switch P5, setting change switch, reset switch, RAM clear switch, and total score clear switch.

Furthermore, if the device is configured to initialize the value of the difference counter when power is turned on by pressing a specified switch, and not to initialize the value of the difference counter when power is turned on by pressing a specific switch, the specified switch and the specific switch are configured to be different switches.

Also, the device may be configured so that the value of the difference counter is not initialized when the power is turned on by pressing a dedicated switch that is different from the various switches mentioned above.

If the device is configured to initialize the value of the difference counter when powered on by pressing a specific switch, it is configured not to initialize the value of the difference counter if power is turned on while switches other than the specific switch are pressed at the same time. This is because, when initializing the value of the difference counter for fraudulent purposes, it is possible that the switch could be affected by radio waves, etc., but it is difficult to direct radio waves only at the specific switch, and it is more likely that other switches will also be affected at the same time. This configuration has the effect of making it easier to prevent fraudulent initialization of the value of the difference counter.

However, this is not a limitation, and for convenience's sake, the device may be configured to initialize the value of the difference counter when the power is turned on while switches other than the specified switch are pressed at the same time.

If the device is configured not to initialize the value of the difference counter when power is turned on with the pressing of a specific switch, it is configured to initialize the value of the difference counter when power is turned on while switches other than the specific switch are also pressed at the same time. This is because, if the device is configured to prevent the initialization of the value of the difference counter for fraudulent purposes, it is possible to affect the switch with radio waves, etc., but it is difficult to direct radio waves only at a specific switch, and it is highly likely that other switches will also be hit by radio waves at the same time. This configuration has the effect of making it easier to prevent the value of the difference counter from being maintained for fraudulent purposes.

However, this is not a limitation, and for convenience's sake, the device may be configured so that the value of the difference counter is not initialized when the power is turned on while switches other than the specified switch are pressed at the same time.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs when the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value and game progress has stopped, and the power is turned on with the setting key switch in the OFF position and the machine starts up normally (normal power-on), the value of the difference counter will be initialized, but game progress will remain stopped. This is because a stop process is executed when the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value, and this stop process is configured to repeat the same process indefinitely using jump commands, etc., so even if a power outage occurs during the stop process and the power is turned on again, the stop process will begin. Note that when the stop process is executed, an interrupt process is executed as usual, but the interrupt process does not return to the normal main loop process from the interrupt process, and the stop process will loop.

In addition, because interrupt processing is executed normally while the termination process is being executed, the power-off process described above can be executed normally even if an event that shuts down the power supply (for example, turning off the power switch) occurs during the termination process.

This configuration prevents unauthorized power-off and power-on operations that would allow gameplay to continue after gameplay has been halted by the game-stopping process.

The difference counter stores the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted from the number of medals paid out for each game. Below is a specific example of how the difference counter value is updated. The process of updating the difference counter value is executed at a predetermined timing between when all reels have stopped and when medals for the next game can be inserted (betting for the next game is possible). Because the process of updating the difference counter value is executed when one game has ended, the predetermined timing is sometimes referred to as when one game has ended. The difference counter will be explained as 2-byte data. The "/" indicating 2-byte data separates each byte, and the number in parentheses after the binary value represents the binary value in decimal.

<When the difference counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), the number of medals paid out = 00001010b (10), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the difference counter is 00000000/01100100b (100), the register calculates 00001010b (10 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = 00000111b (7), obtains the value of the difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference counter is 00000000/01101011b (107).

<When the difference counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), the number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the difference counter is 00000000/01100100b (100), the register calculates 00000000b (0 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = -00000011b (-3), obtains the value of the difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference counter is 00000000/01100001b (97).

<When the difference counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), the number of medals paid out = 00001010b (10), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the difference counter is 00000000/00000000b (0), the register calculates 00001010b (10 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = 00000111b (7), obtains the value of the difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference counter is 00000000/00000111b (7).

<When the difference counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), the number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the difference counter is 00000000/00000000b (0), the register calculates 00000000b (0 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = -00000011b (-3), obtains the value of the difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference counter is 10000000/00000011b (32771).

The calculation result explained in <When difference counter = 00000000b (0), number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)> is -00000011b (-3), but the value stored in the difference counter is 10000000/00000011b (32771) because a 0 in the most significant bit indicates a positive value, and a 1 in the most significant bit indicates a negative value. With a 2-byte counter, values up to 01111111/11111111 (32767) in the difference counter can be stored correctly without using the most significant bit. In other words, if the value of the difference counter is 11111111/11111111b, it indicates -32767, so in the example above, -3 would be 10000000/00000011b.

Note that some parts of the above calculation examples have been omitted. In more detail, the current value of the difference counter is obtained, and a determination is made as to whether the most significant bit of the obtained difference counter value is 0. If the most significant bit of the obtained difference counter value is 0, the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the number of medals paid out, and the subtracted value is added to the obtained difference counter value, and the added value is updated as the value of the difference counter. Furthermore, if the most significant bit of the obtained difference counter value is 1, the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the number of medals paid out, and the subtracted value is calculated by subtracting a fixed value of 10000000/00000000b (32768) from the obtained difference counter value, and the subtracted value is updated as the value of the difference counter.

Also, if the result of calculating the value to be updated as the difference counter value is a negative value, the most significant bit of the absolute value of the result of calculating the value to be updated as the difference counter value is set to 1, and the value is updated as the difference counter value.

In addition, in each of the above calculation examples, the result of subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of paid out medals in the register was added to the obtained value of the difference counter, but the order of calculations may be such that first the number of paid out medals is added to the obtained value of the difference counter, and then the number of inserted medals is subtracted from the result of that addition, or first the number of inserted medals is subtracted from the obtained value of the difference counter, and then the number of paid out medals is added from the result of that subtraction.

Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out is not 0, it means that a small role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the small role has stopped. Note that when a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped, the number of medals paid out may be 3 or 0. If the number of medals paid out when a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped is 3, the number of medals inserted should be 3, and if the number of medals paid out when a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped is 0, the number of medals inserted should be 0.

Also, when a replay role is won, the difference counter update process may be executed, or the difference counter update process may not be executed.Also, when a replay role is won, the difference counter determination process may be executed, or the difference counter determination process may not be executed.

The difference counter does not need to be 2 bytes; it can be 3 or 4 bytes. If the difference counter is 3 bytes, the fixed value is 10,000,000/00000000/00000000b (8388608), and if the difference counter is 4 bytes, the fixed value is 10,000,000/00000000/00000000/00000000b (2147483648). Note that the difference counter is initialized when the power is turned on, so even if the number of medals paid out is 0 after 10,000 plays, which corresponds to approximately one day during the arcade's business hours, the counter will only store up to -30,000 (10,000 (number of plays possible in a day) x 3 (number of medals inserted)). Therefore, 2 bytes of storage capacity for the difference counter is sufficient.

<Another aspect of updating the difference counter>
The gaming machine may be equipped with a payout medal count memory area that stores the total number of payout medals since the gaming machine was powered on, a medal count memory area that stores the total number of medals inserted since the gaming machine was powered on, and a difference counter that stores the difference since the gaming machine was powered on, wherein the payout medal count memory area, medal count memory area, and difference counter are configured to be initialized when the power is turned on, and when updating the difference counter in a difference counter update process that is executed after one game is completed, if the result of subtracting the value stored in the medal count memory area from the value stored in the payout medal count memory area is a positive value, the result of subtracting the value stored in the medal count memory area from the value stored in the payout medal count memory area is stored in the difference counter, and if the result of subtracting the value stored in the medal count memory area from the value stored in the payout medal count memory area is a negative value, the difference counter may be configured to store 0.

With this configuration, it is desirable that the payout medal count storage area, the inserted medal count storage area, and the difference counter each be a 2-byte storage area, but the payout medal count storage area may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more, the inserted medal count storage area may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more, and the difference counter may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more.

The medal payout count storage area, medal insertion count storage area, and difference counter are initialized when the power is turned on, and the initialization process involves storing 0 in each storage area. Power-on events include setting changes and RWM abnormalities, as described above.

The payout medal count memory area is a memory area that stores the cumulative number of payout medals for each game, and is updated regardless of the game status or the specified number (sometimes referred to as the payout medal count memory area update process). For example, if 100 is stored in the payout medal count memory area and the Nth game is played and 10 medals are paid out, 110 will be stored in the payout medal count memory area after the Nth game is completed; if the N+1th game is played and 0 medals are paid out (no medals were paid out), 110 will be stored in the payout medal count memory area after the N+1th game is completed.

The number of inserted medals memory area is a memory area that stores the cumulative number of inserted medals for each game, and is updated regardless of the game status or the specified number (sometimes referred to as the number of inserted medals memory area update process). For example, if 50 is stored in the number of inserted medals memory area and the Nth game is played and three medals are inserted, 53 will be stored in the number of inserted medals memory area after the Nth game is completed; if the N+1th game is played and two medals are inserted, 55 will be stored in the number of paid out medals memory area after the N+1th game is completed.

The difference counter stores the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game. If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is a positive value, the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is updated as the value of the difference counter. However, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is a negative value, the value of the difference counter is updated to 0. For this reason, the value of the difference counter is not necessarily the value obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of paid out medals for each game, but this is not a problem because the difference counter is a counter used to determine whether the difference counter has exceeded 19,000.

In addition, while the embodiment has been described in which 0 is stored in the difference counter if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is negative, the embodiment is not limited to this. If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is negative, the difference counter may not be updated, a fixed value greater than 0 and less than 19,000 may be stored in the difference counter, a fixed value greater than 19,000 may be stored in the difference counter, or the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game may be stored as is.

If the difference counter is not updated when the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game minus the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is negative, or if a fixed value greater than 0 and less than 19,000 is stored in the difference counter, the game will not be halted because the value of the difference counter will never exceed 19,000 even if the process of determining whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 is performed for each game. Furthermore, if the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game minus the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game is positive, the correct value is stored in the difference counter, so there is no problem. Alternatively, if the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game minus the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game is negative, the process of determining whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 may not be performed.

If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is negative, the difference counter stores a fixed value of 19,000 or more, or if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is stored as is, there is a possibility that the value of the difference counter will be determined to be greater than 19,000 if the process to determine whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 is performed every game. Therefore, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is negative, there is no problem in not performing the process to determine whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000.

The difference counter update process is similar to that described above and is executed at a predetermined timing between when all reels have stopped and when medals for the next game can be inserted (bet for the next game can be placed). Note that the difference counter update process may also include a medal payout memory area update process and a medal insertion memory area update process.

<Difference counter judgment process when the special device continuous operation device or the first type special device is operating>
Before executing the process of determining whether the value of the difference counter has exceeded 19,000 as the difference counter determination process, it may be possible to determine whether the reel continuous operation device is operating, whether the first type special reel is operating, or whether the reel continuous operation device or the first type special reel is operating, and if it is determined that they are operating in either case, the difference counter determination process may not be executed.

This is because if play were to stop while the continuous device operation device or the first-class special device is operating (during a bonus), it is highly likely that the player's motivation to play would be significantly diminished. Therefore, by allowing play to continue during a bonus even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000, and stopping play after the bonus ends, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment without diminishing their motivation to play. It can also increase the player's motivation to increase the number of balls won during a bonus.

Even in this configuration, the difference counter update process is performed even when the reel continuous operation device or the first-class special reel is operating. Therefore, it is preferable that the program processing order be configured as follows: "difference counter update process" → "processing to determine whether the reel continuous operation device is operating, whether the first-class special reel is operating, or whether the reel continuous operation device or the first-class special reel is operating" → "difference counter determination process."

Also, if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, and the value of the difference counter falls below 19,000 when the bonus ends, the game may be stopped after the bonus ends.

In this case, even during a bonus, a determination is made as to whether the value of the difference counter has exceeded 19,000, and if it is determined that the value of the difference counter has exceeded 19,000, a predetermined value (for example, any value such as "1" or "255") is stored in the stop flag (stop flag storage area), and when the bonus ends, a determination is made as to whether the value of the stop flag is the predetermined value, and if it is, the progress of the game is stopped. Note that when the bonus ends, if it is determined that the value of the stop flag is not the predetermined value, the progress of the game is not stopped. Furthermore, if the configuration is such that a predetermined value is stored in the stop flag even when it is determined that the value of the difference counter has exceeded 19,000 when not in a bonus, one possible configuration is to determine whether the stop flag is at the predetermined value after each game has ended, whether or not a bonus is in progress, and stop the game depending on the value of the stop flag.If the configuration is such that a predetermined value is not stored in the stop flag when it is determined that the value of the difference counter has exceeded 19,000 when not in a bonus, one possible configuration is to stop the game depending on whether the value of the difference counter has exceeded 19,000 after each game has ended when not in a bonus, without determining whether or not the stop flag is at the predetermined value.

The limit flag is not initialized by initializing the RWM when the power is turned on, but is cleared by initializing the RWM when the power is turned on and a setting change is made. The conditions for initializing the limit flag may include RWM initialization processing when the power is turned on in conjunction with the operation of the reset switch, RAM clear switch, or total score clear switch.

In the above-described embodiment, an example was described in which game progress is not stopped even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, but this is not limiting and game progress may not be stopped even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during an AT. However, as mentioned above, since it is possible to extend the end conditions of an AT (changing the number of AT executables by adding the number of games, etc.), game progress will not be stopped only in ATs in which the end conditions are not extended.

Note that when there are multiple prescribed numbers for starting play, there are cases where the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed with one of the prescribed numbers, and when the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed with one of the prescribed numbers, it cannot be said that the termination condition has changed, so game progress will not be stopped even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000. Specifically, when the prescribed numbers for starting play allow for betting three or two coins, the AT termination condition can be updated with three coins (the number of games at which the AT ends and the difference number can be updated), but the AT termination condition cannot be updated with two coins (the number of games at which the AT ends and the difference number cannot be updated), and when the difference counter reaches 19,000 during the AT, game progress will not be stopped until the AT termination condition is met.

This means that even if the AT is designed to look like a bonus, it will operate in the same way as a bonus, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game. It also increases the player's motivation to play and increase the number of balls won during the bonus.

In addition, if the progress of play is not stopped even when the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus or AT, lotteries advantageous to the player, such as AT lotteries or CZ lotteries, will not be executed during the bonus or AT play after the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000.

This will prevent players from becoming overly gambling-minded when it is certain that the game will stop.

Note that the above describes an embodiment in which a determination is made as to whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, and if it is determined that the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000, a predetermined value (for example, any value such as "1" or "255") is stored in a stop flag (stop flag storage area), and when the bonus ends, a determination is made as to whether the value of the stop flag is the predetermined value, and if so, the game progress is stopped; however, a stop flag need not be provided.

Specifically, if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, the value of the difference counter may not be updated during subsequent bonus play, and a stoppage process may be executed based on the difference counter determination process after the bonus ends. For example, if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus (e.g., 19001), the difference counter may not be updated during subsequent play, and the value of the difference counter at the end of the bonus may be set to exceed 19,000.

<Initializing the difference counter>
In the above-described embodiment, when the value of the difference counter is initialized at power-on, the initial value is set to 0 if the counter is an additive type and 19,000 if the counter is a subtractive type. However, this is not limited to this, and any value may be used as the initial value.

For example, if the difference counter is a 2-byte counter, it can count from 0 to 65,535. If gameplay is to be stopped when the difference since power-on exceeds 19,000, the difference counter must be able to count up to 19,000, so its initial value is set to 46,535 (65,535 - 19,000). In this case, gameplay will be stopped when the difference counter exceeds 65,535, so it is easy to determine whether the difference since power-on has exceeded 19,000 based on whether the carry flag stores a 1 or a 0. The carry flag also stores a 1 even when it falls below 0. However, since the theoretical maximum number of medals that can be inserted in a day is around 30,000, as mentioned above, there is a sufficient margin of 16,535 (46,535 - 30,000). In reality, since small wins and replay wins mean that the number of medals rarely decreases by 30,000 in a day, the probability of it falling below 0 is extremely low.

By configuring it in this way, the process of updating the difference counter can be simplified and the program size can be reduced.

Also, for example, as mentioned above, if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus, game progress may be stopped at the end of the bonus. In such a case, if the difference counter can only count up to 19,000, the increase during the bonus cannot be counted. Therefore, if the difference counter is a 2-byte counter, the initial value may be set to a value smaller than 46,535. A value smaller than 46,535 could be considered, for example, 40,000. In this case, there is room to win up to a maximum of 6,535 coins after the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, so even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the bonus, the difference can continue to be counted until the bonus ends. Furthermore, even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the AT, the AT can only win up to a maximum of 2,414 coins due to its advantageous zone. Therefore, even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the AT, the difference can continue to be counted until the AT ends. When the initial value of the difference counter is 40,000, determining whether the difference exceeds 19,000 can be determined by whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 59,000. Additionally, if the value of the difference counter exceeds 59,000, it will determine whether the game is currently in a bonus mode, and if so, the game will continue until the bonus mode ends.

Although we have given an example in which the initial value of the difference counter is a value smaller than 46,535, it is preferable to set the initial value to a value (32,767 or greater) greater than half the maximum value (65,535) that can be counted using two bytes. This is because when gaming machines are set to a value that indicates the smallest payout rate (for example, set value 1), the payout rate is often designed to be below 100%, making it more likely that the difference will decrease rather than increase. For this reason, by setting the initial value of the difference counter to a value greater than half the maximum value that can be counted, the possibility of the difference counter value becoming 0 can be reduced, making it easier to achieve normal operation in the market.

It is also possible that the difference counter does not count the difference correctly when it exceeds 19,000. In this case, even if the initial value of the difference counter is 46,535, gameplay will not be stopped even if the difference exceeds 19,000 during a bonus. In this case, if the difference counter exceeds 65,535 (when it is determined that it has exceeded 65,535, or when it is determined that 1 has been stored in the carry flag), a predetermined value is stored in the stop flag, and whether or not to stop gameplay is determined based on whether the stop flag for each game is set to the predetermined value. In this way, if the difference exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, the difference counter will exceed 65,535 and start counting from 0, but because the determination of whether or not to stop gameplay is based on the stop flag, normal operation can be achieved overall, even though the value of the difference counter is not normal.

In the above explanation, the difference counter subtracts the number of medals inserted and adds the number of medals paid out, but it may also be configured to add the number of medals inserted and subtract the number of medals paid out. In this case, the initial value of the difference counter may be set to 19,000, or a value between 19,000 and 32,766 inclusive.

Although the difference counter was explained as a 2-byte counter, it can also be a 3-byte or 4-byte counter. If the difference counter is a 3-byte counter, the initial value can be set to 16758215 so that the carry flag will be set to 1 when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins. Furthermore, by making it 3 bytes or more, even if there are gaming parlors that do not turn off the power to their gaming machines, and the payout rate is always set to a value below 100%, and 10,000 games are played every day, the difference counter will not fall below 0 for several years, further reducing the possibility of malfunctions in the market.

<Regarding external signal output based on the value of the difference counter>
When the value of the difference counter is updated in the stop monitoring process and reaches a specific value (18,900 in this embodiment) that is just before the predetermined value (19,000 in this embodiment) at which the stop process is executed, a process is executed to output a test interrupt request signal to the test IF board.

This allows the gaming machine test to be interrupted before the machine reaches a dead end and game progress halts. When the test is interrupted, the tester can turn the power off and then back on to initialize the difference counter value, allowing the gaming machine test to continue until the difference counter value exceeds 19,000 again. In other words, by turning the power off and back on when the difference counter value is 18,900, it is possible to prevent game progress from halting until the difference counter value effectively exceeds 37,900, allowing for stable testing.

Note that the specific value just before the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed (19,000 in this embodiment) is set to 18,900, but this is not limiting and any value between 9,500, which is half the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed, and 18,985, which is the value at which the stop processing is not executed even if the maximum payout number is reached, can be set as the specific value (for example, 18,500).

In addition, in this embodiment, processing was performed to output a test interruption request signal to interrupt the test, but any signal may be output as long as it is conveyed to the tester. As a result, the signal output to the test IF board when a specific value is reached just before the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed may be referred to as a predetermined signal (predetermined test signal), and the processing for outputting to the test IF board may be referred to as processing for outputting a predetermined signal (predetermined test signal).

<Regarding processing by the sub-control means based on the value of the difference counter>
The main control means is configured to be able to transmit information based on the value of the difference counter to the sub-control means, thereby making it possible to notify the player before the progress of the game is stopped.

For example, if the remaining number of coins exceeds 19,000 with a difference of 100 coins, the LCD display may display "100 coins remaining," and an ending effect or sound may be played. Then, as the difference is updated and decreases, the remaining difference display may be updated to "90 coins remaining," "85 coins remaining," etc. When the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, a congratulatory display such as "Complete" or "Congratulations" may be played, or sound may be played, giving the player a sense of accomplishment. A state in which such a sub-control means displays the remaining number of coins until the end of the game, plays an ending effect, or sounds, or a state in which the remaining number of coins until the end of the game is not displayed but an ending effect or sound related to the end of the game is played, is referred to as an operation advance notification state (related to the end of the game). Note that the operation advance notification state is a state related to the sub-control means.

By doing this, the game goal can be set to stop when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, increasing the excitement of the game.

For example, if the remaining difference is 100 and the total exceeds 19,000, and the LCD display shows "100 remaining," if the remaining difference increases and exceeds 100, the remaining difference display can be erased (hide). When the remaining difference again reaches 100, the LCD display will show "100 remaining."

By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to the difference continuing to fall below the target and the remaining difference display not disappearing.

For example, if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus and game progress is not stopped until the bonus ends, once the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the bonus and a congratulatory display is displayed, the congratulatory display will not be erased even if the difference falls below 19,000 coins. Furthermore, the congratulatory display will continue to be displayed until the bonus ends.

By doing this, the player's sense of accomplishment will not be hindered by the disappearance of the congratulatory display, and a decrease in interest in the game will be prevented.

The ending performance or sound may be a continuous performance with a storyline, or a still image. Even in this case, the ending performance or sound can be terminated when the remaining difference falls below the threshold that triggers the execution of the ending performance or sound, so that the ending performance or sound is not executed more than necessary.

In addition, if a celebratory effect is suddenly displayed and play stops when the difference reaches 19,000 coins, this may discourage players who are unaware of the existence of the stop process, which could reduce their motivation to continue playing. Therefore, a notification regarding the stop process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "The game will end at 19,000 coins") may be made when the power is turned on or during play, or a notification regarding the stop process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "The game will end at 19,000 coins") may be made on a demo screen or menu screen.

<Performance in the operation advance notice state>
The display mode on the display device in the activation notification state may be as shown in Fig. 54. In Fig. 54, the effect images in the normal state (which is neither an activation notification state nor a stop state and includes various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means) include a lion and girl character display, a heart effect display, a line display such as "Today was fun," and a total winning number display such as "TOTAL: 18,000 coins." In addition to the effect images displayed in the normal state, the effect images in the activation notification state (which is neither an activation notification state nor a stop state and includes various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means) include a remaining difference display such as "The complete function will be activated soon. 100 coins remaining until activation." Furthermore, as the effect image in the limit notification state (a state in which the progress of the game has stopped), the effect image displayed in the normal state and the activation notice state is not displayed, and instead, a black background and a limit notification (notification regarding the limit processing, limit notification) saying "The complete function has been activated" are displayed. Note that the total number of wins display in the normal state does not need to be displayed all the time, but is displayed when the total number of wins exceeds a predetermined threshold (for example, 18,000 shown in FIG. 54, or 18,900, which is the value at which a test interrupt request signal is sent to the test IF board).

In the activation notification state, the remaining difference display obscures the entire display of the total number of wins, part of the girl character display, and all of the effect display. However, because the display area of the remaining difference display is smaller than 50% of the full screen display area, the player can generally see the effect image being executed. Note that in Figure 54, the transparency (transparency) of the remaining difference display is set to 0%, so the display of layers behind the remaining difference display cannot be seen, but the transparency of the remaining difference display can be set to any value between 10% and 90%. This makes it possible to see both the remaining difference display and the effect image.

In addition, while the remaining difference display in the activation notification state is displayed at the top of the display area of the display device, this is not limited to this, and the remaining difference display may also be displayed at the bottom or center of the display area of the display device. However, if displayed at the bottom or center, there is a possibility that it will overlap with the display area of various information displays (number of game medals displayed, number of awarded medals displayed, or number of bets displayed) not shown, and most of the effect images. Therefore, by setting the transparency of the remaining difference display to any value between 20% and 90%, the player can view the various information displays and effect images.

In addition, when any of the AT termination conditions (for example, the number of AT plays, the difference in the AT, or the number of AT navigation plays) are met in the activation notification state, the addiction prevention display is displayed in priority over the remaining difference display. This allows the player to see the addiction prevention display before the remaining difference display, effectively preventing addiction to the game.

Also, contrary to the above-described embodiment, when any of the AT termination conditions (for example, the number of AT execution games, the difference in the AT, or the number of AT navigations) are met in the activation advance notification state, the remaining difference display may be displayed in priority over the addiction prevention display. This allows the player to quickly visually confirm the remaining difference until the game is stopped.

In addition, when any of the AT termination conditions (for example, the number of AT execution games, the difference during the AT, or the number of AT navigations) are met in the activation notification state, the remaining difference display and the anti-addiction display may be displayed in different display areas. This allows the player to view both pieces of information. In this case, if the display area for the remaining difference display and the anti-addiction display are configured to be displayed in overlapping display areas, the display area for the anti-addiction display may be changed, or the display area for the remaining difference display may be changed. Furthermore, the display areas for the remaining difference display and the anti-addiction display may be predetermined to be non-overlapping display areas even when displayed simultaneously.

In addition, when the total score threshold is reached or the total score upper limit is abnormal, a notification (counting switch prompt display) is displayed to encourage counting. Therefore, when the total score threshold is reached or the total score upper limit is abnormal during the operation advance notification state, both the remaining difference display and the counting switch prompt display are displayed. This allows the player to be aware of both the remaining difference display and the need to operate the counting switch.

Also, when the total score threshold is reached or the total score upper limit is abnormal during the activation notification state, the counting switch prompt display may be displayed in priority over the remaining difference display. In this case, if the counting switch is operated while the counting switch prompt display is displayed and the total score falls below the threshold (15,000 in this embodiment), the remaining difference display will be displayed. This allows the total score threshold reached state to be canceled by quickly operating the counting switch, and the player can then become aware of the remaining difference display.

Furthermore, when the total score threshold is reached or the total score upper limit is abnormal during the activation notification state, the remaining difference display may be displayed in priority over the count switch prompt display. This can provide a sense of satisfaction to players who want to prioritize knowing the remaining difference.

<Effects in the end notification state>
In the limit notification state, the lion and girl character displays, the effect display, the dialogue display, and the total number of wins display are all invisible. Also, a limit display is displayed instead of the remaining difference display. In Figure 54, the limit display is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device, but no effect image is displayed (the transparency of the limit display is 0%), so it may be displayed anywhere in the display area, including the top or bottom.

In addition, the limit display in the limit notification state may occupy 50% or more of the display area of the entire screen. However, when other information is displayed (such as a display indicating that the menu screen can be displayed by operating a sub-switch or a warning display), it is desirable that the limit display in the limit notification state be any value between 50% and 90% of the display area of the entire screen.

In the game end notification state in Figure 54, no congratulatory display is displayed, but a congratulatory display using a character may be displayed instead of a black background image. However, even when the congratulatory display is displayed, the in-game effect image is not displayed.

In addition, when a limit notification state is reached during an AT (when any of the AT end conditions (e.g., the number of AT plays, the difference in the AT, or the number of AT navigations) are not met but the limit conditions are met), and a limit display is displayed, an addiction prevention display may be displayed. This prevents the addiction prevention display that would normally be displayed on the AT end screen from not being displayed. The addiction prevention display at this time may be the same display format and display time as when it is displayed on the AT end screen, or it may be a different display format and display time than when it is displayed on the AT end screen. In addition, the display area of the addiction prevention display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display area of the limit display, but if the addiction prevention display is configured to be hidden (not made visible) after a predetermined time, the display area of the addiction prevention display and the display area of the limit display may overlap.

In addition, contrary to the above-described embodiment, when a stop notification state is reached during an AT (when any of the AT termination conditions (for example, the number of AT execution games, the difference in number during the AT, or the number of AT navigations) are not met but the stop condition is met), and the stop display is displayed, the addiction prevention display does not need to be displayed. This allows the player to quickly recognize that the stop display has been reached, without reducing the visibility of the stop display.

In addition, even if a stop notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT's termination conditions (for example, the number of AT execution games, the difference in number during the AT, or the number of AT navigations) are not met but the stop conditions are met), and the addiction prevention display is not displayed when the stop indication is displayed, if any of the AT's termination conditions are met and the stop conditions are also met (when any of the AT's termination conditions and the stop conditions are met simultaneously), the addiction prevention display may be displayed when the stop indication is displayed. This allows the player to recognize that the AT has ended even when the stop state is reached, giving them a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, when a stop notification state is reached during an AT (when any of the AT's termination conditions (for example, the number of AT execution games, the difference in number during the AT, or the number of AT navigations) are not met but the stop conditions are met), the addiction prevention display is not displayed when the stop indication is displayed. Even when any of the AT's termination conditions are met and the stop conditions are also met (when any of the AT's termination conditions and the stop conditions are met simultaneously), the addiction prevention display may not be displayed when the stop indication is displayed. This allows the player to quickly recognize that the stop state has been reached, without reducing the visibility of the stop indication.

In addition, when the total score threshold is reached or an abnormality occurs in the total score upper limit, a notification (counting switch prompt display) is displayed to encourage counting. When the total score threshold is reached or the total score upper limit is abnormal, and the stop condition is met, both the counting switch prompt display and the stop display are displayed. This allows the player to recognize both that the stop state has occurred and that the counting switch should be operated.

In addition, when the total score threshold has been reached or the total score upper limit is abnormal and the stop condition is met, the counting switch prompting display may be displayed in priority over the stop display. In this case, if the counting switch is operated while the counting switch prompting display is being displayed and the total score falls below the threshold (15,000 in this embodiment), the stop display will be displayed. This allows the total score threshold reached state to be canceled by quickly operating the counting switch, and the player can then recognize that they have reached the stop state.

Furthermore, when the stop condition is met in the total score threshold reached state or in the total score upper limit abnormality, if the counting switch prompting display is displayed in priority over the stop display, the counting switch prompting display may continue to be displayed even after the counting switch is operated while the counting switch prompting display is being displayed and the total score falls below the threshold (15,000 in this embodiment). For example, the counting switch prompting display may continue to be displayed until the counting switch is operated and the total score becomes 0. Then, after the total score becomes 0, the stop display is displayed. This notifies the player to operate the counting switch (to count all the total score) and allows them to recognize that the game has been stopped. Note that if the counting switch is operated and the total score falls below the threshold, and the counting process stops when the counting switch is released before the total score becomes 0, the display of the counting switch prompting display may end and the stop display may be displayed, or the counting switch prompting display may continue to be displayed.

In addition, when the stop condition is met when the total score threshold is reached or when there is an abnormal total score upper limit, the stop display may be displayed in priority over the counting switch prompt display. Since the counting switch prompt display is displayed as a warning display when the stop display is active (described below), the counting switch prompt display for the stop display will be displayed even if the counting switch prompt display for the total score threshold is reached or when there is an abnormal total score upper limit is not displayed, thereby preventing the player from being confused by the same information being displayed twice.

<Regarding the processing of the main control means or sub-control means during the termination processing>
When the main control means executes the stop processing, the sub-control means notifies the player that the progress of the game has stopped (stop notification).

In addition to the congratulatory display described above, the end-of-game notification may also include the display or sound of "The complete function has been activated," "The end-of-game state has been reached," or "The game has ended," as shown in Figure 54. The end-of-game notification may be displayed simultaneously with the congratulatory display, or the congratulatory display may be displayed and then ended, and the end-of-game notification or sound may be executed. Furthermore, along with the end-of-game notification, a warning display (various switch prompt displays) or sound, such as "Please press the settlement switch" or "Please press the counting switch," may also be executed.

To notify the user of the limit, the limit process may be executed before the congratulatory display is executed and the congratulatory display may be displayed during the limit process, or a freeze may be executed for a predetermined period before the limit process is executed, the congratulatory display may be displayed during the predetermined period, and the limit display may be displayed when the limit process is executed after the predetermined period.

In addition, when a stop display is displayed after a blessing display, the warning display will not be displayed while the blessing display is being displayed, but will be displayed when the stop display is displayed.

This prevents players from forgetting to operate the settlement switch or counting switch, and does not hinder the sense of accomplishment that comes from displaying the celebration, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, during the limit notification, sounds such as background music other than the limit text audio such as "The limit has been reached" and the warning audio such as "Please press the settlement switch" and "Please press the counting switch" are not output, and silence remains.In addition, during the limit notification, sounds such as background music other than the limit text audio such as "The limit has been reached" and the warning audio such as "Please press the settlement switch" and "Please press the counting switch" may be output at a volume lower than the volume during error notification.

By configuring it in this way, players are less likely to have a negative impression of a dead end, and are more likely to recognize it as something to aim for, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

In addition, the functions of the sub-switches managed by the sub-control means are enabled during the end notification. For this reason, even during the end processing (end notification), it is possible to open the menu screen or volume change screen by operating the sub-switch. Note that the volume that can be changed from the volume change screen does not include the volume related to the end notification, so it is not possible to change the volume during the end notification.

In addition, by opening a menu screen during the limit-play process and displaying a two-dimensional code including the game history, a service (a so-called "game machine linked service") can be provided to the player in which the game history is read by a mobile device and saved on a server. Note that since the limit-play display is displayed on the display device, when the two-dimensional code is displayed from the menu screen except during a limit-play notification, it is displayed in a specified area in the center of the display device's screen. However, since the specified area overlaps with the limit-play display during a limit-play notification, the display area for the two-dimensional code during a limit-play notification is displayed in an area different from the specified area that does not overlap with the limit-play display.

As an alternative method for displaying the limit indication and the two-dimensional code, even if the display areas of the limit indication and the two-dimensional code overlap, the limit indication and the two-dimensional code may be displayed alternately, allowing the limit notification to be issued while the two-dimensional code can be read.

Furthermore, the stop notification will not end due to the passage of time during the stop processing. In other words, the stop notification will continue until the stop state is released (until a setting change process or RWM abnormality process is performed).

During the abort process, even if an event occurs that could result in one of the aforementioned recoverable errors, the system may be configured not to detect the error, or it may be configured to detect the error but not execute the specified error processing. In either case, the system is configured not to notify the user of the specified error.

As mentioned above, this is because the stop processing is looped during the stop processing, so even if a specified error is detected in the interrupt processing, the specified error processing within the main loop processing will not be executed. Note that if interrupt processing is prohibited during the stop processing, the specified error will not be detected.

This prevents the hassle of having to clear errors when gameplay cannot proceed by executing a game stop process, reducing the workload of game parlor staff.

Note that if the system is configured to execute a specified error process within an interrupt process, the specified error process will be executed even during a stop process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specified error process from being executed during a stop process by determining whether or not a stop process is in progress before executing the specified error process, and if so, not executing the specified error process. This can also be achieved by disabling interrupt processing during a stop process.

Furthermore, considering that fraud can be detected quickly by executing a specified error process even during the termination process, it may be possible to configure the system so that a specified error process can be executed during the termination process.

In this case, interrupt processing is permitted even during the termination processing, and when a specified error is detected during the interrupt processing, the specified error processing is executed within the interrupt processing and the specified error notification processing is performed, or when a specified error is detected during the termination processing, the specified error processing is executed during the specified error processing within the termination processing loop after the specified error is detected during the interrupt processing.

By doing this, fraudulent processing can be carried out even during the termination process, preventing fraudulent activity.

Note that communication with the rental unit continues even while the game-stopping process is being executed, and the rental unit is notified that the game-stopping process is being executed by outputting a security signal for gaming machine fraud 1 in the hall control/fraud monitoring information, and a complete signal. Security signals are signals output due to setting changes, setting confirmation, fraud detection, or game-stopping process.

Specifically, the security signal is Bit 5 of Gaming Machine Illegal Activity 1 (Main Control), which is included in the hall control and fraud monitoring information in the gaming machine information notification. When the play stop process is executed, Bit 6 of Gaming Machine Illegal Activity 1 (Main Control), which is the complete signal, becomes 1, and when Bit 6 of Gaming Machine Illegal Activity 1 (Main Control) becomes 1, Bit 5 of Gaming Machine Illegal Activity 1 (Main Control), which is the security signal, becomes 1.

By doing this, the amusement facility can be notified that the stop processing has been executed, allowing the amusement facility to take appropriate action.

The complete signal stops outputting (complete signal OFF) 30 seconds after play has stopped, but the output time of the complete signal is configured to be longer than the output interval of the hall control/fraud monitoring information x 2 (300 ms x 2 = 600 ms). This is because the complete signal is information included in gaming machine fraud 1 of the hall control/fraud monitoring information, and if the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information overlaps with the gaming machine installation information and gaming machine performance information, the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information will be delayed by up to 600 ms. If the output time of the complete signal were 300 ms, if the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information overlaps with the gaming machine installation information or gaming machine performance information, the hall control/fraud monitoring information could not be transmitted, and the complete signal may be OFF when it is time to transmit the hall control/fraud monitoring information again. To prevent this from happening, the output time of the complete signal is set to be longer than twice the output interval of the hall control and fraud monitoring information (300 ms x 2 = 600 ms). Also, if the complete signal is turned ON immediately after sending the hall control and fraud monitoring information, it may take nearly 1200 ms (300 ms x 4 times) for the complete signal to be sent to the lending unit, even if it is turned ON. Therefore, it is desirable for the output time of the complete signal to be 1200 ms or longer. The output time of the complete signal is also shorter than the output interval of the gaming machine performance information (180 seconds) and the output interval of the gaming machine installation information (60 seconds).

The output time of the complete signal is also set to be longer than the time from when the rental unit is powered on until it is able to receive the gaming machine information notification sent from the gaming machine. In other words, it takes less than 30 seconds from when the rental unit is powered on until it is able to receive the gaming machine information notification sent from the gaming machine. This is so that the complete signal can be output to the rental unit even if the start of the complete signal output and the rental unit are powered on at the same time. Note that if the gaming machine detects a VL abnormality and suspends the output of the complete signal because the rental unit is powered off, it is acceptable for the output time of the complete signal to be shorter than the time from when the rental unit is powered on until it is able to receive the gaming machine information notification sent from the gaming machine.

<Other configurations related to stop monitoring processing or stop processing>
The limit monitoring process and the limit process may be configured to be executed outside the use area. Also, the limit monitoring process may be configured to be executed outside the use area and the limit process may be executed within the use area, or the limit monitoring process and the limit process may be configured to be executed within the use area.

Furthermore, the stoppage monitoring process and stoppage process may be performed outside the use area of the main control board, or the stoppage monitoring process and stoppage process may be performed outside the use area of the gaming medal count control board.

It is configured to continue executing the process to output an external signal while the termination process is in progress.

This configuration allows an external notification that the game is being stopped, allowing the gaming center manager to quickly grasp the status of the gaming machine.

The end of the game notification may be not only by the LCD display or sound output from the speaker, but also by the lighting of various LEDs such as the frame lamp, lower panel lamp, number of coins acquired indicator, or credit indicator.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify players that a game has stopped even on gaming machines that do not have LCD screens.

<Processing for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media>
In the above-described embodiment, a gaming machine in which the advantageous zone ends when the MY of the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 has been mainly described.

Here, to elaborate on the MY of the advantageous zone, the point with the lowest number of balls dispensed since the start of the advantageous zone is set as the base (0), and the advantageous zone ends when the difference from that base exceeds "2400".

As a result, in a single advantageous period, a player could only receive a maximum profit of a difference of 2414. Therefore, if a player spent a lot of gaming media while playing in an advantageous period, they would not be able to recover the gaming media they had spent in that advantageous period, making it less appealing to players.

For example, even if a game where the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone (the number of gaming media spent by the player) is -3000 reaches a specified gaming state (such as AT state), the game ends if the MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, so the maximum number of gaming media that could be acquired in one advantageous zone was only approximately 2400 (the game ended when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone was approximately -600).

Therefore, rather than ending the advantageous zone when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the system is configured so that the start of the advantageous zone is set as the starting point (0), and the zone ends when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone (the difference between the total number of gaming media awarded in the advantageous zone and the total number of gaming media bet in the advantageous zone) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 2400).

Specifically, the total number of gaming media inputs in the advantageous zone (also referred to as the total number of inputs or total number of bets) and the total number of gaming media output in the advantageous zone (also referred to as the total number of payouts or total number of awards) are taken into consideration. In other words, the advantageous zone is configured to end when the difference between the number of gaming media output in the advantageous zone and the number of gaming media inputs in the advantageous zone (hereinafter referred to as the difference in gaming media in the advantageous zone) exceeds 2,400. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improved playability compared to conventional machines, while keeping gambling within a certain range.

For example, if a certain game state (e.g., AT state) is reached from a certain game where the difference in the gaming media in the advantageous zone is -3000, the advantageous zone can end when the difference in the gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, starting from the start of the advantageous zone. Therefore, from a game where the difference in the gaming media in the advantageous zone is -3000, it is possible to obtain a maximum of approximately 5400 gaming media (the difference in the gaming media in one advantageous zone will reach +2400, and the advantageous zone will end).

In addition, if the system is configured to end when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone (the difference between the total number of gaming media awarded in the advantageous zone and the total number of gaming media bet in the advantageous zone) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 2,400), it is acceptable to end the advantageous zone at a value less than this predetermined number. In other words, when the start of the advantageous zone is taken as the starting point (0), the maximum difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone will be a predetermined number (to be precise, the predetermined number + α (α is the maximum difference in the number of gaming media in one game)).

Furthermore, even if the advantageous zone is configured to end when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone exceeds a predetermined number, the advantageous zone can also be ended if any termination condition is met before the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone exceeds the predetermined number.

Below, we will use diagrams to explain the specific process for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media.

<<Processing to end the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media (addition version)>>
55 is a diagram showing an example of a process for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media. This process corresponds to a modified example of the advantageous zone clear counter management process of FIG. 46, FIG. 47, or FIG. 48.

In Figure 55, there is a favorable zone difference number counter. The favorable zone difference number counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone.

The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is not cleared when the power is turned on or off. The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is cleared when the RWM is cleared following the end of an advantageous zone. The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is cleared when the RWM is cleared following a setting change. The value is not cleared when the limit counter (difference counter) reaches a limit state.

Note that while the explanation will be given using an example in which the advantageous zone difference counter is composed of two bytes, the advantageous zone difference counter may also be composed of three bytes or four bytes.

First, "Favorable Zone Clear Counter -1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter. If subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter results in a value below 0 (if there is a borrow), the carry flag becomes 1. Also, if subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter does not result in a value below 0 (if there is no borrow), the carry flag becomes 0. Also, if subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter results in a value of 0, the zero flag becomes 1.

As mentioned above, the advantageous zone clear counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the number of plays in the advantageous zone.

The question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" returns NO if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter does not fall below 0. Specifically, the question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" returns NO if the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter for this game is 1 or greater. In other words, this means that this game is in an advantageous zone.

On the other hand, if the answer to "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is YES, it means that the current game is in the normal zone.

The question "Is the next game in an advantageous zone?" is determined based on the information in the RWM area stored in the main control board. For example, a transition to an advantageous zone may be decided in the current game (a game in the normal zone), and the determination may be made based on the information in the RWM area that stores information indicating a transition to an advantageous zone. Also, for example, if a transition to an advantageous zone is decided in the current game (a game in the normal zone) and the game state at the transition destination is also determined, the determination may be made based on the information in the RWM area that stores the game state at the transition destination. In any case, it is possible to determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone based on information that can determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone. If the next game is in an advantageous zone, the answer is YES, and if the next game is not in an advantageous zone, the answer is NO.

In "Saving the Initial Value of the Favorable Zone Clear Counter," an initial value is stored in an RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 is stored in an RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. Furthermore, if the initial value is 3000, 3000 is stored in an RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. This initial value corresponds to the maximum number of plays that can be played in one favorable zone. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 3000, and can be any predetermined value. For example, a number of plays that cannot be completed in one day (e.g., 65,535) can be set. This configuration allows for the use of a common program across gaming machines with a maximum number of plays in the favorable zone of 1500, a maximum number of plays in the favorable zone of 3,000, and a gaming machine with no set maximum number of plays in the favorable zone (65,535 is not the number of plays that can be played in one day, so it is effectively unlimited).

The "Set initial value of the favorable zone difference counter" function sets the initial value to be stored in the favorable zone difference counter in a register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 63135 (65535 - 2400) and stored in the HL register.

Here, the initial value of 63135 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "2400", which corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that ends the advantageous zone, from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area (corresponding to the size of the memory area for the advantageous zone difference number counter). Note that in this example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, but the condition for ending the advantageous zone is not limited to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 2400. For example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone can be set to a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 4800. If the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 4800, the initial value would be 60735 (65535 - 4800).

In addition, in this example, the advantageous zone difference counter is 2 bytes, but it can also be 3 bytes. If the advantageous zone difference counter is 3 bytes and the condition for ending the advantageous zone is when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the initial value should be 16774815 (16777215 - 2400).

The effect of setting the initial value to "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference number counter" minus "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone set as the end condition of the advantageous zone" will be discussed later.

"Before subtracting advantageous zone clear counter = 1?" determines whether the advantageous zone clear counter was 1 before "advantageous zone clear counter -1" was performed. For example, if "advantageous zone clear counter -1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter, and the result is 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 1), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if "advantageous zone clear counter -1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter, and the result is not 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 0), the answer is NO.

In addition, after "Before subtraction of advantageous zone clear counter = 1?" and before "When replay is activated?", the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is stored in a specified register (e.g., HL register).

For "Replay Activated?", if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a replay game), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is not a replay game), the answer is NO.

"IN number < OUT number?" determines whether the OUT number is greater than the IN number.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 0, the result is determined to be NO.
a) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 1, the answer is NO.
c) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 3, the answer is determined to be NO.
d) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the IN number minus the OUT number is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, register A). Furthermore, if there is a borrow as a result of the IN number minus OUT number calculation (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES; if there is no borrow (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the OUT number, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the OUT number, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, the results of this game:
a) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the A register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 3, the A register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
d) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register will be 249 and the carry flag will be 1.

Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) as a result of the previous game, the bet number for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) as a result of the current game, then even if the bet number was set by the automatic bet, it will be treated as the IN number for the current game.

On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game using a replay), the IN number and OUT number will not be judged as "IN number < OUT number?" In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game using a replay), the number of bets for the current game will not be treated as the IN number. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game using a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game will not be treated as the OUT number.

Note that in the "IN number < OUT number?" test, we calculated the IN number - OUT number, but it is also possible to make a determination by calculating the OUT number - IN number. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game using the IN number and OUT number.

In "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the value of the calculation result (IN number - OUT number) of "IN number < OUT number?" is subtracted from the value of the advantageous section difference number counter stored in a specified register (for example, HL register). Note that if a carry is caused by "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the carry flag becomes 1.
For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (value of the HL register) is 2,
A) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the HL register is 65535 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 2-3 = -1, but registers cannot store negative values. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in 65535.
a) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the HL register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.

When "favorable zone difference number counter < 0", "favorable zone difference number counter subtraction" determines whether a borrow has occurred. If a borrow has occurred, a YES result is determined, and if a borrow has not occurred, a NO result is determined. In the above example, when the value stored in the favorable zone difference number counter is 2, a) a YES result is determined if IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0. Also in the above example, when the value stored in the favorable zone difference number counter is 2, b) a NO result is determined if IN number = 3 and OUT number = 1. Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the favorable zone difference number counter is 2, a NO result is determined if IN number = 3 and OUT number = 3.

If the "favourable section difference counter < 0" returns YES, the carry flag is set to 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is to perform an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the specified calculation is an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

When a borrow occurs due to "advantageous interval difference counter subtraction," "Set lower limit value of favorable interval difference counter" stores a predetermined lower limit value (0) in the register that stores the calculation result (HL register in this embodiment). In the above example, when the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter is 2, if a) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, "Advantageous interval difference counter subtraction" causes the HL register to equal 65535. In such a case, "Set lower limit value of favorable interval difference counter" stores 0 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carryover occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register makes it possible to calculate the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone as accurately as possible. Even when "Set advantageous zone difference number counter lower limit value" is executed, the advantageous zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the advantageous zone. In other words, even in play after "Set advantageous zone difference number counter lower limit value" is executed, the processing in FIG. 55 is executed as long as the advantageous zone continues.

Note that while Figure 55 includes a "Set Lower Limit Value of Favorable Zone Difference Counter" process, it is not necessary to include this process. Specifically, if a YES determination is made based on "Favorable Zone Difference Counter < 0," the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game may be used. For example, if the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is 2 and the IN number and OUT number for the game are a) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter may be 2 (the same value as the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game). This configuration prevents abnormal values (values with borrowed digits) from being stored in the "Favorable Zone Difference Counter." Furthermore, because the process equivalent to "Set Lower Limit Value of Favorable Zone Difference Counter" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, if a downgrade occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction," the advantageous zone difference number counter is not updated using the value at the time of the downgrade, thereby preventing abnormal values from being entered as the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone becomes a negative value, the advantageous zone can be ended as accurately as possible using the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone.

In "Advantageous Zone Difference Counter Addition," the complement of the result of the calculation "IN Number < OUT Number?" (IN Number - OUT Number) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then added to the HL register.

Note that the complement in "advantageous section difference counter addition" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or by using a single instruction (NEG instruction) to derive the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register is 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by calculating 2 + 7, 9 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 2 + 7 does not exceed 65535 (there is no carry), the carry flag is 0.

Also, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (value of the HL register) is 65530,
D) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register is 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, the complement of 249. Next, by calculating 65530 + 7, 2 is stored in the HL register. Note that 65530 + 7 is 65537, but since this is greater than 65535 (because there is a carry), 2 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is a carry, the carry flag is set to 1.

"Save advantageous zone difference counter" stores the value stored in the HL register in the advantageous zone difference counter. In other words, this is a process that updates the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if 63135 is stored in the HL register by "Set favorable zone difference counter initial value," then 63135 is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, if "Replay Activated" returns YES, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter from the previous play is stored in the HL register, so "Save Advantageous Zone Difference Counter" stores the same value as the advantageous zone difference counter from the previous play in the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Advantageous Zone Difference Counter < 0?" is NO, the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game (IN number - OUT number) from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so "Save Advantageous Zone Difference Counter" stores the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game in the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is favorable zone difference counter < 0?" is YES, the lower limit value (0) is stored in the HL register, so the lower limit value (0) is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, after "adding the advantageous zone difference number counter," the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of media for the current game (OUT number - IN number) from the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so by "saving the advantageous zone difference number counter," the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter.

"Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" determines whether the difference in the gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. Specifically, it determines whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it determines YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it determines NO. Note that a carry flag of 1 occurs when a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter addition." On the other hand, if a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction," the carry flag will temporarily become 1, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" determines whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. This allows for a smaller program capacity compared to directly comparing the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone with a constant (2400).

In this way, "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1, so the "Advantageous Zone Difference Number Counter Initial Value Set" stores 63135 as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 63135 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "2400", which corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone, from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area (corresponding to the size of the memory area for the favorable zone difference number counter). In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone exceeds 2400, it will exceed 65535, and the carry flag will be set to 1.

Furthermore, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -63135 as the difference in gaming media, with the start of the advantageous period as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 63135, a situation in which the value of the advantageous period difference counter is 13135 means that the difference is -50000, with the start of the advantageous period as the starting point (0).

As described above, by storing 63135 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference number counter" minus "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone set as the end condition of the advantageous zone," it is possible to reduce the program capacity required to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone has exceeded 2,400. Furthermore, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to -63135 as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone. While an example is given of storing 63135 as the initial value, values other than 63135 can also be used as the initial value as long as they have the same effect.

"RWM initialization" updates all parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function to 0 and ends the advantageous zone clear counter management process. Parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function include the number of AT games, the game status related to the AT, the advantageous zone clear counter, the advantageous zone difference counter, etc. By updating the advantageous zone type to 0, the next game will be played in a normal zone that is not an advantageous zone. When playing in an advantageous zone, if "RWM initialization" is not executed, the next game will be played in an advantageous zone (the advantageous zone will not end).

In other words, if an abnormal value is stored in the HL register due to borrowing, storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register makes it possible to calculate the difference number of the advantageous zone as accurately as possible. Even when "Set advantageous zone difference number counter lower limit value" is executed, the advantageous zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the advantageous zone. In other words, even in play after "Set advantageous zone difference number counter lower limit value" is executed, the processing in FIG. 55 is executed as long as the advantageous zone continues.

Note that in "Is IN number < OUT number?", the OUT number is subtracted from the IN number, but it may also be configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number. If configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number, when "Is IN number < OUT number?" returns NO (when a borrow occurs in the A register), the "favourable zone difference number counter subtraction" calculates the complement using a predetermined calculation and stores it in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium for the current game), and then subtracts the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium for the current game) from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the favourable zone difference number counter). In other words, when "Is IN number < OUT number?" returns NO, it is sufficient to configure the system to subtract the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming medium for the current game from the value stored in the favourable zone difference number counter.

Similarly, if the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number when "IN number < OUT number?" is configured, then when "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as YES (when no borrowing occurs in the A register), the "advantageous interval difference number counter addition" simply adds the value stored in the A register (the difference number of gaming media for the current game) from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous interval difference number counter) without calculating the complement. In other words, when "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as NO, the absolute value of the difference number of gaming media for the current game is added from the value stored in the advantageous interval difference number counter.

<Processing to end the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media (subtraction version)>
56 is a diagram showing an example of a process for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media. This process corresponds to a modified example of the advantageous zone clear counter management process of FIG. 46, FIG. 47, or FIG. 48.

In Figure 56, there is a favorable zone difference number counter. The favorable zone difference number counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone.

The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is not cleared when the power is turned on or off. The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is cleared when the RWM is cleared following the end of an advantageous zone. The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is cleared when the RWM is cleared following a setting change. The value is not cleared when the limit counter reaches a limit state.

Note that while the explanation will be given using an example in which the advantageous zone difference counter is composed of two bytes, the advantageous zone difference counter may also be composed of three bytes or four bytes.

First, "Favorable Zone Clear Counter -1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter. If subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter results in a value below 0 (if there is a borrow), the carry flag becomes 1. Also, if subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter does not result in a value below 0 (if there is no borrow), the carry flag becomes 0. Also, if subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter results in a value of 0, the zero flag becomes 1.

As mentioned above, the advantageous zone clear counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the number of plays in the advantageous zone.

The question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" returns NO if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter does not fall below 0. Specifically, the question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" returns NO if the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter for this game is 1 or greater. In other words, this means that this game is in an advantageous zone.

On the other hand, if the answer to "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is YES, it means that the current game is in the normal zone.

The question "Is the next game in an advantageous zone?" is determined based on the information in the RWM area stored in the main control board. For example, a transition to an advantageous zone may be decided in the current game (a game in the normal zone), and the determination may be made based on the information in the RWM area that stores information indicating a transition to an advantageous zone. Also, for example, if a transition to an advantageous zone is decided in the current game (a game in the normal zone) and the game state at the transition destination is also determined, the determination may be made based on the information in the RWM area that stores the game state at the transition destination. In any case, it is possible to determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone based on information that can determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone. If the next game is in an advantageous zone, the answer is YES, and if the next game is not in an advantageous zone, the answer is NO.

In "Saving the Initial Value of the Favorable Zone Clear Counter," an initial value is stored in an RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 is stored in an RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. Furthermore, if the initial value is 3000, 3000 is stored in an RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. This initial value corresponds to the maximum number of plays that can be played in one favorable zone. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 3000, and can be any predetermined value. For example, a number of plays that cannot be completed in one day (e.g., 65,535) can be set. This configuration allows for the use of a common program across gaming machines with a maximum number of plays in the favorable zone of 1500, a maximum number of plays in the favorable zone of 3,000, and a gaming machine with no set maximum number of plays in the favorable zone (65,535 is not the number of plays that can be played in one day, so it is effectively unlimited).

In "Set initial value of favorable zone difference counter," the initial value to be stored in the favorable zone difference counter is set in a register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 2400 and stored in the HL register.

Here, the initial value of 2400 is the value "2400" that corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that ends the advantageous zone. Note that in this example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, but the condition for ending the advantageous zone is not limited to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 2400. For example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone can be set to a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 4800. If the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 4800, then the initial value would be 4800.

In addition, in this example, the advantageous zone difference number counter is 2 bytes, but it can also be 3 bytes. If the advantageous zone difference number counter is 3 bytes and the condition for ending the advantageous zone is when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the initial value will be 2400.

The effect of setting the initial value to "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone, which is set as the end condition for the advantageous zone," will be discussed later.

"Before subtracting advantageous zone clear counter = 1?" determines whether the advantageous zone clear counter was 1 before "advantageous zone clear counter -1" was performed. For example, if "advantageous zone clear counter -1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter, and the result is 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 1), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if "advantageous zone clear counter -1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter, and the result is not 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 0), the answer is NO.

In addition, after "Before subtraction of advantageous zone clear counter = 1?" and before "When replay is activated?", the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is stored in a specified register (e.g., HL register).

For "Replay Activated?", if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a replay game), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is not a replay game), the answer is NO.

"IN number < OUT number?" determines whether the OUT number is greater than the IN number.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 0, the result is determined to be NO.
a) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 1, the answer is NO.
c) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 3, the answer is determined to be NO.
d) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the IN number minus the OUT number is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, register A). Furthermore, if there is a borrow as a result of the IN number minus OUT number calculation (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES; if there is no borrow (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the OUT number, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the OUT number, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, the results of this game:
a) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the A register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 3, the A register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
d) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register will be 249 and the carry flag will be 1.

Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) as a result of the previous game, the bet number for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) as a result of the current game, then even if the bet number was set by the automatic bet, it will be treated as the IN number for the current game.

On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game using a replay), the IN number and OUT number will not be judged as "IN number < OUT number?" In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game using a replay), the number of bets for the current game will not be treated as the IN number. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game using a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game will not be treated as the OUT number.

Note that in the "IN number < OUT number?" test, we calculated the IN number - OUT number, but it is also possible to make a determination by calculating the OUT number - IN number. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game using the IN number and OUT number.

In "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the value of the advantageous section difference number counter stored in a specified register (for example, the HL register) is added to the value of the calculation result (IN number - OUT number) of "IN number < OUT number?". Note that if a carry occurs as a result of "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the carry flag becomes 1.
For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter (value of the HL register) is 65534,
A) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the HL register is 1 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 65534 + 3 = 65537, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store values greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in a value of 1.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 65534 + 2 = 65536, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store a value greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in 0.
c) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the HL register value is 65534 and the carry flag is 0.

When "Advantageous Zone Difference Counter > Upper Limit Value", "Advantageous Zone Difference Counter Addition" determines whether a carry has occurred. If a carry has occurred, it is judged as YES, and if a carry has not occurred, it is judged as NO. In the above example, when the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is 65534, a) if the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, it is judged as YES. Also in the above example, when the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is 65534, b) if the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 1, it is judged as YES. Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is 65534, c) if the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 3, it is judged as NO.

If the answer to "Is the advantageous section difference counter > upper limit?" is YES, the carry flag is set to 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is to perform an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the specified calculation is an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

When a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter upper limit value set," a predetermined upper limit value (65535) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (in this embodiment, the HL register). In the above example, when the value stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter is 65534, if a) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, the HL register = 1 due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction." In such a case, 65535 is stored in the HL register by "advantageous zone difference number counter upper limit value set."

In other words, if a carry occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, storing the upper limit value of 65535 in the HL register makes it possible to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone as accurately as possible. Even when "Set upper limit value of advantageous zone difference counter" is executed, the advantageous zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the advantageous zone. In other words, even in play after "Set upper limit value of advantageous zone difference counter" is executed, the processing in FIG. 56 is executed as long as the advantageous zone continues.

Note that while Figure 56 includes the "Set upper limit value of favorable zone difference counter" process, it is not necessary to include the "Set upper limit value of favorable zone difference counter." Specifically, if a YES determination is made based on "Favorable zone difference counter > upper limit value," the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game may be used. For example, if the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is 65534 and the IN number and OUT number for the game are a) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter may be 65534 (the same value as the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game). This configuration prevents abnormal values (values with borrowed digits) from being stored in the "Favorable zone difference counter." Furthermore, because the process equivalent to "Set upper limit value of favorable zone difference counter" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, if a carry occurs due to the "advantageous zone difference number counter addition," the value at the time of the carry is not used to update the advantageous zone difference number counter, thereby preventing abnormal values from being entered as the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone becomes a negative value, the advantageous zone can be ended as accurately as possible using the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone.

In "Advantageous Zone Difference Counter Subtraction," the complement of the result of the calculation "IN Number < OUT Number?" (IN Number - OUT Number) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then subtracted from the HL register.

Note that the complement in "advantageous interval difference counter subtraction" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived by subtracting the value of the 0-A register, or by using a single instruction (NEG instruction) to derive the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register is 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter subtraction" first derives 7, the complement of 249. Next, by calculating 2-7, 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 2-7 is less than 0 (because there is a carryover), the carry flag is set to 1.

Also, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (value of the HL register) is 10,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register will be 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by calculating 10-7, 3 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 10-7 does not go below 0 (there is no borrowing), the carry flag will be 0.

"Save advantageous zone difference counter" stores the value stored in the HL register in the advantageous zone difference counter. In other words, this is a process that updates the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if 2400 is stored in the HL register by "Set favorable zone difference counter initial value," then 2400 is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, if "Replay Activated" returns YES, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter from the previous play is stored in the HL register, so "Save Advantageous Zone Difference Counter" stores the same value as the advantageous zone difference counter from the previous play in the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is advantageous zone difference counter > upper limit?" is NO, the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game (IN number - OUT number) from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so "Save advantageous zone difference counter" stores the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game in the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is the advantageous zone difference counter > upper limit?" is YES, the upper limit (65535) is stored in the HL register, so the "Save advantageous zone difference counter" command stores the upper limit (65535) in the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, after "subtracting the advantageous zone difference counter," the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game (OUT number - IN number) from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so by "saving the advantageous zone difference counter," the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the advantageous zone difference counter.

"Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" determines whether the difference in the gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. Specifically, it determines whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it determines YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it determines NO. Note that a carry flag of 1 occurs when a carry is made by "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction." On the other hand, if a carry is made by "advantageous zone difference number counter addition," the carry flag will temporarily become 1, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" determines whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. This allows for a smaller program capacity compared to directly comparing the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone with a constant (2400).

In this way, "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1, so the "Advantageous Zone Difference Number Counter Initial Value Set" stores 2400 as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 2400 is the value "2400" that corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that ends the advantageous zone. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that ends the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, it will fall below 0, and the carry flag will become 1.

Furthermore, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -63135 as the difference in gaming media, with the start of the advantageous period as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 2400, a situation in which the value of the advantageous period difference counter is 30,000 means that the difference is -27,600, with the start of the advantageous period as the starting point (0).

As described above, by storing 2400 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone set as the end condition for the advantageous zone," it is possible to reduce the program capacity required to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone has exceeded 2400. Furthermore, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to the equivalent of -63135 as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone. While an example is given of storing 2400 as the initial value, values other than 2400 can also be used as the initial value as long as they have the same effect.

"RWM initialization" updates all parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function to 0 and ends the advantageous zone clear counter management process. Parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function include the number of AT games, the game status related to the AT, the advantageous zone clear counter, the advantageous zone difference counter, etc. By updating the advantageous zone type to 0, the next game will be played in a normal zone that is not an advantageous zone. When playing in an advantageous zone, if "RWM initialization" is not executed, the next game will be played in an advantageous zone (the advantageous zone will not end).

Note that while "IN number < OUT number?" subtracts the OUT number from the IN number, it may also be configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number. If configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number, when "IN number < OUT number?" returns NO (when a borrow occurs in the A register), "advantageous zone difference number counter addition" calculates the complement using a predetermined calculation and stores it in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium for the current game), and then adds the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium for the current game) to the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter). In other words, when "IN number < OUT number?" returns YES, it is sufficient to configure the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming medium for the current game to be added to the value stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter.

Similarly, if the IN number is configured to be subtracted from the OUT number when "IN number < OUT number?" is answered with YES (no borrowing has occurred in the A register), then the "favourable zone difference number counter subtraction" can simply subtract the value stored in the A register (the difference number of gaming media for the current game) from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the favourable zone difference number counter) without calculating the complement. In other words, if "IN number < OUT number?" is answered with NO, the absolute value of the difference number of gaming media for the current game can be subtracted from the value stored in the favourable zone difference number counter.

As mentioned above, specific processing for ending the advantageous period with the difference in the number of gaming media has been explained using Figures 55 and 56, but this is not limited to these. In other words, it is sufficient if the advantageous period can be ended with the difference in the number of gaming media.

In addition, in Figures 55 and 56, one of the conditions for ending an advantageous zone is that the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number, but the condition for ending an advantageous zone does not have to be that the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number. In that case, the advantageous zone clear counter in Figures 55 and 56 does not need to be provided.

If a favorable zone clear counter is not provided, the process corresponding to "favorable zone clear counter -1" in Figures 55 and 56, the process corresponding to "favorable zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" and the process corresponding to "save favorable zone clear counter initial value" do not need to be provided.

The above example shows the configuration of a slot machine (a reel-type gaming machine) as an example of a gaming machine, but the above configuration can be applied to various gaming models such as pachinko gaming machines and casino machines.

P: Gaming machine P1: Cabinet P2: Front door P3: Start switch P4: Stop switch P4C: Middle stop switch P4L: Left stop switch P4R: Right stop switch P5: Bet switch P5M: MAX bet switch P5O: 1 bet switch P6: Settlement switch P7: Counting switch P8E: Performance decision switch P8W: Performance selection switch P9: Number of gaming media display unit P10: Display window P11M: Image display device P11S: Image display device P12: Sub-control board P13: Number of gaming media display board P14DL: Lower left speaker P14DR: Lower right speaker P14UR: Upper right speaker P15: Main control board P16: Number of gaming media control board P17: Reel device board P18C: Middle reel P18L: Left reel P18R : Right reel

Claims (1)

having a main control means;
A medal count control means is provided,
having a predetermined bet button,
It has a checkout button,
Communication with the rental unit is possible,
When the power supply of the gaming machine and the power supply of the lending unit are turned on , the VL signal can be turned on.
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the VL signal was turned ON, a gaming machine information notification can be transmitted to the rental unit .
When a predetermined bet button is operated, the bet number can be "3",
When the settlement button is operated, data including the settlement number can be transmitted from the main control means to the medal number control means,
The medal count control means receives data including the settlement number, and determines that an abnormality has occurred if the settlement number is greater than "3".
Gaming machine.